Difference between revisions of "American Journal of Anatomy 1 (1901-02)"

From Embryology
(26 intermediate revisions by the same user not shown)
Line 3: Line 3:
{{Amer. J Anat. Volumes}}
{{Amer. J Anat. Volumes}}
'''Editorial Board'''
Your edit was saved.
Lewellys F. Barker,
University of Chicago.
George S. Huntington,
Columbia Univernity
Talk:American Journal of Anatomy 1 (1901-02)
Thomas Dwight,
Jump to:navigation, search
Harvard University.
{{Franklin P. Mall}},
Johns Hopkins University.
Simon H. Gage,
Cornell University.
{{Charles S. Minot}},
Harvard University.
{{G. Carl Huber}},
University of Michigan.
George A. Piersol,  
University of Peniisyivaflia.
University of Chicago. Columbia Univernity
Harvard University. Johns Hopkins University.
Cornell University. Harvard University.
University of Michigan. University of l^eniisyivaflia.
HENRY Mc E. KNOWER, Secketaky, Johns Hopkins University.
Henry Mc E. Knower,
Secketary, Johns Hopkins University.
===No. 1. November 7, 1901===
No. 1. November 7, 1901.
' I. Charles Eussell Bardeen and Warren Harmon Lewis. The Development of the Limbs, Body-Wall and Back 1
With 9 Plates and 27 text figures.
I. {{Ref-BardeenLewis1901}} With 9 Plates and 27 text figures.
II. Preston" Kyes. The Inti-alobular Framework of the
II. Preston Kyes. The Intralobular Framework of the Human Spleen 37 With one text figure.
Human Spleen 37
III. G. Carl Huber. Studies on the Neuroglia 45
With one text figure.
IV. Alfred Scott WarThin. The Normal Histology of the Human Hemolymph Glands 63
III. G. Carl Huber. Studies on the Neuroglia .... 45
V. Charles Sedgwick Minot. On the Morphology of the Pineal Region, based upon its Development in Acanthias 81 With 14 text figures.
IV. Alfred Scott WarThin. The Normal Histology of
===No. 2. February 28, 1902===
the Human Hemolymph Glands 63
VI. B. F. Kingsbury. The Spermatogenesis of Desmognathus Fusca With 4 Plates.
V. Charles Sedgwick Minot. On the Morphology of the Pineal Region, based upon its Development in
VII. {{Ref-Bremer1902}}With 9 text figures.
Acanthias 81
VIII. {{Ref-Lewis1902}} With 2 Plates and 14 text figures.
With 14 text figures.
IX. Arthur B. Lamb. The Development of the Eye Muscles in Acanthias With 9 text figures.
No. 2. February 28, 1902.
X. Charles Eussell Bardeen. A Statistical Study of the Abdominal and Border Nerves in Man .... 203 With 8 figures and 14 tables.
VI. B. F. Kingsbury. The Spermatogenesis of Desmog nathus Fusca 99
===No. 3. May 26, 1902===
With 4 Plates.
VII. John Lewis Bremer. On the Origin of the Pulmonary
XI. {{Ref-LewisFT1902}} 229 With 11 text figures and 2 double colored Plates.
Arteries in Mammals 137
XII. {{Ref-MacCallum1902}} 245 With 17 text figures.
With 9 text figures.
XIII. Franklin Dexter. On the Vitelline Vein of the Cat, With 8 text figures.
VIII. Warren Harmon Lewis. The Development of the
XIV. Joseph Marshall Flint. The Ducts of the Human Submaxillary Gland With 9 text figures.
Arm in Man 145
XV. S. W. Williston. On the Skeleton of Nyetodactylus, with Kestoration With 1 text figure.
With 2 Plates and 14 text figures.
XVI. Frederick Adams Woods. Origin and Migration of the Germ-Cells in Acanthias With 14 text figures.
IX. Arthur B. Lamb. The Development of the Eye Muscles in Acanthias 185
XVII. Katherine Foot and Ella Church Strobell. The Spermatozoa of Allolobophora Foetida With 1 Plate.
With 9 text figures.
X. Charles Eussell Bardeen. A Statistical Study of
XVIII. {{Ref-Mall1902ct}} 329 With 18 text figures.
the Abdominal and Border Nerves in Man .... 203 With 8 figures and 14 tables.
XIX. {{Ref-Sabin1902a}} 367 With 12 text figures.
===No. 4. September 15, 1902===
{{Ref-Sudler1902}} 391 With 1 3 text figures.
iv Contents
XXI. Alice Hamilton. A Case of Heterotopia of the White Matter in the Medulla Oblongata 417 With 4 text figures.
No. 3. May 26, 1902.
XXII. Harris Hawthorne Wilder. Palms and Soles. 423 With 21 text figures.
XL Fkederic T. Lewis. The Development of the Vena
Cava Inferior 229
With 11 text figures and 2 double colored Plates.
XII. John Bruce ]\L\cCallum. Notes on the Wolffian Body
of Higher Mammals 245 With 17 text figures.
XIII. Franklin Dexter. On the Vitelline Vein of the Cat, 261
With 8 text figures.
XIV. Joseph Marshall Flint. The Ducts of the Human
Submaxillary Gland 269
W'ith 9 text figures.
XV. S. W. Williston. On the Skeleton of Nyetodactylus,
with Kestoration 297
With 1 text figure.
XVI. Frederick Adams Woods. Origin and ]\Iigration of
the Germ-Cells in Acanthias 307
With 14 text figures.
/ XVII. Katherine Foot and Ella Church Strobell. The
Spermatozoa of Allolobophora Foetida 321
AVith 1 Plate.
XVIII. Franklin P. Mall. On the Development of the Connective Tissues from the Connective-Tissue Syncytium 329 With 18 text figures.
XIX. Florence E. Sarin. On the Origin of the Lymphatic System from the Veins and the Development of the Lymph Hearts and Thoracic Duct in the Pig . . . 367 With 12 text figures.
No. 4. September 15, 1902.
XX. ]\Iervin T. Sudler. The Development of the Nose,
and of the Pharynx and its Derivatives in Man . . 391 With 1 3 text figures.
XXI. Alice Hamilton. A Case of Heterotopia of the White
Matter in the Medulla Oblongata 417
With 4 text figures.
XXII. Harris Hawthorne Wilder. Palms and Soles . . 423 With 21 text figures.
Contents v
XXIII. Daniel G. Eevell. The Pancreatic Ducts in the Dog, 443 With 14 text figures.
XXIII. Daniel G. Eevell. The Pancreatic Ducts in the Dog, 443 With 14 text figures.
XXIY. AViLLiAM A. Hilton. The Morphology and Development of Intestinal Folds and Villi in Vertebrates . 459 With 3 tables and 7 Plates (87 figures).
{{Ref-Hilton1902}}  459 With 3 tables and 7 Plates (87 figures).
XXV. Proceedings of the Association of American Anatomists, 507
XXV. Proceedings of the Association of American Anatomists, 507
==The American Journal Of Anatomy==
The Ameeican Journal of Anatomy has been founded to collect into one place, and present in a worthy manner, the many researches from our investigators, now scattered through many publications at home and abroad.
The Ameeicax Journal of Anatomy has been founded to collect into one place, and present in a worthy manner, the many researches from our investigators, now scattered through many publications at home and abroad.
Human Anatomy in America needs as high a standard of reference as it has in other countries. Without such a standard it fails to make for itself any proper, satisfactory or stimulating impression. The best interests of modern scientific medicine will be greatly advanced by the upholding of such a standard in this fundamental subject through a journal of high character.
Human Anatomy in America needs as high a standard of reference as it has in other countries. Without such a standard it fails to make for itself any proper, satisfactory or stimulating impression. The best interests of modern scientific medicine will be greatly advanced by the upholding of such a standard in this fundamental subject through a journal of high character.
Many asi^ects of Comparative xVnatomy, Embryology, Histology and Cytology are so intimately bo and wp with the problems of Human Anatomy that these subjects will be included within the scope of the new journal. It will be the aim of The Ameeican Journal of Anatomy to recognize this close natural relationship between the various branches of the science, and to publish results of the best original work of American students of anatomy.
Many aspects of Comparative Anatomy, Embryology, Histology and Cytology are so intimately to and up with the problems of Human Anatomy that these subjects will be included within the scope of the new journal. It will be the aim of The Ameeican Journal of Anatomy to recognize this close natural relationship between the various branches of the science, and to publish results of the best original work of American students of anatomy.
The most cordial assurance of support has been given by the collaborators, and this we believe is sufficient indication of the results to be expected.
The most cordial assurance of support has been given by the collaborators, and this we believe is sufficient indication of the results to be expected.
Line 209: Line 118:
'/{r^i.r. ^?^
==The Development of the Limbs, Body-Wall and Back in Man==
Charles Russell Bardeen, M. D. And Warren Harmon Lewis, M. D. From the Anatomical Laboratory of the Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore.
With 9 Plates and 27 text figures.
* ERRATUM FOR Vol. I, No. 1. Vol. I, No. 1, page 83, Fig. 2, of this Journal should read: Fig. 2. Embryo of 13.0 mm. Sagittal series, No. 224, section 6.5. x 30 diams.
CHARLES RUSSELL BARDEEN, M. D. AND WARREN HARMON LEWIS, M. D. From tlm Aiiatomical Laboratory of the Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, 31(1.
With 9 Plates and 27 Text Figukes.
The purpose of the following paper is a description of various typical stages in the development of the back, the limbs, and the body-wall in man. The work is based primarily upon reconstructions, according to the method of Born,' of parts of five human embryos; it has been extended and controlled by a study of the external form and of serial sections of several other human embryos. Dr. Lewis has devoted special study to the formation of the arm. Dr. Bardeen to that of the leg, the body-wall and the back.
The purpose of the following paper is a description of various typical stages in the development of the back, the limbs, and the body-wall in man. The work is based primarily upon reconstructions, according to the method of Born,' of parts of five human embryos; it has been extended and controlled by a study of the external form and of serial sections of several other human embryos. Dr. Lewis has devoted special study to the formation of the arm. Dr. Bardeen to that of the leg, the body-wall and the back.
Line 232: Line 131:
We shall consider the early stages in the development of the limbs, the body-wall and the back, first, from the point of view of the external form and, secondly, from that of internal structural differentiation.
We shall consider the early stages in the development of the limbs, the body-wall and the back, first, from the point of view of the external form and, secondly, from that of internal structural differentiation.
I. External Form.
===I. External Form===
The external form of the embryos we have used has been compared with that of embryos of a corresponding stage of development pictured ^-- XI, „ TT-:^ A+inc.2 T^io-o ^-^^ on naffes 3 to 9 represent a series of
ERRATUM FOR Vol. I, No. 1.
Vol. I, No. 1, page 83, Fig. 2, of this Journal should read:
Fig. 2. Embryo of 13.0 mm. Sagittal series, No. 224, section 6.5. x 30 diams.
From the. Anatomical Laboratory of the Johns Hopkins University , Baltimore^ Md.
With 9 Plates and 27 Text Figures.
The purpose of the following paper is a description of various typical stages in the development of the back, the limbs, and the body-wall in man. The work is based primarily upon reconstructions, according to the method of Born,' of parts of five human embryos; it has been extended and controlled by a study of the external form and of serial sections of several other human embryos. Dr. Lewis has devoted special study to the formation of the arm, Dr. Bardeen to that of the leg, the body-wall and the back.
In the accompanying table a list is given of the embryos utilized. Those marked with an asterisk have been reconstructed.
We shall consider the early stages in the development of the limbs, the body-wall and the back, first, from the point of view of the external form and, secondly, from that of internal structural ditferentiation.
I. External Form.
The external form of the embryos we have used has been compared with that of embryos of a corresponding stage of development pictured in the His Atlas.^ Figs. 1-15, on pages 3 to 9 represent a series of embryos belonging some to the Mall collection and some to the His collection. The general relation of the limbs and body-wall in embryos between two and seven weeks of age,"* and between 2.1 and 20 mm. in length, are here represented by simple outline diagrams, based in part upon published drawings and in part upon photographs and upon
The external form of the embryos we have used has been compared with that of embryos of a corresponding stage of development pictured in the His Atlas.^ Figs. 1-15, on pages 3 to 9 represent a series of embryos belonging some to the Mall collection and some to the His collection. The general relation of the limbs and body-wall in embryos between two and seven weeks of age,"* and between 2.1 and 20 mm. in length, are here represented by simple outline diagrams, based in part upon published drawings and in part upon photographs and upon
Line 274: Line 140:
3 The ages given are for the most part only roughly approximate. 1
3 The ages given are for the most part only roughly approximate. 1
2 Development of the Limbs, Body-wall and Back in Man
2 Development of the Limbs, Body-wall and Back in Man
Line 1,808: Line 1,673:
Line 3,716: Line 3,581:
Line 16,316: Line 16,179:
Line 17,063: Line 16,926:
Line 17,520: Line 17,379:
Mall. It was his idea that by repeating and extending the experiments of Budge it might be possible to fill in the gap between the two lymphatic systems of Budge and clear up the subject of the origin of the lymphatic system, and this has been indeed the case. It is a pleasure to thank him for many suggestions and for his continued interest in the work. The opportunity for the work was made by a fellowship offered to the Johns Hopkins University by the Baltimore Association for the Promotion of University Education of Women. It is also a pleasure to express my gratitude to them.
Mall. It was his idea that by repeating and extending the experiments of Budge it might be possible to fill in the gap between the two lymphatic systems of Budge and clear up the subject of the origin of the lymphatic system, and this has been indeed the case. It is a pleasure to thank him for many suggestions and for his continued interest in the work. The opportunity for the work was made by a fellowship offered to the Johns Hopkins University by the Baltimore Association for the Promotion of University Education of Women. It is also a pleasure to express my gratitude to them.
Line 23,149: Line 23,006:
^See also Author's Index and Contents';
^See also Author's Index and Contents';
Abdominal, see Nerves. Acanthias, see germ-cells, pineal region, eye-muscles, sharks.
Abdominal, see Nerves. Acanthias, see germ-cells, pineal region, eye-muscles, sharks.
Line 23,204: Line 23,057:
Glands 63
Glands 63
Medulla oblongata, Heterotopia of
Medulla oblongata, Heterotopia of
Line 23,271: Line 23,121:
(See also Subject Index and Contents)
(See also Subject Index and Contents)
Line 23,335: Line 23,183:
Woods, F. A., Origin and Migration of the Germ-Cells in Acanthias . .307
Woods, F. A., Origin and Migration of the Germ-Cells in Acanthias . .307
[[Category:Journal]][[Category:Historic Embryology]][[Category:1900's]][[Category:USA]]

Latest revision as of 17:22, 26 December 2019

Embryology - 4 Aug 2020    Facebook link Pinterest link Twitter link  Expand to Translate  
Google Translate - select your language from the list shown below (this will open a new external page)

العربية | català | 中文 | 中國傳統的 | français | Deutsche | עִברִית | हिंदी | bahasa Indonesia | italiano | 日本語 | 한국어 | မြန်မာ | Pilipino | Polskie | português | ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਦੇ | Română | русский | Español | Swahili | Svensk | ไทย | Türkçe | اردو | ייִדיש | Tiếng Việt    These external translations are automated and may not be accurate. (More? About Translations)

A personal message from Dr Mark Hill (May 2020)  
Mark Hill.jpg
I have decided to take early retirement in September 2020. During the many years online I have received wonderful feedback from many readers, researchers and students interested in human embryology. I especially thank my research collaborators and contributors to the site. The good news is Embryology will remain online and I will continue my association with UNSW Australia. I look forward to updating and including the many exciting new discoveries in Embryology!
Historic Disclaimer - information about historic embryology pages 
Mark Hill.jpg
Pages where the terms "Historic" (textbooks, papers, people, recommendations) appear on this site, and sections within pages where this disclaimer appears, indicate that the content and scientific understanding are specific to the time of publication. This means that while some scientific descriptions are still accurate, the terminology and interpretation of the developmental mechanisms reflect the understanding at the time of original publication and those of the preceding periods, these terms, interpretations and recommendations may not reflect our current scientific understanding.     (More? Embryology History | Historic Embryology Papers)
Amer. J Anat.: 1 - 1901-02 | 2 - 1902-03 | 3 - 1904 | 4 - 1905 | 5 - 1906 | 6 - 1906-07 | 7 - 1907-08 | 8 - 1908 | 9 - 1909 | 10 - 1910 | 11 - 1910-11 | 12 - 1911-12 | 13 - 1912 | 14 - 1912-13 | 15 - 1913-14 | 16 - 1914 | 17 - 1914-15 | 18 - 1915 | 19 - 1916 | 20 - 1916 | 21 - 1917 | 22 - 1917 | 23 - 1918 | 25 - 1919 | 26 - 1919-20 | 27 - 1920 | 28 - 1920-21 | 29 - 1921 | 30 - 1922
Historic Journals: Amer. J Anat. | Am J Pathol. | Anat. Rec. | J Morphol. | J Anat. | J Comp. Neurol. | Johns Hopkins Med. J | Ref. Handb. Med. Sci. | J Exp. Zool.
Links: Historic Journals | Association of American Anatomists | Wistar Institute of Anatomy and Biology | Wliey - Developmental Dynamics | Internet Archive | biodiversity library


Editorial Board

Lewellys F. Barker, University of Chicago.

George S. Huntington, Columbia Univernity

Thomas Dwight, Harvard University.

Franklin P. Mall, Johns Hopkins University.

Simon H. Gage, Cornell University.

Charles S. Minot, Harvard University.

G. Carl Huber, University of Michigan.

George A. Piersol, University of Peniisyivaflia.

Henry Mc E. Knower, Secketary, Johns Hopkins University.





No. 1. November 7, 1901

I. Bardeen CR. and Lewis WH. The development of the limbs, body-wall and back. (1901) Amer. J Anat. 1: 1-36. With 9 Plates and 27 text figures.

II. Preston Kyes. The Intralobular Framework of the Human Spleen 37 With one text figure.

III. G. Carl Huber. Studies on the Neuroglia 45

IV. Alfred Scott WarThin. The Normal Histology of the Human Hemolymph Glands 63

V. Charles Sedgwick Minot. On the Morphology of the Pineal Region, based upon its Development in Acanthias 81 With 14 text figures.

No. 2. February 28, 1902

VI. B. F. Kingsbury. The Spermatogenesis of Desmognathus Fusca With 4 Plates.

VII. Bremer JL. On the origin of the pulmonary arteries in mammals. (1902) Amer. J Anat. 1(2): 135- With 9 text figures.

VIII. Lewis WH. The development of the arm in man. (1902) Amer. J Anat. 1(2): 145-184. With 2 Plates and 14 text figures.

IX. Arthur B. Lamb. The Development of the Eye Muscles in Acanthias With 9 text figures.

X. Charles Eussell Bardeen. A Statistical Study of the Abdominal and Border Nerves in Man .... 203 With 8 figures and 14 tables.

No. 3. May 26, 1902

XI. Lewis FT. The development of the vena cava inferior. (1902) Amer. J Anat. 1(3): 229-244. 229 With 11 text figures and 2 double colored Plates.

XII. MacCallum JB. Notes on the Wolffian body of higher mammals. (1902) Amer. J Anat. 1(2): -259. 245 With 17 text figures.

XIII. Franklin Dexter. On the Vitelline Vein of the Cat, With 8 text figures.

XIV. Joseph Marshall Flint. The Ducts of the Human Submaxillary Gland With 9 text figures.

XV. S. W. Williston. On the Skeleton of Nyetodactylus, with Kestoration With 1 text figure.

XVI. Frederick Adams Woods. Origin and Migration of the Germ-Cells in Acanthias With 14 text figures.

XVII. Katherine Foot and Ella Church Strobell. The Spermatozoa of Allolobophora Foetida With 1 Plate.

XVIII. Mall FP. Development of the connective tissues from the connective syncytium. (1902) Amer. J Anat. 1(3): 329-366 329 With 18 text figures.

XIX. Sabin FR. On the origin of the lymphatic system from the veins and the development of the lymph hearts and thoracic duct in the pig (1902) Amer. J Anat. 1(3): 367-389. 367 With 12 text figures.

No. 4. September 15, 1902

Sudler MT. The development of the nose and of the pharynx and its derivatives in man. (1902) Amer. J Anat. 1:391–416. 391 With 1 3 text figures.

XXI. Alice Hamilton. A Case of Heterotopia of the White Matter in the Medulla Oblongata 417 With 4 text figures.

XXII. Harris Hawthorne Wilder. Palms and Soles. 423 With 21 text figures.

XXIII. Daniel G. Eevell. The Pancreatic Ducts in the Dog, 443 With 14 text figures.

Hilton WA. The morphology and development of intestinal folds and villi in vertebrates. (1902) Amer. J. Anat. 1: 459-504. 459 With 3 tables and 7 Plates (87 figures).

XXV. Proceedings of the Association of American Anatomists, 507

The American Journal Of Anatomy

The Ameeican Journal of Anatomy has been founded to collect into one place, and present in a worthy manner, the many researches from our investigators, now scattered through many publications at home and abroad.

Human Anatomy in America needs as high a standard of reference as it has in other countries. Without such a standard it fails to make for itself any proper, satisfactory or stimulating impression. The best interests of modern scientific medicine will be greatly advanced by the upholding of such a standard in this fundamental subject through a journal of high character.

Many aspects of Comparative Anatomy, Embryology, Histology and Cytology are so intimately to and up with the problems of Human Anatomy that these subjects will be included within the scope of the new journal. It will be the aim of The Ameeican Journal of Anatomy to recognize this close natural relationship between the various branches of the science, and to publish results of the best original work of American students of anatomy.

The most cordial assurance of support has been given by the collaborators, and this we believe is sufficient indication of the results to be expected.

A number of generous persons, whose names will appear later, have given some financial support to help us in gaining a foothold in a suitable manner. The journal must however look to those who are to be benefited by its publication for its real and permanent support; and a good list of regular subscribers is expected and required to maintain it.

It is hoped that those interested in promoting a worthy development of research in America, in the subjects included within the scope of this journal, will energetically assist us.

The Development of the Limbs, Body-Wall and Back in Man

Charles Russell Bardeen, M. D. And Warren Harmon Lewis, M. D. From the Anatomical Laboratory of the Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore.

With 9 Plates and 27 text figures.

  • ERRATUM FOR Vol. I, No. 1. Vol. I, No. 1, page 83, Fig. 2, of this Journal should read: Fig. 2. Embryo of 13.0 mm. Sagittal series, No. 224, section 6.5. x 30 diams.

The purpose of the following paper is a description of various typical stages in the development of the back, the limbs, and the body-wall in man. The work is based primarily upon reconstructions, according to the method of Born,' of parts of five human embryos; it has been extended and controlled by a study of the external form and of serial sections of several other human embryos. Dr. Lewis has devoted special study to the formation of the arm. Dr. Bardeen to that of the leg, the body-wall and the back.

In the accompanying table a list is given of the embryos utilized. Those marked with an asterisk have been reconstructed.

We shall consider the early stages in the development of the limbs, the body-wall and the back, first, from the point of view of the external form and, secondly, from that of internal structural differentiation.

I. External Form

The external form of the embryos we have used has been compared with that of embryos of a corresponding stage of development pictured in the His Atlas.^ Figs. 1-15, on pages 3 to 9 represent a series of embryos belonging some to the Mall collection and some to the His collection. The general relation of the limbs and body-wall in embryos between two and seven weeks of age,"* and between 2.1 and 20 mm. in length, are here represented by simple outline diagrams, based in part upon published drawings and in part upon photographs and upon

1 See Bardeen : Wax plate reconstruction according to tlie method of Born as utilized in the Anatomical Laboratory of the Johns Hopkins University. The Johns Hopkins Bulletin, April-May-June, 1901.

-Anatomic menschlicher Embryonen, Leipzig, 188.5.

3 The ages given are for the most part only roughly approximate. 1

2 Development of the Limbs, Body-wall and Back in Man








Length in mm.

Probable ag-e in weeks.







NB 5


VB 4.5

NB 7


VB 6

NB 9 VB 9




VB 11

NB 12 VB 14


NB 13



NB 15.5 VB 17


NB 14.5



NB 14

VB 16

NB 18


VB 20

Size of Ovum in mm.

Thickness of section

in micro mm

























Number of Myotomes.


14 8c.


So. 5s.

35 8c. 2- 3c. or 12t.

36 51.

2o. 2s. 8c. 27 lot. 51.

cannot be counted with certainty.

3o. 5s. 8c. 5-6c. 38 12t. 51.

8c. 5s. 34 12t. 4c. 51.




Myotomes opposite


arm leg



7-11 .5c- It





21-2^5 or 26 11-ls


11-1 or 2s

No. of Myotomes between tlie arm and leg regions





The Roman numerals refer to embryos in the collection of human embryos belonging to Prof. Mall, in the Anatomical Laboratory of the Johns Hopkins University. To Dr. Mall we are gi eatly indebted for the use of these embryos.

Reference to the embryos given in Table I will be found in the following articles by Dr. Franklin P. Mall. No. II, A Human Embryo Twentj^-six Days Old, Jour, of Morph., Vol. V; Nos. II, XII, XXII and XLIII, Development of the Human Coelom, Jour, of Morph., Vol. XII; Nos. II, XII and XXII, Ueber die Bntwickelung des Menschlichen Darmes, Arch, fiir Anat. und Phys., Special Bd., 1897; Nos. II, XLIII and LXXVI, Development of the Internal Mammary and Deep Epigastric Arteries in Man, Johns Hopkins Hospital Bulletin, 1898; Nos. II, XH, XXII, XLIII, LXXVI and CIX, Development of the Ventral Abdominal Walls in Man, Jour, of Morph., Vol. XIV, 1898; Nos. II, XII, XXII. LXXX CVI. CIX and CXLVIII, A Contribution to the Study of Pathology of Early Human Embryos, Johns Hopkins Hospital Reports, Vol. IX, 1901.

Charles Eussell Bardeen and Warren Harmon Lewis 3

sketches of the embryos indicated. On Plate I the photographs utilized are reproduced. On Plates II to IX are represented several typical stages in the general development of the body-wall and limbs. Figs. A and B, Plate II, are drawn from wax-plate reconstrnctions. Figs. C to E, Plates III to Y, are based, in the main, npon a reconstrnction of the regions of the arm, abdomen and leg of embryos CLXIII and CIX, and npon excellent photographs. Figs. F to I, Plates VI to IX, are based npon wax-plate reconstrnctions of Embryo XXII.

Fig. 1. X about 10 d.

Fisr. 2.

Fig. 3. Fig. 4.

X about .5 d.

Fig. .5.

i:mbryo XII.

The development of the neuro-muscular apparatus begins in the human embryo in the cervical region. In Fig. 1 is represented Embryo XII, 2.1 mm. in length and about two weeks of age. The axis of the embryo is curved in a semicircle about the heart and the umbilical vesicle. The axis contains neural tube, notochord, myotomes, dorsal-aortas, and mesenchyme (see Fig. 16). There are fourteen myotomes on each side. Mall considers three of them occipital, eight cervical, and three thoracic. The first cervical and the first thoracic myotomes are numbered " 1 " in Fig. 1. Caudal to the fourteenth myotome, an unsegmented band of tissue extends along each side of the spinal cord. The neural tube is open dorsally anterior to the fourth and posterior to the fourteenth myotome. Opposite the twelfth myotome a solid band of cells, the "' neurenteric canal," unites spinal-cord and entoderm. The notochord extends from a point opposite the cephalic margin of the heart to the region of the neurenteric canal. The dorsal aortae run a course parallel with the notochord, but extend further than the myotomes caudally. A considerable amount of mesenchyme is formed at the cephalic extremity of the axis of the body, in the region of the heart, but toward the caudal extremity little exists. The heart and the pericardial and pleural cavities are developed in the cephalic regi'on of the wall of the umbilical vesicle. Between the region of the heart and the neural

4 Development of the Limbs, Body-wall aud Back in Man

tube the pharynx extends forwards. Trom it project the hrst and second branchial pockets, Seessel's pocket, and the thyroid diverticulum. Into the caudal end of the embryo the hind-gut extends. The umbilical vesicle projects forwards from the region opposite the 1-6 cervical myotomes (see Fig. 1). At this period the amnion arises on each side along the length of the axis of the embryo as far forward as the region of the heart (Fig. 1). Externally and internally the amnion is covered by a layer of epithelial cells. From epithelium lining the coelom, several layers of cells have arisen (Fig. 16). There is, however, as yet, no true body-wall caudal to the region of the heart. There are no external visible signs of limb buds.

Embryo Lr.

In Fig. 2 is represented the His embryo Lr; length, neck-breach, 4.2 mm.; age, about three weeks. The back of this embryo presents a slight concavity opposite the ninth (first thoracic) myotome. It is probable that this is an artifact, due to the removal of the embryo from the ovum, and that in the natural condition the back curved about the viscera as it does in the embryos represented in Figs. 1, 3, 4 and 5." "Lr'^ shows externally thirty-one myotomes (8c, 12t, 51, 5s, Ic). The ninth (first thoracic) and twenty-first (first lumbar) myotomes are designated by the numeral " 1. Lateral to the region of the myotomes lies the Wolffian ridge, a band of tissue which represents the anlage of the limbs and body-wall. The arm is represented by a slight swelling opposite the 5th to 8th cervical and 1st thoracic myotomes. The leg is represented by a slight swelling opposite the 1st to 5th lumbar and 1st sacral myotomes. The amnion was probably attached, in this embryo, to the umbilical cord. Between the Wolffian ridge and the umbilical cord the menibrana reuniens extends, at this period, so as to cover over the thoracic and abdominal viscera. It is represented as torn along the heavy irregular line.


In Fig. 3 is represented Embryo CXLVIII; length, neck-breach, 4.3 mm.; age, about three weeks. A photograph of the embryo is given on Plate I. Though more advanced in development than Lr, but twenty-seven myotomes are present (2o, 8c, lOt, 51, 2s). This has been determined by careful counting of the myotomes in serial sections of the embryo. The base of the arm-bud appears to lie opposite the sev 4 See Mall, Human Coelom, op. cit., p. 421.

Charles Eussell Bardeen and Warren Harmon Lewis 5

entli to the eleventh myotomes. It is, therefore, probable that two occipital myotomes are present. But nine myotomes lie in the area between the arm-bud and the leg-bud. The base of the latter lies opposite 31st to the 25th or 86th myotomes. If two myotomes be considered occipital myotomes, the leg, in this instance, lies two segments nearer the head than usual. It is therefore probable that this embryo has an unusually short body-wall.

Embryo LXXVI (length, 4.5 mm.; age, about three weeks) is of essentially the same stage of development as CXLVTII. It has thirtyfive myotomes (3o, 8c, 13t, 51, 5s, 2c). The base of the arm lies opposite the eighth (fifth cervical) to the twelfth (first thoracic) myotomes. The base of the leg lies opposite the twenty-fourth (first lumbar) to the twenty-ninth (first sacral) myotomes. Eleven myotomes lie between the regions of the arm and leg-buds. In CXLVIII the limbbuds protrude more than in LXXVI and the body-wall extends further ventrally.

Embryo LXXX (length, 5 mm.; age, about three weeks), a photograph of which is given in Plate I, is similar, though slightly more advanced in development than Embryo CXLVIII.


In Fig. 4 is represented the His embryo a ; length, neck-breach, 4 mm.; age, about 23 days. The back of this embryo is very greatly flexed. Thirty-five myotomes are present (8c, 12t, 51, 5s, 5c). The arpabud lies opposite the 5th to 8th cervical and 1st thoracic myotomes; the leg-bud opposite the 1st to 5th lumbar and 1st sacral myotomes. Both protrude further than in CXLVIII. The arm-bud projects in a caudal direction. The leg is represented, not as in the original His drawing, but instead in the more normal position shown in the His drawing of the right side of the same embryo.

Embryo R.

In Fig. 5 is represented the His embryo E; length, 5 mm.; age, about 3^ weeks. Thirty-five myotomes are pictured (8c, 12t, 51, 5s, 5c). The arm-bud lies opposite the 5th to 8th cervical and 1st thoracic myotomes; the leg-bud opposite the 1st to 5th lumbar and 1st sacral. Both point somewhat caudally.

Embryo II.

In Fig. G is represented Embryo II; length, neck-breach, 7 mm.; vertex-breach, 6 mm.; age, about 4 weeks. Thirty-eight myotomes are

6 Development of the Limbs, Body-wall and Back in Man

present (3o, 8c, 12t, 51, 5s, 5-6c). The extensions of the myotomes within the body Avail are pictured. The base of the arm-bud lies opposite the 5th to 8th cervical and 1st thoracic myotomes; that of the legbud opposite the 1st to 5th lumbar and 1st sacral myotomes. The armbud projects caudally, the leg-bud outwards and slightly caudally.

Embryo A.

In Fig. 7 is represented the His embryo A; length, 7.5 mm.; age, about 4 weeks. Thirty-five myotomes are pictured (8c, 12t, 51, 5s, 5c). The arm-bud lies opposite the 5th to 8th cervical and 1st thoracic; the leg-bud lies opposite the 1st to 5th lumbar and 1st sacral myotomes.^ Both project caudally. Both show a slight division into segments. This, however, is much more marked in the following embryo.

Fig. 7. X about 5 d.

Embryo CLXIII.

In Fig. 8 is represented Embryo CLXIII; length, 9 mm.; age, about 4|- weeks. Two photographs of this embryo are shown on Plate I. Thirty-three myotomes are present (8c, 12t, 51, 5s, 3c). The base of the arm lies opposite the 4th to 8th cervical and 1st thoracic, and that of the leg opposite the 1st to 5th lumbar and 1st to 2nd sacral myotomes. The arm projects nearly caudally. A constriction on the cephalic and caudal borders separates the rounded upper arm from the flattened lower arm and hand. The constriction on the caudal border is close to where the arm joins the body-wall, while that on the cephalic border is at a point some distance from the body-wall. This difference on the two borders is to be correlated with the caudal projection of the arm.

5 This statement is based on the drawing given in Fig. 3, Plate I* of the Atlas.

Charles Eussell Bardeen and Warren Harmon Lewis 7

The medio-lateral flattening of the distal portion of the arm-bud is especially well marked. Proximal to this flattened portion swellings on both medial and lateral surfaces indicate -where pre-muscle tissue is developed. A constriction may likewise be seen dividing the leg-bud into two distinct divisions. Owing to a slight torsion the lower portion o± the leg-bud presents to view the anterior margin instead of the flattened lateral surface.

Fig. 9.

X about 5 d.

Fig. 10.

Embryo Bi\. In Fig. 9 is represented the His embryo Br,; length, 11 mm.; age, about 4^ weeks. Thirty-five myotomes are pictured (8c, 12t, 51, 5s' 5c).' The base of the arm lies opposite the 4th to 8th cervical and' 1st thoracic spinal ganglia. The division of the arm into its main segments is advanced beyond that pictured in Embryo CLXIII. The upper arm still projects caudally. The lower arm, owing to flexion at the elbow projects caudo-ventrally. The hand is flattened and can be distinguished from the forearm. Swellings of the digits are visible. The flrst indications of the shoulder are present. The posterior limb shows a differentiation of foot, leg and thigh regions.

Embnjo CIX. Fig. 10 represents Embryo CIX; length, 11 mm.; age, about 5 weeks Two photographs of this embryo are reproduced in Plate I. The base

"Externally visible segmentation at this stage is due to the spinal ganglia not to myotomes. The latter have lost their identity.

8 Development of the Limbs, Body-wall and Back in Man

of the arm lies opposite the 3d to 8th cervical and 1st thoracic spinal ganglia. The upper arm still projects caudally. The forearm is more flexed and projects ventrally; it is now quite well marked off from the upper arm and hand. The digital swellings have increased and are now visible on the margin as well as on the flattened surface of the hand. The shoulder is more marked. The base of the arm is larger and extends higher in the cervical region than in the younger stages. The posterior limb shows a distinct differentiation of the foot. The kneebend may be distinguished. The hip region is not clearly marked externally.

Fiff. 11.

Fig. 12. X about 2^ d.

Fig. 13.

Embryo CLXXV. Fig. 11 represents Embryo CLXXV; length, 13 mm.; age, about 5-| weeks. Two photographs of this embryo are given in Plate I. The various regions of the arm and the swellings of the digits are well marked. The forearm has a more caudal projection than in Fig. 10, In the posterior limb the various regions are more or less distinctly indicated. In the foot digitation has begun. The body wall has advanced half-way across the surface of the liver.

Enibryo CVI.

Fig. 12 represents Embryo CVI; length, vertex-breach, 17 mm., neckbreach, 15.5 mm.; age, about 5^ weeks. A photograph is reproduced on Plate I. The limbs and body-wall are similar in development to those of Embryo CLXXV, but the flexion at the elbow and knee is more marked, and the body-wall lias advanced further across the abdomen.

Embryo CLXVII. Fig. 13 represents Embryo CLXVII; length vertex-breach 14.5 mm., neck-breach 13.5 mm.; age, 5-|- weeks. A photograph is shown on

Charles Eussell Bardeen and Warren Harmon Lewis

Plate I. While the embr3'0 is similar in general differentiation to Embryos CLXXV (Fig. 11) and CVI (Fig. 13), the development of the digits of the hands and feet is further advanced. The flexion of the forearm is also more marked.

Fie:. 14.

X about 3^ d.

Fig. 15.


Emhryo XLIII.

14 represents Embryo XLIII; length, vertex-breach 16 mm., neck-breach 14 mm.; age, about 6 weeks. The forearm and leg have grown considerably beyond the stage shown in Figs. 11-13, but without marked alteration in external form.

Emhryo XXII. Fig. 15 represents Embryo XXII; length, vertex-breach 20 mm., neck-breach 18 mm.; age, about 7 weeks. A photograph is reproduced on Plate I. The limbs have begun to resemble those of the adult. In the hand the clefts between the digits are well marked. The forearm and hand are somewhat pronated. The tips of the digits now reach nearly to the ventral mid-line. In the hind-limb the foot still lies in the same plane with the leg. The twist at the ankle which brings the foot into adult position has not begun. The toes are fairly distinct.'

' A number of embryos have been pictured wliich correspond essentially in external form to those above described. The following list gives reference to the articles in which several of these have been described and pictured. To the His embryo R. Fig. 5, corresponds :

Foil's 5.6 mm. embryo, Fig. 217, p. 386, Minot's Embryology. To No. II, Fig. 6, corresponds :

Keibel's embryo H. S., length 8 ram., Arch, fiir Anat. und Phys., 1891, Taf. TvIX, Fig. 2.

10 Development of the LimbS;, Body-wall and Back in Man


In noting the main features of development in early human embryos, the most convenient landmarks for describing relative positions of structures are the myotomes. By the end of the second week of embryonic development about fourteen myotomes have been distinctly differentiated in the human embryo (see Fig. 1). The formation of myotomes continues until by the end of the fourth week about thirtyeight have been differentiated (see Embryo II, Fig. 6). Anterior to the eight cervical myotomes, three occipital myotomes seem usually to be developed; posterior to the cervical region, twelve thoracic, five lumbar, five sacral, and five to six coccygeal myotomes are formed. The division of the myotomes into occipital, cervical, thoracic, luinbar, sacral and coccygeal groups depends upon the nerves and skeletal structures related to the body segments in which the myotomes lie.

The occipital myotomes are transient structures developed in conjunction with roots of the Twelfth Cranial Nerve. Before the spinal nerves have appeared they cannot with certainty be distinguished. No account of occipital myotomes is given in the description of the embryos pictured in the His Atlas. In the Mall embryos, LXXVI. CXLVIII

To the His embryo A, Fig. 7, correspond :

His's embryo Pr, length 10 mm., Atlas, Taf. XIII, Fig. 4, and Taf. X, Fig. 10.

His's embryo B, length 7 mm.. Atlas, Taf. I, Fig. 1. To No. CLXIII, Fig. 8, correspond:

Kollmann's 10.3 mm. embryo, Arch, of Anat. and Phys., 1891, Taf. Ill, Fig. 1.

Ruge's 9.1 mm. embryo, His's Atlas, Taf. XIII, Fig. 5, and Taf. X, Fig. 12. To the His embryo Br, Fig. 9, corresponds :

Keibel's embryo, H. S. Bui., length 11. .5 mm.. Arch, fiir Anat. und Phys., 1891, Taf. XIX, Fig. 13a. To No. CIX, Fig. 10, corresponds : ' His's embryo S, length 13..5 mm.. Atlas, Taf. XIII, Fig. 7, and Taf. X, Fig. 16. To No. CLXXV, Fig. 11, corresponds:

His's embryo^Schj, length 13.8 mm., Atlas, Taf. XIV, Fig. 3, and Taf. X, Fig. 18. To No. CVI, Fig. 13, correspond :

His's embryo Br^, length 13.3 mm.. Atlas, Taf. XIV, Fig. 1.

Ruge's 13.6 mm., embryo, His Atlas, Taf. XIV, Fig. 4, and Taf. X, Fig. 19. To No. CLXVII, Fig. 13, corresponds :

His's embryo Pr, length 14..5 mm.. Atlas, Taf. XIV, Fig. .5, and Taf. X, Fig. 30. To No. XLIII, Fig. 14 corresponds :

His's embyro 8^, length 1.5..5 mm., Atlas, Taf. X, Fig 31. To No. XXII, Fig. 1.5 correspond :

His's embryo XCI, length 16 mm., Atlas, Taf. X, Fig. 33.

His's embryo Ltj, length 17..5 mm., Atlas, Taf. X, Fig. 33.

His's embryo Z. W., Atlas, Taf. X, Fig. 34.

Charles Eussell Bardeen and Warren Harmon Lewis 11

and II, the occipital myotomes have been determined by a careful study of serial sections.

The cervical myotomes are those developed in conjimction with the cervical spinal nerves. In the vast majority of instances these are eight in number. The occasional absence in the adult of a cervical vertebra indicates that in the embryo less than the normal number of cervical spinal segments sometimes develop. In all of the embryos we have studied, the arm-bud begins its development opposite the fifth to the eighth cervical segments and opposite the following spinal segment. The most caudal myotome lying opposite the arm-bud may, therefore, be taken to represent the first thoracic segment.

Between the base of the arm-bud and that of the leg-bud, as a rule, eleven myotomes intervene. A marked exception to this is found in Embryo CXLVIII, where but nine myotomes seem to lie in this region. In other instances, twelve myotomes have been pictured. Such is apparently the case in the His embryo B (Atlas, Taf. I, Fig. 1) and in the His embryo Pr (Atlas, Taf. XIII, Fig. 4). It is difficult to determine this with certainty from the figures. Variation in the number of myotomes intervening between, the regions of the arm and leg corresponds with well-known variations in the length of the spinal axis in the adult.' ,

Bardeen, Costo-vertebral Variation in Man, Anat. Anz., 1900. In the His wax-models of young human embryos, Embryo Lr (No. 6) shows nine myotomes between the regions of the swellings which indicate the arm- and leg-buds. Embryo A shows fifteen myotomes between the arm and leg areas. The number of the myotomes in the thoraco-abdominal region in each of the models is probably incorrect. Fig. .5, Plate XX, of the His Atlas seems to show the usual number of thoraco-abdominal myotomes in Lr. Fig. 2, Plate I*, shows twelve instead of fifteen thoraco-abdominal myotomes in A. The model of A presents, in case of the thoracoabdominal myotomes, conditions characteristic of the pig. Out of twelve young pig embryos of various sizes, in eleven instances we have found sixteen myotomes intervening on each side between the arm and leg regions, and in one instance fifteen. In the pig, therefore, five more body segments than in man lie between the arm and leg areas. This is also to be seen in the adult. In the pig there are two more thoracic segments than in man, and, as indicated by the nerve distribution to the abdominal wall, three more abdominal segments. The third lumbar nerve in the pig corresponds in distribution somewhat to the first lumbar in man, but it has a more extensive abdominal distribution. While therefore in man the first lumbar segment is counted as belonging to the leg area, in the pig the third lumbar segment may be considered to belong to the thoraco-abdominal region. There are six lumbar vertebrie in the pig. The furcal nerves are the fifth and sixth lumbar usually, but sometimes the fifth, probably sometimes also the sixth, may be the sole furcal nerve.

In the Keibel " Normentafeln " of the pig the number of myotomes pictured between the arm and leg areas varies from fifteen to eighteen in different embryos. It

12 Development of the Limbs, Body-wall and Back in Man

The leg-bud arises opposite six myotomes. These usually are the twenty-fourth to the twenty-ninth, corresponding to the five lumbar and 1st sacral myotomes. Caudal to this region arise the remaining sacral and the coccygeal myotomes.

The myotomes give rise to the dorsal musculature, to the thoracoabdominal musculature, and to the musculature of the neck, tongue (?) and caudal region. When differentiation of body musculature takes place the distinction between the myotomes becomes lost, and they can no longer be used as landmarks. This occurs by the time the embryo has reached a length of 11 mm. and an age of five weeks. Hereafter segmental skeletal structures and spinal ganglia may be used as landmarks. The former present the more stable relative conditions.




Development of the spinal axis begins in the cervical region. At the end of the second week fourteen myotomes are present (3o, 8c, 3t); at the end of the fourth week, thirty-eight (3o, 8c, 12t, 51, 5s and 5c). During the fifth week the myotomes, owing to fusion of their dorsal surfaces, cease to be externally visible. The spinal ganglia, however, give rise to a segmentation externally visible for a somewhat longer period.

The limbs and body-wall arise in the region where the amnion joins the axis of the embryo. By the end of the second week, at the stage represented in Embryo XIT, the amnion is attached directly to the axis along a line extending from a region anterior to the heart to the caudal extremity (Fig. 1). The amniotic cavity rapidly enlarges. That part of the amnion near the axis of the embryo is carried ventrally so that it closes in the viscera which have previously protruded free into the general coelomic cavity. Finally the amnion reaches the allantoic stalk (or umbilical cord) and becomes attached to this. That part of the amnion extending from the umbilical cord to the axis of the embryo is now known as the menibrana reuniens. It forms the chief covering of the pericardial, pleural and peritoneal cavities. Fig. 2 probably, and Fig. 3 certainly, represent stages in which the viscera are completely inclosed by the menibrana reuniens.

is possible tliat no great care was taken in determining accurately the number of myotomes in tbis region. In the " Normentafeln " of the chick the number of myotomes pictured in this area varies from seven to ten. Apparently seven in the normal number.

Charles Eussell Bardeen and Warren Harmon Lewis 13

During the second half of the third week the membrana reuniens becomes markedly thickened along its line of attachment between, usually, the fourth and twenty-sixth spinal segments. This thickening is known as the WoMan ridge. In Figs. 2-7 the ventral margin of this ridge is emphasized by a heavy line. Opposite the fifth to the ninth and the twenty-first to the twenty-sixth spinal myotomes this thickening is especially marked. The two latter areas represent the inception of the limb-buds; the intervening area represents the rudiment of the lateral body-wall. These three areas first become well marked toward the end of the third week (Figs. 2-3).

The limb-buds increase very rapidly in size. At first the limb-buds extend directly laterally from the Wolffian ridge (Figs. 2 and 3), but as development proceeds they project more and more in a caudal direction (Figs. 4, 5 and 6). Meanwhile two distinct divisions appear in each limbbud. The part which arises directly from the Wolffian ridge we may call the basal division. This portion continues to grow in the ventrolateral direction taken by the limb-bud originally. Beyond this basal part the limb-bud bends in a ventro-median direction. The part of the limb-bud beyond the bend we may call the " distal part " of the limbbud. For some time the basal portion of the limb-bud continues to grow in a ventro-lateral direction, while the distal part grows in a ventro-median direction. The limb as a whole meanwhile points distinctly in a caudal direction.

Dorsally the base of the limb becomes continuous with the dorsal margin of the Wolffian ridge, ventrally with its ventral margin. The dorso-lateral surface of the base of the limb-bud is therefore extensive; the ventro-median surface is small in area. Owing to the caudal direction assumed by the limb, the anterior (cephalic) surface of the base is extensive, while the posterior (caudal) surface is limited in extent.

The distal part of each limb-bud is flattened so that it presents median and lateral surfaces and anterior (cephalic), ventral and posterior (caudal) margins. A constriction may be seen immediately beyond the region where the distal flattened portion of the limb joins the thicker rounded base. In Fig. 8 the constriction is emphasized by heavy lines. In the arm it is seen as one looks at the limb directly from the side. In the leg, which is here slightly twisted, one may see the constriction as it appears when the limb is viewed on the anterior margin. The constriction is just beginning to appear in the leg-bud shown in Fig. B, Plate II, and in Fig. C, Plate III.

From the basal ^portion of each limb-bud are developed the limbgirdle (shoulder and pelvic-girdles), and the upper limb (upper arm and

14 Development of the Limbs, Body-wall and Back in Man

thigh), from the distal portion are developed forelimb (forearm and leg) and extremity (hand and foot). The place where the distal part of the limb joins the base represents the future elbow or knee. These two joints are formed in a flexed position (see especially Figs. F, G, H and I, Plates VI-IX).

The constriction mentioned above serves to designate the differentiation of the distal part of the limb-bud into the forelimb and extremity. Opposite the constriction the forelimb is formed; immediately distal to it the extremity (Figs. 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15).

The hand and foot are at first flattened, disk-shaped bodies. Digitation is first marked on the lateral surface (see the hand in Fig. 9), and then in the free margin also (Fig. 10).

Differentiation of the base of the limb-bud is somewhat less easy to follow than that of the distal part. This is due mainly to the fact that many distinguishing structures are at first deep-seated. As the musculature, however, becomes distinctly differentiated, the various main groups of muscles give rise to distinctive external characteristics.

The limbs at the stage shown in Fig. 15, p. 9, and in Figs. F, Gr, H and I, Plates VI-IX, exhibit rudiments of most of the structures characteristic of the adult limbs. Much growth and shifting of parts, however, is necessary before adult conditions are reached.

The great curvature of the axis of the body opposite the limbs during their formation has been noticed by His."

The arm-bud at first lies opposite the 5th to 8th cervical and 1st thoracic myotomes. As it grows in size the area of attachment to the body enlarges and extends on its cephalic side to the level of the 3rd cervical neural process (see Embryo CIX, Fig. 10). We find also that the shoulder comes to lie closer and closer to the precervical sinus until the embryo reaches a length of about 20 mm. As development still further proceeds the shoulder gradually migrates caudally and the distance between the shoulder and precervical sinus increases imtil the adult position is attained. Simultaneous with this caudal migration of the arm, the lower portion of the ventral wall of the neck appears.

The posterior limb arises slightly later than the anterior. Throughout its development the leg lingers somewhat behind the arm. The base of the leg-bud is at first opposite the 1st to 5th lumbar and the 1st sacral myotomes. Gradually the base extends so as to include the region opposite the second and third sacral myotomes and the upper

9 Zur Geschichte des Gehirns etc., Bd. XIV, der Abhandl. der Mathematisch-pbysiclien Classe der Konigl. Sachs. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften, p. 381.

Charles Eiissell Barcleen and Warren Harmon Lewis


extremity of the base ceases to extend over the region of the first lumbar segment. As adult condition is approached, the leg assumes a much more caudal position.

During the growth of the limbs the body-wall grows forwards at the expense of the membrana reuniens. In the- various figures the ventral line of the body-wall is indicated. The abdominal wall has closed in against the umbilical cord by the time the embryo has reached a length of 6 cm. and an age of about 3 months.

Having thus considered the more general external features presented in the early development of the limbs and body-wall, let us turn to a consideration of the formation of the main structures within these areas.

Fig. 16. Cross section

through the fourth cervical

segment of Embryo XII. X 55 d.

II. Internal Structiteal Differentiation. Second Week.

•-»;4V,.';jv^ ;>■,.-;% «?,*.' -jTi

Fig. 17. Cross section through the fifth thoracic segment of embryo LXXVI. x 55 d. The right side of the section passes through the middle, the left side through the posterior third of the segment.

In an embryo of two weeks, No. XII, Fig. 1, the viscera are attached to the ventral surface of the spinal axis of the embryo, and the amnion is attached to its lateral margin. Fig. 16 shows the conditions which are seen in a transverse section through the fourth cervical segment. The spinal cord is, in this region, a closed tube, the lateral walls of which are composed of five or six layers of epithelial cells. On each side lie the myotomes. These are oval in cross-section, square with rounded corners when viewed from the lateral surface. Each has a well-marked myocoel, surrounded on all sides by four or five layers of epithelial cells. On the left in Fig. 16 the section passes through the centre, at the right it passes through the anterior margin of a myotome. Ventral to the

16 Development of the Limbs, Body-wall and Back in Man

spinal-cord lies the notochord; on each side of this a dorsal aorta. Between notochord, aortse, spinal-cord and myotomes lies a certain amount of mesenchyme, which arises apparently from the ventro-median surface of the myotomes.

In the region between the dorsal margin of the myotomes, the spinalcord and the ectoderm lie spinal ganglia cells.

Ventral to the aorta on each side the splanchnopleure is attached to the axis of the embryo; ventral to the myotomes on each side, the somatopleure. The latter is continuous with the amnion. The coelom is surrounded by epithelium, and this is surmounted by several layers of mesenchyme cells which apparently have arisen from the epithelium lining the ccelom.

Third WeeTc.

During the third week of embryonic development marked changes take place in the spinal axis of the embryo and in the adjoining somatopleure. A section throvigh the fifth thoracic segment of an embryo of the third week. No. LXXVI, is shown in Fig. 17. The spinal ganglia are definite, well-developed groups of cells on each side of the spinal-cord. In the spinal-cord the ventral-root zone is well marked, and the first ventral-root fibres have appeared. The myotomes have become flattened and elongated. The median surface of each of these has become converted into muscle cells, shown in cross-section in the figure. There is a single dorsal aorta, on each side of which a Wolfl&an body has developed. Dorsal to the Wolffian body lies the cardinal vein. The axial mesenchyme, which arises, at first at least, apparently from the myotomes, and the mesenchyme which springs from the coelomic wall have increased very greatly in amount, and have fused so as to form a common mass of tissue which surrounds- the other structures. None, however, intervenes between the dorso-lateral surface of the myotomes and the ectoderm.

A vascular plexus is developing in the mesenchyme. The axial mesenchyme of the caudal third of each segment has become dense. This is shown at the left in Fig. 17. It represents the anlage of the intervertebral disc and of the vertebral arch and costal processes. The somatopleure is considerably thicker than at the stage shown in Fig. 16. This increased thickness is due to an increase in the amount of the mesenchyme. This mesenchyme extends for a short distance dorsally between the ventral tip of the myotome and the ectoderm. The myotomes have not yet entered the body-wall.

In the region of the posterior limb the increase of mesenchyme between coelom and ectoderm precedes the formation of muscle on the

Charles Eussell Bardeen and Warren Harmon Lewis


median layer of the myotomes, the formation of the spinal ganglia, and the appearance of the ventral nerve roots. This is shown in Fig. 18, taken throngh the leg region of Emhryo LXXVI.

Fig. 18. Cross section tbrougli tlie lumbar region of Embryo LXXVI. x 55 d.

Fig. 19, taken through the leg region of Embryo CXLVIII, shows an older stage in which the limb-bud is considerably more advanced in development. The spinal ganglia are distinct. Formation of muscle cells has begun on the median surface of the myotomes.

Fig. 19. Cross section tbrough the lumbar region of Embryo CXLVIII. x 55 d.

The Wolffian ridge and limb-buds, which appear during the third week, as shown in Figs. 2, 3 and 4, consist, therefore, at the end of this period, merely of a mass of mesenchyme which intervenes between the coelom and the ectoderm lateral to the axis of the body. This mesenchyme contains a vascular plexus. Along the free edge of the limbbuds the ectoderm consists of several layers of epithelial cells (Fig. 19). 2

18 Development of the I-iimbs, Body-wall and Back in Man

Fourth Weelc.

During the fourth week certain structures extend from the spinal axis into the Wolffian ridge and the limb-buds. Let us consider first the relation of these axial structures to the body-wall and then their relation to the limb-buds.

Fig. 20. Cross section through the fifth thoracic segment of Embryo II. x .55 d. The right half of the section passes through the middle, the left half through the posterior third of the segment.

coelom sympathetic branch spinal i

Fig. 21. Diagrammatic cross section through the mid-thoracic region of Embryo II. About 2.5 d. In looking at the section the si)ectator is supposed to be facing towards the head of the embryo. In the background one sees the fourth thoracic scleromere with arch and costal process, and at the right the intersegmental artery and the distal edge of the fourth myotome. In the foreground the spinal cord and spinal ganglia in section, and the spinal nerves of the fifth thoracic segment are shown. At the left the fifth thoracic myotome is shown in section.

Fig. 20 shows the general appearance of a typical thoracic segment (the fifth) in an embryo at the end of the fourth week. In Fig. 21 similar structures are shown somewhat more diagrammatically. Fig. A, Plate II, shows a reconstruction of the axis of the body and a part of the right lateral wall and the leg in the same embryo.

The skeletal portion of each axial segment consists of a condensation of the mesenchyme at the caudal third of the segment as shown at the left in Fig. 20. To this skeletal tissue the term scleromere may be applied. It represents the intervertebral disc, the arch or neural process and the costal process of a segment of the future spinal column. The general form of the scleromeres at this stage may be readily seen in Fig. A. The scleromeres do not as yet extend into the body-wall.

The general form of the myotomes may be seen in Fig. A. At the

Charles Eussell Bardeen and Warren Harmon Lewis 19

right the 11th and 13th thoracic and the 1st and 3d lumbar myotomes are viewed from the side and slightly in front. At the left a portion of the median surface of several myotomes may be seen. In Fig. 20 two myotomes are shown in cross-section. The myocoel has disappeared. The median surface of each myotome has been entirely converted into musculature. The lateral surface and ventral and dorsal tips are covered by epithelium. A certain portion of the dorsal surface of the thoracic myotomes is, however, converted into musculature. This is shown in the myotomes at the right in Fig. A. The thoracic myotomes extend for a short distance into the body-wall. In Fig. 20 this is shown in a cross-section. In Fig. A the projecting tips of the myotomes may be seen through tlie membrane lining the coelom.

The thoracic spinal nerves project for a shorter distance into the bodywall than do the myotomes. Each is divided at the dorsal margin of the coelom into two portions, a median which becomes the sympathetic ramus, and a lateral which extends outwards between the median surface of the myotome and the lining membrane of the coelom and becomes the ventral trunk of the spinal nerve (see Figs. A, 20 and 21).

From the aorta intersegmental arteries arise and send branches dorsally toward the spinal ganglia, laterally between the myotomes and ventrally into the body-wall (see Fig. 21). A considerable vascular plexus is developed in the mesenchyme. The general relations of the latter are shown in Fig. 20. The venous blood is collected in the cardinal veins and in branches of the umbilical vein.

The general relation of the formed structures of the axis of the body to the leg-bud at the end of the fourth week are shown in Fig. A, Plate II. The limb-bud lies opposite the five lumbar and the first sacral segments. The coelom extends to a point opposite the first sacral segment, but in the region of the limb it does not extend as far dorsally as in the thoracic region. From the model represented in Fig. A, several of the myotomes of the left side, the axial mesenchyme, the aorta, the left cardinal vein, the intestines and urino-genital organs have been removed. A ^^ortion of the right cardinal vein and a portion of the right umbilical artery are shown, reduced in size for the sake of clearness. The umbilical artery curves about the distal extremity of the coelom. From the umbilical artery a branch passes into the limb-bud. Veins pass from the limb-bud into the cardinal vein. The blood-vessels of the limb exist at this time in the form of an irregular sinusoidal plexus.

The second, third and fourth lumbar nerves may be seen sending spreading bundles of nerve fibres into the dense tissue of the limb, dorsal


Development of the Limbs, Body-wall and Back in Man

to the cardinal vein. They extend, however, for no considerable distance into the limb-bud. The myotomes do not extend into the limbbud.

By following the successive spinal segments from the fourth sacral to the first lumbar in Fig. A, an idea may be gained of the development of segmental structures in the axial region. The scleromeres are represented at the caudal third of each segment. On the left side of the body the myotomes are omitted from the 3d sacral to the 3d lumbar segments. The spinal nerves first appear in the first and second sacral segments.

Fig. 33. Tangential section tlirougli the leg region of Embryo II. 35 d.

Fig. 22 shows the general conditions existing in the limb region of Embryo II when seen in section. At the left the leg-bud is shown cut through an area near the distal extremity of the coelom. At the right the cut is more dorsal and extends through the tips of the lumbar spinal nerves.

In the arm region of Embryo II, the cervico-brachial plexus is formed and limb nerves extend into the limb-bud. The conditions are essentially similar to the conditions found in the leg region of Embryo CLXIII and described below.

Charles Eiissell Barcleen and Warren Harmon Lewis


Fifth Week.

During the fifth week of development a considerable amount of organization occurs in the spinal axis, the body-wall and the limbs. The nature of the processes taking place are indicated in Embryo CLXIII (length, 9 mm.; probable age, 4^ weeks).

The structure of the back, the limbs and body-wall in this embryo is shown in Fig. B, Plate II, and Fig. C, Plate III. The areas mentioned are drawn from reconstructions. The remaining parts of Pig. C are drawn from an excellent photograph.

Fig. 28. Diagrammatic cross section tlirough the 5th-Gth thoracic segments of Embryo CLXIII. x 25 d. The general arrangement of the structures represented is like that described for Fig. 21.

Fig. 23 shows diagrammatically the general nature of the structures in a typical thoracic segment (the 6th) of Embryo CLXIII. The changes taking place in the thoracic region during the first half of the 5th week may be readily followed by comparing Fig. A with Fig. B, and Fig. 21 with Fig. 23.

The skeletal portion of the segment consists in Embryo CLXIII, as in Embryo II, of a condensed mesenchyme at the distal third of the segment, but the scleromere is far more definitely outlined. Xeural and costal processes are well developed. The latter present something of the general form of ribs in the thoracic region (see Fig. 23 and Fig. B). A sheet of condensed mesenchyme connects the neural and costal process of the scleromeres of neighboring segments. That connecting the

22 Development of the Limbs, Body-wall and Back in Man

neural processes is shown in Fig. B at the right. That portion of each scleromere representing an intervertebral disc is likewise united ventrally and dorsally with its neighbors by a dense sheet of tissue at the periphery of the disc. The ventral portions of these sheets of tissue are represented in Fig. B. Within the space lying between the scleromeres is developed the chondrogenous tissue which gives rise to the vertebral bodies. Marked alterations have taken place in the myotomes. In the thoracic region the two layers of the myotome have, with the exception of the dorsal and ventral tips in the more distal segments, become converted into musculature (see Fig. 23 and Fig. B). As shown at the left in Fig. 23, the myogenous tissue which has arisen from the myotomes is being divided into three portions — a dorsal, a lateral and a ventral — by the ingrowth of a vascular mesenchyme. The finer changes taking place during this period are essentially similar to those previously described as taking place in the body-wall of the pig.'°

The tissue of the superficial lateral layers of the myotomes has formed into a continuous layer (see Fig. C, Plate III), Segmentation, however, is still visible.

Both the costal processes of the scleromeres and the myotomes have extended well into the body-wall (Fig. 23).

The thoracic spinal nerves likewise have kept pace in growth with the myotomes. The ventral extremities of the spinal nerves are caught between the tips of the myotomes (see Fig. B, Plate II). From the spinal nerves, dorsal and lateral branches have arisen as well as the sympathetic. A sympathetic cord has arisen from the extremities of the sympathetic rami.

The segmental arteries (see Fig. 23) are similar in nature to those of the stage shown in Fig. 21, but the branching is more extensive. The mesenchyme is much more developed and now surrounds all formed structures in each spinal segment. It has begun to invade the myotomes.

In the region of the posterior limb bundles of fibres from the five lumbar and first two sacral nerves have become anastomosed into a plexus, from which in turn four nerves have sprung. These represent the femoral, obturator, tibial and peroneal nerves (Fig. B). Within the legbud the central mesenchyme, near the axis of the embryo, has become condensed. This condensed mesenchyme represents the femur and hip bone of the adult limb. In the drawing the outline of this sclerogenous mass is made dia grammatically sharp. The femoral portion of the

'"Bardeen, Development of the musculature of the body wall in the pig, including its histogenesis, and its relations to the myotomes and to the skeletal, and nervous apparatus. Vol. IX, Johns Hopkins Hospital Reports, 1900.

Charles Eussell Bardeen and Warren Harmon Lewis 23

skeletal mass fades gradually into the undifferentiated mesenchyme of the distal portion of the limb. It. is this skeletal mass which seems to divide the bundles of nerve fibres of the plexus into the four main divisions which form the origin of the four chief nerves of the limb. The main artery and vein of the limb are represented, but smaller in proportion to the other structures than in nature. The border vein at this period is well developed. The conditions just described are well shown in I'ig. C, Plate III, which represents the conditions seen in the limb from the lateral side after removing the ectoderm and the undifferentiated mesenchyme. It is to be noted that the myotomes do not extend into the limb-bud.

The arm is somewhat more advanced in development than the leg. The following description applies to the conditions represented in Fig. C, Plate III. A detailed account of the structure of the arm at this stage is reserved for a later paper.

Lateral to the myotome system in the arm region is an ill-defined mass of mesenchyme extending from the upper cervical to the 7th thoracic myotomes. At the level of the 1st and 2d ribs it divides into several masses. The first passes ventral to the arm and brachial plexus. The main portion of it joins the arm pre-muscle sheath. From this mass the pectoral muscles develop, hence we may designate it the pectoral pre-muscle mass. It is continuous ventrally with an in-egular mass of condensed tissue, the ventral neck pre-muscle mass. The second division of the lateral pre-muscle mass passes dorsal to the arm and brachial plexus and joins the arm pre-muscle sheath. It constitutes the latissimus dorsi pre-muscle mass. The third division, parallel to the ventral portion of the cervical myotome column, represents the levator scapulge and serratus anterior pre-muscle mass. Lateral to it is an ill-defined mass of pre-muscle tissue. The fourth and most dorsal division is thinner and less clearly marked than the others. We may call it the rhomboid pre-muscle mass. The caudal limit of the trapezius pre-muscle mass appears at the upper end of the arm region. It is at the level of the 4th cervical neural processes, and from here the muscle mass extends to the occipital region. Most of the arm premuscle sheath which surrounds the skeletal core has been dissected away. Toward the distal end of the arm the skeletal and pre-muscle tissues blend (Fig. C). Beyond this point differentiation is less advanced. The proximal portion of the arm sheath is continuous with that around the scapula.

Part of the skeletal core is seen projecting caudally beyond the cut edge of the pre-muscle sheath. The lowej end of the humerus, ulna

24 Development of the Limbs, Body-wall and Back in Man

and radius are represented. The ulna and radius are continuous with the hand plate, which is composed of less differentiated tissue. There is a slight bend at the elbow. The upper end of the humerus is continuous with the scapula. The scapula is a flattened oval mass embedded in the scapular pre-muscle tissue. No coracoid or arromiom processes are present. The clavicula is not present. The skeletal core is composed of dense mesenchyme. It shades oft", however, into the surrounding pre-muscle sheath.

The brachial plexus is formed by the 5th to 8th cervical and 1st thoracic nerves. The spinal nerves, as well as the plexus they form, have scarcely any caudal inclination, but pass ventrolaterally into the arm. The plexus is fairly well formed. The main nerves arising from it are present. The presence of the condensed skeletal core separates these into two groups. The musculo-spiral and circumflex on the dorsal and the ulnar, median and musculo-cutaneous on the ventral side. In Fig. C only the tips of the musculo-spiral and median nerves are shown. At this stage they have scarcely grown to the elbow.

Sixth Week.

During the sixth week the limbs and the body-wall and the back begin to approach the structural conditions characteristic of the adult.

The conditions present at the end of the fifth week are shown in Embryo CIX; length, 11 mm.; age, about 5 weeks. This embryo is pictured in Figs. D and E, Plates IV and V. These figures, with the exception of the head in Fig. D, are drawn from wax-plate reconstructions. Fig. 24 represents a cross-section through the 6th to 7th thoracic segment of a slightly older embryo, CVI (length, 15.5 mm.; age, about 5-| weeks).

'The typical thoracic segment during the first half of the sixth week exhibits the following conditions:

The skeletal structures have begun to assume adult form. Between the intervertebral discs the bodies of the vertebrae are now formed of chondrogenous tissue. This may be seen in the dotted area of the scleromere in Fig. 24 and in the darker areas of the spinal column in Fig. E. The chondrogenous tissue extends into the neural and transverse processes of the scleromere (see the left side of Fig. 24). Each costal process extends considerably further ventrally than at the stage shown in Fig. 23. Within the dense tissue of the costal process chondrogenous tissue is formed similar to, but without direct connection with, that of the vertebral body and transverse process. A lateral view of the

Charles Eussell Bardeen and Warreu Harmon Lewis


neural and transverse processes of the vertebrae is shown in the cervical region in Fig. D. The extent of development of the ribs is shown in Fis. E.

Fi^. 24. Diagrammatic cross section through the 6th-7th thoracic segments of Embryo CVI. x 35 d. This figure is made to correspond with Figs. 31 and 23. See legend for Fig. 31.

The musculature has undergone most marked changes. The dorsal musculature is slightly separated from the ventro-lateral by vascular mesenchyme. The dorsal musculature is further subdivided into three muscle columns. These correspond to the ileo-costal, longissimus dorsi and spinalis groups of dorsal muscles in the adult. The ventral musculature is likewise subdivided into two main portions, the rectus muscle and the lateral musculature. The last is further subdivided into external oblique, the intercostals, the internal oblique, and the transversalis muscles. In the intercostal muscles alone is the segmentation characteristic of the mvotomes fullv maintained.

26 Development of the Limbs^, Body-wall and Back in Man

In Fig. D the separation of dorsal from ventro-lateral musculature is clearly shown. The dorsal musculature is shown divided into three columns in the upper thoracic region; caudally differentiation is not so extensive. The musculature of the external oblique may be seen, in Fig. D, covering the external intercostal muscle, the ribs and in part the rectus musculature. In Fig. E the rectus musculature, internal intercostal and internal oblique may be seen. Differentiation, however, is not so far advanced at the stage shown in Figs. D and E as it is at the stage shown in Fig. 34. The ventro-lateral abdominal musculature of Embryo CTX is connected by an irregular dense band of tissue Avith the pubic process of the anlage of the pelvic bone. This band of tissue is represented with diagrammatic distinctness in the draAvings.

The neural apparatus has undergone rapid development. Fig. 21 shows clearly the main branches arising from the typal thoracic nerve. Muscle twigs are arising. The general appearance of the spinal nerves at this stage is shown in Fig. E.

The mesenchyme is extensive in amount. The blood-vessels are similar in general distribution to those described in Embryo CLXIII, but the vascular plexus is more extensively developed.

In the posterior limb the central skeletal mass has assumed somewhat definite outlines. Fairly good views of it are presented in Figs. D and E. The pelvic portion of the skeleton of the limb consists of a central region continuous with the head of the femur. From this central acetabular portion spring iliac, ischial and pubic processes. The femur is short and thick. It is indistinctly shown in Fig. D. The tibia and fibula are of fairly definite form (Figs. D and E). The skeleton of the foot has the form shown in Figs. D and E. It is composed of condensed mesenchyme. No accurate division into parts can be distinguished.

The main nerve trunks have continued their growth into the limb. From them many of the principal muscular and cutaneous branches have sprung. The general distribution of the lateral nerves of the limb, the femoral and peroneal, and their branches, may be seen in Fig. D. That of the median nerves of the limb, the obturator and tibial, in Fig. E, In both figures the anterior border nerves (the ilio-hypogastric and genito-crural) and the posterior border nerves (the pudic and posteriorcutaneous) are shown.

About the main branches of the nerves of the limb a differentiation of musculature has begun. This is indicated in Figs. D and E. In Fig. 25 are shown the appearances in cross-section presented by the early developing musculature of the leg. The blood-vessels of the limb are shown in Figs. D and E. The sciatic artery is still the chief source of

Charles Eussell Bardeen and Warren Harmon Lewis


supply, but the femoral and obturator arteries also have appeared. The blood is carried into the cardinal (iliac) vein partly by the femoral vein and partly by the sciatic. The formed structures of the limb are surrounded by a vascular mesenchyme.

spiDal ganglion

sciatic nerve, Atid niusculatiir


femoral nerve, and musculature

/ '-.Os'^.


abdominal musculature

Fig-. 25. Section through Embryo CIX. x 25 d.

The conditions existing in the arm are considerably in advance of those in the leg. The following description of the conditions in the arm region can be followed from Figs. D and E, Plates IV and V.

The lateral pre-muscle mass has become completely divided into several groups. The tissue of these groups is now fibrillated. The first division, the one which passes ventral to the brachial plexus, is seen in Plate V. It constitutes the pectoral muscle mass, representing

38 Development of the Limbs, Body-wall and Back in Man

both pectoralis major and minor muscles. This mass extends from the level of the third rib to the humerus and clavicle. There is no attachment to the ribs. The intercostal muscles have been dissected away in Plate V to show its costal end. The second division of the lateral pre-muscle mass has developed into the latissimus dorsi and teres major muscle mass. It extends, from the level of the 4th rib to the humerus, where it blends with the scapulo-humeral mass. Its development and differentiation have not proceeded so far as the pectoral mass. The third division of the lateral pre-muscle mass has developed into a long muscle extending from the 1st cervical vertebra to the 9th rib, Digitations extend to the transverse processes of the cervical vertebra and to the cephalic 9 ribs. The muscle lies in a more median plane than the scapula and has as yet no attachment to it. It represents the levator scapula? and serratus anterior muscles. The trapezius mass has extended to a lower level than found in CLXIII. There is no scapular attachment. Only the ventral half of the mass pictured in Plate IV consists of muscle fibres, the remaining connective tissue portion connects with the dorsal ends of the neural processes.

Considerable differentiation in the pre-muscle sheath has taken place. The scapulo-humeral mass is with difficulty separated into the various muscles. These are more blended into a single mass than would appear from Plates IV and V. Here portions of the deltoid and trapezius have been dissected away.

The extensor mass of the forearm can be separated into three groups which are more or less blended however. The larger superficial mass has been partially dissected away. It represents the extensor digitorum communis, extensor carpi ulnaris, and extensor digiti quinti proprius muscles. The second group arises beneath the first group, taking a course at nearly right angles to it. It represents the deep extensor muscle of the forearm. These two groups fuse distally with the general condensed mesenchyme of the digits, where all traces between premuscle and pre-cartilage are lost. The third group represents the brachio-radialis and the extensor carpi radiates longus et brevis. A • portion of the brachialis can be seen in Plate IV. The flexor surface of the arm is shown in Fig. E, Plate V. The biceps and coracobrachialis are obscured by the pectoral mass. The flexor mass of the forearm has split into two layers. It shows less differentiation than the extensor mass.

The arm skeleton shows considerable advance. The shape of the scapula has changed, both coracoid process and acromion are present and of large size. The clavicle has begun to develop and consists of

Charles Eussell Bardeen and Warren Harmon Lewis 29

an ill-defined mass of condensed tissue projecting about one-half the distance from the acromion to the tips of the first rib. The humerus is fairly well defined and is continuous with the scapula as well as the ulna and radius. The elbow bend is well marked. The ulna and radius are farther advanced than in Embryo CLXIII. They end distally in the carpal plate. In the carpal plate indications of formation of the carpal elements are seen. The digits consist of undifferentiated tissue in which are blended skeletal muscle and tendinous elements. The humerus, ulna and radius have a core of hyaline cartilage. The rest of the skeletal tissue consists of condensed mesenchyme and pre-cartilage.

In Plate IV are shown the circumflex, radial and musculo-cutaneous nerves. The brachial plexus with portions of the nerves arising from it are seen in Plate V. The plexus is well formed. It has only a slight caudal inclination. The spinal accessory nerve is seen on the median surface of the trapezius. Branches from the 3d and 4th cervical nerves join it.

Seventh WeeJc.

By the end of the seventh week most of the structures characteristic of the adult back, body-wall and limbs have appeared. Subsequent development depends in the main upon growth and upon relative shifting of parts.

The structures of the abdominal wall in a seven-week embryo (XXII, length 20 mm.) are shown in the Figs. F, G, H and I, Plates VI, VII, VIII and IX. The vertebra are composed of embryonic hyaline cartilage. Each presents a neural and a transverse process on each side. The cartilaginous portions of the vertebrae are shown in the upper thoracic region of Fig. H. The. ribs are likewise composed of embryonic cartilage, shown in the same portion of the figure. The cartilage of the ribs is at no time continuous with that of the vertebrae. The ribs and vertebras are surrounded by a dense mesenchyme. This is continuous from the ribs to the transverse process of the vertebra. Between the bodies of the vertebrae it forms the intervertebral discs (Fig. I). It is continuous over the surface of the spinal column. From it are developed the ligaments characteristic of the thorax and spinal column together with the perichondrium and periosteum. No thirteenth rib is present in this embryo or in any of the other young embryos we have studied. Fig. 26 shows at the right the portion of the skeleton composed of embryonic cartilage, at the left the covering of dense mesenchyme.

30 Development of the Limbs, Body-wall and Back in Man

The mnscnlatnre of the back and abdominal walls has a general resemblance to that of the adult. Fig. I shows the musculature of the abdomen and thorax as seen from within, Figs. F and G that of the more superficial layers of the abdomen and thorax, and Fig. H that of the deeper layers of the abdomen and thorax. The dorsal muscles are not clearly shown in any of the figures, but they are divisible into the three distinct groups, the ileo-costal, longissimus dorsi, and spinalis muscles, characteristic of the adult.

Fig. 26. Skeleton of distal half of Embryo XXII. At the left side the covering of dense embryonic connective tissue is shown, at the right the parts composed of embryonic cartilage, x 10 d.

The nerves, like the muscles, have a distribution essentially similar to that found in the adult. The figures indicate with sufficient clearness the distribution of the thoraco-abdominal and border nerves.

The main blood-vessels are those characteristic of the adult. ■ In the posterior limb the skeletal tissue has undergone extensive differentiation. The rudiments of all of the bones of the leg may be seen in the form of cartilage except that the terminal phalanges of the

Charles Russell Bardeen and Warren Harmon Lewis 31

three onter toes have not yet appeared (see Fig. 26, right side). The cartilaginous skeleton of the limb, like that of the spine, is covered by a dense mesenchyme. Torsion has not yet begun at the ankle-joint.

The musculature of the posterior limb is so far differentiated that all of the individual muscles characteristic of the adult may be distinguished except the lumbricales. The muscles lie in distinct groups, as is shown in the various figures.

The femoral or extensor group of muscles is shown in Figs. F and H. The groups of muscles belonging to the peroneal nerve and its branches, the gluteal, peroneal, and pedal extensor muscles may be seen in Figs. F and H. The adductor or obturator group of muscles is best seen in Fig. G. The groups of muscles belonging to the tibial nerve may be seen in Fig. I. A detailed account of these muscles is reserved for a subsec{uent article.

The nerves of the posterior limb, like the muscles, are so well developed that most of them may be readily compared with those of the adult. To reach the adult position a considerable amount of shifting, however, must take place.

At the period under consideration the blood-vessels of the limb are those characteristic of the adult. The main artery and the chief vein are the femoral.

An idea of the general condition of the tissues of the limb at this stage may be obtained from Fig. 27, which represents a photograph taken through a section passing through the limb region.

The anterior limb presents similar conditions of structure.

The muscular system shows well-marked fibrillation. All of the muscles of the adult arm are present and in about the relative adult positions.

The bones of the arm are represented by hyaline cartilage except the distal row of phalanges of the 2d to 5th digits. This row is represented by masses of undifferentiated condensed tissue, into which the long extensor and flexor tendons merge.

The clavicle is well developed and extends to the 1st rib, where it comes in contact with the sternal anlage. The sternal anlage is composed of condensed mesenchyme. The ribs, vertebrse and their neural processes are composed of cartilage. All of the cartilages of the arm are surrounded by a condensed mesenchymal sheath, the perichondrium.

The nervous system presents nearly the adult conditions. It has not been possible, however, to resolve the brachial plexus into its usual distinct cords. They appear from study of sections and the reconstruction to be fused into one mass.


Development of the Limbs, Body-wall and Back in Man



In an embryo of two weeks, XII, Figs. 1 and IG, fourteen myotomes are present, three occipital and eleven spinal (8c, 3t). In an embryo of

Fig. 37. Photograph of a section through the leg region of Embryo XXIL

four weeks, II, Figs. 6, 20, 21 and A, thirty-eight myotomes have been counted, three occipital and thirty-five spinal (8c, 12t, 51, 5s and 5c). At this stage the formation of myotomes ceases. Soon hereafter the

Charles Eussell Bardeen and Warren Harmon Lewis 33

occipital myotomes disappear. From the thoracic myotomes processes enter the hody wall. During the fifth week the myotonies give rise to a dorso-ventral muscle-mass in which the segmentation characteristic of the myotomes mainly disappears. This muscle-mass becomes divided longitudinally into two great divisions — a dorsal and a ventro-lateral. Into the composition of the dorsal division all of the spinal myotomes enter. From it is derived the dorsal musculature of the adult. The ventro-lateral muscle-mass is formed from the processes which extend from the thoracic myotomes into the body wall. From it are derived the intrinsic muscles of the thorax and abdomen. The differentiation of these muscles takes place during the fifth, sixth and seventh weeks.

From the median surface of the myotomes near the ventral margin mesenchyme springs to surround the intrinsic structures of the spinal axis (Fig. 16). This mesenchyme is at first non-segmental in distribution. Gradually, however, it becomes denser at the posterior third of each spinal segment. This condensed tissue forms the scleromeres. From the scleromeres are developed the intervertebral discs, the arches and transverse processes of the vertebrae, and the ribs. Between the scleromeres the bodies of the vertebras are formed. The vertebral column at first surrounds only the ventral half of the spinal-cord. It is at a comparatively late period that the vertebral arches from each side meet dorsally to form the vertebral spines.

Owing to the accurate studies by His, the main stages in the development of the spinal-cord and early formation of the spinal nerves are too well known to demand further description. We find, however, that the dorsal divisions of the spinal nerves are given off after the division of the spinal nerve into somatic and sympathetic branches, a period later than that described by His. When the dorsal musculature begins to be formed from the tissues derived from the myotomes, the dorsal divisions appear and pass into the differentiating musculature, where they give rise to the characteristic median and lateral trunks from which muscular and cutaneous branches spring. The ventral trunks of the spinal nerves in the cervical and lumbo-sacral regions unite to form plexuses from which in turn the nerves of the neck and limbs arise. In the thoracic region the ventral trunks pass inio the body wall as intercostal nerves. Sympathetic branches are given off at the end of the fourth week, at the period when the thoracic nerves reach the dorsal margin of the coelom. The lateral and ventral cutaneous branches are given off during the fifth, the main muscular branches during the sixth week.


34 Development of the Limbs, Body-wall and Back in Man

Soon after the two dorsal aortas fnse into a single dorsal aorta intersegmental arteries are given off. From these, main branches pass between the myotomes, between the spinal ganglia and to the ventral surface of the spinal-cord. Longitudinal anastomosing branches are formed between these vessels and an extensive vascular plexus arises. The blood is collected again in the cardinal veins and into the abdominal branches of the umbilical vein.

The limbs and body-wall are developed in the Wolffian ridge. This first appears as a thickening of the membrana reuniens along its attachment to the axis of the body between the 4th and 26th spinal segments. The limbs are developed from special bud-like projections from the Wolffian ridge, the anterior extremity appearing opposite the 5th to 9th spinal segments, the posterior extremity opposite the 21st to 26th. At the end of the third week the Wolffian ridge and limb-buds are well marked, but are without special internal differentiation.

The body-wall is developed by an ingrowth into the Wolffian ridge of processes from the myotomes, scleromeres, nerves and blood-vessels belonging to the twelve thoracic spinal segments, and a gradual differentiation of adult structures from embryonic. Ingrowth begins during the fourth week, structures essentially similar to those characteristic of the adult are differentiated by the end of the sixth week. The body-wall does not complete its growth to the midline, however, until toward the end of the third month.

Into the limb-buds blood-vessels and nerves extend from the axis of the embryo, but neither myotomes nor scleromeres send processes into the limbs. The skeletal and muscular structures of the limb are differentiated from the mesenchyme of the limb-bud. Ingrowth of bloodvessels precedes ingrowth of nerves. The brachial plexus is formed and nerves grow into the anterior limb during the latter half of the fourth week. The lumbo-sacral plexus is formed, and nerves grow into the posterior limb during the first half of the fifth week. Skeletal differentiation begins in the region of the shoulder or hip, and extends distally and proximally. This differentiation immediately precedes ingrowth of the nerves of the limbs. The skeletal structures serve in part to guide the nerves in their distribution. Muscle differentiation immediately follows the entrance of a motor nerve into a given region. From this, however, it must not be concluded that a causal connection exists between the nerves and differentiation of muscles. "

"See: Leonowa. Ein Fall von Anencephalle combinirt mit totaler Amyelie Neurol. Centralbl. Leipsic. Bd. XII (1893), s. 218, 363.

Charles Eussell Bardeen and Warreu Harmon Lewis 35

The structures of the upper arm and thigh are differentiated before those of the forearm and leg, and the latter before the hand and foot. Differentiation in the anterior limb precedes that in the posterior limb. Most of the main structures of the anterior limb may be distinguished at the end of the sixth week; most of those of the posterior limb at the end of the seventh week.

During the first two months of embryonic life, therefore, are developed the rudiments of the muscles, nerves, blood-vessels, and skeletal structures characteristic of the back, the body-wall and the limbs. Adult conditions are reached by an increase in size and complexity of the various organs and by a relative shifting of parts.


A series of photographs of human embryos in the collection belonging to Dr. Mall m the Anatomical Laboratory of the Johns Hopkins University The Roman numerals refer to the numbers by which these embryos are designated. The Arabic numbers indicate the ratio between the size of the photog-raphic image and the size of the embryo.




CXLVIIl— 3-1



CLXMI— 2-1

CLXVII— 24-13


CVI — 55-37


PLATE II. Figure A. Magnification aboiit 20 d.

Drawing from a reconstruction of the region of the posterior extremity in Embryo II; length, 7 mm.; age, 26 days. The xvii (9th thoracic) to the xxix (4th sacral) spinal segments, and, at the left, the right leg and a portion of the body-wall are represented. From the region ventral to the spinal-cord unformed mesenchyme, the aorta and left cardinal vein, and the smaller blood-vessels, the intestines and urino-g'enital organs have been removed. From the spinal segments the myotomes of the left side have been removed with the exception of the last two thoracic, the first two lumbar and the fourth sacral. Half encircling the spinal-cord the scleromeres may be seen at the distal third of each spinal segment. The chorda dorsalis runs ventral to the midline of the spinal-cord. The 9th to the 12th right thoracic mj^otomes and nerves of the right side may be seen extending for a short distance behind the lateral surface of the coelom. The thoracic nerves give off sympathetic branches at the dorsal margin of the ccelom. The first four lumbar nerves give off spreading branches towards the limbbud. The 5th lumbar and 1st sacral nerves are but slightly developed. The umbilical artery curves about the posterior tip of the coelom and sends an arterial branch into the leg-bud. Below this the cardinal vein sends a branch into the limb.

Figure B. Magnification about 20 d.

Drawing from a reconstruction of the region of the posterior extremity in Embryo CLXIII; length, 9 mm.; age, about 4% weeks. The xvi (8th thoracic) to the xxx (fifth sacral) spinal segments are represented. The right leg and a portion of the right body-wall are shown. From the region ventral to the spinal-cord unformed mesenchyme, the blood-vessels, the lining membrane of the coelom, the intestine, and the urino-genital organs have been removed. The 11th and 12th thoracic myotomes only are represented on the left side. The 9th to the 12th myotomes, costal processes and spinal nerves extend ventrally in the right body-wall. Lateral and dorsal branches have arisen from the spinal nerves. The sympathetic cord receives branches from the thoracic and the first two lumbar nerves. The five lumbar and the first two sacral nerves combine to form a plexus. From this the four main nerve trunks of the posterior limb are beginning to spring. The sciatic artery and vein are represented entering the limb. At the centre of the base of the limb-bud the femur and hip-bone are beginning to be differentiated by the formation of a dense mass in the mesenchyme. The mesenchyme lying median to the limb-bud has been removed so as to expose this skeletal mass and the lumbo-sacral plexus.





PLATE III. Figure C. Magnification about 15 d.

Lateral view of Embryo CLXIll; length, 9 mm.; age, 41/0 weeks. The areas from which the skin has been removed are drawn from reconstructions, the remaining portions are drawn from excellent photographs. The myotomes hide from view most of the deeper structures of the back and body-wall. The superficial tissue of the myotomes has to a certain extent fused, so that segmentation is becoming indistinct. In the region of the arm, certain dense masses of tissue are represented in which later the musculature of the arm is differentiated (see p. 23). In the region of the forearm and hand this " premuscle " tissue has been removed so as to disclose the dense mass of mesenchyme which at the centre of the limb-bud represents the forerunner of the skeleton. The skeletal tissue is represented with sharper outlines than in nature. Ulna, radius and hand plate are shown. The musculo-spiral and median nerves may be seen reaching about to the elbow.

In the region of the leg the superficial tissue has been moved so as to disclose the border vein, the sciatic artery, the skeletal rudiment of the femur and hip-bone and the lumbo-sacral plexus. Into the formation of the latter enter the five lumbar nerves and the first two sacral.






Figure D. Magnification about 12 d.

Lateral view of Embryo CIX; length, 11 mm.; age, about 5 weeks. The areas from which the skin has been removed are drawn from wax-plate reconstructions, the remaining portions are drawn partly from photographs, partly from an embryo of corresponding age. The arches and transverse processes of the 4th to 8th cervical vertebrae have been exposed by the removal of the dorsal musculature in that region. The embryonic cartilage of which these structures are formed has been exposed by the removal of the perichondrial mesenchyme. The dorsal musculature has likewdse been removed from the 5th lumbar and first three sacral segments. In this region, however, is shown the dense mesenchyme which incloses the cartilaginous portions of the spinal column.

The heads of the first three ribs may be seen median to the transverse processes of the first three thoracic vertebrae. The third to the eleventh ribs may be seen through the lateral musculature of the body-wall.

The dorsal musculature is distinctly separated from the ventro-lateral. In the thoracic region little evidence remains of segmentation in the dorsal musculature. In the lumbar, sacral and coccygeal regions myomeric structure is still visible. The ventro-lateral musculature, which has developed from processes from the twelve thoracic myotomes, is beginning to assume a differentiation into the muscles characteristic of the thorax and abdomen.

The dorsal divisions of the spinal nerves are shown in the regions where the vertebrae are exposed. The lateral branches of the ventral divisions are shown in the thoracic region.

In the region of the anterior limb superficial tissues have been removed so as to expose the main structural features. Near the spinal column the trapezius and serratus anticus muscles are shown, the former being represented as semi-transparent. From the shoulder the greater portion of the deltoid muscle has been removed, from the upper arm the greater portion of the triceps, and from the forearm the greater portion of the extensor digitorum communis.

In the region of the leg the more superficial tissue has been removed so as to expose the skeletal, muscular, nervous and vascular apparatus.

The skeleton consists of hip-bone, femur, tibia and fibula, which are composed of embryonic pre-cartilage covered by a dense mesenchyme, and of a dense mass of tissue which represents the anlage of the ankle and foot.

The five lumbar and the first three sacral nerves enter into the formation of the lumbo-sacral plexus. From this arise the femoral nerve, which enters a mass of tissue that represents the extensor muscles of the thigh; the peroneal nerve, which gives off gluteal branches to the gluteal muscle mass, a posterior cutaneous branch, branches to the extensor musculature of the foot, and a peroneal branch, which extends a short distance along the fibula. The peroneal musculature has not yet become differentiated from the mesenchyme. At the posterior extremity of the plexus the pudic nerve may be seen.

The border vein empties into the femoral and sciatic veins. The sciatic artery is shown terminating in the extensor musculature of the foot.






Figure E. Magnification about 15 d.

Drawing from a reconstruction of the regions of the arm, leg and bodywall of Embryo CIX; length, 11 mm.; age, about 5 weeks. In the arm region the cervico-brachial plexus, and the nerves and muscles of the arm and hand are exposed (see text, page 27); in the region of the body-wall the ribs, the spinal nerves, and the thoracic musculature (see text, page 26); ' and in the region of the leg the lumbo-sacral plexus and the main nerves of the limb, the anlage of the limb musculature, the skeletal rudiment and the blood-vessels.

The five lumbar and the first three sacral nerves enter into the formation of the lumbo-sacral plexus. The twelfth thoracic nerve, however, sends a communicating branch to the ileo-hypogastric. From the first lumbar nerve arise the ileo-hypogastric nerve and a communicating branch to the lumbar plexus. From the lumbar plexus the femoral nerve may be seen passing behind the pubic process of the hip-bone into the extensor muscle mass. Just above the femoral nerve the genito-crural nerve arises from the plexus. Between the pubic and ischial processes of the hip-bone the obturator nerve passes forward into a mass of tissue which represents the adductor musculature. Below the ischial process the sciatic nerve passes into the limb, and from this the tibial nerve extends distally on the median surface of the skeleton of the leg and terminates in the flexor musculature of the foot. Along the course of the tibial nerve several muscle masses may be distinguished. These represent the perineal, obturator internus and quadratus femoris, ham-string and soleus-gastroenemus muscle masses. Posterior to the tibial nerve the pudic nerve arises. The sciatic artery passes in company with the tibial nerve, the obturator artery with the obturator nerve, and the femoral with the femoral nerve. The border, sciatic and femoral veins may be distinguished.

lA portion of the interosseal musculature has been removed near the tips of the first three ribs.





PLATE VI. Figure F. Mag-nification about 10 d.

Drawing- from a reconstruction of Embryo XXII; length, 20 mm.; age, about 7 weeks (see also Figs. G, H and I). From the arm, leg, body-wall, and the adjacent dorsal region the ectoderm and the superficial tissues have been removed. The muscles and nerves of the body-wall may be recognized readily from their likeness to adult structures. The shoulder muscles and the brachialis and triceps muscles of the upper arm are likewise plain. In the forearm the following muscles may be distinguished from above downwards: brachio-radialis, extensor carpi radialis longus et brevis, abductor pollicis longus, extensor pollicis brevis, extenso;r pollicis longus and extensor indicis proprius, extensor digitorura communis, extensor carpi ulnaris, and flexor carpi ulnaris; and in the hand the abductor minimi digiti. Branches from the circumflex and radial nerves may be seen.

In the posterior limb the sartorius and the extensor muscles (the vastus internus, rectus and vastus externus) may be seen above the femur. Between the femur and ilium the tensor vaginae femoris and the gluteus minimus, medius and maximus muscles may be seen. The biceps curves below the knee-joint. In the leg the tibialis anticus, extensor hallucis longus, extensor digitorum communis, and peroneus tertius muscles may be distinguished, and below the last the peroneal muscles. The middle and lateral cutaneous nerves lie over the thigh; the long saphenus, musculocutaneous and lateral saphenus lie exposed in the region of the leg and foot.

The perichondrium has been dissected away from the phalanges of the hand, leaving the cartilaginous cores visible. In the leg and foot the condensed mesenchyme or perichondrium surrounding the cartilages has been left intact.





PLATE VII. Figure G. Magnification about 10 d.

Drawing- from a reconstruction of Embryo XXII; length, 20 mm.; age, about 7 weeks (see also Figs. F, H and I). The left arm was not reconstructed, but has been drawn in part from the reconstruction of the right arm, in part from a photograph. In the region of the right arm the pectoralis major, biceps, coraco-brachialis, brachialis, brachio-radialis, extensor carpi radialis longus et brevis, the extensor communis digitorum and extensor carpi ulnaris; and the interossenis muscles may be seen. In the abdominal region the external oblique and rectus muscles are exposed. In the region of the posterior limb the adductor and ham-string muscles, and the tibialis anticus, the extensor pollicis longus and extensor digitorum communis muscles may be distinguished. The ventral tips of the thoracic nerves and the long saphenus nerve, and the tip of the anterior tibial nerve are shown.

The dense mesenchyme covering the cartilaginous parts of the skeleton is pictured intact.






Figure H. Magnification aboiit 10 d.

Drawing from a reconstruction of Embryo XXII; length, 20 mm.; age, about 7 weeks (see also Figs. F, G and I). The dorsal musculature has been removed. From the thoracic region all intrinsic muscles lateral to the internal intercostal muscles have been removed down to the 8th rib. The serratus anterior, however, has been left in position. The attachments of the external oblique musculature are shown. The rest of the external oblique muscle and a considerable portion of the internal oblique muscles have been removed. The thoraco-abdominal nerves are exposed. The most anterior nerve shown is the 7th cervical. The 7th cervical vertebra bears a rib-like process. The cartilaginous portions of the vertebrae and ribs of the first eight thoracic segments are represented. The ribs and vertebrae distal to this point are shown covered with a dense embryonic connective tissue.

The skeletal portions of the arm are drawn without the condensed mesenchyme or perichondrium which surrounds all the cartilages. Portions of the cartilages of the scapula, clavicle, humerus, ulnacarpus, metacarpus and phalanges are shown.

Most of the superficial muscles of the arm have been partially dissected away. Most of the deltoid, the infraspinatus and teres minor, the teres major and latissimus dorsi, the triceps and anconeus, the extensor digitorum communis and the extensor carpi ulnaris muscles have been dissected away except for their attached ends which can be readily recognized. The senatus anterior, supraspinatus brachialis, brachioradialis, extensor carpi radialis longus et brevis, supinator brevis, abductor pollicis longus, extensor pollicis brevis, extensor pollicis longus and extensor indicis muscles are left intact. The intrinsic muscles of the hand as well as the insertions there of the muscles of the forearm have been entirely cut away.

The suprascapular, circumflex and radial nerves with their main branches are shown.

In the posterior limb portions of the rectus and sartorius muscles have been removed so as to expose the chief branches of the femoral nerve; and portions of the tensor vaginae femoris, gluteus medius and gluteus maximus muscles, so as to expose the chief branches of the gluteal nerves. In the leg a portion of the extensor digitorum communis muscle has been removed so as to expose the extensor hallucis longus and the extensor digitorum brevis muscles, and the distribution of the anterior tibial nerve. Portions of the peroneal muscles have been removed so as to expose the distribution of nerves to these muscles.

In the anterior limb the cartilaginous portions of the skeleton are represented except at the joints, where some condensed tissue is pictured. In the posterior limb is shown the condensed tissue which incloses the cartilaginous portions of the skeleton.





PLATE IX. Figure I. Magnification about 12 d.

Drawing from a reconstruction of Embryo XXII; length, SO mm.; age, about 7 weeks (see also Figs. F, G and H). The thoracic, abdominal and pelvic viscera have been removed. The attachment of the diaphragm to the body-wall is shown. The intrinsic muscles and nerves of the thorax, abdomen and pelvis are shown intact, and may be readily distinguished by their relative positions.

The ventral ends of the upper four ribs and the median end of the clavicle are not shown.

In the region of the shoulder and upper arm the deltoid, biceps, brachialis, coracobrachialis and subscapular muscles are shown intact. The attached ends of the pectoral muscles may be seen. In the forearm the following muscles may be distinguished from above downwards: brachio-radialis, pronator teres, flexor carpi radialis, palmaris longus, flexor digitorum sublimis and flexor carpi ulnaris. The brachial plexus is shown together with the main nerves of the arm. Some of the interossei muscles are shown in the hand.

The brachial plexus arising- from the 5th to 8th cervical and 1st thoracic nerves is seen. The relatively large size of the nerves and plexus is at once noticed. The plexus itself forms a closely packed mass of fibers in which it is just possible to distinguish the position of the three main cords from which the principal nerves of the arm arise. The posterior cord is not visible in this figure. The suprascapular, small nerve to the subclavious, branch to the pectoral muscles, musculocutaneous, median, ulnar, and internal cutaneous nerves are seen arising from the plexus.

In the region of the posterior limb the psoas muscle is shown cut away over the lumbar plexus. The sartorius and vastus medius muscles may be seen above the femur. In the region of distribution of the obturator nerve the belly of the gracilis muscle has been removed so as to expose the adductor muscles. The bellies of the semi-membranous and semi-tendinosus muscles have been removed so as to expose the sciatic nerve, below which The long head of the biceps may be seen. In the leg the gastroenemeus, soleus, popliteus muscles, and the flexors of the toes may be distinguished. The lumbo-sacral plexus arises from the 12th thoracic to the 3d sacral spinal nerves. The inguinal nerve arises from in front of the first lumbar nerve, the genito-crural from in front of the second, and the lateral cutaneous from a point just above the region where the obturator and femoral nerves are given off. From the lumbar plexus a large nerve bundle passes into the psoas muscle. After passing Pouparts ligament the main trunk of the femoral nerve may be seen below the sartorius muscle. The long saphenus nerve may be traced to the ankle. The main branches of the obturator nerve are shown. The pudic nerve may be seen passing out between the great sacro-iliac ligament and the levator ani muscle, the posterior cutaneous nerve is given ofE on the lateral side of sacro-iliac ligament. The main branches of the tibial nerve in the leg and foot may be readily followed.








{Associate in Anatomy, the University of Chicago.)

With one Text Figure.

The coarser framework of the human spleen divides the organ into small masses of parenchyma — the lobules, each having an afferent artery near its center and the larger efferent veins at its periphery.

The finer fraraev/ork of the spleen subdivides each lobule and supports the individual spleen cells and smaller blood-vessels contained therein. The finer framework is an extension within the lobule of the coarser framework of the trabeculse and is here indicated as the intralobular framework.


Oesterlen/. writing in 18-13, mentioned, without description, a substance between the individual cells of the spleen pulp.

Atto Tigri," iji 1853, described as a constant element of structure an intercellular network giving support to the spleen cells.

Billroth/ in 1857, coufirmed the presence of this intercellular framework, and described its minute structure more in detail. From a comparative study of the vertebrata, he concluded that the framework was formed by stellate cells M'hose anastomosing processes appeared as fibers connecting the cell bodies proper with one another. Thus, according to Billroth, the cell bodies appeared as local expansions of the fibrils, each containing a definite nucleus. From the spleens of amphibia he isolated stellate cells that he asserted were the branched cells forming the intralobular framework. From the human spleen, however, he could not isolate the corresponding cells, and stated that their demonstration in situ was more difficult than in lower forms because of their relative infrequency.

'.Oesterlen, F. : Beitrage zur Physiologic des gesunclen unci kranken Orgaiiismus, Jena, 1843.

2 Tigri, A. : Schiarimenti sulla struttiira e sulla funzione clella milza, Gazz. tried, ital. feder. tosc, Firenze, 2 s., T. Ill, 1853, pp. 25-27.

3 Billroth, T. : Beitrage z%ir vergleichenden Histologic der MHz, Arch. f. Anat., Physiol., u. wissensch. Med., Berl., 1857, S. 88-108.

38 The Intralobular Framework of the Human Spleen

Henle/ in 1859, questioned the findings of Billroth and denied the existence of nuclei within expansions of the fibers. He described the intralobular framework as composed, not of anastomosing cells, but of fibrils similar to those of tendon.. These fibrils crossing one another in all directions and at varying angles were, according to Henle, direct continuations of the white fibrous tissue of the trabeculas. He further described certain circular and spiral fibrils anastomosing with one another to encircle the capillary veins.

W. Mliller/ in 1865, corroborated the findings of Henle as to the fibrillary character of the intercellular framework. He further described a finely granular intercellular ground substance within which he considered the individual fibrils to be imbedded.

Oppel," in 1891, employing precipitation methods, was able to determine with some accuracy the general distribution of very delicate intercellular fibrils within the pulp cords and Malpighian follicles of the human spleen. Such fibers he termed " Gitterfasern," but he gave no data as to their intimate structure.

Mall,' in a series of contributions, commencing in 1888, established a lobule as the unit of structure of the dog's spleen and determined that its framework is composed largely of connective tissue differing from both the white fibrous and yellow elastic forms. The component fibrils of this tissue he found to be devoid of nuclei and everywhere anastomosing with similar fibrils to form a delicate but resistant network. Unlike elastic tissue, these fibrils resisted pancreatin digestion and differed from white fibrous tissue in their extensive branching and anastomosis. To this tissue he applied the specific term " reticulum." The most delicate framework within the pulp cords he described as a distinct "variety of reticulum not resisting pancreatin digestion. The reaction of the reticulum within the Malpighian follicle he did not determine.


In studying the framework of fifteen human spleens, I have employed the so-called "destructive" methods, the removal of the spleen pulp by maceration and digestion permitting inspection of the isolated frame 4 Henle: Zeitschr. f. rationelle IfecUzin, III Reihe, Bd. VIII, S. 201-230.

5- MiiUer, W. : Veber der feineren Bau der MHz, Leipzig, 186.5.

"Oppel, A.: Ueber Gitterfasern der menscldichen Leber mid Milz, Anat. Anz., Jena, Bd. VI, 1891, S. 16.5-173.

'Mall: Anat. Anz., 1888. AbJiandl. d. K. S. Oes. d. Wiss., Bd. XVII, 1891. Johns Hopkins Hospital Reports, Vol. I. Johns Hopkins Hospital Bidletin, Nos. 90-91, 1898. ZeitscMft f. MorpJtolofjie u. Anthropologie, Bd. II, 1900.

Preston Kyes 39

work. Pancreatin digestion was used as suggested by Mall and Spalteholz. According to Mall's method, sections of fresh tissue are digested in the following solution :

Pancreatin, 5 gms.; bicarbonate of soda, 10 gms.; water, 100 ccm. The resulting specimen is washed by shaking in a volume of water and then allowed to dry on the slide. To stain the section, a few drops of the following solution are allowed to dry on the specimen:

Picric acid, 10 gms.; absolute alcohol, 33 ccm.; water, 300 ccm. The specimen is then immersed for one-half an hour in the following solution :

Acid fuchsin, 10 gms.; absolute alcohol, 33 ccm.; water, 66 ccm. Upon removal, the tissue is washed with the picric acid solution, dehydrated, cleared in xylol and mounted in balsam.

The method of digestion suggested by Spalteholz has been of especial service because of the support given to the delicate framework by the glass slide and because of the accuracy of the control. According to this method the tissue to be digested is fixed in a one per cent solution of mercuric chlorid in thirty-three per cent alcohol for twenty-four hours. Each succeeding twenty-four hours the tissue is transferred to fresh alcohol increased ten per cent in strength, until absolute alcohol is reached. The tissue is imbedded in paraffin and cut in serial sections from 6f to 20 microns thick. The sections to be digested are fixed to the slide by the water method and the process continued as follows:

Eemove the paraffin with xylol; wash in absolute alcohol; immerse in benzine at 38° C. for 24-36 hours; wash in absolute alcohol followed by 95 per cent alcohol; wash in water five minutes; digest in a solution of pancreatin at 38° C. for 12-48 hours; wash in water 10 minutes; stain with iron hsematoxyliu; mount in balsam. By substituting acetic alcohol ' for the graded alcohols, the time required for fixing may be reduced from several days to a few hours. The pancreatin solution was employed as follows:

Pancreatin ferment (Griibler), 1 part; sodium bicarbonate,

20 parts; thymol, 10 parts; distilled water, 10,000 parts.

I^he digestion of hardened tissue in bulk was employed as follows:

Small pieces of tissue were hardened 4-12 hours in acetic alcohol and

dehydrated in absolute alcohol. They Avere then extracted with ether

for 10-14 days. The tissue was then digested in an aqueous solution

sCarnoy: La Cellule, T. Ill, 1886.

40 The Intralobular Framework of the Human Spleen

of pancreatin and washed in water. The resulting specimens were in some cases stained, imbedded and sectioned; in others immersed in glycerin and studied with a low-power stereoscopic microscope. The thick sections thus obtained afforded most instructive pictures in three dimensions.

Controls of the digested specimens were stained with orcein, Weigert's elastic tissue stain, hasmatoxylin and eosin, and the connective tissue stains of Mallory and Van Gieson. In searching for elastic fibers within the lobule the so-called differential stains of Weigert, Mallory and Unna-Tanzer were employed.

Digested specimens were stained by immersing them in a five per cent solution of the ammonio-sulphate of iron for 12-18 hours, and subsequently removing them to a five per cent aqueous solution of hsematoxylin for four hours. By difi!erentiating such specimens in a one per cent solution of acetic acid a sharp and intense black stain was obtained. Weigert's elastic tissue stain was also used to stain digested specimens.

Dilute aqueous solutions of potassium hydrate, acetic and hydrochloric acids were employed in testing and differentiating the connective tissues of the framework.


By macerating and washing fresh human spleen tissue it is possible to remove the parenchyma cells and expose a framework of bloodvessels and anastomosing fibers that outlines the general form of the specimen in all dimensions. This is the coarser framework of the spleen formed by the trabeculse and is of imiform density throughout the organ. Its meshes, incompletely marked off by the surrounding fibers, average 20 microns in diameter and are the compartments occupied by lobules. In a specimen thus prepared each compartment appears as a vacuole, its outline alone being indicated.

If, however, spleen tissue be hardened in alcohol, thoroughly extracted with ether, and the parenchyma entirely removed by pancreatin digestion without mechanical injury, there is preserved in addition to the coarser framework a delicate network of fibrils within each individual compartment — the intralobular framework. (Fig. 1, C.)

The delicate fibrils composing the intralobular network vary from 1 to 5 microns in diameter. They branch and anastomose in all directions to form a network with meshes from 16 to 40 microns in diameter. The fibrils are directly continuous with those of the coarser interlobular framework at the periphery of the lobule

Preston Kyes


and with the sheaths of the- blood-vessels within the lobule. The network is devoid of nuclei and the picture is that of a continuous system of branching and anastomosing threads of fairly uniform caliber. The extent of an individual fibril canuc^t be determined.

Fig. 1.— Congested human spleen ; digested with pancreatin ; stained with iron h?ematoxylin ; Zeiss, Obj. AA, Oc. 2.

A. Capsule.

B. Trabeculae of coarser framework.

C. Intralobular framework.

D. Intralobular capillary veins [Billroth].

E. Malpighian follicle with afferent artery.

The network extends throughout the entire lobule between the capillary veins and in a modified form within the Malpighian follicles. Thus the arrangement is such as to outline in the digested specimens all the structures appreciable in the undigested specimens. The general distribution of the network throughout the lobule is interrupted by irregularly, circular channels averaging 0.18 mm. in diameter. These channels freely communicate with one another, and in thin specimens appear as circular and oval lacunae surrounded by the framework of the pulp cords. They represent the lumina of the intralobular capillary veins first described by Billroth. (Fig. 1, D.)

The arrangement of the fibrils immediately surrounding the capillary veins is so modified as to form a definite framework limiting the venous spaces. Continuing from the general network of the pulp cords

42 The Intralobular Framework of the Human Spleen

the fibrils encircle the venules and anastomose with one another to form a series of circular and spiral rings completely surrounding the Imnen. The}' are an integral part of the framework of the pulp cords, modified only as to their distribution. Encircling and limiting the venous spaces the spirals are not compactly apposed to one another, but separated by intervening spaces of varying width. They are identical with the fibrils first described by Henle as white fibrous tissue and by more recent writers as elastic fibers. The nature of the fibril per se will be discussed below.

In fortunate preparations the intralobular framework may be seen to extend throughout the Malpigliian follicle and become continuous with the coats of the afferent artery. (Fig. 1, E.) The fibrils are much more delicate and fewer in number than those of the pulp cords. The meshes are larger and the network is uninterrupted by the spaces representing the capillary veins. There is no membrane or condensation of the framework at the periphery of the follicle to mark it off from the surrounding portion of the lobule, the only transition being from the coarser to the more delicate network.

In all their reactions the component fibrils correspond to reticulum as described by Mall. They differ from elastic fibrils in that they are not digested with pancreatin ferment and are resistant to weak acids and alkalies. Unlike white fibrils, they continually branch and anastomose. Their reaction with pancreatin is constant, and in specimens subjected to the enzyme for forty-eight hours the framework remains intact where sufficiently protected from mechanical injury. The fibrils within the Malpighian follicles, because of their extreme delicacy, are easily broken away in the process of washing, and in a majority of specimens this portion of the framework is wanting. In fortunate preparations, however, this framework is present, intact, after the continued action of the enzyme.

The staining reaction of these fibrils is intermediate between that of elastic and white fibrous tissue. By prolonging the time of staining or by heating, reticulum fibrils may be tinted and in cases somewhat deeply stained by the so-called specific elastic tissue stains of Weigert, Mallory and Unna-Tanzer. Sections of human spleen from which all elastic tissue has been removed by digesting forty-eight hours in pancreatin, may be tinted a deep purple by staining two hours in Weigert's elastic tissue stain. By continuing the staining for three hours at 38° C. the intensity of the color is much increased. The reaction is not the same as that with elastic fibrils, the intense black color never being attained with reticulum as with elastic tissue. Likewise with the orcein

Preston Kyes 43

method, the fibrils may be stained brown and with Mallory's stain a blue-black. I have not been able to obtain similar reactions with the white fibers of tendon.

Such staining reactions would seem to be responsible for the continued descriptions of elastic fibrils within the pulp cords, the walls of the capillary veins and the j\Ialpighian follicles. Fibers within all of these structures may be brought into view by overstaining with the socalled elastic tissue stains. The staining reaction of such fibers, however, is not that typical of the elastic fibers seen within the trabecule and the arterial walls, and unlike elastic fibers, they resist pancreatin digestion. I quite agree with Hohl' that the fibrils within the walls of the capillary veins of the human spleen described by v. Ebner "" as elastic tissue cannot be such, since they resist pancreatin digestion. In addition their staining reactions are those of reticulum found elsewhere.


1. Within the lobule of the human spleen there is a delicate network of fibrils continuous throughout the pulp cords and the Malpighian follicles.

2. The fibrils of this entire network are reticulum in the sense of Mall.

3. The fibrils encircling the capillary veins are an integral part of this reticulum network and are not elastic tissue.

4. The so-called specific elastic tissue stains yield a positive reaction with reticulum as well as with elastic fibers.

SHohl, E. : A7iat. Am., Bd. XVII. i»v. Ebner: Anat. Anz., Bd. XV.




From the Anatomical Laboratory of the University of Jlichigan.

Our present conception of the structure of neurogiiar tissue is based in the main on results obtained by the employment of two fundamentally different methods, each of which is regarded by its supporters as a differential stain for neuroglia. We refer here to the chromesilver method of Golgi, for many years the only method at our disposal by means of which the structural elements of this tissue could be brought to light. To this method we are indebted for the results obtained by Golgi, v. Lenhossek, v. Kolliker, Ramon y Cajal, Retzius, Sala y Pons, Van Gehuchten, Eurich, Reinke and others in their investigations of the structure and histogenesis of the neuroglia. The other method was the one fully described by Weigert in 1895 in his large monograph on the structure of neurogiiar tissue, giving the results of seven years' labor in this field. Almost simultaneously appeared Mallory's publication giving an analogous method. In the Weigert and Mallory methods, the staining is the result of a chemical differentiation of the neuroglia fibers. Their results have been corroborated by Pollack, Ivrause and Aguerre working with normal tissues and by Taylor, Storch and Bonome in their study of pathological tissue and new growths. Quite recently Benda has published a differential stain for neuroglia, which seems destined to become very useful.

All recent writers on neurogiiar tissue have called attention to the apparently contradictory results obtained by those observers working with the chrome-silver method as compared with the recorded observations of investigators who have used the more modern differential stains, and a glance at the more recent literature is sufficient to convince one that a classification of the current views of the structure of neurogiiar tissue may with propriety be based on the methods used in the investigation of the tissue. It is, however, not our purpose at the present time to extend this controversy, and a repetition of what has been previously stated in several of the discussions of neuroglia literature seems uncalled for; it Avill therefore be entered upon only to the extent necessary to present our own observations as clearly and succinctly as possible.

46 Studies on the Neuroglia

As is now very generally known, the chrome-silver method shows the neurogliar tissue to consist of cellular elements possessing a varying number of tibrillar processes. These structural elements have been designated by v. Lenhossek by the very appropriate name of astrocytes, and are subdivided into (a) astrocytes with long processes, found in the white and grey matter, and (b) astrocytes with short processes, found only in the grey matter. In these few words we have endeavored to reflect, as well as possible in so short a space, the views of the majority of the early observers who have used the chrome-silver method in the study of neuroglia. V. Kolliker, while agreeing in the main with the above statement of the structure of the neuroglia, describes the fullydeveloped astrocyte, which he terms a Golgi-cell, as consisting of two portions — a cell-body containing the nucleus which is intimately associated with a cell-plate, from which the cell processes arise. He suggests the hypothesis that " a Golgi-cell with a portion of its protoplasm develops a cell-plate from which the cell processes arise; this plate originally and as long as the processes possess the power of growth is intimately connected with the nucleated portion of the Golgi-cell; in many instances, however, the cell-plate attains a different consistency and perhaps also a different constitution and, under certain conditions, may sever its connection with the nucleated portion of the Golgi-cell." Andriezen, who has used the chrome-silver method in studying the neurogliar tissue of the brain cortex, recognizes two varieties of neuroglia cells. One of these, which he has designated as the neuroglia fiber cells, corresponds in the main with the astrocytes with long processes described by other writers. It should, however, be stated that this observer was able to make out in certain of his preparations that not all neuroglia fibers are processes of cells, but that many of them "pass right through the cell body." The other variety of neuroglia cell is 'described by him under the name of protoplasmic glia cell, and has stout, coarse and very shaggy processes, which vary very greatly in size. These latter cells are said to be of mesoblastic origin. Eeinke, who, in his study of neuroglia tissue, has made use of a modified chrome-silver method (after obtaining a chrome-silver precipitate, he dehydrated and then imbedded his tissue in paraffin, fixed the sections with albumin fixative and then stained them with Heidenhain's hematoxylin and counterstained them in eosin), has obtained results which deserve especial mention. His conclusions are " that the neurogliar tissue of the white substance of the human cord consists of (1) cells and (2) fibrils. The cells possess numerous processes, some of which are branched and which run in part transversely and in part obliquely; the majority of

G. Carl Huber 47

them, however, run vertically, that is, parallel to the nerve-fibers. These processes are well stained by the chrome-silver method. The fibrils differ morphologically, physically and chemically from the cellprocesses. They are, however, developed from the protoplasm of the cells and lie partly in and partly on the protoplasm and have a direction which in the main is opposite to that of the cell processes. For the most part these fibrils, the length of which is unknown, are emancipated from the cell-bodies. The fibrils differ in thickness and probably do not anastomose. These are the fibrils which are so clearly brought out by the Weigert method."

Erik Miiller's " Studies on Neuroglia " may also be mentioned in this connection. His observations were made on tissues taken from amphioxus, myxine, acanthias, and from teleosts; they were fixed by the Golgi method and then stained after Heidenhain's iron-lack-hematoxylin. In all of these forms he finds the neuroglia made up of cells and fibers, which are, however, in such relation to each other that all the fibers may be regarded as processes of cells.

As may be seen from the above brief summary of neuroglia literature giving accounts of observations made with the chrome-silver method, all observers who have' used this method, even when such method has been subjected to special modifications, have reached the conclusion that the neuroglia is composed of cellular elements and cell processes— neuroglia-cells and neuroglia-fibers, the latter being the processes of the former. It is true that Andriezen found certain astrocytes in which the neuroglia fibers passed through the cell-body, and that V. Kolliker regards himself justified in describing a cell-plate with cellprocesses, which may under certain conditions become separated from the nucleated portion of the neuroglia cell, and that Reinke believes that he has harmonized the conflicting views by his discovery of two varieties of neuroglia fibers, the one being processes of neuroglia cells and the other developed from the protoplasm and in part at least emancipated from such protoplasm; yet a careful study of the account and figures given by Andriezen and v. Kolliker does not reveal sufficient evidence to indicate that these observers regard the neuroglia fibers as other than processes of the neuroglia cells, and Eeinke's statement will need further confirmation with methods other than a chrome-silver precipitate before they can be accepted as established. At this date it does not seem necessary to enter into a consideration of the chromesilver method as such, as its advantages and disadvantages have been the subjects of frequent consideration and are now very generally known; suffice it to say that we agree with Taylor when he states that

48 Studies on the Neuroglia

"A method which colors by precipitation is a priori incapable of giving US the information which we require ; it must of necessity be confusing in its pictures of structural detail."

We may now turn our attention to the observations of investigators who have employed a differential chemical stain in their study of neuroglia. Weigert, whose comprehensive work gave a new impetus to the study of neuroglia, summarizes his results in the following statements: " The neuroglia fibers, which have been hitherto regarded as processes of Deiters' cells, differ chemically from the protoplasm of these cells. This difference in the chemical constitution of the ' cell-processes ' is apparent 'in the immediate vicinity of the cell nucleus, as well as at some distance from it. The majority of the so-called cell processes are not cell processes since two such apparent processes form a continuous fiber, which is in no way interrupted by the cell body, as would be the case were they true processes arising individually from the cell body. In a word, there is no question here of cell processes or cell extensions, but of fibers which are fully differentiated from the protoplasm. Weigert describes two types of nuclei of neuroglia cells — large, vesicular nuclei the chromatin of which has a granular appearance, and smaller ones in which the chromatin forms a deeply-staining, homogeneous mass, with transition forms between the two varieties. The large vesicular nuclei often show a definite relation to the neuroglia fibers, in that they form centres, over which and around which the neuroglia fibers pass, simulating in a most characteristic manner the astrocytes of other investigators. Numerous free neuroglia cell nuclei, notably of the smaller, deeply-staining variety, which bear no special relation to the neuroglia fibers, are also found,

Mallory, working with his own method, obtained results which were practically identical with those obtained by Weigert. Although these 'two investigators worked independently, their results were published almost simultaneously. Pollack in a short note confirms Weigert's statements and calls attention to the importance of his differential neuroglia stain and the results obtained. Aguerre, after discussing the recent neuroglia literature and calling attention to the superiority of Weigerfs neuroglia stain and corroborating his observations, discusses at some length the shape and structure of the neuroglia cell nuclei as found in the human spinal cord, stating that these nuclei vary much in shape and size and are often polymorphous. He classifies the neuroglia cell nuclei according to their size as follows: (1) small nuclei, 3// to 4/^, to which variety the small deeply-stained nuclei belong; (2) medium-sized nuclei, G/x to S/i, the smaller nuclei of the

G. Carl Huber 49

vesicular variety; (3) large nuclei of the vesicular variety, often polymorphous and measuring as high as 14^^. Krause and Aguerre, in another communication, describe at some length the distribution of the neuroglia tissue in the human spinal cord. Attention should also be drawn to the fact that these two observers have been able to stain the neuroglia in apes and half-apes, after having slightly modified the Weigert method. Krause has given a full account of the neuroglia in the spinal cord of the ape, in which he describes small, deeply-staining nuclei of neuroglia cells and larger often polymorphous, vesicular nuclei, having only a small amount of chromatin. He finds the majority of the neuroglia fibers fully difi'erentiated and many of them relatively thin. Enrich in his last publication places himself in accord with Weigert's view on the structure of the neuroglia and advances theoretical reasons for accepting the same. It would lead beyond the limits of this paper to do more than mention the observations of Taylor, who worked with the Mallory method, and Storch and Bonome, who used the Weigert method in their study of glioma and gliosis and of the behavior of the neuroglia in certain pathological conditions of the central nervous system of man. As pertains to the structure of the fully-developed neuroglia tissue, their published results confirm in the main the views expressed by Weigert and Mallory and others who have used these methods. Yamagiwa has recently described a new stain for neuroglia which consists of a modification of Strobe's differential axis-cylinder stain. As a result of observations made with this method, he is led to conclude that the neuroglia fibers are differentiated intercellular structures, which are, however, not entirely or not in all instances completely separated from the neuroglia cells. Mention may also be made of a somewhat crude method described by Whitwell, by means of which he aims to differentiate the neuroglia fibers. Sections from hardened tissues are treated for a few seconds with a hot concentrated solution of caustic potash, are then rinsed in water and allowed to desiccate on the slide. When dry, the sections are covered with a cover glass. In such preparations examined with a moderate magnification, but with good illumination, a dense feltwork of fibrils may be seen. Whitwell regards these fibrils as neuroglia fibers and states that " they show no evidence of being direct processes of cells and do not appear to branch and form a complete basket network for each element in the nervous tissues, including the blood-vessels." Benda has recently described a differential neuroglia stain which will be given fuller consideration presently and will therefore receive no further mention at this time. From the foregoing account it may be seen that those

50 Studies on the Neuroglia

observers who have used differential neuroglia stains in their study of this tissue agree in regarding the neuroglia fibers, not as cell processes, since they are readily differentiated from the protoplasm of neuroglia cells, from which they differ in chemical constitution and physical properties, as is shown by these staining methods, but as an intercellular substance emancipated from the protoplasm of the neuroglia cells.

One of the disadvantages of both the Weigert and Mallory neuroglia stains is the fact that these stains can be used only on human tissue; furthermore, owing to the fact that the neuroglia fibers break down very readily, as was pointed out by Virchow many years ago, it is necessary to have at one's disposal very fresh tissue in order to obtain satisfactory staining of the neuroglia. Krause and Aguerr^, as has been previously stated, were able by careful manipulation of the Weigert method to obtain successful differential staining of the neuroglia in apes and half-apes; this, however, is the only instance, so far as I have been able to ascertain, in which a successful differential staining of the neuroglia in vertebrates other than man has been obtained. Weigert and Mallory both admit that their neuroglia staining methods are useful only on fresh human tissue. The difficulty of obtaining very fresh human tissue no doubt accounts for the fact that we have so few confirmatory observations of the views of Weigert and Mallory concerning the structure of the neuroglia. The fact that it is often difficult to obtain fresh human tissue and the further fact that these methods cannot be used to stain the neuroglia of animals no doubt explains in part the apparent hesitancy to accept their results in place of the results obtained by the chrome-silver method, by means of which, as is well known, neuroglia tissue may be stained in the central nervous system of all vertebrates, whether embryonic or adult tissue is used. The reason why the Weigert and Mallory stains are selective for human neuroglia only is difficult to explain and must be ascribed to some slight difference in the chemical composition of the neuroglia fibers of man and other vertebrates, in which case we may look upon these staining methods as so highly differential as to be applicable to the staining of human neuroglia only. In the hope that by modifying these methods a procedure might be found by means of which the neuroglia of animals might be stained, I spent much time in experimentation. All of my endeavors, however, proved fruitless so long as I confined my attention to the Weigert and Mallory methods. Much more satisfactory results were, however, obtained after the writer became familiar with the Benda differential neuroglia stain, published in September of last year. Benda was led to continue his endeavors to discover a satisfactory stain for

G. Carl Huber 51

neuroglial- tissue, partially interrupted by the appearance of Weigert's large monograph, because the Weigert method did not seem to possess the certainty ascribed to it by its discoverer. I am not aware that Benda is familiar with the fact that his method may be used as a differential staining method for the neuroglia of animals. I find, however, no reference to this fact in his account of his method. This fact seems to me, however, of sufficient importance to warrant my giving his method somewhat in detail, since it does away with one of the obstacles to the use of the Weigert or Mallory method— namely, the necessity of using fresh human tissue in order to study the neuroglia with a differential stain.

The method used by me in my study of the neuroglia of animals is essentially the same as the first of the three methods given by Benda. I have not been successful in staining the neuroglia of animals by the other methods given by him.

The method as used by me is as follows : '

1. The tissues, which should be in small pieces, not more than 0.5 cm. in thickness, are fixed and hardened for two to four days in a 4^ or 10^ solution of formaldehyde (10 parts or 25 parts respectively of formalin in 100 parts of water). A large quantity of the solution is used and, during the hardening process, the tissues rest on several layers of filter paper placed in the bottom of the dish.

3. The tissues are then placed for two to four days in Weigert's chrom-alum mordant, used in his neuroglia stain, the solution being kept in the warm oven at 38° C. during this step.

3. Wash in flowing water for 24 hours.

4. Place tissues for two to four days in a 0.5;^ aqueous solution of chromic acid.

5. Wash for 24 hours in flowing water.

6. Dehydrate in graded alcohol. It is necessary to dehydrate the tissues very thoroughly.

7. Imbed in parafiin. It is necessary that this procedure be very carefully carried out. After dehydration the tissues are placed in xylol for 24 hours, renewing the xylol several times; then place them for 12 hours in toluol and again 12 hours in benzole. Eenew the benzole and add an equal quantity of melted soft paraffin and place in the warm oven. At the end of 24 hours the mixture of benzole and paraffin is replaced by soft paraffin and in three to four hours by hard paraffin (58° C. melting point, Grlibler); after three hours' stay in this, they may be imbedded.

52 Studies on the Neuroglia

8. Cut sections and fix to slide or cover glass with albumin fixative. To facilitate the application of this step, I may say that sections from paraffin-imbedded tissues of the central nervous system are most readily made by placing the knife at an angle of about 30° and placing a layer of distilled water on the knife, renewing it constantly as necessity requires. I have found no difficulty in cutting 3// to 5^« sections of the spinal cord or even of the medulla of animals ordinarily used in the laboratories. The sections are then caught on a small brush and floated on distilled water contained in a small evaporating dish. When 40 to 50 sections have been cut and floated on the distilled water, the evaporating dish is placed over a flame and the water is gently heated until the sections flatten out, care being taken not to melt the paraffin. The sections are then caught on cover glasses smeared with a thin layer of albumin fixative and placed for 24 hours in the warm oven.

9. Eemove paraffin and bring sections through alcohol into distilled water.

10. The sections are now placed for 24 hours in a mordant consisting either of a 4^ solution of ferric alum or of a solution of liquor f erri tersulphatis, made by adding one part of this to two parts of distilled water.

11. Sections are rinsed in two tap waters and one distilled water and placed for 24 hours in a solution of sodium sulphalizarate, made by adding to distilled water a sufficient quantity of a saturated solution of sodium sulphalizarate in 70^ alcohol to give the distilled water a sulphur-yellow color.

12. Einse the sections in distilled water and dry between filter papers.

13. Sections are now stained for 15 minutes or longer in a 0.1;^ solution of toluidin blue, which should be heated, after the sections are in the stain, until the solution steams. Allow the stain to cool and rinse sections in distilled water.

The sections are next rinsed in a slightly-acidulated solution. For this purpose Benda recommends primarily a 1^ aqueous solution of glacial acetic acid, in which the sections remain for five to ten seconds and are then dried between filter papers, hastily washed in absolute alcohol and placed in creosote. This step was found necessary in staining the neuroglia of the frog, tortoise and dove. Benda further recommends the use of acidulated alcohol, made by me by adding six drops of hydrochloric acid to 100 ccm. of 70fo alcohol. This was found more useful in differentiating the neuroglia of mammalia (dog, cat, rabbit), and experience showed that the proper degree of washing was usually

G. Carl Huber 53

attained by dipping the sections into this solution as many times as there were micra in the thickness of the section. Tne further procedure is as above.

15. The sections are differentiated in creosote. Benda states that the sections are properly differentiated after they have remained in the creosote about ten minutes. In my work, however, the time varied from about ten minutes to several hours. Sections washed in acidulated alcohol are usually differentiated in about ten minutes ; sections washed in the dilute acetic acid solution require a much longer time, varying from one to several hours. It is therefore necessary at all times to control the differentiation under the microscope.

16. After differentiation in the creosote the sections are dried between filter papers, washed in several xylols and mounted in xylolbalsam.

To the naked eye, preparations well differentiated should have a bluish-red or brownish-red color, large masses of neuroglia showing as blue areas. Under the microscope, the neuroglia fibers appear stained deeply blue and stand out very distinctly. The chromatin of the neuroglia cell nuclei presents a purplish-blue color; the remainder of the nucleus is brownish-red and the protoplasm is of the same color, but of a lighter hue. The myelin and neuraxes of the nerve fibers are of a brick-red or brownish-red color, the neuraxes staining much more deeply than the myelin. The nerve cells are of a brownish-red color, the chromophile substance staining more deeply, and the nucleoli are a deep purplish-blue. The fibrous connective tissue stains a pink-red, its nuclei a purplish-blue. The red-blood cells are of a dark greenishblue. The colors here given are those seen in a well-differentiated preparation, especially after washing in acidulated alcohol (step 14). In case the acetic acid wash is used, the myelin and neuraxes retain some of the blue color, giving them a reddish-purple or even a bluish tinge, the axis-cylinders staining more deeply; even in such preparations, however, the neuroglia fibers may be clearly made out by reason of their deep blue color. It is necessary to add that it is not always possible to obtain a clear differentiation, as the method while often reliable, is not without its whims. It is my custom to fix as many sections to one cover glass as I can, and nearly always some of the sections, if not all, will show the desired result. In over-differentiated preparations, the neuroglia fibers have a brownish-red color, but may usually be clearly seen. Such preparations may, after removal of the creosote and xylol, be brought into water and then stained again in toluidin blue, the further treatment being as above described.

54 Studies on the Neuroglia

For this investigation material was obtained from the following vertebrates :

Mammalia — Dog, cat, rabbit.

Birds — Dove.

Eeptilia — Tortoise (Emys meleagris).

Amphibia — Frog (Eana Catesbiana and Kana halecina).

It is my purpose at this time to give a brief descriptive statement of observations made on the neuroglia of the spinal cord of the abovementioned vertebrates, differentially stained after Benda's method; I shall deal only with the structure of the neuroglia tissue of adult animals and not with its origin nor its distribution. A much more extended treatment of this subject is contemplated and many of the statements here made will then be substantiated by figures. This will appear on the completion of work now in progress.

Dog. In the dog, the neuroglia of the spinal cord consists of neuroglia cells and neuroglia fibers. With the method used, the nuclei of the neuroglia cells stain a purplish-blue color the protoplasm a brownish-red and the neuroglia fibers a deep blue. The nuclei of the neuroglia cells vary greatly in shape and structure, but may be described under two general types with transition forms. The majority of the neuroglia cell nuclei are vesicular with the chromatin arranged in fine granules. The nuclei belonging to this type vary greatly in shape and size. In the smaller varieties, which are generally of round or oval shape, the chromatin is in the form of numerous small granules; in the larger varieties, which are round, oval, or polymorphous, the chromatin is found in the form of one or several granules, the nucleus being otherwise homogeneous in appearance. The nuclei of the other type, which are not numerous, stain diffusely and usually quite deeply and are usually of round or oval shape and generally quite small. The Benda method has the advantage of staining the protoplasm of the neuroglia cells. The amount of protoplasm seen in connection with the dift'erent neuroglia nuclei varies greatly. In connection with the small vesicular nuclei with numerous chromatin granules, it is often difficult to make out any protoplasm, many of them appearing as free nuclei; now and then, however, a thin layer of protoplasm is made out, either surrounding the whole nucleus or appearing at only one side of it. The large vesicular nuclei with one or several larger chromatin granules are usually associated with larger masses of protoplasm, in which case distinct neuroglia cells are distinguished. In cross sections of the spinal cord, such cells present a variety of appearances, their shape depending more or less on the space occupied; they may be triangular or quadran

G. Carl Huber 55

gular or somewhat spindle-shaped, with a varying number of processes (usually not more than four or five), which may be traced for short distances between the nerve fibers; such processes are, however, not always made out and when present give the cell a very characteristic appearance. These cells are easily recognized in longitudinal sections of the spinal cord by reason of the structure of their nuclei. The cell protoplasm is often clearly brought out, the cells presenting a rectangular or irregularly oval shape with now and then a few short processes. The small, round or oval deeply-staining nuclei are often associated with a small amount of protoplasm, which usually stains somewhat deeply, often making it difficult to distinguish between protoplasm and nucleus.

The neuroglia fibers stain deeply blue. They vary somewhat in size, but the majority are relatively fine and only here and there does one find coarser fibers. The relation of the neuroglia fibers to the neuroglia cells or free nuclei is generally easily ascertained, in both cross and longitudinal sections of the cord. In the majority of instances, the neuroglia fibers are seen passing over or under the neuroglia cells or nuclei and appear independent of them. Other fibers are seen, however, in close proximity to cells and are seen to lie against them. The large neuroglia cells with protoplasmic branches are particularly interesting in this connection. In such cells it is often possible to trace one or several neuroglia fibers along the side of a protoplasmic branch to the cell body and then either directly across the cell and away from it, or along the side of some other protoplasmic branch and then away from the cell. Three, four or more neuroglia fibers may thus be traced over or under or along the borders of one of these branched neuroglia cells. Usually also numerous small blue dots, cross sections of neuroglia fibers, are seen in close proximity to such cells and now and then in the peripheral portion of their protoplasm; this latter fact must be interpreted as showing that some of the neuroglia fibers pass through the protoplasm of the neuroglia cells. Longitudinal sections of the cord give a better idea of the course of the neuroglia fibers than can be gained from cross sections. In longitudinal sections it will be seen that the neuroglia fibers run parallel to the nerve fibers, at right angles to them and obliquely across them. The relation of the neuroglia fibers to the deeply-staining cells above mentioned is often more difficult to make out, since the cell protoplasm of such cells and the neuroglia fibers now and then stain more nearly the same color than is the case with other cells. In such cells, the neuroglia fibers often appear as processes of the cells, especially when a cross section is studied

56 Studies on the Neuroglia

and when a section is not completely differentiated. In well-differentiated sections and more easily in longitudinal sections, it may usually be made out very clearly that the neuroglia fibers pass over or under or in close proximity to such cells and are not interrupted by them.

Cat. — The neuroglia of the spinal cord of the cat presents essentially the same appearances as those described for the dog. Nearly all of the neuroglia cell nuclei are of the vesicular variety with very little chromatin. In many of the cells, very little protoplasm can be made out, the nuclei appearing as free nuclei. In others, the protoplasm, staining a brownish red color, is readily made out, such cells often appearing distinctly branched, with three, four or five protoplasmic branches, varying in thickness and length and recognized between the cross-cut nerve fibers. The neuroglia fibers of the spinal cord of the cat are somewhat coarser than those found in the dog. They are clearly differentiated and may be traced over or under or around the neuroglia cell nuclei or neuroglia cells. The statements made concerning the relation of the neuroglia cells and nuclei and neuroglia fibers, as seen in the dog, are equally applicable for the cat and need, therefore, no further repetition.

Rabhit. — The neurogliar tissue of the spinal cord of the rabbit is not so easily stained differentially as that of the dog and cat. This is due to the fact that the protoplasm of many of the neuroglia cells shows a greater affinity for the toluidin blue than seems to be the case in the dog and cat and, as a consequence, one often finds neuroglia cells with protoplasm and nucleus staining a purplish color, sometimes of a lighter and sometimes of a darker shade. A longer differentiation in the creosote bleaches not only such cells but also to some extent the neuroglia fibers. The right degree of differentiation is therefore somewhat difficult to obtain. The majority of the nuclei of the neuroglia cells are of the vesicular type, varying greatly in size and shape and in the character and amount of chromatin contained. This may be present in the form of numerous fine granules or as one or several larger granules. Small nuclei, staining deeply, are found, but are not numerous. Many of the nuclei appear as free nuclei and show no or very little protoplasm surrounding them. The large vesicular nuclei, with one or several granules, are generally found in masses of protoplasm which are readily made out. Such cells are usually branched and when stained are purplish-blue in color; the protoplasmic branches can be very readily traced between the nerve fibers. The neuroglia fibers of the rabbit are relatively fine and stain a deep blue color and, in the great majority of cases, it can be readily seen that the fibers are independent of the nu

G. Carl Huber 57

clei and protoplasm of the neuroglia cells. In case of the branched neuroglia cells, when the protoplasm is stained a purplish-blue, it is now and then difficult and in certain cells quite impossible, in cross sections of the cord, to differentiate between neuroglia fibers and protoplasmic branches of neuroglia cells. It is often possible to trace with the utmost clearness a neuroglia fiber along the side of a protoplasmic branch of a neuroglia cell, along the side of or over the cell and by the side of some other protoplasmic branch and away from the cell. At other times, however, when a neuroglia fiber appears cut near the cell body of a neuroglia cell or near one of its protoplasmic branches, it appears as if the neuroglia fiber terminated in the cell. In longitudinal sections of the spinal cord of the rabbit, the relation of the neuroglia fibers to the cells under discussion is more readily made out. In such sections, the neuroglia fibers can be readily traced over, under, and around the neuroglia cells, even though at times the color of the neuroglia fibers is similar to that of the protoplasm of the cells.

Dove. — I have had more difficulty in staining the neuroglia of the spinal cord of birds than was experienced with the other vertebrates studied. This is due to the fact that with the method used the neuroglia fibers seem to bleach out at about the same time as the neuroglia cells and nerve fibers. When well stained, the color of the neuroglia fibers is a light blue and, even in the most successful preparations, they do not stand out as clearly as in the mammalia studied. In cross sections of the cord, the great majority of the neuroglia cells of the white matter appear as branched cells with relatively large vesicular nuclei, containing numerous chromatin granules. The protoplasm of such cells often stains a reddish-blue or purplish-blue color. Here and there in the white matter and more generally in the grey matter, free neuroglia cell nuclei are seen of vesicular structure and containing numerous chromatin granules, or similar nuclei surrounded by very little protoplasm.

The neuroglia fibers in the spinal cord of the dove are relatively fine. In longitudinal sections, it can be seen that they are independent of the cell protoplasm of the neuroglia cells; in cross sections of the cord, it is more difficult to see this, but in favorable sections, one can usually trace the neuroglia fibers over or along the borders of the neuroglia cells and gain the conviction that they are not the processes of these cells.

Tortoise. — The neurogliar tissue of the spinal cord of reptilia is quite easily stained by the Benda method, the neuroglia nuclei and cells staining a brownish-red and the neuroglia fibers a deep blue. The nuclei of

58 Studies on tlie Neuroglia

the neuroglia cells are generally vesicular and show usually only one round or oval refractive granule, which stains deeply and of a purple color. The amount of protoplasm found with these nuclei varies and oftentimes is scarcely made out. Protoplasmic branches, when present, are slender and short. Here and there are found nuclei, which stain reddish-blue with protoplasm of the same color; such cells usually present clearly-marked protoplasmic branches. The neuroglia fibers vary much in thickness, stain a deep blue and are readily differentiated from the protoplasm of the neuroglia cells and may be traced over and along the borders of the neuroglia cells, often following the protoplasmic branches when these are present.

Frog. — In the frog, the greater proportion of the nuclei of the neuroglia cells are large, round, oval, or polymorphous and vesicular in structure. They are often stained a purplish-blue color, in which case they present a homogeneous appearance; when more bleached, they show numerous small chromatin granules. Here and there, smaller nuclei, staining deeply are also found and are more clearly seen in longitudinal sections. Many free nuclei or nuclei with very little protoplasm are found. The amount of protoplasm found varies greatly with the different cells. The protoplasm usually stains a reddish-blue or purplish-blue color. Branched neuroglia cells are found in the white matter of the cord.

The neuroglia fibers of the spinal cord of the frog are relatively very large and are stained a deep blue color. The greater proportion of these fibers run at right angles to the nerve fibers and in cross sections may often be traced for relatively long distances. In cross sections, not many fibers — usually not more than three or four — are seen in relation with any one neuroglia cell or nucleus. The relation of the neuroglia fibers to free nuclei and neuroglia cells is generally very clearly made out; the neuroglia fibers being so large and of such definite course, we are enabled in both longitudinal and cross sections to differentiate between these fibers and other structures. The neuroglia fibers can usually be traced over or by the side of neuroglia cell nuclei or neuroglia cells and are in no way interrupted by the protoplasm of such cells.

Conclusions. These observations seem to warrant the following conclusions: 1. The neuroglia of the spinal cord of the dog, cat, rabbit, dove, tortoise and frog consists of neuroglia fibers and neuroglia cells. The neuroglia fibers differ chemically from the protoplasm of the neuroglia

G. Carl Hiiber 59

cells— as shown by differential staining — but this difference is not equally well marked in all the forms studied. In the animals studied, this chemical difference between the protoplasm of neuroglia cells and neuroglia fibers is most marked in the dog, cat and tortoise, less so in the rabbit and frog and least in the dove.

II. The neuroglia fibers may be regarded as intercellular structures, as they bear no constant relation to the great majority of the cell nuclei or neuroglia cells observed.

III. By reason of the fact that the protoplasm of the neuroglia cells is stained by the Benda method, this method has been helpful in showing that there are certain neuroglia cells, usually possessing protoplasmic branches, the neuroglia fibers of which are not completely separated from the protoplasm, but are in continuity with it or even pass through it. That such neuroglia fibers are not simply processes of the cells is usually clearly shown by their chemical reaction — behavior toward stains — and by the fact that such fibers may generally be traced over, under, or along the sides of such cells without suffering interruption. That such cells are normal constituents of neurogliar tissue is shown by the fact that they occur in the spinal cord of the four classes of vertebrates studied.

IV. These observations present no evidence which would go to confirm V. Kolliker's hypothesis concerning the structure of neuroglia cells — namely a nucleated cell body with differentiated cell-plate, from which arise processes, the neuroglia fibers. Cross and longitudinal sections of the spinal cord of the animals studied show no such relation of neuroglia fibers and neuroglia cells. These observations cannot be used in confirmation of Eeinke's views of the structure of the neuroglia. The branched neuroglia cells seen by me bear no resemblance to the astrocytes or astroblasts, as seen in the chrome-silver preparations with which I am familiar, nor do they resemble the figures given by Eeinke. In my own preparations, the neuroglia fibers very generally follow the course of the protoplasmic branches of the neuroglia cells.

V. The observations here presented strengthen materially the position held by Weigert and Mallory as to the structure of neuroglia tissue, as well as by others who may have used their methods or modifications thereof in the study of neuroglia, and extend their observations to cover the more important vertebrate classes.

Finally the following quotation from Pollack's article may serve to emphasize the further advantages of the method used by me: " Angesichts des Umstandes aber, dass wir des Thierexperimentes nicht entrathen konnen, da wir ja am Menschen keine Versuche mit experi

60 Studies on the Neuroglia

menteller Degeneration anstellen konnen, erscheint mir die Anwendbarkeit auf das thierische Nervensystem als das nachste Postulate dieser hochbedeutsamen Methode." This postulate, it seems to me, has to a large extent been met by the introduction of the Benda differential neuroglia stain. I may add that experimental work on cats and dogs, undertaken with a view of studying the behavior of the neuroglia under certain })athologic conditions has been begun and will form the subject of some future contribution.

In conclusion I wish to thank Mr. August Henry Eoth, student in medicine, for much valuable assistance given in the preparation of the sections on which these observations are founded.


1900. J. A. Aguerre. — Untersuchungen iiber die menschliche Neuroglia.

Archiv f. Mik. Anatom. und Entwicklungsgescli., Vol. LVI, p. 509. 1893. W. Lloyd Andriezen. — The Neuroglia Elements in the Human Brain.

Brit. Med. Journ., Vol. II, July-Dec., p. 227.

1900. C. Benda. — Erfahrimgen iiber Neurogliafarbungen und eine neue

Farbungsmethode. Neurologisches Centralblatt, Vol. XIX, p. 786.

1901. A. BONOME. — Bau und Histogenese des pathologischen Neuroglia Gewebes. Virchow's Archiv, Vol. CLXIII, p. 441.

1897. F. W. EuRiCH. — Studies on the Neuroglia. Brain, Vol. XX, p. 114.

1898. F. W. EuRiCH. — Contribution to the Comparative Anatomy of the

Neuroglia. Journal of Anatomy and Physiology, Vol. XXXII, p. 688.

1899. E. Krause. — Untersuchungen iiber die Neuroglia des Affen. Anhang

z. d. Abh. der Konigl. Akad. der Wissenschaften zu Berlin. 1899.

1900. K. Krause and J. Aguerre. — Untersuchungen iiber den Bau des

menschlichen Riickenmarkes mit besonderer Beriicksichtigung der Neuroglia. Anat. Anzeiger, Vol. XVIII, p. 239.

1893. A. V. KoLLiKER. — Handbuch der Gewebelehre des Menschen, 6 Aufl.,

Vol. II, pp. 136 to 193. 1895. F. B. Mallory.— Centralblatt f. Allg. Pathol, u. path. Anat., Vol. VI,

p. 753; also Method of Fixation for Neuroglia Fibers, pp. 532-3,

Journal of Exp. Med., Vol. II, 1897.

1899. Erik Muller. — Studien iiber Neuroglia. Arch. f. Mik. Anatom. und

Entwicklungsgesch., Vol. LV, p. 11. 1897. B. Pollack. — Einige Bemerkungen iiber die Neuroglia und Neurog liafilrbung. Arch. f. Mik. Anatom. und Entwicklungsgesch., Vol.

XLVIIT, p. 274. 1897. Fr. Reestke. — Ueber die Neuroglia in der vs^eissen Substanz des Eiick ensmarks vom ervi^achsenen Menschen. Arch. f. Mik. Anatom. und

Entwicklungsgesch., Vol. E, p. 1.

G. Carl Huber 61

1899. E. Storch. — Ueber die pathologish-anatoinischen Vorgange am

Stiitzgerlist des Centralnervensystems. Virchow's ArcMv, Vol. CLVII, p. 127.

1897. E. W. Taylor. — A Contribution to the Study of Human Neuroglia.

The Journal of Experimental Medicine, Vol. II, p. 611. 1895. C. Weigert. — Beitrage zur Kenntniss der normalen menschlichen Neuroglia. Festschrift, Frankfurt a M.

1898. J. E. Whitwell. — On the Structure of the Neuroglia. British Med,

Journ., Vol. I, Jan.-June, p. 681.

1900. K. Yamagiwa. — Eine neue Farbung der Neuroglia. Virchow's Archiv,

Vol. CLX, p. 358.





Assistant Professor of Pathology^ Pathological Laboratory, University of Michigan.

In the prevertebral fat of the bullock and sheep there are found in large numbers glands varying in size from a pin-point to a large cherry and of a deep-red or chocolate color. Because of their number and striking color these glands stand out with much greater prominence than the pale lymph glands of these anipials, but despite this fact they have been strangely overlooked and their histology and function investigated by but few observers. The earliest mention made of them that I have been able to find is by Leydig (Lehrbuch der Histologic der Menschen und der Thiere, 1857, pages 434, 429). This writer speaks of glands occurring along the thoracic aorta in many mammals, particularly in the hog, which from their color might be mistaken for accessory spleens in case they were found in the immediate neighborhood of the spleen. The cut surface of many of these glands he describes as perfectly resembling that of the spleen, presenting a darkred pulp in which lie white masses of cells corresponding to the Malpighian follicles. Leydig noticed further that transition-forms exist between these glands and ordinary lymph-glands, but his observations were confined entirely to the gross appearances, and the histological structure of these glands was not investigated by him.

In 1884 H. Gibbes noticed the presence near the renal vessels of the human body of glands differing from ordinary lymph-glands in that they possessed sinuses containing blood in place of lymph. This important discovery was not carried further and the observation was lost sight of, the next mention of these organs being made by Eobertson (Lancet, Nov. 29, 1890) who, apparently unaware of Gibbes' discovery, made the first histological study of these structures and gave them the name of hemolymph glands (suggested by Dr. Russell under whom Eobertson was working). He found these glands to be present in the sheep, bullock and human body, but his histological descriptions are based chiefly upon their structure as found in the sheep. His work 6

G4 The Normal Histology of the Human Hemolymph Glands

upon the human body was unsatisfactory because of the unfavorable conditions under which his autopsies were made. He was able, however, to determine the presence of these glands in man, and states that their structure in the human body is very similar to that in the sheep and bullock.

In 1891 Clarkson reported observations on " certain hitherto undescribed glands " found in the neighborhood of the renal vessels in the horse, sheep and goat. To these he gave the name of " hemal glands," and considered them to be a different variety from the hemolymph glands described by Eobertson though probably possessing the same function.

Gibbes in 1893 made a second report in which he states that Eobertson's description of these organs accords with the glands discovered by himself in 1884, and accepts the designation of hemolymph glands as an appropriate name for them. Finding his discovery thus confirmed he had made further investigations in the human subject, and found these glands to be constantly present near the renal vessels. He added nothing, however, concerning their histology or function.

In Clarkson's " Text-Book of Histology," 1896, several pages are devoted to the histology of the " hemal glands." Clarkson states that these organs have been found in the pig, horse, ox and sheep, but have not yet been observed in man. His descriptions are similar to those of Gibbes and Eobertson, and the hemal glands must be regarded as hemolymph glands.

Vincent and Harrison, in 1897, gave a detailed histological description of the hemolymph glands of the ox, sheep and rat. They noted also the occurrence of similar glands in the horse, dog, common fowl and turkey, and pointed out the histological resemblance existing be'tween hemolymph glands and the head-kidney of certain teleostean fishes. In several human cadavers examined they found no hemolymph glands, but Vincent in a later examination found them in the mesentery of a young boy.

In 1900 Drummond made a more thorough study of the histology ol: the hemolymph glands of the sheep, ox, rat and dog; and gave a very clear description of their structure. He confirmed the work of Eobertson and Vincent and Harrison; and added many important points concerning the distribution and structure of these glands in the lower animals.

In so far as I have been able to discover these are the only observations that have been made of the occurrence and structure of the hemolymph glands, and as seen above the chief part of these have been

Aldred Scott WartMn 65

of these glands as occurring in the lower vertebrates. Gibbes' discovery of their presence in the human subject, confirmed by Eobertson, the second report of the former and the solitary observation of Vincent represent the sum total of the published work upon the human hemolymph glands up to the publication of my article, " A Contribution to the ISTormal Histology and Pathology of the Hemolymph Glands" (Journal of the Bost. Soc. of Med, Sciences, April, 1901). In this paper I made a preliminary report of a study of the human hemolymph glands which has been carried on by me in this laboratory for several years. My attention was first drawn to these glands by certain cases in which some of the retroperitoneal lymph glands appeared to play a part independent of that of the other lymph glands of the body. In its earlier stages the study was confined to the retroperitoneal region, but later systematic investigation was also carried out of the cervical, thoracic and mediastinal glands. The material for this work has been obtained from my autopsy cases of the last 'five years, 94 in all. It was early evident to me that there were two distinct varieties of lymph glands, one containing blood sinuses aud apparently possessing distinct hemal functions. At that time the observations of Gibbes, Eobertson and Vincent were unknown to me so that the essential nature of the glands was also independently discovered by me.

Since the publication of my article in April of this year there has appeared in the Archiv f. Mikr. Anatomie (July) a paper by Weidenreich on the "Gefasssystem der Menschlichen Milz," in which he treats theoretically of the hemolymph glands, basing his conclusions upon the work of the English observers. The more important of his theoretical deductions are confirmed by my previously-reported observations.

The present paper will be devoted to a consideration of the normal histology of human hemolymph glands to a much fuller extent than in my preliminary report. With the exception of a few accident cases none of my autopsy subjects can be said to have been normal. The majority were chronic cases, many of which showed various stages of anemia and cachexia. In so far as I am able to divide the appearances observed by me into histological and pathological such classification is based upon the fact that only in cases showing extensive changes in the blood were conditions found in the hemolymph glands that could be regarded as being essentially pathological. In all other cases the structure of the glands was assumed to be histological because of their identity of structure with the glands found in normal individuals killed by accident, the general similarity of structure in all cases except certain blood cases, and finally their resemblance to the hemolymph glands of

66 The Normal Histology of the Human Hemolymph Glands

normal animals. As a result of this study the following conclusions regarding the normal histology of the human hemolymph glands have been reached.

Technique. — The thymus, anterior mediastinal and renal regions are examined in the usual order of the autopsy; the prevertebral tissues at the close of the autopsy. The neck-organs, thoracic and abdominal vessels, root of the mesentery, and other structures attached are stripped from the spinal column from above downwards and removed from the body for minute examination. When there is much prevertebral fat present or when the tissues are very opaque the search for hemolymph glands may be made much more successful by first fixing the tissues in mass in 4 per cent formalin. The color of the blood-sinuses is in this way brought out much more sharply, and the glands may be recognized when the search in the fresh tissue would have been negative. When it is desired to study the exact position and relations of these glands the prevertebral tissues should be dissected in place and not stripped from the spine. Since the sinuses of the human hemolymph glands partly collapse after death the recognition by color alone is not easy and at times impossible. It therefore becomes necessary to remove all glands found in a region for microscopical diagnosis and in many cases it is only in this way that the character of a gland can be definitely determined. In the search for these glands in the human body their proximity to large vessels should be borne in mind; they occur very frequently in the connective tissue between artery and vein.

OccuREENCE. — Taking the presence of a sinus containing blood in place of lymph as the essential feature of a hemolymph gland, such glands are found constantly present in the human body. They are apparently more numerous, at least are more easily recognized, in early adult and middle life than in infancy or old age. In new-born children they are discovered with difficulty, and usually can be found only after microscopical examination. In late life they become atrophic, the blood-sinuses being obliterated for the greater part by connective-tissue increase. No difference in their occurrence has been observed in the sexes. With the individual they apparently differ very much as regards their location, number and size, seldom being found under exactly similar conditions; but owing to the difficulty of recognizing them with the naked eye it is probable that these variations may be only apparent, resulting from imperfect technique.

They are found in greatest numbers in the prevertebral retroperitoneal and cervical regions, in the neighborhood of the adrenal and renal vessels, along the brim of the pelvis, in the root of the mesen

Aldred Scott Warthin 67

tery but rarely extending far out into it, still more rarely in the omentum and epiploica. In normal individuals they are rarely found in the mediastinal tissues or along the thoracic vertebrae, but in cases of a,nemia in which the hemolymph glands throughout the entire body are enlarged they may be found in large numbers in these regions making it appear probable that under normal conditions they are of such small size as to escape notice. In the cervical region they are usually found below and behind the lobes of the thyroid in association with the parathyroids.

Gross Appeaeances. — The human hemolymph glands are not nearly so easily recognized by the naked eye as are those of the steer and sheep, because of the fact that their blood-sinuses are frequently collapsed and partly emptied after death. They usually lie deeply embedded in fat or connective tissue, and as a rule near the wall of some large vessel. As a rule only a few show distended sinuses, these glands are deep-red or bluish in color and may be easily mistalsen for hemorrhages, bloodclots, or deeply-congested lymph glands. The resemblance to spleentissue is often very close. In the transition forms which are partly hemolymph glands and partly ordinary lymphatic glands the bloodsinuses appear as red points or streaks. It is often difficult or impossible to distinguish these from congested lymph glands. The smallest hemolymph glands may often be found by stretching the tissue against the light, the blood-sinuses then appearing as red points or lines. Fixation of the tissues in formalin is of great advantage as the blood-content of the sinuses of these glands is brought out in sharp contrast to the lighter color of lymphoid tissue. When the blood-sinuses are small or few in number the gland cannot be distinguished on naked-eye inspection from an ordinary lymph gland. It is, therefore, safest in studying the occurrence of hemolymph glands to remove all apparent glandular structures and examine them microscopically.

On cross-section the blood-sinuses resemble spleen-pulp and contrast according to their blood-content more or less sharply with the whitish areas of lymphoid tissue. Small round masses of whitish lymphoid tissue often project into the pulp-like peripheral sinus suggesting splenic follicles. Partly collapsed and emptied sinuses appear as points and streaks of red. The presence of a peripheral red streak just beneath the capsule of the gland with red lines radiating toward the center of the gland is a very important point in the naked-eye diagnosis of these organs. Occasionally the capsular surface of a hemolymph gland is studded with small beaded elevations, giving it a raspberry appear

68 The Normal Histology of the Human Hemolymph Glands

ance; on section these are found to be small round masses of lymphoid tissue projecting into the peripheral sinus.

The size of the human hemolymph glands varies from that of a pinpoint to a large cherry or almond. The latter size is, however, uncommon, the usual size being that of a yellow mustard seed or pea. In the majority of cases their shape is round or oval, some are flattened, others elongated, while not infrequently glands of an almond shape are found, the larger end being somewhat recurved upon itself. They usually possess a distinct hilum into which vessels enter. Their consistency is somewhat softer than that of ordinary lymph glands depending upon the amount of blood in the sinuses. If these are large and dilated the capsule of the gland may be so stretched that it is easily ruptured and the gland pulp have the appearance and consistency of a fresh bloodclot; and these glands are undoubtedly many times mistaken for such.

Attached to the gland there is usually a relatively large plexus of vessels, the veins in particular being large and prominent. Occasionally these remain dilated and filled with blood, and under such conditions are of great aid in making the naked-eye diagnosis. No lymph vessels can be demonstrated in the case of those glands, even the largest, which contain blood-sinuses throughout, but in the glands of mixed type, partly hemolymph and partly lymphatic, lymph vessels can be made out.

The number of hemolymph glands in the human body is exceedingly difficult of estimation. Since the ultimate diagnosis depends upon the microscopical examination it would be necessary in making an exact estimation to examine every lymphatic gland in the body. Moreover, since many of the hemolymph glands are very small and lie deeply embedded in fat and connective tissue, it is necessary to remove all the tissues in the regions where the glands are found and make serial sections of the entire tissue. The difficulty of this is evident. The number of lymph glands visible to the naked eye in the retroperitoneal region varies from 200-500, and the prevertebral tissues contain also numerous nodes of lymphoid tissue too small to be seen on naked-eye inspection. In a number of cases the entire retroperitoneal tissue has been examined, both in the fresh state and microscopically, but the results are so much at variance that no definite statements regarding the number of hemol3^mph glands can be made. Ordinarily the relative proportion to lymphatic glands is 1-20 to 1-50, but this statement is based upon very incomplete observations. It is very probable that the number of hemolymph glands is much greater than that expressed by these ratios, since in one case of pernicious anemia over sixty of the glands were removed

Aldred Scott Warthin 69

from the cervical, thoracic and retroperitoneal regions alone ; in another case of pernicious anemia, over thirty from the retroperitoneal region alone ; and forty from the same region in a case of leukemia. Vincent's finding of hemolymph glands, about fifty in number, in the mesentery and gastro-colic omentum may also be remembered. In the human body many of these glands appear to be in a resting state, and are not easily distinguished from ordinary lymph glands, but in certain conditions, particularly blood diseases, they become enlarged and prominent. A new-formation of these glands in compensation for spleen or bone-marrow is also possible and undoubtedly takes place under certain pathological conditions. The use of formalin in fixing the tissues and rendering more prominent the blood-content of hemolymph glands may be mentioned again in this place as being of great service in the estimation of their number.

Microscopical Examinatiox.

Technique. — Alcohol fixation does not give the best results m the study of these glands except for the use of the tri-acid stain. It produces too much contraction of the reticulum and changes the red cells so that they do not stain well. Mercuric chloride, formalin and Zenker's fluid are the best fixing agents in the order named. With all of these there is less shrinkage, and the red cells are better preserved, staining well with eosin, etc., so that the course of the blood-sinuses is well outlined by the blood yet remaining in the meshes of the reticulum. Mercuric chloride fixation is especially recommended in the study of their finer structure, since all stains, including the tri-acid, give good results after this fixation, the celldivision figures and the red-blood cells are well preserved, and there is little shrinking. Hematoxylin and eosin, the tri-acid stain, etc., are used according to the object sought. Mallory's reticulum stain is essential for the study of the reticulum of the blood-sinuses, and is particularly valuable in tracing the course of these. Kresylechtviolett is also very valuable in the study of mast-cells, etc.

For the study of the cells of these glands it is also advisable to make cover-glass smears from the freshly-cut surface. This should be done as soon as possible after death. The smears are made in the usual manner, fixed by heat or alcohol and ether, and stained as desired. In this connection kresylechtviolett is also recommended as of value in the study of cellgranulation.

' Microscopical Appearances. — The lymph glands of the human body may be divided broadly into two groups: those containing only lymphsinuses, ordinary lymphatic glands, and those possessing blood-sinuses, hemolymph glands. Between these two groups intermediate forms exist — a gland may contain both blood and lymph-sinuses— the pres

70 The Normal Histology of the Human Hemolymph Glands

ence of a blood-sinus, however small, is sufficient warrant for the classification of a gland as a hemolymph gland.

The microscopical study of the lymphoid nodes containing bloodsinuses reveals a most striking variety of structure in so far as the relative size, number and arrangement of the blood-sinuses, lymphoid tissue, etc., are concerned. It is possible, however, to divide the different forms into two distinct types, to which I have given the names splenolymph and marrowlymph gland as indicating their structure and probable functions. Between these two there is every possible transition-form, just as there is also between the spleen, hemolymph glands and ordinary lymphatic glands. It is not by any means intended to replace the designation, hemolymph gland, by these names, as the latter should still be used as a collective term.

Splenolymph Glands.

The great majority of hemolymph glands correspond to this type. They are found chiefly along the abdominal aorta, vena cava, adrenal and renal vessels, in the neighborhood of the solar plexus, cervical region, occasionally in the omentum, mesentery, epiploica, mediastinal and thoracic prevertebral regions. These glands are usually round, but also frequently almond-shaped, varying in size from a pin-point to a large cherry. As a rule they possess a distinct hilum into which numerous vessels of large size enter. These are also found penetrating the capsule at many points. Very often the gland appears to be surrounded by a plexus of vessels, sometimes arterial, at other times venous. Their gross appearances correspond with those given above for hemolymph glands in general. Their resemblance to the spleen is sometimes so great that they may be mistaken for accessory spleens, aild undoubtedly many of the so-called accessory spleens belong to this type of hemolymph gland. This fact was dimly recognized by Haberer in his recent article "Lien Succenturiatus und Lien Accessorius" (Arch. f. Anat. u. Phys., March, 1901). Apparently unaware of the existence of hemolymph glands this observer concluded that many glands regarded as accessory spleens were in reality peculiar types of lymph glands representing intermediate forms between spleen and lymph glands. •

Capsule. — The splenolymph glands possess a capsule of connective tissue which may be very thick in proportion to the size of the organ or very thin and delicate. It contains a varying amount of unstriped muscle, and very little yellow elastic tissue. Adipose tissue surrounds the capsule. The latter is frequently pierced by many obliquely-pene

Aldred Scott Warthin 71

trating blood-vessels. Occasionally the blood-spaces and vessels in the capsule are so numerous as to give it the cavernous structure so frequently seen in the capsule of these glands in the steer; but on the vrhole the splenolymph glands of man are distinguished from those of the lower animals by the less vascular structure of the capsule. From the external capsule trabeculse of similar tissues run into the gland dividing it into irregular lobules. Accompanying the trabeculas are the communicating blood-sinuses and between them lies the lymphoid tissue.

Blood-sinuses. — Immediately beneath the external capsule there is a blood-sinus which sometimes extends entirely around the periphery of the gland, but more frequently only for portions of the way, being frequently interrupted by masses of lymphoid tissue which reach to the external capsule. In the great majority of cases this sinus is much smaller and less prominent than in the hemolymph glands of the steer and sheep. Glands are, however, occasionally seen in man with the peripheral sinus dilated and 'containing as much blood as in any gland from these animals. From the peripheral sinus branches pass in with the trabeculae toward the centre of the gland or toward its hilum, increasing in size and becoming confluent towards these points until they are often very large and prominent. These radiating sinuses frequently commiinicate with each other, and so divide the lymphoid tissue into irregularly-shaped islands apparently surrounded on all sides by a blood-sinus. Serial sections, however, show that these islands are not entirely cut off from each other in the majority of cases, but at some point or other are connected by an isthmus of lymphoid tissue of varying size. The number and size of the blood-sinuses as well as their general arrangement vary greatly, so that scarcely any two glands exactly resemble each other in these respects.

The lumen of the peripheral as well as of the communicating and central sinuses is traversed by a coarse reticulum through the meshes of which the blood circulates. The amount of this reticulum and the size of its meshes vary in different 'glands; frequently the central sinuses are open, possessing but a scanty reticulum or none at all. The reticulum of the sinuses is probably lined throughout with flattened endothelium, but it is sometimes difficult or impossible to make this out, so that the blood appears to be in direct contact with fibres of the reticulum. A wide sinus is often abruptly narrowed by a constriction of coarser reticulum suggesting a valve-like arrangement, but this point is yet to be worked out. The course of the sinuses is clearly shown in sections by the lighter staining nuclei of the reticulum in contrast

72 The Normal Histology of the Human Hemolymph Glands

to the more deeply-stained lymphoid tissue and the red cells lying in the reticular meshes.

The central sinuses frequently form the most striking feature of the splenolymph glands. Though usually partly or even wholly emptied of blood they often remain dilated. Scanty reticulum may extend either across or only for a short distance into the lumen of the larger sinuses. At other times the central sinuses may contain as much reticulum as either the peripheral or communicating ones. Red-blood cells and large phagocytes containing red cells and blood pigment are found in the reticular meshes along the sides of these sinuses. In some glands the central and communicating sinuses take up the greater part of the central portion of the gland, so that microscopical sections resemble a much-congested spleen-pulp.

Lymplwid Tissue. — The lymphoid tissue lying between the sinuses resembles very much that of an ordinary lymph gland. It varies very much in amount, sometimes forming a mere network between the sinuses, while in other cases it may form 'the chief part of the gland. Usually the greater mass of lymphoid tissue is toward the periphery, forming the inner border of the peripheral sinus, but it also frequently extends to the capsule interrupting the peripheral sinus. The arrangement of the lymphoid tissue also varies much in different glands. It is usually cut up into irregular areas or lobules which are for the greater part surrounded by the blood-sinuses. Small round collections of lymphoid cells are often seen, resembling splenic follicles. These occur more frequently at the periphery, where they may be partly or wholly surrounded by the blood-sinus, but they may also be found toward the central portion of the gland. Serial sections show that they are almost perfectly round. In the majority of cases they possess no arterial relations as in the case of the splenic follicles, but occasionally a small capillary is found in them which under certain pathological conditions may become gradually converted into a small arteriole with thick walls. The resemblance in this case to the splenic follicle is complete.

The cells of the lymphoid tissue are for the greater part small lymphocytes. These vary greatly with respect to the relative size and staining power of the nucleus and relative amount of protoplasm. Next to the small lymphocyte the large mononuclear cell is the most common form present. These also va^y much in size, form and staining power. Transitional and polymorphonuclear leukocytes are also present. A small number of basophile and mononuclear eosinophiles is usually present, mast-cells are rare in the majority of cases, but occasionally a

Aldred Scott Warthin 73

gland is found, as in the steer and sheep, in which the majority of the cells of the central portion of the gland are mast-cells.

Eed-blood cell^^ lie free in the meshes of the reticulum. The small blood-vessels and capillaries of the lymphoid tissue are usually filled with red cells and leukocytes, the large mononuclear form appearing to predominate. Throughout the reticulum there is usually present a varying amount of blood pigment, partly free and partly contained within large mononuclear phagocytes. Eed cells in various stages of disintegration are also found in these cells. Scattered areas of a hyaline substance which stain pink with eosin, red with fuchsin, and blue with Mallory's reticulum stain are often found throughout the lymphoid tissue, but are most numerous toward the periphery of the gland. Small hyaline, highly refractile spherules of varying size, usually about the diameter of a red-blood cell, are frequently seen in small groups lying free in the reticular meshes and are also found in the mononuclear phagocytes. They stain intensely with eosin and fuchsin, retaining the latter with Mallory's reticulum stain. These hyaline bodies are evidently the products of the destruction of red-blood cells, as all stages of their formation can be found. They may contain iron, especially those found in the phagocytes, the reaction being absent from many of the free bodies. In some cases these spherules can be seen partly extruded from the phagocyte.

Beticulum. — The reticulum of the lymphoid areas resembles that of ordinary lymphatic glands. That of the blood-sinuses is much more abundant and of a coarser mesh-like structure than that of the lymphsinuses of lymph glands. It differs from the reticulum of the spleen-pulp in the same respects. It stains blue with Mallory's reticulum stain, and consists of branching fibres and stellate or spindleshaped cells arranged in a coarse mesh-work, the surfaces of which are covered with flattened endothelial cells. Small fibrillge of yellow elastic tissue and occasional unstriped muscle-cells may be scattered through it. In its meshes there are found constantly large mononuclear phagocytes containing disintegrating red cells. These cells are always more abundant in the reticulum of the sinuses than in the lymphoid tissue. Under certain conditions they are so greatly increased in number as to almost entirely fill the spaces of the sinus. Normally their number i^ individual glands varies greatly, suggesting a possible cyclical function of hemolysis. Glands containing many of these cells may be found side by side with others whose reticular spaces contain but few. The same appearances are found in the hemolymph glands of the lower animals, particularly in those of the dog -and rat, Multinuclear giant

74 The Normal Histology of the Human Hemolymph Glands

cells, eosinophile, basophile and mast-cells may at times be found also in the reticular meshes. The origin of the phagocytes has not yet been definitely determined; they may arise either from leukocytes or from the endothelial cells lining the reticulum.

Vascular System. — The exact manner of circulation in these glands has not yet been worked out, but it seems probable that the arteries entering the hilum quickly divide into small branches which, passing toward the periphery, empty into the blood-sinuses from which the blood is again gathered into veins which pass out at the hilum or obliquely through the capsule. As in the lower animals, there are great individual differences in the number and mode of branching of the blood-vessels. Occasionally the entering arteries pass along the trabecule and do not divide until near the periphery. In well-stained sections the course of the blood-sinuses and vessels is well shown by the blood contained in them which serves the purpose of an injection. The exact manner of communication between arterial and venous systems cannot, however, be made out by this means. Injections have not yet been attempted in the human subject, but in the lower animals they have been unsatisfactory. The circulation in the sinuses is of the type known as sinusoidal, only the endothelium separating the blood from the cells contained in the reticular meshes. The current in these spaces must be extremely slow and a long period of time must be required for the complete circulation through the intricate meshes of the reticulum crossing the sinuses.

In the splenolymph glands containing blood-sinuses throughout, afferent and efferent lymph vessels are not found, small lymphatics alone being present in the capsule. In glands of mixed type containing lymph-sinuses lymphatic vessels are also found. Whether there is any communication between the lymphatic and blood-systems in these glands remains yet to be shown. In the round masses of cells lymphspaces or capillaries are probably present as in the splenic follicles, since under certain pathological conditions these may become edematous, the cells being separated by an accumulation of fluid in the intercellular spaces. These lymph spaces probably empty directly into the blood-sinuses and convey leukocytes into the circulation.

Varieties. — As already mentioned transition forms exist between the splenolymph glands and the spleen on one hand and ordinary lymphatic glands on the other. The significance of these intermediate forms is not yet apparent.

Development. — No work has yet been done on the development of these glands. They are present as fully-developed organs in the new

Aldred Scott Warthin 75

born child, and have been found at an early period in the foetal calf. They are without doubt individual organs whose early stages of development are probably parallel with those of the lymph glands. Under certain pathological conditions it is possible that they may be developed from ordinary lymphatic glands or even in adipose tissue in compensation for the spleen or bone-marrow.

Function. — A discussion of the probable functions of these glands is beyond the limits of this paper. Briefly stated, it is probable that their function is chiefly one of hematolysis. The great variation in appearances in different glands suggests a cyclical function. They are also leukocyte-forming organs. Under normal conditions no evidences of red-blood cell formation have been discovered in them. It may also be possible that in the glands containing both blood and lymphsinuses there is communication between the two systems and these glands may serve as the means of the return of lymph into the bloodstream. This supposition must, however, be regarded as purely hypothetical.

Differential Diagnosis. — To the inexperienced observer the hemolymph glands may at first be taken for deeply-congested or hemorrhagic lymph glands, even on microscopical examination. This mistake has probably occurred many times. The essential features of these glands as given above are, however, easily seen and, when once known, a glance at a section is sufficient for their recognition. The differences in reticulum, lymphoid tissue, sinuses, etc., together present a picture entirely distinct and characteristic from that of a congested or hemorrhagic lymph gland. Care in the treatment of the autopsy material, perfect fixation and good staining are points of technique which are of great service in the recognition of these organs.


The second form of hemolymph gland to which I have applied the designation of marrowlymph gland is of very much less frequent occurrence. They are much more prominent in certain pathological conditions than they are in the normal body, suggesting the possibility of resting glands or of new formations. In many cadavers I have been unable to find them, but this may have been due to a lack of time for a thorough examination. They have been found only in the retroperitoneal region, along the spine and brim of pelvis, always in close proximity to the large vessels, vena cava, abdominal aorta, adrenal and renal vessels and common iliacs. They are present most frequently

76 The Normal Histology of the Human Hemolymph Glands

along the vertebrae behind the aorta or between it and the vena cava. These glands are flattened and long in proportion to their breadth, their greatest dimension lying parallel to the axis of the neighboring vessel. They may have a distinct hilum, bnt the number of vessels entering is not so great as in the case of the splenolymph glands. Lymph vessels may also be found in connection with these glands. The latter vary greatly in size, but are sometimes found as slender cylinders several centimeters long embedded in adipose tissue. They are white or pinkish in color with fine red lines corresponding to the blood-sinuses. Their consistence is very soft and on section they present an almost homogeneous surface.

They possess a thin capsule which contains but little luistriped muscle and yellow elastic tissue. Delicate trabeculge run from this toward the centre of the gland. Beneath the capsule there is a bloodsinus of small size which usually runs entirely around the periphery and from this there are narrow branching sinuses accompanying the trabeculge toward the centre of the gland. All of the sinuses are filled with a coarse reticulum through the meshes of which the blood circulates. Dilated sinuses like those of the splenolymph glands are not present. The course of the sinuses is shown by the lighter staining nuclei of the reticulum and by the presence of red-cells. Lymph sinuses are also present in some of these glands. Between the sinuses lies the lymphoid tissue arranged in irregular islands or lobules and is in much greater amount than in the splenolymph glands. Collections of cells resembling follicles are not found in the pure type of this gland. Throughout their central portions large numbers of fat cells are usually present.

The reticulum of the lymphoid tissue is more delicate and contains but little elastic tissue. The lymphoid areas are richer in cells and these present a much greater variety than in the splenolymph glands. Mononuclear eosinophiles and mast-cells are more numerous, and multinuclear as well as large mononuclear forms with deeply-stained knobbed nuclei also occur. Giant-cells resembling those of the bone-marrow are also occasionally found, and in certain pathological states of the blood may be very numerous. No nucleated red cells have been found in normal conditions. The lymphocytes and large mononuclears show a much greater diversity of form and staining power, and there is also a great variety of cells in the reticulum of the sinuses. Phagocytes containing red-cells pigment, fuchsinophile hyaline bodies and leukocytes occur to a much less extent than in the splenolymph glands. Eed

Aldred Scott Warthin 77

blood cells are found scattered throughout the reticulum of the lymphoid tissue.

Transition-form? between spleno- and marrowlymph glands are found and also between the latter and ordinary lymphatic glands. The function of the marrowlymph glands is not clear. They are evidently leukocyte-forming organs, and the presence of giant-cells and many mononuclear eosinophiles suggests the bone-marrow and the formation of red-cells. In certain forms of anemia and leukemia these glands are greatly enlarged and come to resemble the lymphoid marrow, containing nucleated red cells, neutrophile and eosinophile mononuclears, and many giant-cells exactly similar to those of the marrow. It can hardly be doubted that in these cases these glands are centres of red-cell formation perhaps compensatory for the marrow. Under normal conditions they may be in a resting state in so far as their function is concerned. Their part in hemolysis is much less marked than that of the splenolymph glands. In old age they become atrophic, their sinuses obliterated, large deposits of hyalin occur in them, and finally they cannot be distinguished from atrophic lymphatic glands. The study of these glands from the pathological side promises much more than from the normal.


Our conceptions of lymphoid tissue are greatly broadened by the study of the hemolymph glands. The intimate relations existing between the different organs of this class, the transition-forms, the possibility of compensation o£ function, etc., throw new and important light upon both histological and pathological problems. The various lymphoid organs might be compared as follows:


Hemal gland.

Blood-forming function.

Sinusoidal organ.

Afferent and efferent blood-vessels.

No afferent lymph-vessels.


H«molymph gland.

Hemolytic function.

Sinusoidal organ.

Afferent and efferent blood-vessels.

No afferent lymph-vessels.

Efferent lymph-capillaries.

78 The Normal Histology of the Human Hemolymph Glands


Hemolymph gland.

Hemolytic function.

Sinusoidal organ.

Afferent and efferent blood-vessels.

No afferent lymph-vessels.

Efferent lymph-capillaries.


Lymph gland.

Lymphatic function.


No blood-sinuses.

Lymph and blood-systems separate.

With respect to the relations between blood and lymphatic systems the red marrow might be considered the most primitive type of lymphoid structure, and the ordinary lymphatic gland the most highly developed, the hemolj'-mph glands and spleen occupying intermediate positions. If viewed from a broader standpoint regarding both general structure and functions the relations of the organs might be theoretically represented in the following manner:

Lymphatic Gland.

/ \

Splenolvmpli Gland Marrowlymph Gland


Spleen. Lymphoid Marrow.

In conclusion, the field of the human hemolymph glands has barely been entered and its most important problems remain unsolved. Much is .to be hoped from experimental work upon the lower animals in whom these glands are larger and more numerous than in man. Work along this line has already been begun in this laboratory.

Note. — The limits of this article have prevented me including in the brief review of the literature given above references to observations made on lymph-glands with 'blood-containing sinuses by a number of writers who apparently unaware of the existence of hemolymph glands interpreted their findings as hyperemic or hemorrhagic lymph-glands. Eindfleisch, Weigert, Neumann and Orth are among those who have made such observations. Especial attention is, however called to the article by Saltykow (Ueber bluthaltige Lymphdriisen beim Menschen, Zeitschr. f. Heilkunde, 1900). In an examination of 60 cadavers this

AldreS Scott Warthin 79

observer found blood-containing lymph-glands in 91.66^ of the cases. Saltykow considered these glands to be only ordinary lymphatic glands in which there had been hemorrhage or a backward flow of blood into the lymph-vessels. Eeferring to the hemolymph glands as described by GibbeS;, Robertson and Clarkson he concludes that these writers were in error in their assumption that these were glands sui generis. I have already pointed out the close resemblance between hemorrhagic lymph glands and hemolymph glands and some of the more important differential points between these structures. I regard Saltykow as being wholly in error in so far as his conclusions regarding the nature of these glands are concerned.


Clakkson. — British Med. Jour., July 25, 1891.

Text-book of Histology, 1896.

Drummond. — Jour, of Anat. and Phys., 1900. GiBBES. — Microscopical Journal, Vol. XXIV, 1884.

Amer. Jour, of Med. Sciences, 1893.

Habeker. — Arch. f. Anat. u. Phys., March, 1901.

Leydig. — Lehrbuch der Histologie d. Menschen u. d. Thiere, 1857. Robertson. — Lancet, 1890.

VmcENT AjfD Harrison. — Jour, of Anat. and Phys., 1897. Warthin. — Jour, of the Bost. Soc. of Med. Sciences, April, 1901.

Jour, of Med. Eesearch, July, 1901.

Weidenreich. — Arch. f. Mikr. Anatomic, July, 1901,


CHARLES SEDGWICK MINOT, LL. D. From the Embryological Laboratory of the Harvard Medical School.

With 14 Text Figures.

The term "pineal region'" is used here in a descriptively topographical sense, the observations reported concern the epiphysis, paraphysis, vehim transversum, and the superior and posterior commissures chiefly in dog-fish embryos of from 11.5 mm. to 86.0 mm. The sections studied form part of the Harvard Embryological Collection, the general plan of which I have briefly described in an earlier article.' To facilitate confirmation of the observations the number of the embryo and of the section, as catalogued, is given for each of the illustrations.

Our previous knowledge of the pineal region in Elasmobranchs is based on the observations of Balfour {Worls, Vol. I, p. 399 ff.) and Ehlers, 78.1, on the development, and of Ehlers and Cattie, 81.1, on the adult anatom3^ Cattie reviews the earlier literature quite thoroughly. Gaupp's resume, 98.3, in the " Ergehiisse " is invaluable for the comparative study of the parts. The account of the development of the epiphysis proper, given by Balfour and Ehlers is essentially correct. They both saw the velum transversum, but did not specially study it. It has been more accurately figured by W. His, 92.1, p. 361, Fig. 14. Balfour figures only the superior commissure, which he identified as the posterior, and appears not to have observed the true posterior commissure at all. Ehlers, 78.1, has indicated both commissures in his Fig. 8, very clearly, but gives no description of their development in his text. Neither Ehlers nor Balfour mention the paraphysis, which was not recognized as a morphological constituent of the brain until much later (Selenka, 90.1), but Balfour has recorded several of the changes in the paraphysal region. Balfour's descriptions of the pineal region are incomplete, and owing to the defective methods of the time, often inexact as to details.

In embryos of Squalus acanthias of 11.5 mm. in length " the changes

1 Anatomischer Anzeiger, Bd. XVIII, pp. 138-139.

'^ The measurements of lengths are from the preserved specimens in alcohol.


Ou the Morphology of the Pineal Kegion

in the roof of the diencephalon are just beginning. Fig. 1 represents a sagittal section, the plane of which is not true since it passes through the epiphysal anlage about in the median plane, but in the region of the hind brain passes considerably to one side so that it strikes the jugular vein, Ve, the first aortic arch, Ao, and the three " head cavities," the praemandibular, 1, the mandibular, 2, and the hyoid, 3. Miss Piatt's " anterior cavity," 91.2, 201, is also shown, and is connected in sections 88 and 89 of this series with the praemandibular cavity. In our transverse series, No. 206, section 120, the two cavities are just separated. It seems, therefore, probable that the " anterior cavity " arises

Fig. 1. Embryo of 11.5 mm. Sagittal series, No. 208, section 93. (For explanation of the lettering see at end of the article.)

X 30 diams.

from the praemandibular as van Wighe found to be the case in Galeus. It may be noted that the tip of the notochord joins the wall of the praemandibular cavities, which at this stage are still united across the median line.* The fore-brain is already subdivided into the wider anterior prosencephalon and the narrower posterior diencephalon. The roof of the latter has two well-marked arches, of which the posterior, Ep., is the anlage of the epiphysis. In connection with these arches appear on the inside of the brain wall in the section three points; of

3 The condition of the head-cavities is described as it offers a convenient means of fixing the stage at which the dififerentiation of the pineal region begins.

Charles Sedgwick Minot 83

thesC;, the first, V, is the anlage of the velum; the second, which marks the boundary between the two arches, is the site for the future commissura superior; the third, which forms the posterior boundary of the epiphysal anlage is the site for the future commissura posterior — compare Fig. 5. The curve in front of the velar anlage I propose to name the paraphysal arch, on account of its subsequent differentiation; the curve between the velum and the epiphysal anlage may be termed the post-velar arch. We thus distinguish six fundamental morphological divisions in the median line of the diencephalic roof :

1. Paraphysal arch.

3. Velum transversum.

3. Post-velar arch.

4. Superior commissure.

5. Epiphysis.

6. Posterior commissure.


Fig. 3. Embryo of 11.5 mm. Sagittal series, No. 308, section 93. x 30 diams.

The homologues of all these parts exist probably in all vertebrates.

In the next stage, which I have, an embryo of 13.0 mm.. Fig. 2, the brain is larger, and the outline of the fore-brain has been considerably modified, chiefly owing to the growth of the infundibular region. The " anterior " cavities in this embryo (No. 224, sections 99-100) seem to have no longer any connection with the praemandibular cavities, but lie further laterad. The relations are well demonstrated by transverse sections — thus No. 223, section 99, shows both the " anterior cavity and the median connection of the praemandibular cavities. In both


On the Morphology of the Pineal Eegion

series the anterior end of the notochord is bent ventralwards at a sharp angle, Fig. 2, nch; it tapers off gradually, and has a rounded termination, which lies close against the wall of the praemandibular cavity. The roof of the diencephalon has advanced slightly as compared with figure 1. The velum, V, projects further into the cerebral cavity and appears more clearly as a fold of the brain wall; in another embryo of the same length, No. 235, section 63, the projection is more marked. The epiphysal anlage has begun to deepen, Ep., and immediately behind it the brain wall shows a thickening where the posterior commissure is to appear.

As shown in the figure the narrower diencephalon is marked externally by a depression between the mesencephalon, M. B. and prosencephalon, F. B. This depression can still be easily traced in embryos of 40-45 mm, but gradually disappears.

Fig. 3. Embryo of 1.5 mm. Sagittal series, No. 238, section 51. x 30 diams. Fig. 4. Embryo of 18 mm. Sagittal series, No. 204, section 100. x 30 diams.

In embryos of 15 mm.. Fig. 3, the epiphysal evagination, Ep., has grown, as has also the velum, Y, which now has distinctly an anterior and posterior surface; the ependymal coverings of the two surfaces lie close together so that there remains only a minimal space between the two ependymal layers. In this specimen the brain-wall is thicker in the pineal region than in both the younger and the older stages, which I have examined. Similarly the walls of the epiphysal anlage. Fig. 5, Ep., are thicker than in both the older and younger stages of Figs. 4 and 6. I think these variations are not important morphologically.

The next. Fig. 4, is from an embryo of 18 mm, and shows a decided advance of the differentiation. The velum, Y, is now a well-marked fold of the ependyma, with a narrow middle layer of mesenchyma; the fold extends across the fore-brain from side to side, and according to the current interpretation is regarded as marking the boundary between the diencephalon and the prosencephalon. The epiphysal anlage is more distinctly an evagination than before. Immediately in front of it has appeared the small but well-marked superior commissure, s. c,

Charles Sedgwick Minot


and immediately behind it has appeared the much larger posterior commissure, p. c, the position of which — compare also Figs. 5-10 — indicates that it belongs rather to the mid-brain than to the fore-brain. Opinion on this point must be reserved however until determined by an investigation that will fix the boundary between the two primary cerebral vesicles. Our present information seems to me insufficient to decide with finality this point. Both commissures are developed in the " edoglia." This term I propose as the equivalent of the " Randschleier " of His, to designate the outermost of the three primary layers of the medullary wall.^ In stained sections the commissures are con-' spicuous owing to the absence of nuclei, in contrast with the adjacent

Fig 5. Embryo of 23 mm. Sagittal series, 231, section 79. x 30 diams.

Fig. 6. Embryo of 28.0 mm. Sagittal series, 233, section 122. x 30 diams. A, approximate plane of the section represented in Fig. 11 ; B, approximate plane of the section represented in Fig 12.

tissue of the brain-wall, which is densely crowded with nuclei. The cross sections of the transverse nerve fibers are sharply marked in the sections.

Embryos of 22 mm. — 4 mm. longer than the last — show a decided growth of all the parts, and the growth is downward, i. e. towards the interior of the brain. The ectoderm, Ec, is still a thin layer, and the mesoderm between it and the brain-wall has increased a little in thick

Upon the fundamental morphological importance of these three layers I have insisted in my Human Embryology, p. 616. The entire structure of the adult brain and cord should be stated in terms of these three layers.

86 On the Morphology of the Pineal Eegion

ness; accordingly the outer surface of the mid-brain and of the forebrain, F. B., also the summit of the epiphysis, Ejp., are all nearly as close to the outer surface of the head as before, while on the contrary the orifice of the epiphysis, the posterior commissure and the superior and the edge of the velum are all much more remote from the surface than before. Comparison of the successive stages shown in Figs. 4-10 will suffice to demonstrate that increasing downward extension is the method of development by which all these parts elongate. This comparison will also demonstrate that the summit of the epiphysis remains quite close to the ectoderm, while the continued development of the mesoderm is increasing the distance between the epidermis and the mid-brain and fore-brain both, so that the epiphysis comes to project more and more above the level of the brain. Two further characteristic features are illustrated by Fig. 5, first the small growth of the post-velar arch, so that the distance between the base of the velum and the orifice of the epiphysis is barely more than sufficient for the superior commissure. It is probable that the small size of the post-velar arch is a special characteristic of the elasmobranch type. In other vertebrates the post-velar arch has considerable extension in the sagittal direction, as in Accipenser according to Kupffer, and in ISFecturus, Fig. 13, and Gallus, Fig. 14. Second, the ependyma on the posterior side of the velum has grown thinner, except that towards the inferior edge of the velum it thickens and is then reflected over the edge onto the anterior surface. Finally it must be noted that up to this stage the velum has elongated more rapidly than the epiphysis, after this stage on the contrary the epiphysis elongates much more than the velum.

In embryos of 28.0 mm. the permanent relations are already clearly indicated. The most important advance has been the thickening of the wall of the fore-brain, except as seen in the sagittal sections towards the velum, where the wall corresponding to the area of the paraphysal arch remains thin. The differentiation of this arch therefore occurs quite late, and may perhaps be best described as resulting from an arrest of the histological development, which just in front of the arch progresses rapidly, there causing the brain wall to thicken, and to change into nervous tissue proper. Owing to the continued downgrowth of the parts a deep fold or cleft is formed between the midbrain, M. B., and fore-brain, F. B. In and near the median plane the space of the cleft is almost filled by the epiphysis, as shown in the figure — the wall of the epiphysis being almost in contact with the wall of the mesencephalon behind, and with the paraphysal arch in front. Laterally the cleft between the two vesicles is filled only with mesen

Charles Sedgwick Minot


cliyma, as can be seen iu Fig. 11. Comparison with Fig. 5 shows that the velum has elongated, but comparatively much less than the epiphysis. Both commissures have grown, causing each a local thickening of the brain-wall. Our notions of the structure may be completed by the examination of cross sections, compare below Figs. 11 and 12.

In embryos of 34.0 mm. we find that there has been an obvious growth of all the parts, and in addition we note: — 1, that the paraphysal arch is more accentuated, and has changed in form so that it has now be


Fig. 7. Embrj'o of 34.0 mm. Sagittal series, 363, section 173. Fig. 8. Embryo of 40.5 mm. Sagittal series, 370, section 169.

gun to bend upwards, so as to reach above the level of the fore-brain in front of it; 2, the ependyma on the anterior side of the velum has thinned out, so that it is about the same as the ependyma upon the posterior side; 3, the epiphysis, Ep., is clearly differentiated into a terminal enlargement and a narrower stalk.

In an embryo of 40 mm., Fig. 8, we may point out the general growth, which has continued in all the parts, and besides must direct attention to the following special points: — the marked thickening of the nervous portion of the fore-brain wall, the upward protuberance of the paraphysal arch; the decided curvature of the velum, and its


On the Morphology of the Pineal Kegion

peculiar insertion, which causes it to appear almost (in these sections) like an appendage of the epiphysal stalk; the growth of the post-velar arch between the base of the velum and the superior commissure, s. c; and finally the well-marked thickening of the mesencephalic wall.

I have examined also sagittal sections of the pineal region of embryos of 50 and 60 mm., but, deeming it superfluous to present pictures

Fig. 9. Embryo of 70 ram. Sagittal series, 431, section 293. x 30 diams.

of them, will pass at once to Fig. 9, taken from an embryo of 70 mm. The nervous tissue proper of the mid-brain and fore-brain has grown very much so that these parts now form a striking contrast owing to their increased thickness with the ependymal covering of the pineal region, that is to say of the paraphysal arch, P, and velum, V, and the epithelium of the epiphysis, which, however, is considerably thicker than the velar and paraphysal epithelium. Around the superior com

Charles Sedgwick Minot 89

missure, s. c, there is also a considerable accumulation of differentiated nervous tissue, indicated in the figure by shading with lines. This material does not extend across from side to side but is interrupted by a deep and rather narrow cleft in the morphological median plane — see section 299 — as can be readily observed in transverse and frontal sections of this and earlier stages. The section figured passes through the mouth of the epiphysis but does not pass through the cleft mentioned, hence the illustration gives a somewhat false impression. The thickenings in question are continuous with the wall of the fore-brain; they were termed tuhercnia intermedia by Gottsche, 35.1, walls of the thalamencephalon by F. M. Balfour, and by recent writers are often referred to as the ganglia liahenulo'. I have not pursued the study of these structures further. I will only remark in passing that the term ganglion hahenuJce does not appear to correspond with any morphological conception sufficiently clear to be valuable in comparative anatomy. During the earlier stages the mesodern between the epidermis, Ec, and the brain has been steadily growing and has now reached considerable proportions, but the summit of the epiphysis, Ep., still lies relatively near the outer skin and the organ consequently projects far above the brain; it has begun to curve forward preparatory to its elongation rostrad. As regards the superior commissure, s. c, it is noteworthy that it is now nearly as large as the posterior. As we ascend the vertebrate series the posterior commissure increases in size and importance, but the superior commissure is persistent occurring even in mammals. The velum, V, has distinctly the character of a choroid plexus, being rich in blood vessels, and bearing irregular villous outgrowths, the beginnings of which can be seen in Fig. 8. The velar villi are much more developed laterally and their formation is spreading forward around the sides of the paraphysal arch, a fact wliich I regard as of fundamental importance for our final morphological interpretation.

The last stage I have been able to investigate is an embryo Acanthias of 86.0 mm. which is in a somewhat imperfect state of preservation, the epidermis being in part lost, entirely so in the part drawn, although indicated in the figure; the brain had shrunk a little; and as the ependyma had withdrawn from the mesenchyma on both sides of the velum that structure appears abnormally thick, but there seem to be no important distortions. The anlage of the skeleton, sic, is now clearly defined in the mesenchyma on the same level as the upper vesicular end of the epiphysis, Ep.; the stalk of the same is bent and has begun to elongate forwards above the brain thus making a distinct approach towards the adult condition described by Ehlers and Cattie. The para


On the Morphology of the Pineal Kegion

physal arch forms a distinct evagination, P, with thin walls and its top is irregular as if the walls had formed the anlages of new outgrowths. I am thus led to believe that the arch has not at this stage yet completed its differentiation, but on the contrary is about to form the true paraphysis, or paraphysal gland as a local development of the arch proper. My efforts to obtain more advanced stages having failed I must leave the decision to future observations. My belief, or better said — supposition, is confirmed by the fact that in amphibians and birds the

Fig. 10. Embryo of 86 mm. Sagittal series, 436, section 293. x 30 diams.

})araphysal gland is an appendix of the arch — see below. The velum, V, has now distinctively the character of a choroid plexus being very irregular in the form of its surface, rich in blood vessels, covered by a thin ependyma and projecting far into the cavity of the brain. Laterally the projections from its surface are much more developed, and as the organ has grown forward alongside the median paraphysal arch, it has produced what we can now easily identify as the plexus of the lateral ventricles. These plexuses are therefore to be interpreted morphologically as secondary modifications or appendages of the primary

Charles Sedgwick Miuot 91

velum transversum — compare below, Fig. 12. The superior commissure, s. c, is now in the area of its cross section fully equal to the posterior commissure, p. c, and must be regarded as of great morphological importance. The nervous portion of the wall of the fore-brain shown in the figure in front of the paraphysal arch is very thick.

The ependymal covering of the velum early develops a superficial coat, which appears lightly colored in stained sections. In embryos of 22 mm. (stage of Fig. 5) this border is easily seen on the anterior surface of the velum, but not on the posterior surface. In embryos of 28 mm. the border is conspicuous, but is thinnest at the base of the velum, and gradually thickens toward the inferior edge. The nature of the border is uncertain; the appearance is probably not due to cilia, but suggests rather the formation of secretory spherules, such as I have recently discovered in the cervical glands of the human uterus, the Wolffian body of the pig, and the kidney of the frog. These spherules are formed from the free ends of the cells, and resemble those which, as Mingazzini has shown, are formed on the inner ends of the absorbing epithelial cells of the mammalian intestine. I wish, however, not so much to offer a definite interpretation of the border, as to suggest a line of investigation.

In order to render clearer the relations of the velum Figs. 11 and 12 have been added. These are both from a series of transverse sections of an embryo of 28 mm., or of the same length as the embryo from which Fig. 6 is taken. The plane of Fig. 11 is approximately that of the dotted line A in Fig. 6. It passes, therefore, through the mid-brain, M. B., and fore-brain, F. B. Next the former is the oval section of the stalk of the epiphysis, Ep., crowded into the space between the two commissures. The posterior commissure, p. c, apparently belongs wholly to the mid-brain, as can be seen in the sagittal sections also. The development in Kecturus, in the chick, and in the rabbit and pig also indicates that the posterior commissure belongs to the mesencephalon. When it is further remembered that its fibres in man are of mesencephalic origin, we must conclude that the traditional description of the commissure as situated in the roof of the third ventricle is erroneous, since the commissure does not belong to the diencephalon. Keturning to Fig. 11, the superior commissure, s. c, runs in the cerebral tissue of the post-velar arch — compare Fig. 6 — between it and the velum proper, V, appears the narrow space of that arch; laterally this space curves towards the mid-brain. The velum, V, stretches from side to side of the brain, it consists of a thin central layer of mesench-\Tna continuous laterallv with the mesenchyma surrounding the


On the Morphology of the Pineal Kegion

brain, and of two layers of ependyma, of which the posterior is the thinner.

The plane of Fig. 13 is approximately that of the dotted line B in Fig. 6. The velum, V, belongs to the fore-brain, dividing the cavity thereof into a large anterior (in Fig. 13 lower) chamber and the much smaller chamber of the post-velar arch, which is extended far out laterally, the lateral cavities being slit-like; the lateral post-velar slits are bounded in front (below) by a thin ependyma, and posteriorly (above) by the thick brain wall of the tuhercula intermedia in which one readily


Fig. 11. Embryo of 28.0 mm. Transverse series, 232, section 130. The plane of the section is indicated by the dotted line A in Fig. 6. x 30 diams.

Fig. 12. Embryo of 28.0 mm. Transverse series, 232, section 163. The plane of the section is indicated by the dotted line B in Fig. 6. x 30 diams.

distinguishes the lateral prolongations, s. c, of the superior commissure. As the tubercula belong to the fore-brain their junction with the midbrain, which is marked externally by the apex of a deep furrow, indicates the division line between the first and second primary cerebral vesicles. From such a section as Fig. 13 one might be easily led to interpret the velum not as the division between the diencephalon and prosencephalon, but between mid- and fore-brain, and further to interpret the tubercula as appendages of the mid-brain. Attention should be paid to the two lateral projections, L. cli., of the ependyma on the

Charles Sedgwick Minot


anterior surface of the velum, because these projections not only fix the lateral boundaries of the paraphysal arch but also are the anlages of the choroid plexus of the lateral ventricles. These anlages from this stage on rapidly increase both in size and in complication of form.

I wish now to add certain comparisons of the structures described with those of other vertebrates, particularly with a view of determining the homologies of the paraphysis, velum, and superior commissure. Since Selenka's original brief announcement, 90.1, of the recognition of the paraphysis as a distinct vertebrate organ, little has been added to our morphological conception of it. It is completely ignored by the standard German and English text-books, and Prenant in his Traite


Fig. 13. Necturus maculatus of J 8 mm. X 30 diams.

Sagittal series, No. 23, section 90.

d'Embryologie is the only author, known to me, who has attempted a systematic analysis of the scattered observations.

The paraphysis is a gland developed by a local evagination of the epithelium of the paraphysal arch, and so far as known never is differentiated as a sensory organ.

As I have found no paraphysis in Acanthias embryos up to 86 mm., we must have recourse to other types. I will mention first Necturus, Fig. 13, and the chick. Fig. 14, as on these two forms I have made original observations. In a Necturus of 12.0 mm. (Sagittal series 49, section 60) the stage of the pineal region corresponds more or less to that of acanthias shown in Fig. 3; the epiphysis is evaginated, and there is

94 On the Morphology of the Pineal Region

a well defined paraphysal arch in front of the velum and post-velar arch behind it. In a jSTecturus of 15.0 mm. (Sagittal series 79, section 84) the paraphysis is a narrow elongated evagination from the arch, and so appears again in embryos of 18 mm.. Fig. 13. In embryos of 21 mm. the wall of the paraphysis is irregular, and in a larva of 26.0 mm. the anlages of the paraphysal gland tubes are easily recognized (Sagittal series 377, section 12G).

In the chick the paraphysis is developed very late and at seven days is a small nearly hemispherical evagination. Fig. 14, Par., formed from the paraphysal arch, P, quite near the rudimentary velum, V. A day later the epithelium is thicker and irregular as if the glandular tubules were beginning to form.

In Petromyzon Burckhardt figures a small evagination, which is probably the paraphysis, but his figure does not show the limits of the paraphysal arch. In various forms it is known that the paraphysis arises as a small evagination, which appears just in front of the velum and rather late in development as a local outgrowth. See for example Kupffer's observations on Accipenser; the observations of de Graaf, Burckhardt, Eycleshymer and others on Amphibia, those of Dendy and Burckhardt on reptiles. In all these cases there is a comparatively wide paraphysal arch, and a small paraphysis. The two things have heretofore not been distinguished so that there is considerable confusion in the descriptions.

The existing observations render it probable that the paraphysis is a true gland, the main evagination serving as the duct, while the secondary tubules are the secretory portions. Certainly the type of organization is that of a gland and not of a sense organ, and whenever the adult paraphysis has been found and studied it has presented the same plan of structure. Its secretion must of course pass into the cavity of the brain, so that functionally it is comparable to the glandular epiphysis in birds, and the infundibular gland of all vertebrates. One may suppose that these three glands supply some substances, which are useful to the nervous system, and that they are somewhat comparable from the physiological standpoint to the ductless glands at least in respect to the fact that their secretion has no direct open channel of escape from the body.

The velum probably is characteristic of all vertebrates. In elasmobranchs the post-velar arch remains small, hence the velum seems to arise later very close to the mouth of the epiphysis. In ganoids the post-velar arch is well developed, hence the velum is inserted quite far in front of the epiphysis. As regards the teleosts the data for a satis

Charles Sedgwick Minot


factory interpretation seem to me lacking. In amphibia (as in necturus) there is at first a well-defined velum ; the mesenchyma within the velum increases greatly in amount and converts the velum into a broad structure, Fig. 13, V. I have been unable as yet to follow the growth of the velum in sufficient detail, but it is probable that, as the velum expands, the post-velar arch is incorporated in it and disappears as a separate region. The enlarged velum projects backward, extending

Fiq. H

Fig. 14. Chick embryo of about 7.0 days. Sagittal series, 3.54, section :204. x 30 diams.

even into the mid-brain, and meanwhile expands laterally around and in front of the paraphysal arch, until its wings meet across the median line, Fig. 13, pi. x, to form the anlage of the anterior plexus. The entire expanded velum gives rise to the choroid plexus (supra-plexus of American writers), which accordingly surrounds the paraphysis. In the adult the paraphysis has become a gland of complex structure, as has been so well described by Francotte, but by most writers has been conftised with choroid plexus. In Bana haleciiia I find the adult

96 On the Morphology of the Pineal Region

paraphysal gland very clearly distinguishable by, 1, the character of its epithelium, 2, its tubular structure and 3, its apparently sinusoidal circulation, from the choroid plexus proper, in the midst of which lies the orifice of the gland. In reptiles the velum has been identified and its morphological importance for the class emphasized by Burckhardt (Anat. Anzeiger, IX, 320). In birds, Fig. li, the velum, 7, is almost rudimentary in its median portion, though very broad, and it merges without recognizable boundary into the very broad post-velar arch, which can already be identified as the anlage of the tela choroidea. As regards mammals further investigation is necessary, both to determine the history of the velum and of the paraphysis, if that organ is present in the placental, as Selenka states it to be in marsupial, mammals. In both birds and mammals the lateral portions of velum, i. e. the choroid plexus of the lateral ventricles is highly developed. It thus appears that as we ascend the vertebrate series there is first a broadening of the velum, and an increase of its lateral development, then occurs a further reduction and flattening out of the velum, and a much greater growth of the lateral plexus.

The superior commissure is a remarkably constant structure in the vertebrate brain, and must, since it persists in all vertebrate types, be regarded as a fiber tract of fundamental morphological importance. H. F. Osborn, 84.1, 268, was the- first to demonstrate the homologies, wide occurrence and topographical relations of the tract, and to apply the name " supra commissura." So far as I am aware, it has not yet been recorded in birds, but a more thorough search will perhaps lead to its discovery in that class. It has been found in representative types of all other vertebrate classes, including mammals, for I have observed it in embryos of rabbits, pigs and cats. In all cases it develops later than the posterior commissure — in mammals much later, and is at first ' much smaller than the posterior commissure. It acquires a large size in acanthias and perhaps other fishes, it attains less size in amphibians and is proportionately smallest in mammals. Its position is very constant as it is always situated immediately in front of the orifice of the epiphysis and at the outer surface of the brain wall.

The posterior commissure belongs morphologically to the mid-brain, not to the fore-brain. For the present the epiphysis may be accepted as marking the posterior limit of the fore-brain.

The pineal region develops a series of structures, which, from their anatomical characteristics, appear to be directly concerned in the formation of the fluid in the cavities of the brain. We may assume that the choroid plexus supplies the main bulk of the fluid, but the gland-like

Charles Sedgwick Miiiot 97

"organizatiou of the epiphysis and of the parapliysis indicates that they supply by secretion special chemical substances to the encephalic fluid. It remains, therefore, for the physiologist to investigate these glands and to determine how far their action is indispensable to the brain, and for the pathologist to investigate the possible relations of diseases of these glands to cerebral disorders. The pathological study of these organs seems to me all the more important, because I regard as reasonable the anticipation that the paraphysal gland will be discovered in man.


Ao., aorta.

Chi., optic chiasma.

Ep., Epiphysis.

Ec, Ectoderm.

F. B., fore-brain.

H. B., hind-brain.

Ily-, hypophysis.

Inf. g., infundibular gland.

L. cli., lateral choroid.

M. B., mid-brain.

M., mouth.

ncJi., notochord.

Oc, oesophagus.

P., paraphysal arch.

Par., paraphysis.

p. c, posterior commissure.

Plx., choroid plexus.

sk., anlagc of skull.

s. c, superior commissure.

v., velum.

Ye., jugular vein.

1, praemandibular head-cavity.

2, mandibular cavity.

3, hyoid cavity.

98 On tlie Morphology of the Pineal Region


Cattik, J. T., 81.1. — Verglijkend-anatoniische en histologische Onderzo kingen van der Epiphysis cerebri der Plagiostomi, Ganoidei en

Teleostei. Transl. Arch. Biol. Ill, 101-194, Pis. IV-VI. Ehlers, 78.1. — Die Epiphyse am Gehirn der Plagiostomen. Zeitschr. wiss.

Zool., XXX, Snppl., 607-634, Taf. XXV-XXVI. Galpp, Ernst, 98.3. — Zirbel, Parietalauge und Parapliysis. Ergebn. Anat.

Entwick-ges. VII, 208-285. GoTTSCHE, C. M., 35.1. — Vergleichende Anatomie des Gehirns der Griiten fische. Miiller's Arch., p. 453. His, WiLHELM, 92.1. — Zur allgenieinen Morpholog-ie des Gehirns. His'

Arch., 1892, 346-383. His, WiLHELM, 92.2 — Die Entwiekelung der nienschlichen imd thierischen

Physognoniien. Arch. Anat. Physiol., Anat. Abth., 1892, 384-424. OsBORN, He3«ry P., 84.1. — Preliminary observations upon the brain of

Menopoma. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philadelphia, 1884, 262-274. PI.

VI. Platt, Julia B., 91.2.— A contribution to the morphology of the vertebrate

head, based on a study of Acanthias vulgaris, Journ. Morphol.,

V. 79-112, PI. VI.

Selenka. Emil, 90.1.— Das Stirnorgan des Wirbelthiere. Biol. bbl. X, 323-326.



Aissista7it Professor of Histology and Embryology^ Cornell University.

With 4 Plates.

The work of which this paper is the outcome, was undertaken in the winter of 1896. Necturus maculatus was the form first chosen, but it was soon abandoned for the salamander Desmognathus fusca, which from its abundance, availability at all seasons of the year, and the size and structure of its testis, seemed a more suitable object for the work in hand. A preliminary note on the divisions of the spermatocyte was published in 1899. In November, 1900, the drawings, photographs and the larger portion of the preparations covering what would have been the first part of this article were destroyed by the burning of the histological laboratory of Cornell University. The plates (published herewith) and the portion of manuscript discussing the divisions of the spermatocyte were saved, and it has seemed best to publish that portion without waiting to repeat the work of the first part, which would take several years.'

When this investigation waf- begun, the need for careful work on the spermatogenesis of Ampjiibia was quite apparent. Eesearch on the spermatogenesis of Amphibia had been largely confined to the European salamander, Salamandra maculosa, and to that form alone had a monographic treatment been accorded, in the papers of Flemming, 87, vom Rath, 93, and Meves, though his final paper did not appear until 1897. Since this work was undertaken, however, McGregor, 99, has published a monograph on the spermatogenesis of Amphiuma, and Eisen, 00, has brought out an extensive article on Batrachoseps, another American salamander.

The results of Flemming and vom Rath have been reviewed by Meves, 97, and need not be discussed here in any detail. Flemming's paper,

1 The writer wishes to acknowledge gratefully the help which has been given him with the manuscript and preparations by S. H. Gage, head professor of the department, and by M. Hempstead and C. F. Flocken, students in the laboratory.

100 The Spermatogenesis of Desmognathus Fusca

which appeared iu 1887, is classical, not only as a contribution to tlie knowledge of spermatogenesis, but of mitoses in general. In Salamandra Flemming recognized the period of multiplication of the spermatogonia, followed by the period of growth to form the spermatocyte, which he believed divided twice, forming medium-sized and then small cells. The latter he apparently thought divided again,^ there being thus three generations of cells resulting from the division of the si3ermatocytes. In these divisions were recognized and named two divergent types of mitosis, " homotypic " and " heterotypic " — terms and types widely known in spermatogenesis work. The divisions of the spermatogonia were found to be homotypic, those of the spermatocyte of the first order characteristically heterotypic, though homotypic divisions also occurred; the division of the spermatocyte of the second order was believed to be heterotypic and homotypic equally.

In the interval between the appearance of Flemming-^s paper, 87, and vom Eath's, 93, Weismann, 91, had published his prophecy that in the process of spermatogenesis and oogenesis a " reducing " division would be found to take place.

The results of Haecker, Henking, Eiickert and vom Eath appearing soon after, brought an apparent confirmation of the correctness of this prediction, in the forms investigated by them. Yom Eath approached the investigation of Amphibian spermatogenesis (Eana, Salamandra) fresh from his results in Gryllotalpa, in which he had described tetrad formation. To the three generations described by Flemming he added a fourth in which tetrads were formed and which were distributed in two more divisions, as he believed to be typically the case, making six generations in all. Vom Eath's investigation was evidently undertaken to see if tetrad formation did not also obtain in Airiphibia, and he was led to suspect the correctness of this view by certain descriptions and figures 'of Flemming in which tetrad formation was apparently shown, though regarded as abnormal.

Moves' published work on the spermatogenesis of Salamandra began in 1891, his main paper appeared in 1897, followed the next year by a paper on the transformation of the spermatid into the ripe spermatozoon.

2 The statements of Flemming on this point do not seem to leave his interpretation entirely clear. In his schematic table of the cell generations, only two generations are given as descendants of the spermatocyte, and the following words convey the same impression " Mehr Tochtergenerationen der grossen Zellen als zwei scheinen mir den vorlindlichen Zellengrossen, nicht vorzukommen" (p. 401). Nevertheless, to Meves, Flemming personally stated that he had believed there were three generations of cells.

B. F. Kingsbury 101

His results did not sustain those of vom Eatli; no tetrad formation was found to occur, and there were but three cell-generations instead of six. On the other hand, the divisions of the spermatocytes he found to be equation divisions, the first heterotypic in character, the second homotypic, not mixed as Flemming had thought; furthermore, the spermatocytes of the third generation did not divide as Flemming seems to have supposed.' His paper, 97, dealt with the entire spermatogenesis, the structure and divisions of the spermatogonia, as well as the growth and divisions (two) of the spermatocyte, involving a consideration of reduction. The papers of McGregor and Eisen, which will be considered in the body of this article, supported the results of Meves (as far as the purposes of this paper are concerned). These five papers include the more exhaustive investigations of Amphibian spermatogenesis. Minor papers contributing to our knowledge but not dealing with the question of reduction need not be considered here, as also the work of older writers of historical interest in the analysis of the structure of the Amphibian testis. Of the publications on Amphibian oogenesis, the only one that is of impoi-tance for the purposes of this article is the paper of Carnoy and Lebrun.


The form chosen for this investigation is one of the most abundant salamanders in this locality (Ithaca, New York, U. S. A.), and in eastern United States generally; it is likewise the most abimdant species of the genus. In 1866 the Desmognathidce were recognized by Cope as a distinct family, represented by a single genus, to which have since been added the genera Thorius, Typhlotriton, and finally, Leurognathus.

Desmognathus, in habits is semi-aquatic, living at the edge of swiftly running brooks, especially near or at springs. It chooses concealment under stones at the edge of the stream, or among the pebbles of coarse gravel, saturated with water; dry ground, and also deep water in the bed of the stream, it apparently avoids. If confined in an aquarium of still water, it will crawl up the sides so that its head and a portion of its body are out of water; if prevented from thus gaining access to the air, it speedily dies.

It is said to be nocturnal in its feeding habits. Wilder, 99, wandering forth in search of its food, which consists of small insects (beetles, etc.) and their larvae.

Of its breeding habits and development very little is known. The

3 See note 2, p. 100.

102 The Spermatogenesis of Desmognathus Fnsca

eggs are laid some time in the summer. Wilder has found eggs laid in captivity, June 1st; Sherwood, 95, on the other hand, has found eggs from July to October, so that there is probably considerable individual variation in the time of ovulation. Desmognathus eggs have been found at Ithaca during July and August. Eecorded observations are insufficient for a more exact determination of the time of ovulation. The development of the form is known only in its grossest outline, but the very interesting statement has been made that cleavage in Desmognathus is meroblastic. Wilder, 99, and this statement has also been guardedly made of a member of an allied family, Autodax luguhris, Eitter, 99. The eggs are laid under stones near the stream in a hollow in the mud and are connected together by albuminous cords, uniting them in a group. The female remains with the eggs, which lie in a mass at her side, according to my observations, not wrapped about her body as Wilder has stated to be the case.

Mating habits. — Nothing definite is known of the mating habits of Desmognathus. The investigations, especially of Zeller and Jordan, have made us well acquainted with these phenomena in the genus Salamandra and in the genera of the allied family of the Pleurodelidce, where they consist in the deposition of a spermatophore by the male, over which the female passes while her cloacal lips, coming in contact with the mass of spermatozoa, either actively grasp it, or to them the spermatozoa adhere and enter later by their own activity. Within the cloacal chamber the spermatozoa become ensconced in tubules constituting spermathecae, in which they remain until the time of ovulation. Fertilization in Salamandra (Triton and Diemyctylus) takes place in the spring, and is preceded by a mating. In Triton and Diemyctylus, at least, there is occasionally an autumnal mating, the entire winter intervening before ovulation.

As compared with what is known of the mating habits of these forms, our knowledge of the same phenomena in Desmognathus is scanty, indeed. I know of no published observation on this form which, from its retiring mode of life and (presumably) nocturnal habits, is difficult to observe. The probability is strong, however, that the same mode of mating occurs in this form, since in the male Desmognathus are present in a well developed condition the same three cloacal glands found in forms whose mating is known and which undoubtedly produce the secretion that constitutes the body of the spermatophore. Likewise, the spermatheca is present in the cloaca of the female, and is a much more highly specialized organ than in the Salamandridce and Pleurodelidce. In specimens of Desmognathus taken in the fall, winter, spring and summer, it was

B. F. Kingsbury 103

foimd to be quite full of spermatozoa. This, of course, affords no due to the time of mating or ovulation. Examination of the testis shows that the mass of spermatozoa leave it in the early fall, so that it contains but few ripe spermatozoa. But the ducts are well filled and in the spring the cloaca as well contains a mass of spermatozoa upon a jelly-like base, presumably a spermatophore. This suggests a spring mating with quite probably a fall one also.

Nomenclature and Spermatogenetic Cycle.

It is perhaps hardly necessary to define the meaning of the terms that will be used in this paper as applied to the generations of cells in spermatogenesis, so universally have La Valette St. George's, 76, names of (a) spermatogonia, (b) spermatocytes of the first order, (c) spermatocytes of the second order, (d) spermatids and (e) spermatozoa, been used in all recent work; and so well recognized are the corresponding periods which they characterize— (a) a 'period of multiplication, (b) a period of growth or maturation, (c) a reduction period, sometimes spoken of as the maturation period, and (d) the period of transformation, sometimes also called the maturation period. Meves has further divided the spermatogonia into large and small spermatogonia, a division which, as a matter of convenience, seems to be helpful, though McGregor's terms of primary and secondary spermatogonia are preferred by the writer.

In Salamandra, as Flemming early pointed out, the spermatogenesis forms an annual cycle in which in adaptation to the breeding habits of the animal, the stages succeed each other in chronological order and characterize certain periods of the year. After mating in the spring a multiplication of the residual spermatogonia takes place which continues during the months of April, May and June. During late spring and early summer occurs the period of growth and maturation of the spermatogonia to form the spermatocytes; during June, July, and also into August, the reducing divisions are taking place, followed by the transformation of the spermatids into spermatozoa in August and September. The testis in the winter is filled with ripe spermatozoa, which are emitted in the following spring, when another yearly cycle begins.

In Desmognathus the cycle is shifted but slightly, so that the characteristic periods occur at nearly the same times as in Salamandra. The testis of animals killed in the autumn (October, November) contain none or but few ripe spermatozoa; the spermatogonia are, however, dividing and the secondary spermatogonia have entered upon their

104 The Spermatogenesis of Desmognathus Fusca

period of growth to form the spermatocytes. Mature and dividing spermatocytes occur sporadically, but seem to be those left over from the preceding summer. During the winter a sluggish division of the spermatogonia is taking place and a few lobules containing spermatozoa or spermatids are usually encountered. There does not seem to be much activity in the organ during the cold months, and there is practically no increase in size, but in the spring mitoses become numerous and more cysts of spermatogonia are found in stages of cell division. Growth to form the spermatocytes also begins anew, continuing well into July. During June and July, especially in July, divisions of the spermatocyte are taking place, and multiplication of the spermatogonia has practically ceased. The transformation of the spermatogonia into spermatocytes stops in June, while the transformation of spermatids into spermatozoa, beginning in June or July, extends through August into September. Most of the spermatozoa leave the testis in the early fall and the cycle begins again.

The spermatogenetic cycle of Desmognathus corresponds closely, therefore, with that of Salamandra, differing in the extrusion of the mass of the spermatozoa in the fall, so that the cycle may be said to begin then instead of in the spring, though there is no great activity until spring. The months when the processes of spermatogenesis are actively taking place are the spring and summer months. During April, May and June transformation of the spermatogonia into spermatocytes is predominant; the divisions of the spermatocyte characterize July, and the transformation of the spermatid, August. The processes, however, overlap widely with doubtless considerable seasonal and individual variation.

The Testis.

' This organ is quite elongated and attached to the dorsal wall of the abdominal cavity by a mesorchium in which are the vasa efferentia, blood-vessels, etc., as in other Amphibia. It is highly pigmented, as is also the spermatic duct, the pigmentation diminishing with the expansion of the organ as spermatogenesis proceeds.

The structure of the Amphibian testis has been investigated by several writers, among them von Wittich, Leydig, Bidder, Spengel, La Valette St. George, 76, and Hoffmann, 78, all of whose papers appeared prior to 1880. Of these the papers of Spengel and Hoffmann appear most valuable. Spengel, in his analysis of the structure of the organ, recognized " capsules " (containing sperm-producing cells), connected with a collecting duct by branch-tubules. According to the relations and ar

B. F. Kingsbury 105

rangement of the capsides in regard to the collecting duct, three general types of structure were found: (1) with a longitudinal collecting duct in the center and the capsules radially arranged, (2) with the longitudinal canal superficial and the arrangement of the capsules fan-like, (3) the capsules short (more spherical) and terminating the divisions of the richly branched collecting duct. Between these extreme types, however, are transitional forms even in different parts of the same testis, as, for example, the central longitudinal canal becoming superficial. Hoffmann extended Speu gel's work, adding also to the knowledge of the development of the organ. La Valette St. George, 76, in his wellknown paper, carried the analysis of the structure a step farther. The testis is made up of " tubules " (capsules of Spengel), which may be hollow or not, and these " tubules " are made up of " follicles " enclosing " spermatocysts "—clusters of cells formed from a single original cell by division.

Meves recognizes the occurrence of the " cysts," which are arranged together in the form of a " thick- walled vesicle enclosing a central cavity. . . . Therefore, it is not proper to speak of tubules (referring to La Valette) here." These vesicles again are the tubules of La Valette, the capsules of Spengel.

Far more appropriate seems the designation of " lobule," which will be the term employed in this article. These divisions or lobules, separated from each other by connective tissue, are the structural units of the organ, and each is connected with the central collecting duct by a short tubule. Further, their homology with the lobules of the mammalian testis seems probable. Hoffmann has found that the collecting duct with its branches is developed from the tubules of the mesonephros, suggesting, therefore, their homology with the rete testis and vasa recta. The lobules of the Amphibian testis are not differentiated into tubules, though in some forms (e. g., Bufo) the structure, of the tubule of the mammalian testis is suggested.

The testis of Desmognaihus combines the first and second of Spengel's three types, there being a longitudinal collecting duct, which is centrally located save at the ends of the organ, where it becomes nearly or quite superficial. About this collecting duet the lobules are placed radially, each connected with it by a short cord of cells whose arrangement in the form of a tubule is more or less evident. The form of the testis varies greatly with the season of year, due to the changes in the spermatogenetic cycle. In general, it is enlarged in the center and tapering at both ends, the enlargement and shape of any part being caused by the state of development and therefore size of the component lobules.

106 The Spermatogenesis of Desmognathus Fusca

These begin as hollow vesicles, as Moves has described them in Salamandra, in which the wall is composed of the primary spermatogonia in a single row, each enwrapped by one, or possibly two or three follicle cells. By division of the primary spermatogonia, the wall of the vesicle becomes thicker and of several layers of cells, but the descendants of each spermatogonium remain enclosed by its follicle cells and are thus separated into a group or cyst. By increase in size of the cysts, the cavity of the lobule is soon obliterated and the lobule becomes a solid mass of cells. Each secondary spermatogonium of the last generation undergoes a period of growth to form the spermatocyte, nearly doubling in size during the process. Each spermatocyte divides twice to form the spermatids which become transformed into the spermatozoa. As a result of this increase in the number and size of the component cells, the lobule, and therefore the testis as a whole, becomes greatly enlarged. During these changes the cysts are still evident, each encompassed by its follicle cells, the descendants of the cells surrounding the primary spermatogonia. When the spermatids begin their transformation, the cysts — as cysts — become disorganized, and the follicle cells assume a new function, or (probably) the old function is modified to suit the new conditions. The protoplasm increases in amount and is accumulated especially upon one side of the nucleus. In this protoplasm are inserted the heads of the maturing spermatozoa, as is the case in the organ in the higher vertebrates. AVhen the spermatozoa are fully mature, they lose their relation to the follicle cells and accumulate in the center of the lobule ready for expulsion, while the follicle cells occupy and form the wall of the lobule. The spermatozoa finally pass from the lobule through the short tubule into the collecting duct, and thence by means of the vasa efferentia into the spermatic duct.

The follicle cells now undergo a degeneration and disappear, so that the lobule, as such, eeases to exist. Each lobule, therefore, has a life cycle of a year; develops, reaches maturity and degenerates, and during this time increases greatly in size, finally to shrink and disappear.

While the mass of the cells of the lobule undergo the changes of spermatogenesis, a few primary spermatogonia in the apex of the lobule (i. e., near the collecting tubule) remain unchanged and persist throughout the succession of stages through which the other cells pass. When the lobule is greatly distended with the maturing spermatozoa, they become so flattened as to be rocognized with difficulty. After the spermatozoa have been extruded and the lobule has collapsed, these residual spermatogonia, surrounded by their follicle cells, again round out and present their original appearance and structure. These, by their later

B. F. Kingsbury 107

multiplication, may furni&h the cells for a new formation of the lobule in a succeeding season. McGregor, 99, was inclined to believe that the cells which replenish the lobule came from the cells, forming the ducts of the lobules. This seems hardly probable, since the collecting duct and its branches appear to be developed from the mesonephros, Hoffmann, 86, and not from the germinal epithelium. I believe therefore that residual spermatogonia occur in Amphiuma as they do in Desmognathus, but were not recognized as such. In other salamanders, as Spelei'pes, regeneration of the lobule begins before the spermatozoa leave it. This does not seem to occur in Desmognathus, so that when the lobule is regenerated, it is as a new formation.

In Desmognathus, the spermatogenetic wave passes over the testis in a forward direction, that is, from the caudal to the cephalic end. There are encountered in an organ at the proper season of the year, a succession of lobules containing ripe spermatozoa, maturing spermatozoa, spermatids, speimatocytes, maturing and in division — second growing spermatocytes (of the first order), secondary spermatogonia, and finally primary spermatogonia in the more filiform cephalic end to which the organ tapers. At the opposite end the organ also becomes constricted, general!} more abruptly, where it passes into the mass of interlobular connective tissue, which became more prominent when the lobules shrank and disappeared. The testis accordingly has a rather fusiform shape, tapering at both ends to a filament. The accompanying diagram indicates the succession of regions in the testis of a specimen

Fig. a. Diagram of a longisection of the testis of Desmognathus during July, to show the succession of regions, a. primary spermatogonia ; 6. secondary spermatogonia; c. growing spermatocytes; d. zone containing dividing spermatocytes of the tirst order and spermatocytes of the second order, resting and dividing; e. spermatids; /. transforming spermatids and immature spermatozoa ; ^. ripe spermatozoa; h. " degenerated" lobules.

killed in July, as seen in longisection. The shape and size of the organ, as is evident, is variable, depending on the time of year, being larger in the summer than at other seasons, and of a correspondingly different shape. Occasionally, and perhaps usually, it consists of two, three or even four enlarged portions in which the spermatozoa are

108 The Spermatogenesis of Desmognathus Fusca

developing, these enlargements being connected by more constricted portions. The enlarged parts are identical in structure, each with a succession of stages, from the primary spermatogonia at one end to the degenerated lobules at the other. Their occurrence evidently means that there have been 2, 3 or 4 centers of growth, either primary — in the original cord of germ cells; or secondary — by the division of residual spermatogonia left when the lobule, as such, disappeared. There seems to be no absolute correlation of this condition with other structural features of the salamander, save that the presence of two or more enlargements occurs more often, in fact, quite constantly, in large animals. A similar division of the testis into "lobes" occurs in other salamanders with an elongated body, and has been noted in Amphiuma and Spelerpes. The segmented condition of the organ in Coecilians is perhaps to be associated likewise with the elongated form of body. In the European salamander, Meves, 96, and others have noted a division of the testis into lobes, whose size, shape, and possibly existence, are dependent upon the stage of development of the spermatozoa. Of these lobes, 4-5 in number, the more caudal contain ripe spermatozoa, the cephalic lobe, the cells that will form the spermatozoa, and they are so arranged that different stages follow one another in cephalo-caudal succession. In the cephalic tip, which is prolonged into a thread, the spermatogonia are located, caudad of which are the spermatocytes in successive stages of maturity or division. The lobes also possess different color according to the contents, the spermatozoa imparting a yellowwhite, the cells, a transparent blue-gray. With these lobes, which are not well marked in Desmognatlius, must not be confounded the succession of enlargements spoken of above, which are in effect independent testes.

In the spermatogenetic cycle of Desmognathus degenerations seem to occur quite constantly and normally. These are: (a) a degeneration of spermatozoa left over from the preceding year. This occurs in the organ in the spring, and even, it would appear, in the winter and preceding fall; (b) likewise spermatids undergo degeneration in the spring; (c) when the spermatogonia cease to undergo transformation into spermatocytes in the summer, the last cysts of spermatogonia apparently undergo a chromatolysis and solution, and the boundary between the spermatocytes which are to form spermatozoa that season and the spermatogonia remaining over until the next summer, is thus well marked. After the expulsion of the spermatozoa and the collapse of the lobule, the follicle cells degenerate and disappear. These degenerations, together with the divisions and structure of the spermatogonia

B. F. Kingsbury 109

and a more detailed discussion of the structure of the Amphibian testis, the writer hopes to consider at some future time.

The Geowth and Division or the Spermatocyte.

As is well known, from the spermatogonia are formed, by a process of growth, the spermatocytes of the first order. Eoughly speaking, this transformation involves an increase in the size of the nucleus and the amount of cytoplasm, together with chromatic changes resulting in the formation of twelve chromosomes. The character, however, is given to the cell at the beginning of the period of growth, so that in this article the name of spermatocyte will be applied to it during this time of development, a distinction being made when necessary by applying to it the qualifying word " immature." The growth is evidently slow and takes some time for completion. In the fall and early winter the number of nearly mature spermatocytes is small. The mass of spermatozoa formed from the spermatocytes of the preceding summer, as has been said, have been largely expelled from the testis, though a few lobules usually still retain them. A few lobules likewise may contain spermatids and immature spermatozoa. During the fall, on the other hand, the spermatogonia are undergoing evidently rapid division, so that entire cysts are often found in stages of mitosis, and this process continues at a much retarded rate through the winter, to become very active again in the spring. The transformation of spermatogonia into spermatocytes, beginning in the fall, continues up to about the middle of the summer when it ceases. Divisions of the spermatocyte of the first order are but rarely found during the fall, winter and early spring, though occurring sporadically, especially in the early winter. But during late spring and early summer the divisions are abundant, continuing up to August (about), when they have nearly ceased.

A secondary spermatogonium of the last generation, small spermatogonium of Meves, 96, possesses a round or slightly oval nucleus of' medium size. The chromatin is in the form of an apparent network of irregular shape and distribution. One or two small nucleoli are present. The amount of cytoplasm is small and is especially accumulated on one side surrounding the idiozome (to use the name introduced by Meves). Within the idiozome two centrosomes may usually be distinguished.

In the transformation into the spermatocyte, the network of chromatin becomes changed into a thread which is, I believe, at this time already segmented into the twelve chromosomes which are easily distinguishable a little later in their growth. The spirems are at first very fine and

110 The Spermatogenesis of Desmognathus Fusca

intricately interwoven, the only indication of the segmentation being afforded by apparently free ends protruding on the side toward the idiozome.

Synapsis. — The beginning of the growth period of the spermatocyte is evidently a time of great importance in the process of spermatogenesis. The spermatocyte possesses chromosomes of one-half the number normally occurring in the mitoses of that species, and this pseudoreduction has generally been located as occurring in the growth of the spermatocyte. The view, too, that the reduction in number of the chromosomes is only an apparent or pseudo-reduction, is generally accepted. That the chromosomes of the spermatocyte are bivalent and are two joined together end to end, is of course well known and also seems quite generally accepted. The terms introduced by Moore to indicate this pseudo-reduction and the corresponding period, " synapsis " and "synaptic phase," have been used in rather a confusing way. As used by Moore, 95, in his work on the spermatogenesis of Elasmobranchs, synapsis is equivalent to Riickert's, 93, pseudo-reduction, though Moore apparently does not assume that the chromosomes of the spermatocyte necessarily represent two joined together and therefore bivalent, which pseudo-reduction does assume. At the time that this reduction was believed to take place, there occurred in the forms studied by Moore (Scyllium and Torpedo), a peculiar contracted condition of the chromatin, causing it to be massed upon one side of the nucleus, and giving the appearance of an artifact. This Moore belieyed characteristic of the synaptic period and to be of general occurrence, and to this phenomenon of chromatin contraction, by a species of m.etonymy, the term synapsis has been transferred by several investigators. For this Moore himself seems partly responsible, since in a later paper, in conjunction with Farmer, 95, he uses the term synapsis as equivalent to " the contraction figure." A distinction between these two uses of synapsis seems to be necessary. The first use is evidently the correct one and is followed in this article. The use of the term in my preliminary communication upon this subject is wrong. The contracted condition of the nucleus, Moore found in the elasmobranchs investigated by him and in Amphibia (the Triton). Brauor, 93, had figured and described the massing of the chromatin upon one side of the nucleus in Ascaris, and Toyama, 94, figures it in the spermatogenesis of the silk worm (Moore). Paulmier, 99, describes it in insects (see also Montgomery, 00, p. 354). By botanical workers similar figures occun'ing at comparable points in the process of sporogenesis (the maturation period of the spore or pollen mothercell) have been found in a large range of forms.

B. F. Kingsbury 111

The observations of the investigators enumerated would indicate that the massed condition of the chromatin at the beginning of the growtli period of the spore or sperm mother-cell is a natural phenomenon of general occurrence without affording any clue to its significance; on the other hand, the fact that careful investigations in spermatogenesis have been made without noting the occurrence of any such phenomenon, suggests that it is not of universal occurrence.

In Desmognathus, the contracted condition of the nucleus at the beginning of the growth period does occur, as was noted in my preliminary publication, and it was then assumed to be of constant occurrence in the spermatic cycle of this form. Subsequent and more careful study of the form makes this seem very doubtful. Spermatocytes are being formed during the fall, winter and spring, though growth in the winter is probably slow, and transformation ceases to take place at about the beginning of summer, as has been already stated. During this time contraction figures are found rarely, and it is not until late May or June, or in other words, in the last generations' ot spermatocytes, that contraction of the chromatin into a mass is general. The appearances so produced are quite similar to those found by Moore, Paulmier, Wiegand and others, and are, I think, the same phenomenon; the chromatin gathers at one side of the nucleus, leaving a space within the nuclear membrane, with which it remains connected by a few shreds of linin. At this time the chromatin is closely massed together and details of structure are diflieult to make out, Fig. 18. There is no indication that anything is cast out from the nucleus at this time, as Wiegand found. With other workers, I feel confident that it is not an artifact, though no examination of fresh tissue was made. The fact that it occurs only at the end of the season of transformation at a time when the process is almost ready to stop, dissociates it, I think, from the process of " synapsis " or reduction.

At about this time there begin to appear in the last generations of spermatogonia contraction-figures which are essentially similar to those described above, in which the contraction is excessive. In these, the nucleus gathers into an apparently perfectly homogeneous round mass, the chromatin often separating from it as though " squeezed out." Such contraction-figures become abundant during July and August and are clearly, I think, degeneration changes associated with the cessation of transformation into spermatocytes, whether as cause or effect need not be considered here. Further study of this interesting phase will be undertaken in connection with the spermatogonia.

It is suggested, therefore, that the contraction-figures, instead of

112 The Spermatogenesis of Desmoguatlius Fnsca

being constructive and a fundamental phenomenon in the formation of the spermatocyte, may be an expression of a " running out " in the spermatogonium stock, and represent a tendency toward degeneration. We know as yet too little of the occurrence of contraction-figures in different forms to drav/ any general conclusions; possibly quite different phenomena may be here included. The fact of their occurrence in DesmognatJius only at the end of the season of spermatocyte-formation is, I think, suggestive, and further knowledge of their presence in other forms from this point of view is desirable.

Groictli of the Spermatocyte. — The growth of the spermatocyte has already been well described by Meves, 96, Herman, 89, and McGregor, 99, so that a detailed discussion is unnecessary. The chromatin of the spermatogonium is irregularly distributed in the nucleus in the form of an apparent network, Fig. 1. The changes in the nucleus are the following: The chromatin in the form of small granules becomes more evenly distributed in the nucleus upon the linin frame-work, which still appears to be a close reticulum with the chromatin evenly distributed. Gradually, the chromatin is concentrated in the form of a thread (or threads) connected by the linin network. It is at first hard to say whether a single thread or several (twelve) threads are so formed. Soon, however. Fig. 2, the free ends of threads are discernible projecting from the tangled mass on the side toward the idiozome. From this time on, in the growth of the spermatocyte, the chromatin threads or cliromosomes shorten relatively and increase in thickness. Fig. 3; they may now be counted and are found to be twelve in number. Their free ends, typically at least, are toward the idiozome (see Montgomery, 00, p. 352), so that they form a more or less irregular horseshoe. They are made up of a succession of numerous and large chromatin granules connected together by a less chromatic substance, giving the characteristic beaded appearance shown by Hermann, and now so well known. They are not smooth but possess processes joining the linin network of the nucleus and giving to the thread (chromosome) a fanciful resemblance to a string of daisies, as has been said by others.

The establishment of the spirem from the resting nucleus of the spermatogonium, and the shortening and thickening of the chromatin threads, are but a part of one continuous process of growth, so I have considered them together rather than as belonging in part to the succeeding division. The process is one involving a considerable period of time, as judged from the large number of lobules containing growing spermatocytes in various stages of development. During this period, there is a steady increase in the size of the nucleus, as may be seen from

B. F. Kingsbury 1^'^

the figures 1-6 of Plate 1. The exact method of chromatin change during the establishment of the chromosomes is rather difficult to determine. The chromatin of the spermatogonium seems to migrate out on the linin network as small granules and accumulate in lines as the spirem threads (or thread). Just in how far there is an actual migration ot particles and how far it may represent a chemical change, as of the less chromatic particles to the more chromatic and the reverse (e. g., as the change of oxychromatin to basichromatm of Heidenham), giving the efEect of such a migTation, could not be detected.

Eisen, oo, in his richly illustrated contribution upon the spermatogenesis of Batrachoseps, devotes attention largely to the finer structure of the cells. My work upon the minute details has been insufficient to render a full criticism of Eisen's views justifiable. Chromioles, chromomeres and chromosomes (his terminology) are recognized, and it seems highly probable that the chromioles do unite to form the chromosomes, though not in the fantastic way he describes. Chromoplasts were not recognized, and in the "bouquet" stage, instead of twelve "leaders" there are twenty-four, as may be seen from the transection, Eig. 4. In other words, one "wreath" does not represent two chromosomes joined by a chromoplast, but a single chromosome bent m the form of a horseshoe. Although the term "Auxocyte" was introduced by Lee as a name for the spermatogonium which becomes the spermatocyte of the first order, he fails to use it in his main work on the spermatogenesis of Helix and its introduction does' not simplify nomenclature, especially when it is applied to the spei-matocyte of the first order, either mature or in any stage of its growth.

It seems quite certain that there is not in this period of growth any formation of twenty-four chromosomes which then actually unite to form twelve; nor does it seem probable that a single continuous spirem is formed, which subsequently segments into the twelve chromosomes, though, as already stated, this is possible. The process appears as one of a continuous change and growth by which the distributed chromatin is gathered together in the form of twelve loops. In this case synapsis, actual or potential, would not occur as an observable fact.

But little attention has been bestowed upon the achromatic structm-e of the nucleus or cell body at this stage. The increase in the size of the cell body is quite large, as may be seen by comparing the figures 1-b. The idiozome, with the two centrosomes contained, shows usually three zones, which are, however, ill defined. In tissue fixed in chrom-acetoosmic mixture there is a condensation of substance about the idiozome, as Eisen has figured it in BatracJioseps. This is not shown in tissue

114 The Spermatogenesis of Desmognathus Fusca

fixed in Platino-aceto-osmic mixture, and may be due to the precipitation of proteids dissolved out when the latter fluid is used, which suggests that the idiozome acts as the nutritive center of the cell.

The two points which seem to need emphasis in discussing this stage of the spermatogenesis of Desmognathus are: (1) the early establishment of definite chromosomes while growth is still taking place, and (2) their polar orientation during tbis period of growth in relation to the idiozome and centrosomes. The early formation of the chromosomes in other Amphibia does not seem to have been very definitely recognized or noted, save in the case of Batrachoseps by Eisen.

The First Division. — The first indication of the division of the spermatocyte occurs in the change of position of the chromosomes. They lose the polar arrangement which they have maintained throughout their period of growth and possess no recognizable arrangement in relation to the idiozome. They do, however, exhibit a tendency to take up a superficial position beneath the nuclear membrane. The splitting of the chromatin threads follows next in close succession. Fig. 6. The details of the splitting are difficult to determine. The chromatin segments are long and still possess a bead-like structure. In them the splitting appears as a succession of clefts originating (in some cases at least) in the less chromatic part and merging at last in one continuous space. In which case, it would seem that the division did not begin with the chromatin granules. Whether or not the splitting is complete and the daughter-threads are at first separated throughout their entire length and afterwards fuse at their ends, could not be satisfactorily determined. Moves, 96, believed this was the case in Salamandra, and it seemed to be the case in Desmognathus as well, though it was hard to determine whether or not the ends seen in a section were free or cut ends. The point, however, is a minor one on our present basis of 'knowledge, and need not be considered further. The splitting is followed by a thickening and shortening of the double chromosomes which now are seen to be fused at their ends. In this stage they are usually distorted and twisted, assuming a variety of shapes. Figs. 7, 10. They may be twisted once, presenting the figure of an 8; they may be twisted twice; and also twisted and bent. The typical ring, 0, is frequently found but by no means constantly, even in stages approaching the establishment of the equatorial plate stage.

The splitting of the chromosomes takes place before there is any perceptible change in the idiozome or the centrosomes. The latter become larger, Figs. 6, 8, 9, stain more intensely and are of vaguer outline, appearing surrounded by an umbra. They migrate apart within

B. F. Kingsbury 115

the idiozome which becomes the center of radiations extending throughout the cell-body and also penetrating the idiozome itself, Fig. 9. "When the centrosomes have moved apart, a delicate spindle may be seen extending between them. This spindle increases in size as the centrosomes move farther apart, and with the dissolution of the nuclear membrane, which occurs when the spindle is about half grown, penetrates the nucleus, some of the fibers becoming apparently attached to the chromosome rings as the mantle fibers. When the spindle is first formed its axis may make any angle with the nuclear membrane. Figs. 9, 10; but as it increases in size, it seems to rotate so that the axis is roughly tangential to the nuclear membrane. In some cases the spindle could be observed before the outline of the idiozome had disappeared, Fig. 10. This, together with the penetration of the idiozome by the radiations are features not observed in the other Amphibia, Moves finding in Salamandra that the centrosphere fragments took no part in the formation of the spindle. In Desmognathus, this does not seem to be the case. The chromosome loops do not seem to retreat to the opposite side of the nucleus, but rather to collect upon the side next the spindle.

The linin of the nucleus, I am sure, takes no part in the formation of the spindle, but has a different, irregailar appearance, as of degeneration, and stains somewhat differently.

The chromosomes, at the stage when they are drawn upon the spindle, are irregular rings, usually much distorted; occasionally presenting the form of a Y, by partial fusion of the sides. The typical stage of the spindle formation, such as is shown in Meves' figure, in which the chromatin rings bend in response to the attachment of the mantle fibers to the ends, are of rarer occurrence in Desmognathus, Fig. 13. The methods employed did not reveal any difference between mantle fibers .and central fibers, nor from the study of this division in Desmognathus did there appear to be sufficient evidence for the conclusion that the arrangement of the chromosomes on the spindle and their subsequent migration are due to the mechanical force of contraction in the mantle fibers. A careful study of the mechanics of mitosis in the spermatocyte has not been attempted, hoAvever.

The succeeding stages in the mitosis of the spermatocyte of the first order have been carefully described by Meves, Flemming and McGregor, and Desmognathus diff'ers from the forms investigated by them only in apparently unimportant details. The spindle varies in shape and size though the volume of the spindle appears to remain nearly constant, the shorter spindles being broader. In Desmognathus, as in the other forms, the chromosomes vary in shape and actual size. The amount of fusion 10

116 The Spermatogenesis of Desmognathiis Fiisca

of the ends of the chromosomes varies widely. In some cases the fused ends project prominently from the spindle in the equatorial plane, thus: [^ Such forms occur more often in the short and broad spindles, and it is believed represent an extreme expression of a tendency of the chromosomes to fuse, made possible by different " mechanical " conditions.

The disappearance of the polar radiations as the spindle develops has been commented upon hj McGregor and explained by Meves as due to the absorption of their ends as the spindle grows. In Desmognathus the polar radiations are possibly more marked in the metaphase, but rapidly disappear in the anaphase. In the anaphase the migration of the daughter-chromosomes and their secondary fission as they pass to the poles occur in much the same way as described in other forms, Fig. 16. The secondary longitudinal fission in Desmoganthus is shown in Fig. 15. As the chromosomes approach the poles, they become so closely massed. Fig. 17, that the individual outlines are completely lost. This massing serves to completely mask the secondary splitting that in the early anaphase is evident. The centrosomes pass to the extreme periphery of the cell and become no longer recognizable, so that I was unable to identify them and trace them continuously to the division of the spermatocyte of the second order. A well-defined astral shield was not recognized in Desmognathus, nor was there any indication of a migration of the centrosomes, such as both Meves and McGregor have found in the forms studied by them. The vacuole on the polar side of the chromatin mass, which in Salamandra occurs under the astral shield, is, however, present.

The mid-body and the remains of the central spindle present the same characteristic appearances already well known in other forms, as may be judged from Fig, 17. No attention has been devoted to their meaning and fate.

The Second Division. — The chromosomes in the telophase of the division of the spermatocyte of the first order are closely massed in an apparently structureless mass, much contracted. When the chromatin expands to form the nucleus of the spermatocyte of the second order, the chromosomes separate from each other, and it is then seen that they occilpy the same position as in the late anaphase of the previous division; their apices are turned toward the former pole of the spindle, and the branches of the Vs extend back toward the opposite pole. Fig. 19. This is, of course, of typical occurrence and needs no emphasis. The chromosomes, are, however, seen to be double, so that from the apex of each, where they are united, four chromatin threads radiate out. Fig. 20

B. F. Kingsbury 117

shows a stage slightly older than that illustrated iu Fig. 19. A careful count at this time reveals twelve of these groups of double chromosomes. Polar views of the nucleus of the spermatocyte of the second order are shown in Figs. 20 and 21, while Fig. 22 represents a deep (equatorial) section through a nucleus, showing the chromatin threads cut across. The chromatin threads are at first long, fine, and irregular in thickness, and rough in outline, though a regular succession of chromatin granules, such as made up the chromosomes of the growing spermatocyte of the first order, is not so evident. The linin is at first scanty in amount but increases as the nucleus gi'ows, though it never becomes relatively as abundant as in the spermatocyte of the first order. It forms a coarse mesh-work between the chromosome threads, attaching to them, and thus giving them their irregular outline. The question of the source of the linin of the spermatocyte of the second order is one to which no attention has been given in this investigation, though it is of considerable interest.

The chromosomes shorten and thicken corespondingly, thereby losing their rough outline. The groups of four chromatin threads are in this way converted into crosses or X's, which tend to lie superficially under the nuclear membrane, Figs. 23-27, as did the chromatin rings in the spermatocyte of the first order, and so lose their original polar orientation. At about the time of the dissolution of the nuclear membrane, the X's separate into their component V's which become involved in the spindle. Fig. 29. Their distribution at the time they are first formed is apparently without order or system, so that the equatorial plate stage is one of loose formation. Typically, when the cross is dissolved, the two component V's become applied to each other, and thus are drawn into the equatorial plate in pairs, Fig. 29. This, however, does not seem to be always the case, so that often the V's are separated from each other and promiscuously scattered.

The remaining stages in the mitosis of the spermatocyte of the second order have been well described hj other workers, Flemming, Meves, McGregor, and need not be repeated here. The equatorial plate, anaphase and telophase are shown in Figs. 30, 31 and 32, and from them one may see that the processes are essentially identical with those described long ago by Flemming in Salamandra. The chromosomes become closely massed as they pass to the pole, as was the case in the spermatocyte of the first order. Fig. 32. They become separated again in the dispirem stage, and are once more apparent as V's, twelve in number, with their apices toAvard the pole of the cell. Fig. 33. These soon lose their form and oive rise to a fine reticulum characteristic of

118 The Spermatogenesis of Desmognatlius Fusca

the spermatid. Fig. 34 is a transection of the expanding nucleus of the spermatid, showing the arms of the Vs cut across, while Fig. 35 shows the fully formed spermatid. That the nucleus of the spermatid undergoes a slight enlargement before the period of transformation into the spermatozoon is evident.

The determination of the exact method in which the spindle is established in the spermatocyte of the second order has been attended with considerable difficulty, and despite careful work with many specimens well fixed and stained, it has been im_possible to arrive at an absolute decision. The spindle is established from a stage similar to that shown in Fig. 27. One centrosome lies at an extreme side of the cell-body directly under the cell-membrane, and from it there extends a radiation of fibers. The other centrosome lies close to the nuclear membrane some distance from the first, and it likewise is the center of radiations. The spindle seems to be formed by the fusion of these two sets of radiations. The earlier history of the formation of the achromatic figure is not so clear. The identity of the centrosome at the end of the first mitosis is lost, as has already been stated, so that centrosomic continuity between the first and second divisions has not been established; nor has it been shown that the two centrosomes of the second division were derived from a single centrosome, which presumably would have been one of the daughter-centrosom_es of the previous division. Fig. 25 suggests that this is the case, and that my failure to trace them has been due to the fact that one of them moved close to the nuclear membrane and on that account and because of the absence of well-marked radiations became in most cases indistinguishable. The entire achromatic figure, in comparison with the one of the previous division, is weak. A centrosphere is lacking, radiations are not well marked, and the astral shield at the end of the division is not developed.

From an examination of the Amphibian literature, it appears that there are no figures showing the development of the spindle in the second division. McGregor failed to trace the continuity of the centrosome in the spermatocyte divisions of Antphiuma, though Meves, in his description, leaves no doubt as to his interpretation of centrosomic continuity. Eisen, in Batrachoseps, describes and figures the spindle in the second division as formed by a fusion of two sets of radiations (fibercones) resembling somewhat the method described above as the one believed to occur in Desmognatlius. In his work, new-formation of centrosomes (archosomes) is assumed to occur. His fiber-cone resembles closely one of the centrosomes in Desmognatlius, surrounded by its radiations, and undoubtedly the two are the same.

B. F. Kingsbury 119

The life of the spermatocyte of the second order must be short, very short as compared with the gi'owth period of the spermatocyte of the first order and the transformation period of the spermatid, since never at any time do more than a few lobules contain spermatocytes of the second order. In size these are markedly smaller than the spermatocytes of the first order, and during their existence do not show an appreciable increase in size. The chromosomes remain distinct throughout, never losing their individuality, though a nuclear membrane is formed with a development of linin.

General Considerations.

In the brief discussion just given of the divisions of the spermatocyte, questions of their interpretation as mitoses have been entirely ignored. While sutScient attention has not been devoted to the study of the " mechanics " of the divisions, a word may be vouchsafed on certain points. Any contribution offering correct or suggestive interpretations in this most difficult field must, at the present time, be the result of comparative work, and that I have not done in this case. My aim has been, therefore, to keep the analysis of cell and nuclear structure as simple as possible, ensuring only its being sufficient for the purposes of this paper. Eisen's more elaborate analyses of granosphere, plasmosphere, hyalosphere and cone-fibers, were not found applicable in Desmognathus; they are felt to be premature. The purely mechanical interpretation of the processes of division given by Eisen (and others), I cannot consider at all satisfactory, nor can his statement that " the mitosis of the cells of the testis of Batrachoseps is the result of two independent parallel processes cooperating only at certain points," receive my confirmation from the study of the same divisions in Desmognathus. In the maturing spermatocyte of the first order, the arrangement of the developing chromosomes with their free ends toward the idiozome, suggests an interaction of the two during this period, and the idiozome as the metabolic center of the cell-body. As has been said, if Flemming's fluid is employed instead of Hermann's fluid, there is revealed a massing of substance about the idiozome not indicated by the other fixer — quite possibly soluble proteids. The loss of orientation when growth is attained, the splitting of the chromosomes followed by the changes in the idiozome point, I believe, to an intimate interrelation of the two sides of the phenomena. Meves, McGregor and Eisen have assumed that the arrangement of the chromosomes on the spindle and their subsequent migration axe due to a force of contractility in the

120 The Spermatogenesis of Desmognathus Fusca

mantle fibers, which seems to me quite inadequate as an explanation from the conditions in Desmognathus.

The chromatin changes in Desmognathus, considered by themselves and briefly stated, are as follows: The chromosomes, twelve in number, (presumably) one-half that of the somatic mitoses, develop as horseshoe-shaped threads, the free ends pointing toward the idiozome. These split longitudinally and incompletely, the ends being fused and open out to form rings in the manner typical in Amphibia. In the anaphase, however, the fused ends separate and daughter-V's are formed. As these pass to the poles, a secondary splitting takes place, which (presumably) masked in the late anaphase, reappears in the expansion of the nucleus of the spermatocyte of the second order, when the chromosomes are found to be united at their apices. These united V's shorten and thicken to fotm crosses and X's, which in the metaphase separate into the two component V's. In my preliminary paper was set forth a discussion of the chromatin changes in view of the possibility of a " reducing " division in Desmognathus, and a portion of what was then said may be repeated here. It was there pointed out that the formation of the crosses in the spermatocyte of the second order and their subsequent solution into V's introduced the possibility of a reducing division, since it was not possible to determine in what plane the separation into V's took place. Granted the V's represent

bivalent chromosomes, the result of the splitting and cross formation

a h ^

gives ^ If the separation into V's simply completes the longitudinal

c d • ha

splitting, we have ^ and no reducing division; if, however, it takes


place at right angles the resulting V's are j^ and the division is a

Z) a "reducing" divisions. To quote from that article, 99: "If the second division in Desmognathus is to be looked upon as a reducing division, it may be considered in two ways. The original union of the chromosomes, after two longitudinal splittings of the united chromosomes, is now dissolved and a new union between the daughter-chromosomes established; or, from the standpoint of the more typical mode of reduction by tetrad formation with longitudinal and transverse divisions, there would occur in Desmognathus, a reduction in number to one-half, a longitudinal (equation) division, which, however, is not completed, and is prevented from being completed, by the second division, which is transverse. Shorten the interval elapsing between the first and the second divisions, and (possibly thereby) eliminate the second longitu

B. F. Kingsbury 121

dinal splitting, and the process is reduced to the typical form." Such a transverse division is not believed to occur in Desmognathus, however, and the above is written simply to present all the possibilities of interpretation. If we compare other Amphibia we find that the occurrence of a fusion between the apices of the daughter- Vs with X-formation does not exist as far as reported, save perhaps in the oogenesis of the Triton, as investigated by Camoy and Le Brun, 98. Flemming, 87, in his work, indeed, did not recognize that the longitudinal splitting of the chromosomes of the secondary spermatocyte took place early (in the previous cell generation), nor that the splitting of the daughterchromosomes in the anaphase of his heterotypic mitosis was the precocious splitting for a second, following division; though he recognized its importance and normal occurrence, he confessed ignorance as to its significance. Meves, 96, leaves no doubt that this second precocious splitting becomes completed in the spermatocyte of the second order as the longitudinal division of the chromosomes of that cell division; his words are: "Die zweite homootypisch verlaufende Eeifungstheilung schliesst sich an die erste heterotypische an, ohne dass ein eigentliches Euhestadium des Kerns durchlaufen wurde, sondern dieser tritt aus dem Dispiremstadium von neuem in Mitose. Indem sich die chromatischen Faden aufiockem, wird zunachst die im Dyaster der heterotypen Form aufgetretene Langsspaltung welche wahrend des folgenden Dispiremstadiums undeutlich geworden war, von neuem sichtbar" (p. 61). McGregor,* too, inclines to the same result in Amphiuma, Avhile Eisen does not refer to the steps in sufficient detail, stating simply that both divisions in Batraclioseps are equation divisions. Carnoy and Le Brun, 98, in their work on the oogenesis of the Tritons, agree with the other workers on Amphibia in that they find both divisions are longitudinal. Their results are unique in several particulars. Their figures show the occurrence in the oogenesis of Triton, of X's entirely similar in appearance to the structures in Desmognathus, though it does not appear that they are daughter-V's united at their apices and formed by an incompleted longitudinal splitting. Their figures illustrating the second longitudinal splitting do not appeal to me as satisfactory, and perhaps permit of a different interpretation. The two divisions in the oogenesis of the Tritons follow each other more rapidly, so that a species of tetrad •* " The chromatin emerges from the spirem in the form of twelve Vs longitudinally split, which are probably identical with those of the anaphase of the preceding division, though this cannot be stated with absolute certainty, for it is impossible to discover exactly how the new double Vs arise from the spirem." McGregor, 99, p. 80.

122 The Spermatogenesis of Desmognathus Fusca

formation occurs. The second (axial) splitting may be postponed and occur in the anaphase as ihe chromosomes are passing to the poles. The figures strongly suggest that there is a close resemblance to the divisions in the spermatogenesis of Desmognathus, modified by the more rapid succession of the division in the polar-body formation.

From these comparisons there seems little doubt as to the interpretation of the second division in Desmognathus as a longitudinal splitting, nor as to its being the persistent longitudinal splitting which occurred in the anaphase of the first division. The second splitting in Flemming's heterotypic mitosis is clearly, then, the precocious division of the chromosomes for the succeeding division, and should not be considered an essential character of heterotypic division, since it would not necessarily occur, I believe that Amphiuma agrees with Desmognathus in this respect. The interpretations of Carnoy and Le Brun are unique, and cannot be reconciled with my own findings.

It is not necessary here to refer in detail to the influence Weismann's theory of the germ-plasm has had upon spermatogenesis work. Practically the only detailed work that had appeared prior to his first publication, in 1887, touching on the question of a reduction was Flemming's classical paper upon the divisions of the spermatocyte in Salamandra maculosa. Under the stimulating influence of Weismann's essay, paper after paper appeared — by Henking, vom Eath, Eiickert, Hacker and others — some of which seemed to bring wonderful proof of the correctness of his prophecy, while in other cases, as those of Brauer, Boveri, Moore, Moves, etc., the results were contradictory.

Owing largely to Weismann's theory and its apparent confirmation, there has been a powerful impetus given to the work in oogenesis, spermatogenesis, fertilization and cleavage, and from the standpoint of his brilliant theory new possibilities of interpretation of the phenomena of development have been brought out in testing its accuracy. In so far as it has led to these results, much could be said of the beneficial influence " Weismannism " has had in biology. On the other hand, in the investigation of oogenesis and spermatogenesis, the study of the phenomena has been made too largely a search for the occurrence of tetrad-formation and reducing divisions. An unproved theory, a speculation, highly suggestive and stimulating, but altogether hypothetical and not admitting of even partial proof, has been made the basis of the work, and it has diverted attention from other points of view that would have given a more normal, though perhaps not so rapid, development of this field of work.

A truer basis upon which an interpretation of the phenomena of

B. F. Kingsbury 123

spermatogenesis should be attempted is that of mitosis. The two " reducing " divisions are mitoses with certain peculiarities and should be considered simply as such and investigated from that standpoint. Any explanation of oogenesis or spermatogenesis must be first of all an explanation of cell-divisions. I do not mean that this has not been done by many workers on spermatogenesis; and full appreciation is felt of the excellence of the work of those employing spermatogenesis divisions for the investigation of mitosis. Flemming's classical paper in 1887, with its recognition of the divergent types of mitosis, uninfluenced as it was by theoretical interpretations, seems to me to represent a much more healthy attitude than do many of the later contributions. Occasionally the influence of theory has been responsible for evident eri'ors of interpretation, as, in Amphibia, vom Rath's work on the spermatogenesis of Salamandra.

As is well known, in several groups, by repeated and confirmatory investigations, the absence of " reducing ". divisions has been shown, and this is especially evident in Amphibia, Ascaris, and Lilium. In Amphibia, Flemming, Meves, McGregor, Cai-noy et Le Brun, Eisen and myself have furnished strong demonstration, Ascaris megalocephala has been tested by Boveri, Brauer and Hertwig. Among plants, small doubt may be felt about the divisions in the Liliacece from the work of Strassburger, Guignard, Mottier, Sargent and Dixon. A single wellauthenticated case of the absence of transverse divisions seems to me to be fatal to the theory of a qualitative reduction, and warrants its rejection as a working hypothesis. In its abstract form, it is a theory that cannot be disproved, although as reconstructed it cannot offer a more suitable basis for interpretation. While in certain forms both divisions of the spermatocyte have been shown to be longitudinal," in other groups I think it may be considered fairly well proved, that one of the divisions is as certainly transverse. Carnoy and Le Bruri, it seems to me, go too far in doubting correctness of observation in the finding of transverse divisions. In Insects and Copepods, certainly, the concordance of results permits but one interpretation — that one of the divisions is transverse. Both conditions must be harmonized, then, in any theory of spermatogenesis, and this the Weismann theory does not do.

If we view the divisions of the spermatocyte from the standpoint of

5 In a recent paper by King on the oogenesis of Bufo, tlie conclusion reached is that there both divisions are equation divisions, the "splitting" in the first maturation division taking place very early.

124 The Spermatogenesis of Desmognathus Fusca

mitosis, three features are to be noted; the first of these, is the rapidity with which the divisions follow each other, witliout an intervening interval of rest and growth. The effect of this is, theoretically, a reduction in the size of the nucleus of the grand-daughter cells one-half. In ordinary mitoses, the nucleus, n, increases by growth to 2n, divides so that the daughter-nuclei represent n: by growth each of these increases to 3n, to be reduced in the ensuing division to n, and so on. Omit one of the periods of growth so that the second division follows immediately after the first_, and the nuclei in the daughter-cells of the second division are reduced to -Jn. A quantitative reduction of the nuclear matter to one-half is accomplished as an inevitable result of the two rapidly following divisions. The difference in relative size of the cells of the generations of the spermatocyte divisions may be easily seen by comparing the figures, after reducing those of Plates III and IV, as directed. The spermatogonium has a nucleus Avith a diameter of, say, 25n, the nucleus of the mature spermatocyte measures 32n, that of the secondary spermatocyte has a diameter of 25n, while the spermatid has, as the corresponding measurement, 18n. This, of course, gives but the grossest idea of the size differences of the cells and nuclei. The size of the nucleus depends in part upon the growth period it has enjoyed, and this, in turn, must depend upon numerous factors, among them the metabolic interrelation of nucleus and cellbody, so that, considered quantitatively, the size of the nucleus is largely relative and variable. In the divisions of the spermatogonia there is such a variation in the size of the nuclei that it would be very difficult to estimate the size relative to the original embryonic nuclei. The primary spermatogonia possess large nuclei; these undergo rapid division and there is a decrease in the size accordingly. The period of growth of the spermatocyte again increases the size of the nucleus, restoring it — may we assume? — to the original size before a division. Only in case we assume that the quantity of nuclear matter in embryonic cells remains approximately constant, and that the mature spermatocyte has a nucleus as large as that of an embryonic cell before a division, is it safe to state that the divisions of the spermatocyte accomplish a quantitative reduction to (approximately) one-half.

The second point that seems well established is that in the spermatocyte mitoses the chromosomes appear in one-half the number that has been found in the ordinary tissue (and embryonic) mitoses in the respective forms. The significance that this seems to possess is the prevention of the doubling of the chromosomes and the maintenance of their numerical constancy in the species. It is, therefore, prophetic,

B. F. Kingsbury 125

anticipatory. It lias theoretical bearings on the meaning of the constancy of the number of the chromosomes and their individuality. Great as the evidence is, my inclination is to regard the generalizations as to the imjDortance of a constancy in number of the chromosomes and the adherence to that number in the mitoses of different cells in the organism, as yet unsafe.

The same doubt may be applied to the question of the individuality of the chromosomes, for which the evidence is not as strong. On the basis of the individuality of the chromosomes rests the interpretation of the reduction in number of the chromosomes as to a synapsis or a joining together in pairs, so that each is bivalent. This view may be purely hypothetical and unobserved, as in Moore's work, or based on actual observation, as in Montgomery's. In Desmognathus there is no evidence that the chromosomes of the spermatocyte are bivalent; nor in other Amphibia do we find evidence reported, save perhaps by Eisen in Batrachoseps where the chromoplasts may be interpreted as joining or separating single chromosomes. In that case, however, the number of chromosomes is one-half what it should be in that form.

The third general feature that attracts attention is the existence of the peculiar chromosomxC-forms that characterize the spermatocyte divisions, among which may be included, tetrads, ring-forms, X-forms, Y-f orms, and V-forms different from the V-shaped chromosomes of ordinary mitoses. It seems likely that the differences which exist between the spermatocyte divisions in different forms is due to minor modifications of the procedure, and that they are not intrinsic, so that if the modifying causes could be recognized, the variations could be more easily understood.

As a peculiarity of the spermatocyte mitoses has been mentioned the lack of a period of growth between them. The rapidity with which the second division follows the first in spermatogenesis seems to vary. Perhaps Scyllium, according to Moore's account, presents, among observed forms, the most complete resting stage between the first and second divisions. Here a complete resting period intervenes, with new formation of chromosomes in the second division. In Mammals likewise there is apparently a new-formation of the chromosomes after a resting period, Lenhossek, 96.

In Amphibia there is encountered a step toward the shortening of the interval. In Salamandra, according to Meves' account, a true dispirem, not to say a reticulum, does not seem to exist, and in Desmognathus the chromosomes remain distinct, though they become irregular and threadlike. The second splitting, furthermore (if we may accept this inter

126 The Spermatogenesis of Desmognathus Fusca

pretation), has moved forward from the second spermatocyte into the anaphase of the primary spermatocyte. In the oogenesis of the Tritons, Carnoy et Le Brun, as already stated, tind that the second splitting follows the first so rapidly that by the two splittings, a chromatin ring (tetrad) is formed, though sometimes the second splitting appears in the anaphase of the first division. In all these cases the chromatin division is by longitudinal splittings not (in this respect) markedly different from those of ordinary mitoses, but becoming less typical as the resting period is shortened and the chromatin fission is shifted toward the first mitosis. In all, however, the intervening period of growth is inadequate to restore the chromosomes to their former size, and the chromosomes of the second division are markedly smaller than those of the first, presumably approximately one-half their size, as commented on by Moore, Lenhossek, Meves, Carnoy et Le Brun.

From the Amphibia, it is but a step to the condition described by Boveri in Ascaris, where the second chromosome division, occurring as a longitudinal fission before the first mitosis, forms tetrads by a double longitudinal splitting, which Boveri himself interpreted as a precocious splitting due to or associated with the lack of nuclear reconstruction between the two divisions.

Why it is that, in what is generally regarded as the more usual method of tetrad formation, the chromatin preparation for the two divisions is accomplished by the first longitudinal splittings being (in the typical case) followed by a transverse splitting as the second division instead of another longitudinal one, is, of course, on the basis of bur present knoAvledge, entirely inexplicable. The nature of the changes that go on in the cell and induce spirem and chromosome formation and longitudinal fission is equally unknown, and the explanation of ,why in certain forms and certain mitoses the daughter-chromosomes are formed by a transverse instead of a longitudinal separation, must be wrapped up with the explanation of the former; in other words, the exception must be explained with the rule. Any discussion of the side of mitosis, to which this leads, is beyond the scope and ambition of this article, but the interpretation of the transverse division is to be sought in that portion of mitosis phenomena in general. The fact, however, that in the same divisions, in different forms, the separation occurs in different ways, indicates that the plane of fission is not the determining factor, or intrinsically important, but is itself determined by other factors. Forms in which tetrad formation is accomplished by means of at least one transverse division are, I believe, all forms in which

B. F. Kingsbury 1^'^

the second division of the cell follows the first without any resting


A second point of view from which the chromosome forms may be considered is that of their manifest tendency to fuse. Thus, ringformation typically occurs by the fusion or incomplete fission— which is in effect the same-of the ends of the chromosomes. Almost every conceivable variety and modification of the typical ring is to be met with depending on the region and extent of the fusion; Y-forms Tforms, solid rods, crosses and V's, have all been found. The ring-form is the type and from it all others of these varieties may be derived by the increase of the fused area. Rings and their modifications are found almost constantly in the large majority of forms, with or without tetrad formation, in the first division of the spermatocyte. The more exceptional forms derived from it. while rarer, yet occur also in the first division of the spermatocyte. Thus, Griffin found in Thalassema, Y-forms, rod-forms, and X-forms; van der Stricht found in Tkijsanozoon rod-forms with gradations of fusion modified from the ring-form; v. Klinckowstrom, ring-forms, cross-forms, and rod-forms in the Planarian, Prostliecermis. Many o,ther instances of excessive fusion m the chromosomes of the spermatocyte of the first order might be given in both animals and plants; e. g., Belajeff, 92, Atkinson, 99.

Fusion of the daughter-chromosomes in their middle instead of at the end produces the characteristic X- and +-forms, when they are more or less V-shaped, and as the fusion extends out on the legs of the V- Y- and T-forms as well. These have also been found in the divisions of 'the spermatocyte in a number of forms, and usually in the division of the spermatocyte of the second order rather than in the previous mitosis. Thus, by van der Stricht in Thijsanozoon; by v. Klinckowstrom in Prosthecemus; in Cyclops by Haecker; by myself in Desmognathus. Among plants crosses were found in Larix by Belajeff, in Hemerocalhs by Juel. In Allium, Ishikaua reports the X-formation by fusion of the daughter-chromosomes at their apices in the first division; while in the second division, the chromosomes unite by their ends to form rings, there being thus a reversal of the condition found by me in Desmognathus, which is perhaps more typical. Crosses may, therefore, be formed as a modification of the end fusion (ring-formation), or by the center (apex) fusion of the daughter-chromosomes. These two formsand X— seem to be the types from which other varieties of chromosome form in the spermatocyte are derived.

In tetrad-formation, based on the ring-formation, the tendency toward

128 The Spermatogenesis of Desmognathus Fusca

fusion of the daughter-chromosomes inter se is not so marked, though in certain cases it seems to be exhibited; e. g., in Anasa, Paulmier, gg.

The significance of this tendency toward fusion and its cause are, of course, obscure. Possibly it is due in part to a more labile condition of the chromatin in the spermatocyte, which would cause the chromosomes to run together and round off whenever other forces permitted and in a corresponding manner and degree. This marked lability is indicated by a number of facts that appeal to one in studying the divisions in a particular form, as well as in examining the published figures of the conditions in other forms: the strong tendency of the chromosomes to mass together as they approach the poles of the spindle in the anaphase; the great irregularity of the forms of chromosomes presented; and the readiness with which they change shape. Typical tetrad-formation itself may be in part the expression of this same tendency of the chromatin to round off, due to a more fluid consistency.

Whatever the factors upon which the ring and cross formations depend, it is my belief that they cannot be interpreted apart from the entire problem of cell division. I fully appreciate that no real explanation is offered in what has been written above; nor is it meant as a criticism of the excellent work done upon spermatogenesis and oogenesis. Those investigations in which the spermatocyte divisions have been studied as mitoses are also recognized. I simply present my view as to the standpoint from which the phenomena of spermatogenesis should be considered in order that a firmer basis be given for interpretation; that view is, — that the divisions be studied as such, and the case and effect of the omission of the second growth period be sought; that the chromatin changes be considered from the standpoint of chromatin changes elsewhere and as a part of the entire phenomenon of cell division.

If we return again to a consideration of Desmognathus, we find in the first mitosis, ring-formation, usually quite irregular and variable; in the second division, cross-formation. In the first division it is the ends of the chromosomes that show the fusion more strongly, and rings result; in the second division their middle points (the apices of the V's) fuse and X's result, the behavior of the daughter-chromosomes of the two divisions in this respect being antithetic, a condition that may have significance and which occurs also in other forms (v. Klinckowstrom, van der Stricht, Ishikaua). If we consider the chromosomes in the two spermatocytes in their relation to the pole of the cell (centrosome), in the growing spermatocyte, the chromosomes form loops with their ends toward the centrosomes; in the spermatocyte of the second order, the

B. F. Kingsbury 129

apices of the Vs (their middle points) are toward the centrosome (?), and in each case the portion toward the pole of the cell becomes fused. This is offered without comment as worth consideration, in the firm conviction that the chromatin changes cannot be explained in themselves.

Assuming that the chromosomes of the spermatocyte are bivalent (of which, as said, there is not evidence in Desmognathus), then it is that in the first mitosis one end of the united chromosomes fuses; in the second, the opposite end, suggesting a polarity in the chromosomes themselves, which, indeed, their bivalence itself might be interpreted as indicating.


1. The " contraction figures " in the nucleus of the growing spermatocyte do not occur constantly in Desmognathus.

2. The chromosomes of the spermatocyte are twelve in number, and in their growth are horseshoe-shaped with- the ends toward the idiozome and centrosomes, suggesting a polarity of the cell at this stage.

3. Synapsis was not observed in the formation of the chromosomes of the spermatocyte.

4. The first division of the spermatocyte is heterotypic, with ringformation by incomplete splitting.

5. The second splitting of the chromosomes in the first division is believed to be the precocious fission of the second division.

6. The daughter-chromosomes of the second spermatocyte remain fused together at their apices to form X's.

7. Both divisions of the spermatocyte are believed to be equation divisions, and no qualitative reduction takes place.

8. The spindle in the second division is believed to be formed by the fusion of two sets of radiations.

9. The first and second divisions of the spermatocyte have certain similarities and differences that are suggestive. A comparison with other forms is given.

10. The structure of the testis, spermatogenetic cycle, and the life

cycle of the lobules are discussed.

Histological Laboratory, Cornell University, August 30, 1901.


Atkinson, G. F., gg. — Studies on reduction in plants. I. Reducing division in Arisaema triphyllum by ring and tetrad-formation during sporogenesis. 11. Reducing division of the chromosomes in Trillium grandiflorum during sporogenesis. Bot. Gazette, Vol. XXVIII, pp. 1-26.

130 The Spermatogenesis of Desmognathus Fusca

Belajeff, W., 92. — Ueber die Karyokinesis in den Pollenmutterzellen bei Larix und Fritillaria. Sitzb. Warsch. Naturf. Ges.

Bidder, F. H., 46. — Verg-leicliend Anatomische und Histologishe Untersuchungen iiber die miinnliche Gesehlechts und Harnsorgane der nakten Amphibien. Dori)at., 1846.

BovERi, Th., 90. — Zell Studien, Heft. 3. Ueber das Verhalten den chromatischen Ivernsubstanz bei der Bildung der Richtnngskorper und bei der Befruchtung. Jen. Zeitschr. f. Naturw., Bd. XXIV, 1890.

Brauer, a., 93. — Zur Kenntniss der Spermatogenese von Ascaris megalocephala. Arch. f. mikr. Anat., Vol. XLII, pp. 153-213.

CARJsroY, J. B. et Le Brun, H, 98. — La vesicule germinative et les globules polaires chez les batraciens. La Cellule, Vol. XVI.

Dixon, H. H., 94.— Annals of Botany, Vol. VIII.

EisEN, GuSTAV, 00- — The spermatogenesis of Batrachoseps. Polymorphous Spermatogonia, Auxocytes and Spermatocytes, Journ. of Morph., Vol. XVII, pp. 3-117.

Flemming, W., 87, 91. — Neue Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Zelle. Arch. f.

mikr. Anat. Theil I, Vol. XXIX; Theil II, Vol. XXXVII. McGregor, J. H., 99. — The Spermatogenesis of Amphiuma. Journ. of

Morph., Vol. XV, Supplement, pp. 57-104.

Griffin, B, B., 99. — Studies on the maturation, fertilization and cleavage of Thalassema and Zirj)haea. Journ. of Morph., Vol. XV, pp. 583-634.

GuiGNARD, L., 91. — Nouvelles Etudes sur la Fecondation. Ann. d. sci. nat.

Bot., T. XIV, 1891. Haecker, v., 99. — Praxis und Theorie der Zellen und Befruchtungslehre.

Jena, 1899. Henking, H., 91. — Untersuchungen iiber die ersten Entwicklungsvorgiinge

in den Eiern der Insekten. Ill Specielles und Allgemeines.

Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool., Vol. LIV; also Vol. XLIX; LI. Hermann, F., 89. — Beitrage zur Histologic des Hodens. Arch. f. mikr.

Anat., Vol. XXXIV. Hertwig, O., 90. — Arch. f. mikr. Anat., Vol. XXXVI. Hoffmann, C. K., 78- — Bronns Klassen und Ordnungen des Thierreiches.

Bd. VI, 2te Abth. Amphibien.

Hoffmann, C. K., 86. — Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte der Urogenitalorgane

bei den Anamnia. Zeitschr, f. wiss. Zool., Vol. XLIV, 1886, pp. 570 643. ISHIKAUA, M., 97. — Studies of Reproductive Elements. III. Die Entwick lung der Pollenkorper von Allium fistulosum L., ein Beitrag zur

chromosomenreduction im Pflanzenreiche. Journ. Coll. Sci.,

Tokyo, X, 2. Jordan, E. O., 91. — The Spermatophores of Diemyctylus. Journ. of

Morph., Vol. V, pp. 263-270. JuEL, H. O., 97. — Die Kerntheilungen in den Pollenmutterzellen. Jahrb.

d. wiss. Bot., Vol. XXX.

B. F. Kingsbury 131

Kingsbury, B. F., 95. — The Spermatlieca and Methods of Fertilization in some American Newts and Salamanders. Proc. Am. Micr. Soc, Vol. XVII, 1895, pp. 261-304.

Kingsbury, B. F., gg. — The Keducing Divisions in the Spermatogenesis of Desxnognathus fusca. Zool. Bulletin, Vol. II.

Klinckowstrom, a. v., 97. — Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Eireife und Befruchtnng bei Prostheceraeus. Arch. f. mikr. Anat., Vol. XLVIII.

Lee, a. B., gy. — Les Cineses Spermatogenetiques chez I'ilelix pomatia. La Cellule, Vol. XIII, pp. 199-278, 1897.

Lenhossek, M. von, g6. — Untersuchungen iiber Spermatogenese. Arch. f. mikr. Anat., Vol. LI.

Leydig. Untersuchungen iiber Fischen und Reptilien.

Meves, F., g6. — Ueber die Entwicklung der mannlichen Geschlechtszellen

von Salamandra maculosa. Arch. f. mikr. Anat., Vol. XLVIII. Moore, J. E. S., 95. — On the Structural Changes in the Eeproductive Cells

during the Spermatogenesis of Elasmobranchs. Quart. Journ.

Mikr. Sci., Vol. XXXVIII, 1895.

MooRE, J. E. S. and Farmeb, J. B., g5. — Essential Similarity of the chromosome reduction in Animals and Plants. — Annals of Botany, Vol. IX, p. 435, 1895.

MoTTiER, D. M., ^'j. — ^Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Kerntheilungen in den Pollenmutterzellen. Jahrb. d. wiss. Bot., Vol. XXX, 1897.

Montgomery, Th. H., 98.— The Spermatogenesis of Pentatoma up to the formation of the Spermatid. Zool. Jahrb., Vol. XII; Abt. f. Anat. u. ontogenie.

Montgomery, Th. H., 00. — The Spermatogenesis of Peripatus (Peripatopsis) balfouri up to the Formation of the Spermatid. Zoolog. Jahrbiichern: Abth. f. Anat. \md Ontogenie der Thiere, Vol. XIV, pp. 277-368, 1900.

Paulmier, gg. — The Spermatogenesis of Anasa tristis. Anat. Anz., Vol. XIV; Journ. of Morph., Vol. XV, suppl., pp. 223-272.

VoM Eath, 0., g3. — Zur Kenntniss der Spermatogenese von Salamandra maculosa. Zeitschr. f. v^ass. Zool., Vol. LVII.

VoM Rath, O., g2. — Zur Kenntniss der Spermatogenese von Gryllotalpa vulgaris Latr. Mit besonderer Berlicksichtigung der Frage der Eeductionstheilung. Arch. f. mikr. Anat., Vol. XL, p. 102.

EiTTER, W. E., and Miller, Loye, gg.— A contribution to the life-history of Autodax lugubris, Hallow, a Californian Salamander. Am. Nat., Vol. XXXIII, 1899, pp. 691-704.

EucKERT, J., g3. — Die Chromatinreduction der Chromosomenzahl im Entvs^icklungsgang der Organismen. Merkel & Bonnet, Ergebnisse, Vol. III.

Sargent, Ethel, g6, 97.— The formation of the Sexual Nuclei in Lilium Martagon. Annals of Bot., Vol. X; Vol. XL

Sherwood, W. L., 95. — The Salamanders found in the Vicinity of New York City, with notes on extra-limital or allied Species. Proc. Linnean Soc. of New York, No. 7, pp. 21-37. 11

132 The Spermatogenesis of Desmognathus Fusca

Spengel, 76. — Das Urogenitalsystem der Amphibien. Arbeiten des zoolog'. zootom. Instituts in Wlirzburg, Vol. Ill, Ileft. 1, 1876. La Valette, St. Geoege, 76- — Ueber die Genese der Samenkorper. Die

Spermatogenese bei den Amphibien. Arch. f. milir. Anat., Vol. XII. Steassburgek, E., u. Mottier, 97. — Ueber den zweiten Theilungsschritt in

Pollenniutterzellen. Ber. d. Deutsch. Bot. Ges., Vol. XV, nr. 6. VAN der Stricht, 98. — Contribution a I'etude, de la forme, de la structure,

et de la division du noyau. Bull, de I'acad. de Belgique, Ser. 3,

T. XXIX, 1898. ToYAMA, 94. — On the Spermatogenesis of the Silk-worm. Bull. Agr. Coll.

Imp. Univ., Tokio, Vol. II, No. 3. Wbismann, a., 87. — Ueber die Zahl der Eichtungskorper und iiber ihre

Bedeutung fiir die Vererbung. Jena, 1887. Weismann, a., 93. — The Germ-plasm. New York. WiiiDEK, H. H., 99. — Desmognathus fusca (Eafinesque) and Spelerpes bili neatus (Green). Am. Nat., Vol. XXXIII. Wilson, E. B., 00. — The Cell in Development and Inheritance. The Mac Millan Co., New York, 1900. VON WiTTiCH, 53. — Beitrage zur Morphologische und Histologische Ent wicklung der Ham und Geschlechtswerkzeuge der nakten Amphibien. Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool., Bd. IV, 1853. Zeller, Ebnest, 90. — Ueber die Befruchtung bei den Urodelen. Zeitschr.

f. wdss. Zool., Vol. XLIX, pp. 583-602, 1890.

Explanation of Plates.

All the figures of the tour plates are drawn at the same magnification with a Leitz microscope, draw-tube in, Leitz 1/16 in. immersion objective, and Leitz No. 4 Ocular. All figures on plates III and IV are reduced only Yz the extent of plates I and 11. % was taken off any diameter of figures on plates I and II. Only i/g taken off any diameter of figures on plates III and IV. Hence take 14 more off any diameter of a figure on last two plates, to compare size with a figure on first two plates. All were drawn from longitudinal sections of Desmoffnathxis testes, fixed in Hermann's fluid (except Fig. 7, where the fixer was Flemming's chrom-aceto-osnaic mixture, strong formula) and stained with Heidenhain's iron hematoxylin. The sections from which they were drawn, were paraffin sections, 10 and 7 fi thick.


Division of Spermatocyte I.

Fig. 1. Secondary spermatogonium of the last generation, showing as yet no indication of the beginning of the growth period.

Fig. 2. Spermatocyte soon after the beginning of the growth has become evident. The chromatin is becoming arranged in the form of threads. A nucleolus is shown.

Fig. 3. Spermatocyte, later stage of growth; spirems larger and better defined. Indication of the chromosome threads vdth their free ends towards the idiozome.





•• #

0m "^Cs














^ ^




\.V. T".,












B. F. Kingsbury 133

Fig. 4. Spermatocyte. Transection of the nucleus when growth is nearly completed. Most of the chromosome-loops are cut twice.

Fig. 5. Spermatocytes. Growth nearly completed. Three cells are cut nearly "longitudinally "; one cell shows the idiozome but not the nucleus. The chromosomes are in the form of looi^s with their free ends toward the idiozome. This is about the same stage as Fig. 4.

Fig. 6. Splitting of the chromosome threads in two adjacent cells. Chromosomes have lost their orientation in relation to the idiozome. Splitting in some of the threads is not continuous.

Fig. 7. Three Spermatocytes, showing ring-formation; some of the chromosomes are twisted as 8's; while fragments only of others are seen. But one cell is cut in the right plane to show the idiozome. The two centrosomes are yet close together.

Fig. 8. Spermatocyte. Section at the beginning of spindle-formation. The centrosomes within the idiozome have moved slightly apart and faint radiations have appeared. The chromosome rings are situated superficially under the nuclear membrane and are cut irregularly.

Fig. 9. Spermatocyte. Stage slightly older than that of Fig. 8. Kadiations are more distinct and penetrate the' idiozome. Centrosomes naore distinct. Chromosomes near the nuclear membrane.

Fig. 10. Stage older than Fig. 9. Two cells are shown with young spindles forming. The outline of the idiozome is still preserved. Note the angle of the spindle axis. The nucleus of one of the cells is cut superficially, and the chromosome forms are well shown. In the other cell, the chromosonQes are on the side of the nucleus toward the idiozome.

Fig. 11. Spermatocyte. Later stage; spindle well formed, with but two chromosomes shown at the level.

Fig. 12. Spermatocyte. Deeper section of the same cell shown in Fig. 11. Ring chromosomes are w^ell shown. Note their shape and bending. Two Y-shaped chromosomes are shown.

Fig. 13. Spermatocyte. Spindle at a later stage. The chromosomes are being arranged on the spindle. The rings are bent in a typical manner.

Fig. 14. Spermatocyte. " Equatorial plate " stage, showing a typical spindle. The chromosomes are breaking apart in the equatorial plate. Fused ends of some of the chromatin loops are seen projecting.

Fig. 15. Spermatocyte. An oblique polar view of the daughter-chromosomes as they pass to the pole, showing the second splitting.

Fig. td. Spermatocyte. Late anaphase. The chromosomes approaching the poles.

Fig. 17. Spermatocyte. Telophase. The chromosomes have become closely massed; a vacuole caps the mass. Mid-body and remains of the spindle are shown.

Fig. 18. Spermatocyte. At the beginning of the growth period, with the nucleus in a " contracted " condition. The chromatin is in a dense mass, still connected with the nuclear membrane by strands. Detail of structure in tlie nucleus cannot be made out.

134 The Spermatogenesis of Desmognathus Fiisca


The figures of tlhcse two plates must he reduced y^ more {i.e., y^ off any diameter) to permit of correctly comparing size with figures on the first two plates.

Division of Spermatocyte II.

The following- figures may be compared with the corresponding stages of the Spermatocyte I:

Fig. 19. Secondary Spermatocyte. Two danghter-cells of the first division at the " dispirem " stage. The chromosomes have expanded somewhat; the apices of the V's are still toward the pole of the cells.

Fig. 20. Secondary Spermatocj^te. Later stage. Slightly oblique view showing five of the chromosomes, which are seen to be double. They still maintain their polar arrangement.

Fig. 21. Secondarj^ Spermatocyte. Polar view of a similar stage. Eight chromosomes more or less complete are shown. The polar arrangement is still maintained.

Fig. 22. Secondary Spermatocyte. Ti'ansection (equatorial section) of the nucleus at a deeper level. The cut chromosome threads are shown; and their arrangement in fours is indicated. The apex of one group of four threads is seen.

Fig. 23. Secondary Spermatocyte. Later stage. Three cells are shown; in one the section is near the middle and the chromosomes, now shortened to X's, are seen to lie superficially. In the other tw^o cells, the section cuts the nucleus nearer the s\:rface.

Fig. 24. Secondary Spermatocyte. Stage similar to that shown in Fig. 23. Crosses and X's are shown.

Fig. 25. Secondary Spermatocyte. Longisection at the beginning of spindle formation. The chromosomes are in the form of crosses and are next the nuclear membrane.

Fig. 26. Secondary Spermatocyte. A later (?) stage. The nucleus is cut superficially. One centrosome only can be seen next the cell membrane.

Fig. 27. Secondary Spermatocyte. Spindle formation. The one centrosome is located near the cell-membrane, the other at a distance, near the nucleus, and a spindle is not yet formed between them.

Fig. 28. Secondary Spermatocyte. Later stage; spindle almost completed. Nuclear membrane has been dissolved.

Fig. 29. Group of five secondary spermatocytes. The equatorial plate stage just being established. The crosses in most cases have been dissolved, and the daughter-Vs have become applied to each other. Tw^o of the cells are cut somewhat obliquelj' so that only one pole of the spindle is shown.

Fig. 30. Secondary Spermatocyte Typical equatorial plate stage. The spindle is quite spherical; mantle fibers are shown.

Fig. 31. Secondary Spermatocyte. Anaphase. Daughter-Vs passing to the poles of the spindle.






























B. F. Kingsbury \3o

Fig. 32. Secondary Spermatocyte. Telophase. Chromosomes closely massed at the poles. Division of the cell-body completed. Mid-body and spindle-relic seen.

Fig. 33. Spermatid. Oblique polar view of a daughter-nucleus of the division of Spermatocyte II, at the " dispirem " stage, when the chromosomes again expand.

Fig. 34. Spermatid. Transection of the nucleus at the stage of Fig. 33, showing the legs of the V's cut across.

Fig. 35. Spermatid, fully formed. The chromatin is irregularly distributed in small masses. The two centrosomes at the edge of the cell-body, near the " Sphere."



JOHN LEWIS BREMER, M. D. From the Embryological Laboratory of Harvard Medical School.

With 9 Text Figukes.

The material used in prepai'ing this paper is from the collection of the Laboratory of Embryology at the Harvard Medical School; the original numbers of the series and sections have been preserved. The drawings are from reconstructions, and represent, as it were, casts of the lumina of the arteries without reference to the thickness of their walls. They are all of the same magnification (X 80 diameters); the arteries are seen from behind, and the pulmonary arches can be followed until they unite to form the truncus pulmonalis, or until, as in Fig. 1, they enter the heart itself.

In 1857, H. Rathke published his monograph, "Die Aortenwiirzeln und die von ilinen ausgehenden Arterieii der Saurier," in which appear the diagrams of the aortic arches now made more familiar by their reproduction by Kolliker, Hertwig, Quain, and many others, Avith or without slight modifications. In these diagrams the right and left pulmonary arteries are represented as arising, in lizards and birds, from their respective fifth, or pulmonary, arches, while in snakes and in mammals one fifth arch alone gives rise to both pulmonary arteries, the other arch becoming obliterated; in snakes the right pulmonary arch remains, in mammals the left. Since this monograph there has been, so far as I know, no special investigation into the origin of the pulmonary arteries.

The earliest buds of the pulmonary arteries, in the rabbit, appear in embryos of about 4.0 mm., one bud from each of the puhuonary arches, on the mesial aspect of each. The growth of these buds is at first backward, then downward and inward, giving a small twist, Figs. 1, 2, 3, x, near the proximal end of the pulmonary artery, which seems peculiar to the rabbit. From this twist, the course is straight downward, on each side of the trachea and slightly anterior to it, to the lungs, where the usual branches are given off. During this downward course no branches

138 On the Origin of the Puhnonary Arteries in Mammals

are seen. As the arteries increase in length their proximal ends, where they arise from the aortic arches, seem to approach each other actually, as can be seen by comparing Figs. 1, 2 and 3. The mechanism of this change is probably as follows: the truncus pulmonalis is at first short, soon dividing into its two branches, the right and left fifth aortic arches; as it becomes twisted around the aorta, following the turn of the heart, the truncus pulmonalis pulls on the two fifth arches, which are thus crowded together, forming a double tube, and at the same time the two pulmonary arteries, arising from the mesial aspect of the two arches, are

Fig. 1.


Fig. 1. Kabbit of 5.0 mm. Frontal series No. 14S, sections 250-261. X 80 diameters. A, B, left and right pulmonary arches, opening directly into heart, H. C, D, pulmonary arteries. F, G, fourth aortic af-ches, opening into heart.

.Fig. 2. Eabbit of 8.0 mm. Frontal series No. 154, sections 291-311. X 80 diameters. E, junction of A and B. H, valve of heart.

brought nearer together. By fusion of the two parallel arches the truncus pulmonalis is increased in length, and its two branches shortened; this fusion may extend until the origins of the pulmonary arteries are very near the bifurcation, or until the left artery springs actually from the bifurcation.

The diameter of the pulmonary arteries remains small in comparison to their increasing length, as one might expect from the slight necessity

John Lewis Bremer


of blood in the unused lungs. The left pulmonary arch grows rapidly in diameter as well as in lengtli, while the right becomes entirely obliterated beyond the point where the pulmonary artery arises, leaving finally no trace of its existence; from this point to the junction with the left arch to form the truncus pulmonalis, the right arch remains of the same calibre as the pulmonary artery. The small twist marking the origin of the pulmonary artery gradually straightens out, and the whole right side, i. e. the anterior portion of the fifth arch and the

Fig. 3.

Fig. 4.

Fig. 3. Habbit of 10.0 mm. Frontal series No. 157. sections 347-367. X 80 diameters. ,

Fig. 4. Pig- of 7.8 mm. Frontal series No. 430, sections 270-297. X 80 diameters.

pulmonary artery, being now unattached to the right dorsal aorta, is drawn to the left by the larger left aortic arch, which is constantly tending to become straight. As a result of these changes, the left pulmonary arch seems to give rise, at about its mid-point, to two arteries, with their origins close together (or there may be a very short common stem); the right one, the longer of the two, arising anteriorly, and taking its course

140 On the Origin of the Pulmonary Arteries in Mammals

at first almost horizontally across to the right side of the trachea, then bending down toward the right lung, the left pursuing a straight course to the left lung. The portion of the left fifth arch posterior to the pulmonary arteries becomes later the Ductus Botalli, and is closed at birth.

It will be seen from this description that, in the actual origin of the pulmonary arteries, the rabbit is identical with birds and reptiles, as drawn by Rathke and verified by many other writers. In the rabbit, as well as in birds and reptiles, one pulmonary artery arises from each pulmonary arch, but in birds and reptiles the growth of these arches is equal until birth, so that the picture is symmetrical, a fifth arch, a pulmonary artery, and a Ductus Botalli on each side; while in the rabbit the left pulmonary arch alone remains until birth, and the picture is distorted. It was this distortion, this early disappearance of that portion of the right pulmonary arch posterior to the pulmonary artery, which made possible the diagram of Eathke, and his statement that '^in mammals the left fifth aortic arch at a very early period of embryonic life sends out from about its mid-point a small branch which is intended for both lungs, and posterior to its place of origin divides into two twigs."

Eathke examined, of mammals, the pig, sheep, and hare, with special reference to the pulmonary arteries.^ In the rabbit, cat, and in the few human embryos within my reach, I have found the pulmonary arteries to arise as I have stated, that is, in the beginning, symmetrically, one from each pulmonary arch. In Eathke's original diagrams the arteries of lizards and of birds arise symmetrically, as do they also in the frog, as described by Gaupp.^ Of snakes, according to Stannius and others, while most species have only the right lung, and therefore only the right pulmonary artery, in adult life, some species have the left lung and left artery alone, and others even both lungs and both arteries, more or less fully developed. In two cases, recently cited by F. Hochstetter,^ of Trojudonotus tessellatus (a species with only the right lung normally developed), a slender artery was found, which, although finally ramifying in the oesophageal wall, resembled in origin and course a left pulmonary artery. From these facts it seems probable that in the younger snake embryos, of all species, both pulmonary arteries will be found present. If this is the case, the proof will be strong that in all

iMiiller's Archiv, 1848, p. 276.

2 Anatomic des Frosches, diagram, p. 285.

3 Morpliologisches Jahrbucb, 1901, p. 419.

John Lewis Bremer


vertebrates with lungs the laulmonary arteries originate one from each pulmonary arch, and "that Rathke's diagrams, though describing perfectly the adult and late embryonic conditions, are, as regards this origin, incorrect.

In the pig, one of the animals examined by Rathke, although the symmetrical origin is preserved, one pulmonary artery arising from each pulmonary arch, and although the ultimate appearance, that of both

Fig. 5.

Fig. 6.

Fig. 5. Pig of 9.0 mm. Frontal series No. 54, sections 462-502. X 80 diameters.

Fig. 6. Pig of 11.0 mm. Sagittal series No. 8, sections 96-113. X 80 diameters.

pulmonary arteries arising from the mid-point of the left pulmonary arch, is the same as in the other mammals I have examined, the intermediate steps are different, as is shown in Figs. 4 to 9. Instead of remaining comparatively parallel, as in the rabbit, the pulmonary arteries, after attaining considerable length (pig of 7.8 mm.), bend toward

142 On the Origin of the Puhnonary Arteries in Mammals

each other, and instead of remaining without branches (except those developed later in the lungs) send out buds, each toward the other artery. Fig. 4, x, y. This bending toward the median line of these two

Fig. 7. Pig of 12.0 mm. Transverse series No. 5, sections 366-404, X 80 diameters.

Fig. S. Pig- of 12.0 mm. diameters.

Frontal series No. 6, sections 429-464. X SO

pulmonary arteries is perhaps caused by the great growth of the auricles of the heart in the pig. Both processes continue until in a pig of 9 mm. there is at least one connection between the right and left pul

John Lewis Bremer


nionary arteries, often two, as is suggested in Fig. 5, x, y, while in a pig of 11.0 mm. the two arteries, along a considerable part of their length, have merged into one channel. Fig. 6. Meanwhile the upper or proximal part of the right pulmonary artery, which often shows signs of

Fig. 9. Pig of 20.0 mm. diameters.

Frontal series No. 61, sections 270-279. X 80

irregularity, such as a double origin. Figs. 4 and 7, D, ceases to increase in size, then grows smaller, and soon becomes obliterated, so that all the blood to both lungs flows through the left pulmonary ai-tery. This gradual change is shown at D, Figs. 5, 6 and 7, and in Fig. 8, where only the remains of the right artery are seen. For a little while after the obliteration of the lumen, a cord of connective tissue marks the

144 On the Origin of the Pulmonary Arteries in Mammals

former course of the right pulmonary artery, but soon even this disappears.

Along with this change, another, common to all mammals, has taken place, namely, the obliteration of the right pulmonary arch; but this is not the cause of the obliteration of the right pulmonary artery, since the lumen of the latter is the first to close. Fig. 8. Still another change is seen, as in the rabbit, in the lengthening of the truncus pulmonalis at the expense of the two pulmonary arches, and the consequent apparent movement of the left pulmonary artery toward the right pulmonary arch. In the pig, considerable variation seems to occur in regard to the stage of growth at which this last mentioned change takes place, as may be seen by comparing Figs. 6 and 7, where the distance between the points of origin of the pulmonary arteries is about the same in two pigs of 11.0 and 12.0 mm., respectively, and Fig. 8, where the distance is much greater, although the length of the embryo is again 12.0 mm. It will be seen that of the two 12.0 mm. pigs, one still has, and one has already lost, the connection of the right pulmonary artery.

Whether all ungulates, or only pigs, have this odd method of arriving at the adult relations of the pulmonary arteries, I do not as yet know; certainly there is nothing like it in the rabbit, the cat, the dog, or in the human embryos within my reach.




Instructor in Anatomy, The Anatomical Laboratory, Johns Hopkins University.

With 3 Plates and 14 Text-Figures.

The wandering of the trapezius and the latissimus dorsi and also of muscles in the ahdominal wall was noted by Dr. Mall ' several years ago. At his suggestion I undertook, in the spring of 1897, a more careful study of these and other changes in the development of the arm region in man. Similar studies were undertaken later by Dr. Bardeen on the leg and body wall. We have embodied many of the important points obtained from our studies in a joint article ^ which appeared in the first number of this journal, and of which this present article may be considered a continuation.

In the present paper I purpose to consider the origin of the tissue which fills the arm bud, the entrance of nerves into this tissue and its differentiation into skeleton, ligaments, muscle and tendon, and finally the growth and wandering of these structures until practically the adult conditions are present.

I wish here to express my most sincere thanks to Dr. Mall for his constant interest and many suggestions, and also for the use of the valuable embryological material in this laboratory.

The embryos studied, with the exception of the one belonging to Dr. Buxton, of Cornell University, are in the collection belonging to Dr. Mall. Most of those considered in this paper are tabulated on page 2, Vol. I, of this journal.

From the serial sections of embryos CLXIII, CIX, XLIII and XXII I have made reconstructions of the arm region after the Born method. The arm region in Plates III to IX in the paper by Bardeen and Lewis

' Mall, Development of the ventral abdominal walls in man. Jour, of Morph., Vol. XIV, 1898.

2 Bardeen and Lewis, Development of the limbs and body wall in man, Am. Jour, of Anat., Vol. I, p. 1.

14:0 The Development of the Arm in Man

are drawn from these models, and are to be consulted in connection with the descriptions given in this article. Dr. Mall's embryos are stained in alum caraiine or alum cochineal.


Relation of the Myotomes to the Arm Bud.


Considerable study and perhaps even more theorizing has been done on the relation of the myotomes to the musculature of the limbs. The present state of our knowledge upon this subject is far from satisfactory, especially in the higher vertebrates. The great difficulty or impossibility in many cases of distinguishing between the cells at the ventral edge of the myotomes and those in the neighboring portion of the limb bud renders the problem very difficult. Experimental work, such as has been done by Byrnes,^ may lead to a clear understanding of the relations in the lower vertebrates. The majority of workers appear to have been able to trace myotomic processes into the limbs. Mollier ■* has shown in Selachians that myotome buds enter into the fin anlage or pectoral plate. From these buds are developed the muscles. From the mesoderm between the buds are developed the fin rays. Braus " also shows myotome buds going into the pelvic fins of Selachians. Dohrn * finds two buds from each myotome, an anterior and a posterior, entering the fin anlage, these he believes form the fin muscles. Balfour^ holds that the limb muscles in Elasmobranchii come from muscle plate buds. Harrison * has shown that in teleosts the pectoral fins are derived wholly from the somatopleure and that the myotomes take no part in the

3 Byrnes, Experimental studies on the development of the limb muscles in Amphibia, Jour, of Morph., Vol. XIV, 1898.

Mollier, Zur Entwickelune: der Selachierextremitaten, Anat. Anz., Vol. VII, 1893, p. .3.51. Die paarigen Extremitaten der Wirbelthiere, Anal Hefte, Bd. Ill, 1893.

5 Braus, Beitrage zur Entwi-ckeluno; der Muskulatur und des peripheren Nervensystem der Selachier, Morph. Jahr., Bd. XXVII, 1899, p. .501.

6 Dohrn, Studien zur Urgeschichte des Wirbelthier Korpers, VI, etc., Mittheil. aus der Zool. Station zu Neapel, Bd. V, 1884.

1 Balfour, Comp. Emb., 3nd. Ed., 1885.

8 Harrison, Die Entwickelung d. unpaaren und paaren Flosseu der Teleostier, Archiv f. Mikr. Anat., Bd. XLVI, Ileft 3, 1895.

Warren Harmon Lewis 147

formation of these fins. Boyer^ believes elements from the peripheral layer of certain myotomes are contributed to the pectoral plate which comes from the somatopleure. Corning" believed in 1894 that the pectoral fins in teleosts received muscle-plate buds, but he has since come to the conclusion " that these fins in teleosts do not receive such buds, and agrees with Harrison that the myotomes take no part in the formation of the pectoral fims. Kaestner " was not able to show in Anura that the myotomes take any part in the formation of the limbs, though he believes they do at a very early period. Field " believes that the elements which form the muscle of the extremities in Amblystoma are separated at a very early age from the ventral part of the myotome. Byrnes " work, both her embryological and experimental studies, shows that " the myotome processes, as such, take no part in the formation of the limbs . . . The limbs are of somatopleuric origin, i. e., the muscle, cartilage, and connective tissue." Goette " believes that the limb muscles in Bombinator develop from the outer layer of the muscle plate. Van Bemmelen" believes that in the lizard the limb muscles are derived from the myotome buds. Mollier" finds cells from myotome buds go into the arm anlage in Lacerta niuralis. According to Patterson," the limbs of the chick are derived wholly from the somatopleure. He does not find muscle buds or homologous structures entering into the limbs. In a recent paper by Maj," the conclusion is reached that the myotomes

9Boyer, The mesoderm in Teleosts, etc., Bull. Museum Comp. Zool., Harvard Univ., Vol. XXIII, 1893.

lo Corning, Ueber die Ventralen Urwirbelknospen in der Brustflosse der Teleostier, Morph. Jahr., Bd. XXII, Heft 1, 1894.,

"Corning, Ueber die Entwickelung der Zungen Musculatur bei Reptilien, Anat. Anz. (Gesellschaft) 1895.

i^l^aestner, Extremitaten- und Bauehmusculatur bei Auuren, Arcbiv f. Anat. und Phys. (Anat. Abtheil.), Hefte .5 und 6, 1893.

13 Field, Die Vornieren Kapsel, ventrale Musculatur und Extremitiitenanlagen bei den Amphibien, Anat. Anz., Bd. IX, No. 33, 1894.

14 Byrnes, Op. cit.

13 Goette, Die Entwickelungsgeschichte der Unke., 187.5.

16 Van Bemmelen, Ueber die Herkunf t der Zungen- und Extremitiitenmusculatur bei Eidechsen, Anat. Anz., Bd. IV, 1889.

1' Mollier, Die paarigen Extremitaten der Wirbelthiere. Anat. Hefte, Bd. Ill, Heft VIII; Bd. V, Heft XVI.

18 Patterson, On the fate of the muscle plate and the development of the spinal nerves in birds and mammals. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci., Vol. XXVIII, 1887.

"Maj, Contribute alio studio dello sviluppo della musculatura negli arti. Osservazioni sur polio (Gallus domesticus), Dal Bollettino della Soc. Med.-Chir. di Pavia, 1901.


148 The Development of the Arm in Man

do enter the limbs in the chick. He pictures the ventral end of the myotome entering the limb in company with the nerve and splitting into dorsal and ventral lamellae. Fischel '" believes that in birds and mammals myotome cells mix in the limb bud and give rise to the muscles. There is a diffuse entrance of cells from the myotomes but not of myotome buds. In a section of a human embryo of the fourth week he pictures these myotome cells as forming a peripheral layer around the arm bud and even extending into the somatopleure. The rest of the bud comes from the somatopleure. Kollmann '^ pictures in a very diagrammatic manner the downgrowth of the outer lamella of the muscle plate into the arm bud where it lies between the ectoderm and the mesenchymal core.

In the lower vertebrates it would appear therefore that the limb muscles may arise either from distinct buds of the myotome or they may arise independently of the myotomes from the somatopleure. In the higher vertebrates no distinct myotome buds have been traced into the limbs. Myotome cells are supposed by most observers to enter the limbs and take part in the formation of the muscles.

The question as to whether in man the muscles of the arm are derived from cells of the myotomes which have migrated into the arm bud at a very early period, I have not been able to determine satisfactorily. Neither am I convinced by the work of Pischel or Kollmann that the myotomes take such a part in the formation of the arm. Their pictures are quite unlike any of the conditions found in the human embryos which I have studied.


In Embryo CLXIV, 3.5 mm. in length, there are thirteen myotomes. No signs of an arm bud are present. The myotomes are sharply limited and do not give off any cells into the region where the arm bud is soon to sprout. Cells appear to be migrating from the myotome towards the chorda. The somatopleure, hov/ever, shows a proliferation of the cells lining the ccelom. This is very close to the place where the arm bud is soon to appear and lateral to the Wolffian duct and tubules. (See Fig. 1.)

5io Fischel, Zur Entwickelung der ventralen Rump- und Extremitiiteumusculatur der Vogel und Saugethiere, Morph. Jahr., Bd. XXIII, 1895.

21 Kollmann, Die Rumpfsegmente menschl. Embryonen von 13 bis 35 Urwirbel, Archiv f. Anat. und Pliys. (Anat. Abtbiel.), 1891.

Warren Harmon Lewis


Embryo XII," 2.1 nun. in length, has fourteen myotomes and is slightly older than CLXIV. The first definite signs of an arm bud are here noticed by a slight swelling ventrolateral to the myotomes in the lower cervical region. Its position is seen in Fig. 2. The origin of the cells which cause this swelling I am not able to determine, though there are suspicious looking processes from the myotomes. No spinal nerves are present.

Embryo LXXYI is 4.5 mm. in length and about three weeks old. Between embryos XII and LXXVI there is quite a gap. There are

' IVolffian duct.'^ '(


Fig. 1. Cross section through the eighth mj'otome of embryo CLXIV. X 100 diameters.

35 myotomes. The arm bud is quite large and filled with uniformly and closely packed cells whose nuclei take a deep stain with the alum carmine. A few thin-walled blood-vessels are scattered here and there. The base of the arm bud lies opposite the fifth cervical to the

^- Dr. Mall considers embryo CLXIV slightly older than embryo XII. The greater length of CLXIV he accounts for by a straightening of the body of the embryo through mechanical injury to the ovum. See Mall, On the development of the human diaphragm, The Johns Hop. Hosp. Bui., Vol. XII, 1901, p. 160.


The Development of the Arm in Man

first thoracic intervertebral disks. The cells of the median lamella of the myotomes have been converted into muscle fibers. The myotomes are fairly well defined and do not show buds, or, so far as I can determine, migration of their cells into the arm bud. The general trend of the growing ventral end of the myotome is not out towards the arm bud, biit ventrally towards the ccelom. It will be seen in Fig. 3 that a considerable portion of the root of the arm lies close to the dorsal end of the ccelom and that a proliferation of cells from its lining might easily contribute to the arm tissue. The spinal nerves are not formed though a few anterior root fibers appear to pass directly lateral from the anterior horn. Most of them are lost in the surrounding mesen

Sth cervical =«j'S^(S%^,ob jS^ muscle plate .•^WiJfel^tS .felST»=


Wolffian duct.


muxcle plate AMii'tif-^-^;,-^

■^'■ISk '■' ■"■■'\ ' '^'

ai-m bud j/}^J}'^^M,>'X'%-('-% '""^ A

■'-^~r'.'X%J-i-;y j'

border vein

Fig. 3.


Fig. 3.

Fig. 2. Cross section through the eighth cervical myotome of embryo ,XII. X 100 diameters.

Fig. 3. Cross section through the eighth cervical myotome of embryo LXXVI. X 50 diameters.

chyma, a few, however, appear to reach the group of muscle fibers on the median surface of the myotomes. This is an exceedingly important stage. The arm bud is filled with a peculiar closely packed mesenchyma which, so far as I am able to judge, is the same sort of tissue from which at a later stage the skeletal and muscular tissues differentiate. This tissue fills the arm before the nerves are developed, and if there are cells from the myotomes present they have migrated there without the nerve supply.

In Embryo LXXX, 5 mm. in length, the arm bud has increased con

Warren Harmon Lewis


siderably in size. The cells which fill it resemble those in LXXVI, but are more closely packed together and stain deeper. There is no differentiation of this mesenchyma. Thin-walled blood-vessels are numerous, the border vein (Eandvene of Hochstetter) is present. Numerous mitotic figures indicate that there is a rapid proliferation of the mesenchymal cells. The myotomes are fairly well defined, though in places the ventral end is not always sharp and the possibility of wandering of cells

tj^ '" ^ I \^ ,intei\ertebral disc ^-Ur- i^\i'i^^; %\ ^tlnen-ical

bolder vein

Fig. 4. Cross section through the eighth cervical myotome and nerve of embryo LXXX. X 50 diameters.

from it into the arm bud cannot be denied. The almost constant presence of several blood-vessels at the ventral end of the myotome would interfere somewhat with that process. The spinal nerves have grown out some distance from the cord, they however pass by the median side of the myotomes without sending branches into them. The distal ends of the nerves reach beyoud the myotomes. The lower four cervical and first dorsal end at the root of the arm. As will be seen in Fig. 4, this end of the nerve spreads out somewhat and is surrounded here as well


The Development of the Arm in Man

as along its course by loose mesenchyma which is quite different from that in the arm bud, but like that which lies between the myotome and the aorta, and through which the nerve has pushed, probably carrying some of this tissue with it and before it. The first beginnings of the cervical and brachial plexuses are present in the form of anastomoses of the brush-like ends of the first cervical to the third thoracic. It is an interesting fact that at this stage the upper thoracic myotomes extend to a considerable distance ventral of the ventral union of the arm bud

sp. gang_ y/yjjTrk:^^

'neural process

condensed m^s

Sth muscle Plateilpf^.^^V/'h/ •

Sth nerve #i^FH^>^^■^■ ' ' ' ^ " / Ttli nerve ^,,jt^.i,Sl-im^li\l:^>i:^i^

border ^eln

intervertebral disc

^ -jom iiopleure

Fig. 5. Cross section through the eighth cervical myotome of embrj^o II. X 50 diameters.

with the body wall. The tip of one of these thoracic myotomes is seen in Fig. 4. In the cervical region, on the contrary, the myotomes are much shorter and do not extend so far ventrally.

In the Buxton embryo about the same conditions exist as in LXXX. Embryo Buxton is 5 mm. in length and about 25 days old. It was stained in haematoxylin and eosin, thus bringing out the muscle plates even better than with the alum carmine in which Dr. Mall's embryos were stained.

Eiribryo II is 7 mm. in length, and about four weeks old. It shows

Warren Harmon Lewis 153

some advances over LXXX. The arm bud is filled with the closely packed mesenchyma similar to that seen in LXXVI and LXXX, with this important difference however that in the center of the mass the cells are somewhat more closely packed than at the periphery, and represent the first beginnings of differentiation in the arm. This probably represents the hnmerns. It will be seen from Fig. 5 that the peculiar tissue in the arm bud has spread some distance into the membrana reuniens. Here, as in the previous stages it is impossible to determine whether cells may not go from the myotomes into the arm bud. The nerves, as in LXXX, pass along the median side of the myotome without sending branches into the myotome or, so far as I can determine, taking a portion of the myotome along into the arm bud. They extend farther into the arm than in the preceding stage. The beginning of the cervical and brachial plexus is even more marked, and is formed by anastomoses of the brush-like ends of the first cervical to the second thoracic. The root of the arm lies at the level of sixth cervical to the second thoracic intervertebral discs.


The tissue from which the muscles, ligaments, tendons, and cartilages of the arm develop is present at a very early stage in the arm bud, probably by the beginning of the third week. No distinct myotome buds take part in the formation of this tissue. That cells from either or both myotomes and somatopleure enter into this early arm mesenchyma cannot be determined from the material at my disposal. If cells do migrate from the myotomes, they apparently do so independently of the nerves which are not present until the tissue is formed and fills the arm bud. The first beginnings of differentiation of this peculiar tissue which fills the arm bud occur durine; the fourth week.

PART 11.

The Diffeeentiation of the Mesenchyma of the Aem Bud into muscrlae and skeletal elements, and the


Embryo CLXIII.

The first indication of a differentiation of the mesenchyma of the arm bud occurs as we have seen in an embryo of about four weeks. In


The Development of the Arm in Man

our next stage, embryo CLXIII, quite marked changes have taken place.

Embryo CLXIII is 9 mm, in length, and about four and one-half weeks old.

In order to gain a clear conception of the form and various relations of the structures in this embryo, I found it necessary to construct a model, and in order to do so it was necessary to draw sharp lines about the various structures when in reality there were no sharp limits. One mass often shading off into another, while the central portion of each was very distinct. Thus, in most places the skeletal core of the arm

"eural process

Fig. 6. Skeleton and nerves of the arm region in embryo CLXIII. X 40 diameters.

shades off into the surrounding premuscle tissue, or as in the region of the hand plate into the primitive condensed mesenchyma, filling the distal end of the arm bud. The same was often true of the various premuscle masses. The main portion of these are quite distinct, but they often shade off into each other and into the surrounding mesenchyma. We find in this embryo in the arm region that the premuscle masses most closely associated with the trunk are the farthest advanced, those connecting the arm and trunk next, and the least devel

Warren Harmon Lewis 155

oped is the general arm jjremuscle slieatli, especially its distal portion.

I have given the name premuscle to various Jiiasses of condensed mesenchyma from which at a later period I believe muscle develops by histogenetic changes of the cells.

The Skeletal System. — There is no cartilage at this stage. The skeleton is composed of condensed or closely packed mesenchyma which takes a deeper stain than the surrounding tissue.

The vertebral column consists in the arm region of the intervertebral discs, and their nenral processes which lie in the posterior third of each segment. Between the discs is a loose mesenchyma, the cells of which, as well as those in the disc, have a concentric an-angement about the chorda.

The ribs spring from the adjacent portions of the disc and neural process. A line of separation is visible. They take a ventrolateral direction into the body wall. The sixth and seventh cervical intervertebral discs have short rib-like processes.,

In the arm the exact limits of the skeletal strnctures cannot be determined as this central core which is easily recognized, shades off into the surrounding mesenchyma, which develops into muscle. The scapula is a quadrilateral mass at the level of the fourth and fifth cervical discs. There are no indications of coracoid, acromion or spinous processes. The scapula is continuous with the humerus, which is a cylindrical mass occupying the center of the proximal portion of the arm bud. Practically all of it lies at a level anterior to the first rib. At the level of the first rib the humerus is continuous with tlie ulna and radius. There is a slight flexion of the forearm. They are short and thick. The ulna is the larger and is more directly a continuation of the humerus. Partially surrormding the ulna and radius is a plexus of blood-vessels which helps to outline them. The continuation of this plexus is seen in Fig. 8. Both ulna and radius are continuous, with the very ill-defined mass of condensed tissue which lies in the center of the distal end of the arm bud. This rather thin plate composed of cells more closely packed together than those of the surrounding tissue, shows no signs of division into the various elements of the hand. I name it the hand plate.

The Muscular System. — The muscle plates are fused into a continuous column. Indications of segmentation remain. This column lies close and lateral to the neural processes. In the cervical region it ends abruptly at the brachial plexus. In the costal region, however, it extends ventrally into the body wall, between, and partially surrounding the ribs. It ends ventrally beyond the tips of the ribs. The muscle


The Development of the Arm in Man

plate system is easily distingnished from the surrounding tissues by its fibrillation.

Lateral to the muscle-plate system are ill-defined masses of condensed tissue without fibrillation, but from which muscles differentiate.

Lateral to the anterior six ribs lies the lateral premuscle mass. It occupies most of the space between the costal portion of the muscle-plate system and the integument. It shades off into the surrounding loose mesenchyma everywhere, but at the anterior end, at about the level of the first intercostal space, it splits into four divisions which pass anteriorlv.

Fig. 7. Outline of the arm region of embryo CLXIII from Plate III. Bardeen and Lewis, Vol. I, No. 1, this Journal. X 15 diameters.

The first or dorsal division lies lateral to the muscle-plate column, and extends to the level of the fifth cervical disc.

The second, third and fourth divisions correspond so closely with the position in which I find certain muscles in the next stage, and as they also have the same nerve supply as the muscles into which I believe they develop, that I have called them in order: The (2) levator scapulae and serratus anterior, the (3) latissimus dorsi and teres major, and the (4) pectoral premuscle masses.

The second division, the levator scapulce and serratus anterior premuscle mass, ventral to the first and opposite the ventral portion of the muscle-plate column is fairly well defined. It extends into the upper cervical region. It lies in a more median plane than the scapula, and at this stage is in no way attached to it.

Warren Harmon LeAvis


The third division, the laUssimus dorsi and teres major premuscle mass, passes anteriorly along the dorsal side of the brachial plexus and becomes continuous with the arm premuscle sheath at the proximal

trapezius intia. hjoid apular

lev. scap. premuscle mass muscle plate column / neural process

spinal gang.


premuscle sheatl

,5th nerve

phrenic nerve

brachial plexus sympathetic

diaphragm disc

border vein

hand plate

tip 4th rib

Fig. 8. Ventral view of the arm region of embryo CLXIII. X 40 diameters.

portion of the humerus. The humeral end is thicker and broader, and continuous also with the arm premuscle sheath about the scapula.

The fourth division, the pectoral premuscle mass, passes ventral to the brachial plexus and joins the arm premuscle sheath near the proximal end of the humerus. This pectoral premuscle mass is continuous medially with an irregular mass of condensed tissue which extends to the

158 The Development of the Arm in Man

base of the tongue. The cephalic portion of it is supplied by two nerves, one a branch of the first and second cervical, and the other a branch of the third cervical nerve. These two branches form a loop on the siu'face of the mass. They correspond to the ramus descendens n. hypoglossus and ramus communicans hypoglossus uniting to form the ansa hypoglossus. Hence I have called this the infra-hjoid premuscle mass. I have not been able to determine the fate of the condensed tissue on the median side of the pectoral premuscle mass, and caudal to the infrahyoid mass. The phrenic nerve ends very close to it, and very likely this is diaphragm premuscle mass.

The rJwmhoid premuscle mass lies lateral to the second division of the lateral premuscle mass and is an ill-defined plate of condensed tissue. It lies at the level of the fifth cervical vertebra and receives a branch from the fifth cervical nerve, arising in connection with a nerve to the levator scapulae mass.

The caudal end of the trapezius premuscle mass is seen in Fig. 7, lateral to the levator scapulse mass. The main portion of the trapezius premuscle mass lies opposite the cephalic four cervical vertebrae. It is supplied by the spinal accessory and communicating branches from the first four cervical nerves.

Arm premuscle slteath. — The skeletal core of the arm is surrounded by a mass of tissue which shows no signs as yet of splitting into separate masses. Along the median side of the humerus this sheath is interrupted by the entrance of the brachial plexus and nerves. In places the sheath is separated from the skeletal core by blood-vessels, but in most places no sharp line of separation can be seen. Toward the distal end of the arm the sheath merges into the more primitive mesenchymal tissue which fills most of the distal end of the arm. In Fig. 8 the ,distal limit of the premuscle sheath is indicated, a portion of the primitive arm mesenchyma having been removed to show the limit of the sheath, the hand plate, the border vein and the venous plexus between the hand plate and the mesenchyma.

The Nerves. — The muscle plate column is supplied by branches of the dorsal rami from all the nerves in this region. They enter the median side of the muscle-plates branch Avithin them, one branch passing through to the subcutaneous tissue.

Branches from the anterior rami of the III, IV, V, VI and VII cervical nerves supply the levator scapulfe and serratus anterior premuscle mass. The rhomboid premuscle mass is supplied by a branch which comes off with the one from the V cervical.

Warren Harmon Lewis 159

The phrenic nerve arises from the median side of the trunk formed by the IV and V cervical nerves. It does not reach quite to the level of the first rib. See Fig. 6.

The brachial plexus is formed from the ventral divisions of the IV, V, VI, VII, VIII cervical and I thoracic nerves. The main portion of the plexus forms a continuous sheet of nerve tissue in which only indications of the three cords can be distinguished. The plexus passes laterally into the arm without any caudal inclination. On reaching the arm it splits into a dorsal and a ventral division. The dorsal division corresponds to the continuation of the posterior cord. It passes around the dorsal side of the humerus, decreasing rapidly in size and ends in the premuscle sheath near the distal end of the humerus. Most of it represents the musculo-spiral nerve. A small branch, which is probably the circumflex, is given off near its beginning. Fibers from all the spinal nerves forming the plexus can be traced into this dorsal division. The ventral division is partially divided into two parts, which probably represent the outer and inner cords. From the outer arises the suprascapular nerve, having fibers from the IV, V, and VI cervical. It passes ventral to the scapulo-humeral junction into the arm premuscle sheath. The rest of this outer cord splits into the musculo-cutaneous and the outer head of the median. The musculo-cutaneous passes into the premuscle sheath on the ventral side of the humerus, and the median into the sheath distal to this, reaching as far as the distal end of the humerus. The inner cord terminates in the ulnar nerve, which runs into the premuscle sheath along the median side of the humerus as far as the beginning of the ulna. Branches going into the pectoral premuscle mass leave the median side of the plexus, one mostly from the outer and the other two from the inner cord. They correspond to the external and internal anterior thoracics. In Fig. 6 the lengths of the various nerves are indicated.

Embryo CIX.

Embryo CIX measures V. B. 10.5 mm. and X. B. 11 mm. in lengtli and is about five weeks old. There is a marked advance over the preceding stage. Cartilage has made its appearance both in the vertebrae and in portions of the arm skeleton. There is considerable difference in the character of the cartilage of the vertebra from that in the arm. The latter seems more advanced and lias more the appearance of true hyaline cartilage. It is possible that the cartilage appears first in the arm, though I have not been able to examine intervening stages to

160 The Development of the Arm in Man

determine this with certainty. Other portions of the arm skeleton are in the precartilage and condensed tissue stages. Both cartilage and precartilage are surrounded in most places by a distinct perichondrium. This takes a very deep stain with the alum carmine. This perichondrium shades off into the condensed tissue of the carpus, which is like that composing the skeletal core in the preceding stage. This again shades into the even less differentiated tissue of the digits, which is at a.bont the same stage of development as the hand plate of the preceding stage, and it in turn shades off into the surrounding mesenchyma.

The muscles in the arm region show very different degrees of development. Those derived from the muscle plate system are in advance of most of the others. The trapezius, levator scapulae and serratus magnus are about as far advanced as those from the muscle plate system, they show distinct muscle fibers and are for the most part quite sharply limited from the surrounding loose mesenchyma. In position they correspond with their premuscle masses of the preceding stage. The pectoral muscle is next in advance and the latissimus dorsi next. These two muscles grow from the humeral region towards their future attachments on the body wall. It is this portion which lies farthest from the humerus which seems to show the most advance in fibrillation and the sharpest limitation from the surrounding mesenchyma. At the humeral end these muscles gradually shade into a condensed mesenchyma, which fuses with neighboring muscle and skeletal elements. Both muscles correspond in position to their premuscle masses of the preceding stage. As in the preceding stage, embryo CLXIII, the trapezius and serratus premuscle masses were in advance of the pectoral and latissimus; in embryo CIX we find the same relation still continues.

The remaining muscles of the arm apparently develop in situ from the premuscle sheath and undergo practically no migrations. They do not appear to be as far advanced as any of the above mentioned muscles. Of these muscles developing from, the arm premuscle sheath, the more proximal ones are more developed than the ones more distal. In the scapulo-humeral region most of the muscles show partial fibrillation, while those in the palm of the hand are in about the same condition as the proximal portion of the premuscle sheath in the preceding stage.

The fibrillation, position and nerve supply have made it possible to determine the presence of most of the muscles of the arm.

The Skeletal, System. — The Vertebral Column. The inteiTertebral discs are composed of condensed mesenchyma, the cells having a concentric arrangement about the chorda. The vertebral bodies between the discs are each composed of two masses of cartilage, one on either

Warren Harmon Lewis 161

side of the chorda. Tliey are surrounded by a perichondrium. Along the ventral surface of the vertebral coluuni is a layer of dense mesenchyma, which probably represents both perichondrium and the anterior common ligament. The neural processes, composed of condensed mesenchyma, are clearly defined. They are continuous with the discs and form a wide, shallow groove for the spinal cord. The transverse processes arise by two roots, one from the base of the neural process and the other from the disc. They are of condensed mesenchyma.

The Ribs. — The ribs are more sharply defined than in CLXIII. They are of condensed tissue except for a small area near the head, which is of precartilage. They extend farther into the body Avail than in the preceding stage.

Fig. 9. Skeleton of the arm region of embryo CIX, lateral view. X 12 diameters.

The Arm Skeleton. — The Scapula is composed of precartilage and has greatly altered in shape. It lies in the region of the lower four cervical and first one or two thoracic vertebrae. From the anterior border, which corresponds to the spine, springs the large curved acromion process. On the median surface at the junction of the humerus with the scapula arises the large hooked coracoid process. Eunning across the median surface of the scapula to the vertebral border is a slight ridge which separates the supraspinatus from the subscapularis muscles and corresponds to the future anterior border. The condensed tissue is thickened on the medial surface into a perichondrium, while on the lateral surface the precartilage shades off into the surrounding mesenchyma.

The Clavicle. — A rather poorly defined mass of condensed tissue continues from the tip of the acromion toward the tip of the first rib, extending for about one-third this distance. This mass represents the clavicle. From it a mass of ill-def]ned tissue extends to the coracoid process and represents the coraco-clavicular ligament.


The Development of the Arm in Man

The Humerus is directly continuous with the scapula and root of the coracoid process. No signs of joint surfaces or ca-vity arc present. Both ends of the shaft are enlarged and Ihe distal end shows both external and internal condyles. The core of the shaft is of hyaline cartilage; this is surrounded by very thick perichondrium, which shades ofE into the condensed tissue of each end in' which is enclosed an area of precartilage. The distal end seems more advanced than the proximal.

The Radius and Ulna are continuous with the distal end of the humerus, no indications of joint surfaces or cavities being present.

Fig. 10. Outline of the arm region of embryo CIX, lateral view from Plate IV. Bardeen and Lewis, Vol. I, No. 1, this Journal. X 12 Diameters.

There is more flexion at the elbow than in CLXIII. The forearm occupies a position about half way between pronation and supination. The core of each shaft is composed of hyaline cartilage. This is surrounded by a very thick perichondrium, which continues into the condensed tissue at either end of the bone, in which precartilage is enclosed. The Hand-plate is continuous with the distal ends of the radius and ulna. It is composed of condensed mesenchyma. There are several centers of increased condensation which I believe must correspond to the carpal bones, namely, the scaphoid, lunar, pyramidal, trapezium, trapezoid, OS magnum and unciform. The scaphoid is in line with the radius and the lunar with the ulna, while the pyramidal is at the ulnar side of

Warren Harmon Lewis 16B

■the carpus, and as the metacarpal V continues from it more tlian the unciform tlie whole hand has a peculiar bend toward the ulnar side. From the carpus five masses of condensed tissue project. They shade off into the surrounding mcsenchyma which fills the distal end of the arm. The condition of these finger masses corresponds to the condition of the hand-plate in CLXIII. There is not the sliglitest indication of segmentation into metacarpals and phalanges. The radial of the five projections probably consists of both trapezium and metacarpal I, which have not yet shown signs of separate centers of condensation.

The Musculae System. — The muscle plate system has become differentiated into several muscles, namely, the deep dorsal muscles, the intercostals, the abdominal muscles and the deep ventral neck muscles.

The infrahyoid muscles correspond in position and nerve supply with the infrahyoid premuscle mass of the preceding stage. They extend nearly to the region where the median end of the clavicle will eventually extend.

The trapezius muscle has extended posteriorly to the level of the fifth cervical vertebra. Its posterior end lies near to the lateral surface of the body and is connected to the tips of the neural processes as far posteriorly as the second thoracic vertebra by a considerable interval of fascia. As the muscle passes anteriorly it lies deeper and deeper from the surface, being separated from it by the platysma and facial muscles. Its ventral border is free from attachment to the scapula and clavicle. At the level of the second cervical vertebra it is joined by the stemomastoid muscle, which has ascended from the more ventral neck region. The nerve supply is as in the adult.

The rhomboid mass lies in the region of the Y and A^I cervical vertebrae. It connects with the fascia passing to the dorsal tips of the neural processes but has no scapular attachment. A branch of the fifth cervical nerve supplies it.

The levator scapula; and serratus anterior muscles form a continuous fibrillated mass, extending from the first cervical vertebra to the ninth rib. It occupies much the same position that its premuscle mass did in embryo CLXIII except that the posterior end now extends to the ninth rib. Digitations go to all the cervical transverse processes and to each of the anterior nine ribs. The anterior and posterior digitations are very slender and contain but few fibers. The thickest part of the- muscle lies in the scapular region. There is no scapular attachment. The ventral edge of the muscle lies at about the same level as the dorsal edge of the scapula but in a more median plane. Branches from the second to the seventh cervical nerves supply the muscle. The first three 13

164: The Development of the Arm in Man

penetrate directly into the muscle. The last three form a trunk which runs along the lateral surface of the muscle as far as the fourth rib.

The pedoralis major and minor "^ are united into a common muscle mass, which is well differentiated from the surrounding tissue. It forms a thick oval mass, which extends from the level of the second rib to the proximal portion of the humerus. The greater part of the muscle thus lies anterior to the first rib. As the mass bends towards the humerus it is attached also to the clavicle. So probably both sterno-costal and clavicular portions are present. The median side of the mass bulges towards the coracoid process and represents the minor. Most of the mass shows distinct fibrillation, but toward the humerus this passes into the condensed tissue which is not sharply outlined from the surrounding structures. The position of the pectoral muscle corresponds to the position of the pectoral premuscle mass in embryo CLXIII. Branches from the median side of the brachial plexus supply the pectoral. Two from the external cord contain fibers from the fifth, sixth and seventh cervical nerves. Two come from the inner cord. Within the muscle complicated anastomoses occur from which fibers spread out in all directions.

The muscles thus far considered were fairly definite, and, as we have seen, come from quite definite premuscle masses. The remaining muscles of the arm are in process of differentiation from the arm premuscle sheath. The exact limits of the individual muscles are almost impossible to determine.

The deltoid muscle extends from the acromion and clavicle and fascia over the infraspinatus to the humerus. It is very closely connected with the infraspinatus and only by the difference in the nerve supply can the two be separated. The position of the teres minor is also only indicated by its nerve and not by any line of separation between it and the infraspinatus or deltoid. The origin of part of the deltoid from the acromion and clavicle helps to distinguish some of its fibers, but a short distance from this origin no line of separation can be made between it and the infra- and supraspinatus muscles. Condensed tissue connects it with the triceps and pectoral muscles. The circumflex nerve supplies this muscle and also sends a branch to fibers which are closely associated with the infraspinatus and probably constitute the teres minor muscle.

That portion of the infraspinatus which lies on the lateral surface of the scapula is fairly distinct except where the deltoid and teres minor

23 Lewis, Observations on the pectoralis major muscle in man, Johns Hopkins TTosp. Bui., Vol. XII, 1901.

Warren Harmon Lewis 165

muscles join it. The portion of tlie supraspinatus on the anterior onefourth of the median surface of the scapula is distinct, but after it passes the acromion it is inseparably' connected with the infraspinatus and deltoid and pectoral muscles. These muscles shade off into the 23roximal end of the humerus. The main portion of each of these muscles contains muscle fibers. The suprascapular nerve supplies the supra- and infraspinatus muscles.

The subscapularis muscle arises from the posterior one-half of the median surface of the scapula and passes beneath the coracoid process to the humerus. The circumflex nerve separates a portion of it from the teres major muscle, but the scapular portions of the two are closely imited, as is also the long head of the triceps. A branch from the circumflex and another from the posterior cord of the brachial plexus supply the subscapularis.

The teres major and latissimus dorsi muscles are closely associated at "their humeral end. The latissimus dorsi' lies in the lateral thoracic region, extending posteriorly as far as the fourth rib. It has no attachments to the ribs or vertebral column. The two muscles are inserted together into the proximal portion of the humerus. The teres major arises from the axillary border of the scapula near its posterior angle. The common portion of the latissimus and teres passes close to the posterior cord of the brachial plexus, from which a large branch is given off that runs into the latissimus and has a brush-like ending near the posterior limit of the muscle. A smaller branch of the posterior cord is given off to the teres major.

The triceps muscle extends along the posterior and lateral surfaces of the humerus, extending from the scapula to the ulna. Indications of the three heads are present. The portion of the muscle lying near the insertion of the latissimus dorsi and the infraspinatus muscles is not sharply defined from them. The musculo-spiral nerve passes through the muscle and gives branches to it.

The biceps and coracohracJnaUs muscles lie along the median side of the humerus, extending from the coracoid process to the radius. The two heads of the biceps are quite closely united nearly to their origins, Avhich are but a short distance apart. The portion of the coracoid process from which the long head arises must ultimately become a portion of the head of scapula. The attachment of the coracobrachialis to the humerus is by condensed tissue, as is the distal end of the biceps to the radius. The distal end of the biceps blends with the brachialis and the flexor mass. The musculo-cutaneous pierces this group and gives off branches to it.

166 The Development of the Arm in Man

The hracJiialis muscle is closely attached to the distal one-half of the hmnerns over the anterior and median surfaces. It is also closely attached to the overlying biceps muscle and it is impossible to determine just the line between the two or between it and the brachioradialis muscle. It is also impossible to determine the exact line between the muscle and the underlying perichondrium. It is closely associated with the triceps on one side and the deltoid on the other. The main portion of the muscle is fibrillated and is inserted into the ulna by condensed tissue, which is closely associated with the, flexor mass of the forearm. The musculo-cutaneous nerve gives off a large branch which has a brush-like endins; within the muscle.

Spinal accessoiy

Fig. 11. Outline of the arm region of embryo CIX, median view, from Plate V. Bardeen and Lewis, Vol. I, No. 1, this Journal. X 15 diameters.

The flexor muscle mass of the forearm forms a thick layer over the median surface of the ulna, radius, carpus and proximal end of the metacarpus. It is with considerable difficulty that I have separated this mass into two layers. The superficial layer is smaller in extent and lies in the proximal region of the forearm. It is connected with the radial portion of the forearm by a condensed tissue mass and distally fuses with the deep layer to become continuous with the condensed tissue of the digits. The median nerve passes through the proximal portion and then comes to lie between the two layers. From its position and relation to the median nerve I believe this to be the layer from which the flexor carpi radialis, flexor sublimis digitorum, pronator teres and palniaris long-us muscles differentiate. Branches from the median nerve supply this layer. Both layers arise partly from the inner condyle of the humerus, and are continuous more or less with the muscles of the upper arm. The deep layer is closely attached to the perichondrium of

Warren Harmon Lewis 167

the forearm and hand. It is wider in extent than the superficial and shows indications of separations into muscles. Tlie portion for the flexor carpi nlnaris shows most advance. The extension into the hand probably constitutes the portion from which the interossei and lumbrical muscles and flexor tendons develop. It is continuous with the condensed tissue of the digits. The portion on the forearm forms the flexor profundus digitorum, flexor pollicis longus, flexor carpi ulnaris and pronator quadratus muscles. Both the ulnar and median nerves supply the deep layer.

The extensor mass of the forearm is farther advanced than the flexor. It can be differentiated into three groups of muscles which accord well with the adult groups. The first group, the largest and most superficial, extends from the lateral condyle to the proximal ends of the digits, where it blends with the condensed mesenchyma. It is a thin layer and spreads out over the ulnar two-thirds of the forearm and is quite closely applied to the perichondrium and cpndensed mesenchyma of the skeletal structures beneath. A portion of it overlaps the second and third groups. It is the still undifferentiated extensor communis digitorum, extensor carpi ulnaris, and extensor minimi digiti. It is supplied by branches of the posterior interosseus nerve.

The second group occupies the proximal portion of the radial side of the forearm. It arises in connection with the first group from the external condyle and adjoining portion of the humerus. The muscle mass passes distally along the radius and soon divides into two parts between which the radial nerve passes. The radial part fuses with the condensed tissue of the distal end of the radius. It is the brachioradialis muscle. The second part passes beneath the third group and fuses with the condensed mesenchyma at the proximal ends of the second and third digits. It is the extensor carpi radialis longior et hrevior muscle. Branches of the musculospiral nerve supply this second group.

The third group arises beneath the first from the ulna and radius. Its fibers pass toward the radial side of the forearm, passing from beneath the first group and over the second group, and finally end in the condensed tissue of the first and second digits. The portion to the second digit is closely fused with the portion of the first group which goes to this digit. This group is quite closely applied to the underlying skeletal condensed tissue. The third group represents the abductor pollicis longus, extensor pollicis brevis, extensor pollicis longus and extensor indicis proprius. Branches of the musculospiral nerve supply this group.

The supinator I believe must arise in connection with the third group, judging from its position and the direction 'of its fibers.

168 The Development of the Arm in Man

The muscle fibers of the extensor groups do not extend as far distally as do those of the flexor mass.

The Nerves. — The enormous size of the lower cervical nerves attracts the attention at once. In the plates and figures they are given in their true proportion to the other structures. The main portion of the brachial plexus has but a very slight posterior inclination.

A branch from the V cervical supplies the rhomboid muscle mass.

The V, VI, VII and VIII cervical and I thoraeic nerves unite to form the brachial plexus. The IV cervical does not connect with the plexus. The main portion of the plexus forms a continuous sheet in which indications of the three cords can be seen. The V and VI unite before joining the others and from this union is given off the -suprascapular. It leaves the trunk at right angles and has the appearance of having its proximal end dragged distally to\\'ard the arm by the main portion of the plexus. The VIII and I thoracic unite before joining the plexus. The continuous sheet formed by these five nerves soon splits into a lateral (dorsal) and median (ventral) division. The lateral corresponds to the posterior cord and from it arise the circumflex, subscapular and musculospiral nerves. These nerves take the normal course found in adult and supply the same muscles as in adult. Cutaneous branches are also given ofl^. The median sheet of the plexus quickly divides into several bundles. The anterior one corresponds to the distal end of the external cord. From it are given off the musculo-cutaneous, two branches to the pectoral mass, and one head of the median nerve. The posterior division corresponds to the distal end of the inner cord. From it arise branches to the pectoral mass, the inner head of the median, the ulnar and internal cutaneous nerves. The distal end of the median splits into a peculiar fan-like arrangement of its branches. Both median and ulnar give branches to the deep flexor mass and anastomose within the mass.

I have attempted to trace the origin of the fibers in the main nerves of the arm. The results are given in the following table:

Cervical. Thoracic.

Suprascapular V, VI ?

Subscapularis V, VI, VII

Long thoracic VII, VIII I

Anterior thoracics V, VI, VII, VIII I

Musculo-cutaneous V, VI, VII ?

Median V, VI, VII, VIII I

Circumflex V, VI, VII

Musculospiral V, VI, VII, VIII I

Ulnar VI?, VII, VIII I

Warren Harmon Lewis 169

Embryo XLIII.

Embryo XLIII measures 16 mm. V. B. and 11 mm. jST. B. It is about six weeks old. Many changes have talcen place during the sixth Aveck. The entire arm has migrated posteriorly, dragging muscles and nerves with it. The brachial plexus has a decided posterior inclination. The skeletal system is much farther advanced and consists for the most part of cartilage; its individual elements are assuming more the adult form. The clavicle now unites the arm and thoracic skeletons.

The muscular tissues have become more clearly differentiated and except in the hand are easily distinguished. Muscles, such as the trapezius, serratus, and pectoral, have spread out into sheets and acquired more their permanent attachments, in the case of the trapezius, latissimus and pectorals by migTation or extension of their fibers.

In the hand, however, we find the interossei still in an undifferentiated condition like that of the deep flexor layer in embryo CIX or the serratus and infrahyoids in embryo CLXIIL'

The Skeletal System. — The vertebral column. The intervertebral discs are of still more compact tissue than in embryo CIX, but they occupy only about one-fourth height of the segment, while in CIX they occupied nearly one-half the anterior-posterior length of the segment. The body of each vertebra contains a large mass of cartilage, which is continuous with the cartilage in the transverse and neural processes. Indications of the hypochordal brace of Froriep are present in connection with the ventral side of the first three discs. The anterior one is the largest, the others decreasing rapidly in size.

The ribs are composed of long, slender cartilages, surrounded by a thick perichondrium. This is continuous with the condensed tissue of the tips of the ribs. The tips of the first seven ribs are connected by a narrow strip of condensed tissue which appears to be formed by the turning anteriorly of their tips until they touch the rib above and fuse with it. Thus is formed the' anlage of one-half the sternum on either side some little distance from the median line. There is at present no sign of union of the two halves of the sternal anlagen. The first rib is fused with the median end of the clavicle. The ribs show a marked increase in their lateral convexity, as in embryo CIX there was scarcely any. There are no joint cavities between the ribs and vertebrte.

The scapula is composed largely of cartilage. It has migrated posteriorly so that less than one-half of it lies above the level of the first rib. The whole scapula is larger than in embryo CIX. There is a thick layer of perichondriuui around the cartilage and a considerable


The Development of the Arm in Man

mass of condensed tissue along the vertebral border, and at the posterior angle, the cartilage reaches to the level of the third rib and the condensed tissue nearly to the fifth. The anterior border is somewhat irregular and thickened and gives origin in part to the supraspinatus muscle. The lateral lip of this border probably represents the spine and the median lip the anterior border. Projecting from the lateral side of the head and continuous with the lateral lip of the anterior border is the acromion process. It is large, curved and mostly of condensed tissue and contains a slender core of cartilage continuous with the cartilage

trapezoid metacarpal

trapezium ( scaphoid

OS magnum .

ant. border acromion , spine coracoid ^ft^^.


,FiG. 12. Cartilaginous slceleton of tlie arm of embryo XLIII, lateral view. X 20 diameters.

of the body. The coracoid process arises from the median side of the head, is larger than the acromion, and contains a much larger cartilao-inous core, which is continuous with the cartilage of the body. The acromio-clavicular ligament is strongly developed.

The clavicle consists of a thick mass of condensed tissue, extending from the acromion to the tip of the first rib, where it continues with the half sternal anlage. There is no line of separation at either end. There is a small core of a peculiar precartilaginous tissue.

The Immerus is larger, longer and more slender in proportion to its

Warren Harmon Lewis 171

length than in the preceding stage. The two ends are enlarged. The main portion is of cartilage snrronnded by a thick perichondrihm which is continuous with that of the head of the scapnla, forming the Ijeginning of the capsular ligament. There is also a strip of perichondrium between scapula and humerus in which there are no signs of a joint cavity. At the proximal end the perichondrium shows thickenings for the tuberosities, while at the distal end the condyles are for the most part of cartilage continuous with that of the main portion. Considerable masses of condensed tissue, however, help to increase the size of the condyles. A portion of the head of the humerus rests against the base of the eoracoid process, indicating that a portion of this is to be incorporated with the head of the scapula.

The ulna and radius are of cartilage surrounded by a thick perichondrium. This is continuous with that of the distal end of the humerus, forming the beginning of the capsule. The perichondrium of the proximal end of the radius is continuous with that of tlie adjoining surface of the ulna. The cartilages of the humerus, radius and ulna are separated from each other by condensed tissue in which no signs of cavities are present. The olecranon is quite well developed and consists mostly of cartilage. The coronoid process is mostly of condensed tissue. The great sigmoid fossa is rather shallow. The bicipital tuberosity is of condensed tissue. The distal ends of these bones are enlarged and separated from each other by condensed tissue continuous with the perichondrium of each.

The carpus consists of a condensed tissue matrix in which lie imbedded the various cartilages. The distal row is complete, the trapezium, trapezoid, os magnum and unciform. The latter has spread in between the fifth metacarpal and the cuneiform (pyramidal). In the proximal row the cuneiform and scaphoid are of cartilage and the hmar and pisiform of condensed tissue.

The metacarpus shows five slender cartilages surrounded by very thick condensed tissue layer or perichondrium. The first metacarpal cartilage is only about one-half the length of the others.

The ulnar four plialanges of the first row are present as short slender cartilages deeply imbedded in condensed tissue. In the first digit condensed tissue takes the place of the cartilage. At the tip of each digit is a mass of condensed tissue.

There are no joint cavities between the cartilages of the hand, each one is separated from its neighbor by an area of condensed tissue.

172 The Development of the Arm in Man

Ilagen '* has reconstnicted the cartilaginous skeletal system of a hnman en'ibryo of abont this age. A comparison of the drawings from the reconstructions shows that there is considerable variation in the carpal region. In none of my stages does the metacarpal come irt contact with the radius, either before or after the cartilages of thecarpus and metacarpus appear, and there is a considerable area of dense mesenchyma between metacarpus and radius. I am inclined to believe what he calls metacarpal I, may be trapezium and his so-called firstphalanx the metacarpal.

The Muscular System. — Plates I and II, Figs. A and B. The trapezius muscle has both clavicular and acromial attachments. The muscle has extended posteriorly so that the muscle fibers run from theocciput to the level of the fifth rib. They are connected by a considerable interval of fascia with the dorsal ends of the cervical and all the thoracic neural processes.

The levator scapulce and serratus anterior muscles are greatly altered iit shape. The latter forms a broad, thin sheet between the dorsal border of the scapula and the first nine ribs, being attached by a digitation tO' each rib. The scapular attachment is into the condensed tissue along its dorsal border.

The pectoral mass is now spread out into a large, thin sheet, which has split into the major and minor muscles. The clavicular and sternocostal portions of the pedoralis major are separated by a considerable interval. The clavicular fibers arise from the median one-third of the clavicle and pass to the humerus. They overlap the humeral ends of the sterno-costal fibers which arise from the first six ribs and the sternal anlage.

The pedoralis minor is a distinct muscle arising from the second, third and fourth ribs and passing to the coracoid process.

The subelavius muscle is quite Avell developed and runs from the first ril) to the clavicle, having a course nearly at right angles to the latter.

The latissimus dorsi has spread out into a broad, thin sheet of muscle fibers, which are connected by fascia with the lower thoracic and lumbar neirral processes. Its humeral end is closely miited with the teres major.

The teres major muscle has about the relations found in the adult. It and the latissimus dorsi are inserted together into the humerus.

Tlie deltoid muscle is very much like the adult in its attachments and shape.

-'•* Hagen, Die Bildung des Knorpelskeletes beim mensclalicben Embryo, Arch, fiir Anat. u. Pbys., 1900.

Warren Harmon Lewis 173

Tlic infraspinatus nniscle arises from the anterior portion of the lateral sin-face of the scapula and can bo easily traced to its insertion into the great tuberosity of the humerus. The teres minor cannot be separated from it.

The supraspinal us muscle arises from the anterior thickened border of the scapula and passes to the great tuberosity of the humerus.

The suhscapularis muscle occupies the central portion of the median surface of the scapula. It is separated from the teres major. It passes beneath coracoid process to the lesser tuberosity of the humerus.

The triceps muscle is easily traced from its origin by the three heads to its insertion into the olecranon process. The three heads are quite easily distinguished. The long head is smaller in proportion than in the adult.

The biceps muscle is more elongated and shows more of a separation of its two heads than in embryo CIX. The long head still arises from the base of the coracoid process. The two heads join about the middle of the humerus and pass to a thickening of condensed tissue on the radius. The short head arises in common with the coracobrachialis muscle from the tip of the coracoid process. This latter muscle is inserted into the middle of the median surface of the humerus. It is closely connected with the biceps for most of its length.

The hracJiiaUs muscle is spread out more over the distal portion of the humerus and its muscle fibers extend farther toward the insertion into the coronoid process of the ulna than in the preceding stage.

The fte.ror mass of the forearm and hand show a most marked advance over the preceding stage. The various muscles of the superficial layer which arise from the internal condyle are easily recognized. They are more or less fused at their origin and for some little distance from it.

The pahnaris longus muscle, the most superficial one, is thin and wide, ends in the condensed tissue of the palmar fascia.

The pronator teres muscle passes to the middle of the shaft of the radius.

The flexor carpi radialis muscle lies mostly on the radial side of the forearm, towards the distal end of which it bends under the deep flexor and ends in a condensed tissue tendon which fuses with the condensed tissue near the proximal end of the second metacarpal. This portion of the muscle is not yet clearly differentiated from the condensed tissue on the palmar surface of the caqms.

The flexor digitonim suhlimis muscle arises beneath the palmaris longus in connection with it from the internal condyle, and also from the shaft of tlie ulna, for a little distance distal of the coronoid ]~)rocess.

l74 The Development of the Arm in Man

It is very broad and spreads out over the middle of the forearm and carpus, where it divides into fonr broad, thin tendons which fnse with the condensed tissue surrounding the distal end of the four ulnar metacarpals and first row of phalanges. The muscle fibers continue distal as far as the middle of the carpus, where the muscle becomes wider and thicker. The tendons do not show the split which is later to appear and enclose the deep flexor tendon. The strongest part of the tendons lie on the ulnar side of digits.

The deep layer of the preceding stage has undergone marked changes.

The flexor carpi ulnaris muscle is quite distinct. It arises partly from the internal condyle superficial to the sublimis and closely connected with it and the palmaris longus and partly from the ulna. The muscle at its origin is broad and thin but narrows into a condensed tissue tendon which is inserted into the os pisiform.

The flexor digitorum profundus and the flexor polUcis longus muscles arise from the surfaces of the radius and ulna and the internal condyle. They are closely imited and pass to the carpal region where division takes place into five well-formed oval tendons, which pass beneath the tendons of the sublimis, and fuse with the condensed tissue about the ends of the digits.

The pronator quadraius muscle is a small, oval mass connecting the distal ends of the ulna and radius.

The lumhride muscles are fonned. They arise from the profundus near the angles formed by the iive tendons. They are short and contain distinct muscle fibers which end in tendons that fuse with the condensed tissue on the radial side of the ulnar four digits.

The intrinsic muscles of the hand, the interossei, and muscles of the thumb and little finger, are represented by a late premuscle tissue in which a few muscle fibers are beginning to appear. These masses are more or less continuous with each other and lie on the palmar surface of the carpus and metacarpus and partially in between the latter. The distal ends of these masses fuse with the less differentiated condensed tissue about the digits.

The extensor muscles of the forearm show considerable advance over the preceding stage, but the development does not seem to have been as rapid as in the case of the flexor muscles.

Of the first group, the extensor communis digitorum and the extensor minimi digiti are united into a broad, thin sheet which divides in the metacarpal region into four broad, thin tendons that end in the condensed tissue of the four ulnar digits. The extensor carpi ulnaris closely associated with this muscle at its origin from the external condyle arises

Warren Harmon Lewis 173

also partly from the ulna and is inserted into the condensed tissue at the proximal end of the fifth metacarpal. It is quite separate from the common extensor for the greater part of its length.

Of the second group, the hracMoradinlis is quite distinct from the extensor- carpi radialis longior et hrevior for most of its length, but at their origin, however, the two are closely connected. Both muscles are broader and larger than in the preceding stage. The extensor passes beneath the third gTOup and ends in the condensed tissue near the proximal ends of the second and third metacarpals.

The tJiird group, which arises beneath the first from both radius and ulna, has split more or less into four parts. The proximal one, which is the most completely separated, is the supinator and passes from the ulna and external condyle to the radius. It is united with rest of this group along their ulnar origins, forming thus a continuous sheet for a short distance. The next two pass over the extensor carpi radii tendon, and fuse with the condensed tissue of the first digit. They are the abductor pollicis longits, extensor poUicis brevis and the extensor poUicis longus muscles. The fourth division is broad and thin and soon joins the deep surface of the tendon of the extensor communis and goes with it to be inserted into the condensed tissue of the second digit.

The Kerves. — By the migration of the arm posteriorly the brachial plexus has been pulled caudally and given a decided posterior inclination. It has also divided into the various cords more than in the preceding stage.

The distribution of the muscle and cutaneous nerves is much as in. the adult and as in the next stage.

Embryo XXII.

Embryo XXII measures 20 mm. V. B. and 18 mm. X. B. It is about seven weeks old. The entire arm has a more posterior position. The lower angle of the scapula is at the level of the sixth rib, its anterior limit is about at the seventh cervical vertebra. The entire arm as well as its various parts have increased in size. The muscles are sharper and better developed than the preceding stage. Every muscle that the adult arm presents can now be recognized and each one now contains muscle fibers. The tendons are better formed and can be traced farther towards their final insertions. The ligaments and fasciae are also more distinct. The process of ligament and tendon formation from the condensed mesenchyma is still in progress at the distal ends of the digits. The skeletal elements are for the most part fairly well formed in cartilage except the distal row of phalanges.

176 The DeveloiDinent of tlie Arm in Man

The Skeletal System. — The vertebral column. The intervertebral discs are reduced in thickness, while the bodies of the vertebra have increased and occnpy about four-fifths of each segment. The neural and transverse processes are larger and for the most part of cartilage. At the tip of the neural processes, which reach about one-half way around the spinal cord, is a small mass of condensed tissue at what juay be considered the growing point. These processes arise entirely from the body and not from the disc. So the body has probably grown at the expense of the disc. The perichondrium, wliich surrounds the body and its processes, is thickened along the ventral side of the bodies into the anterior common ligament.

The rihs are of cartilage surrounded by thick perichondrium, wliicli is continuous with the condensed tissue anlage of the one-half the sternum. The distance between the two halves of the sternum is not as great as in the preceding stage and at the anterior end they ai'e just beginning to come in contact with each other. There are no joint cavities between the ribs and vertebrae.

The clavicle is composed of cartilage somewhat different in appear ance from that in the other bones. It is continuous with the acromion and sternum by an area of condensed tissue. It is surrounded by a typical perichondrium. There are distinct coraco-clavicular, costoclavicular, and interclavicular ligaments.

The cartilaginous scapula is very much larger than in the precedingstage and contains no large areas of condensed tissue. It has moved posteriorly and lies in the region from the last cervical to the fifth thoracic vertebrae. Its dorsal border also extends farther dorsal than in any of the preceding stages. The acromion and coracoid processes are large and of cartilage with only the ordinary thickness of perichondrium which is continuous with that surrounding the rest of the scapula. The spine has not yet appeared but the thickened anterior border from which the supraspinatus muscle arises probably represents by its lateral lip the spine and by its median lip the future anterior border. The acromion arise partially from the lateral side of the anterior border. The head seems to have enlarged at the expense of part of the base of the coracoid process as the long head of the biceps now arises from the junction of the coracoid and the head, and the head of the humerus does not rest against such a large proportional area of the coracoid. There is a distinct suprascapular and a coraco-acromial ligament. At the posterior angle of the scapula there is small mass of condensed tissue which gives attachment to a portion of the serratus, latissimus, and teres major muscles.

Warren Harmon Lewis ITv

The humerus is much hirger than in embryo XLIII, and has much the adult shape, though of course it is thicker in proportion to its length. It is composed of cartilage. There is a capsular and a coraco-humeral ligament. No joint cavity exists between the scapula and humerus. The tuberosities and condyles are fairly well formed in cartilage and •condensed tissue. The bicipital groove is present.

The ulna and radius are larger and longer than in the preceding stage 3ind are well formed in cartilage. The olecranon, coranoid and styloid processes are partially formed in cartilage and condensed tissue. The perichondrium about the ulna and radius is quite thick. The capsular .and orbicular ligaments are present. No joint cavities exist and the cartilages are separated by condensed tissue continuous with the peri•ciiondrium.

Fig. 13. Cartilaginous skeleton of the arm of embrj-o XXII, lateral view. X 12 diameters.

All the bones of the carpus are represented by cartilage, and in about their relative positions. The amount of condensed tissue matrix is much less than in the preceding stage. The condensed tissue matrix is continuous with the ulna and radius and the five metacarpals without joint cavities. Indications of ligaments of the wrist are present.

The five metacarpals are present in cartilage surrounded by thick perichondrium. The first is the shortest.

The first tAvo rows of phalanges are present in all the digits. They are of cartilage surrounded by a very thick perichondrium, which is continuous with the condensed tissue between them and the metacarpals and between the phalanges them.selves. It is also continuous with the ■enlarged condensed tissue tip of each digit. There are thickenings for the various ligaments connecting the metacarpals and phalanges and the phalanges with each other.

The Musculak System. — (Plate II, Fig. C.) The trapezius muscle fibers extend from the occiput to the level of the sixth rib. There is a

178 The Development of the Arm in Man

considerable interval of fascia connecting them to the neural processes of the lower cervical and the thoracic vertebrae. There is a tendonous attachment to the clavicle and acromion and into fascia or condensed tissne on the surface of the infraspinatus between the trapezius and the deltoid.

The rliomhoid muscle lies in the region of the seventh cervical to the fourth thoracic vertebrae. It is inserted into the condensed tissue along the dorsal border of the scapula.

The latissimus dorsi muscle fibers extend from the humerus to the level of the ninth rib. There is a considerable interval of fascia between them and the neural processes of the lower thoracic and the first two or three lumbar vertebrae. This dorsal fascia is not very well marked. The latissimus also has fibers attached to the condensed tissue at the inferior angle of the scapula.

The serratus anterior muscle is separate from the levator scapulae except near its attachment to the scapula. It is a broad, thin sheet, having digitations to the first eight ribs.

The pedoralis major muscle is well developed. The separation between the clavicular and the sterno-costal portions is less marked than in the preceding stage.' The muscle is attached as low as the sixth rib.

The pedoralis minor muscle is quite distinct from the major, as a considerable layer of loose mesenchymal tissue lies between them. It arises from the second, third and fourth ribs and passes to the coracoid process.

The siibclavius muscle is inserted into the clavicle at an angle of 45°. As the scapula and clavicle sink down towards the level of the first rib the angle at which this muscle is inserted into the clavicle decreases.

The teres major muscle arises from the lower angle of the scapula and passes to the humerus. It is interesting to note that at this stage tendon of the latissimus dorsi twists around the lower l^order of the teres to be inserted with it into the humerus.

The deltoid muscle is large and well developed.

The suprasfinatus muscle arises from the thickened anterior border of the scapula. It cannot be said to take origin more from the lateral surface than from the median surface of the scapula.

The infraspinatus muscle occupies the middle of the lateral surface of the scapula and passes beneath the deltoid to the great tuberosity of the humerus.

The suhscapularis muscle arises from most of the median surface of

Warren Harmon Lewis 179

the scapula. Its tendon of insertion is broad and thin and closely applied to the capsular ligament.

The three heads of the triceps muscle are easily distinguished. The long and external heads are of about the same size. The anconeus muscle is continuous with the triceps but arises from the external condyle and passes to the side of the olecranon and adjoining surface of the shaft of the ulna.

The long 'head of the biceps muscle arises from the junction of the eoracoid process and the head of the scapula and passes through the bicipital groove. The two heads are inserted together into the condensed tissue swelling on the radius.

The corncobracJtviUs muscle and short head of the biceps are intimately connected for most of the length of the former.

The brachialis muscle has spread out over more of the distal surface of the humerus than in the preceding stage.

The flexor muscles of the forearm are easier to distinguish than in the preceding stage.

The tendon of the palinaris longus is narrower in proportion than in embryo XLIII.

The tendon of the flexor carpi raclialis muscle can be traced farther towards its insertion into the base of the second metacarpal than in embryo XLIII.

The muscle fibers of the flexor sublimis digitorum still run to the carpus before the ^\ide tendon begins. This tendon soon splits into four tendons which go to the four ulnar digits. These tendons are better formed than in the preceding stage and split to surround the tendons of the deep flexor. Their ends fuse with the thick perichondrium about the phalanges.

The flexor carpi uhiaris muscle shows distinctly its two heads of origin. It has a well-formed tendon of insertion.

The deep flexor muscles can be separated into the flexor polUcis longus and the flexor profundus digitormn muscles. The muscle fibers of the profundus continue into the carpal region and end in a broad tendon which divides at the base of the metacarpus into four well-formed tendons. These fuse with the condensed tissue at the tips of the digits. There is a slight split in each of these tendons near its end. The tendon of the flexor longus pollieis behaves similarly.

The pronator quadratns muscle is oval in cross section, and connects the distal ends of the radius and ulna.

The lumbricales are quite well developed and their fairly well-formed tendons end in the perichondrium on the radial side of the digit. 14


The Development of the Arm in Man

The interossei mnscles and the small mnscles of the thumb and little finger are now fairly well developed. Muscle fibers are present.

The extensor muscles of the forearm show considerable advance over the preceding stage. The tendons of the extensor communis digitoriim are longer and narrower. The muscle fibers continue to the base of the metacarpus, where the splitting into the four tendons takes place. The tendons are inserted into the condensed tissue tips of the digits. The edge of the tendons near their insertions are more or less continuous with the perichondrium about the digit.

The tendon of the extensor carpi ulnaris is beginning to. form. One branch of it seems to join the communis tendon. This may be the tendon of the extensor minimi digiti.

briich,ora,lml,s /and .■xl! indf

Fig. 1-t. Lateral view of the arm of embrj'o XXII. from Plate VIII. Bardeen and Lewis, Vol. I, this Journal. X 12 dia.

The extensor carpi radialis longior et hrevior are not to be separated.

The supinator muscle is well developed and has the posterior interosseus nerve passing through it.

The abductor pollicis longus and extensor pollicis brevis muscles are only to be separated where the muscle fibres pass into tendons, which fuse with the perichondrium of the first digit. The separation occurs at the lower end of the radius. These two muscles are fairly distinct from the supinator and the extensor pollicis longus and extensor indicis projiriiis muscles. The last two muscles are inseparable for part of their course and shortly after dividing each forms a round tendon. The extensor pollicis longus then spreads out into the sheath about the first

Warren Harmon Lewis ISl

digit. The extensor indicis muscle joins the nlnar side of the tendon of the commimis to the second digit.

The Nehves.— The drachial plexus has a decided posterior inclination and seems to have been pulled down against the first rib. The three cords are so close together that it was impossible to separate them satisfactorily though indications of the cords are present. There is nothing especially peculiar about the distribution of the nerves from the plexus^ either motor or sensory, which is not present in the adult.


The first indications of the arm bud appear during the third week as a slight swelling in the lower cervical region on the anterior portion of the Wolffian ridge. This gradually enlarges and by the time the embryo is 4.5 mm. in length and three weeks old the arm is of considerable size. The base now lies opposite the lower four cervical and first thoracic vertebrae. The arm bud is at first filled with a homogeneous and closely packed mesenchyma. No nerves or myotome buds have entered the arm, yet it contains the tissue from which the muscular and skeletal elements develop.

During the fourth week before the nerves enter differentiation begins by an increased condensation for the skeletal core. The nerves, however, have reached the base of the arm and have united by their expanded ends into the first beginnings of the cervico-brachial plexus. During the fifth week the nerves from this plexus push into the pre-, muscle sheath which surrounds the skeletal core.

By the end of the fifth week the skeletal core can be differtotiated into many of the skeletal elements, three of Avhich contain cartilage, namely, the humerus, ulna and radius. The premuscle sheath also has become more or less differentiated into muscles or groups of muscles, between which, however, no sharp lines can, as a rule, be drawn. Toward the distal end the differentiation is less complete, and in the hand premuscle tissue still represents the intrinsic muscles. The nerves have grown into the hand and spread out in a veiy peculiar manner. Most of the branches of the brachial plexus found in the adult are now present.

By the end of the sixth week most of the muscles of the arm are easily recognized. The intrinsic muscles of the hand are just beginning to show fibrillation and are still mostly of premuscle tissue. The tendons and ligaments are also becoming more sharply differentiated. Most of the skeletal elements consist of cartilage and the surroundino

183 The Development of tlie Arm in Man

thick perichondrium. The clavicle, some of the carpals and the second row of phalanges are of condensed tissue, while the distal row of phalanges are not differentiated as yet. The nerves, both sensory and motor, are distributed much as in the adult.

By the end of the seventh week all the skeletal elements are of cartilage except the distal row of phalanges from the second to fifth digits, which are of condensed tissue. All the muscles are to be recognized and are composed of muscle fibers. The tendons and ligaments, except in the distal part of the digits, are well formed. The digits present a very interesting picture of the differentiation of the cartilage, perichondrium, ligaments, and tendons from the condensed tissue tip of each.

During the process of differentiation other important changes are taking place, namely, the migration caudally of the whole arm, the migTation or extension of certain muscles from the arm caudally along the body wall and the migration of other muscles from more anterior regions to the arm, shoulder girdle and thorax.

We may consider the position of the scapula and the inclination of the brachial plexus as indicators of the migration of the arm. We find, in an embryo of four and one-half weeks, that the scapula lies in the region of the fourth and fifth cervical vertebrae. The brachial plexus and the nerves forming it run to the arm without any caudal inclination. The nerves which leave the plexus do bend posteriorly in the arm. At five weeks the scapula has greatly enlarged and extends from the fourth cervical to the first dorsal vertebrae. Its center has evidently shifted posteriorly. The brachial plexus and the anterior nerves which go to it have a slight caudal inclination. By the end of the sixth week the greater portion of the scapula lies below the level of the first rib, its posterior angle, including the condensed tissue, having extended to the level of the fifth rib. The brachial plexus has been pulled along with the shifting of the arm and has a decided posterior inclination. By the end of the seventh week very little of the scapula lies above the level of the first rib, and its lower angle reaches to the fifth intercostal space. The brachial plexus has a very marked caudal inclination and appears to be bent over the first rib. Before the adult conditions are attained the sca]nila must migrate some distance posteriorly. Part of this movement will take place with the sinking posteriorly of the ventral portion of the thoracic wall, for in these stages the ventral ends of the ribs are as far anterior as the vertebra? from Avhicli they arise.

The migration of the pectoralis major and minor and the latissimus dorsi muscles from the arm posteriorly to the thoracic wall is very

Warren Harmon Lewis 183

evident from the stages we have studied. At a very early stage these masses receive their nerves and later drag them posteriorly. By the seventh week the pectoral mnscles have reached their adnlt positions so far as the thoracic attachments are concerned. The latissimns dorsi, even Ly the end of this week, only extends to the ninth rib.

Another A'ery important group of muscles migrate from the head and anterior cervical region to the arm and thorax. In an embryo, four and one-half weeks old, the posterior end of the trapezius })remuscle mass lies at the level of the fourth cervical vertebra, at five weeks the muscle fibers extend to the level of the fifth cervical vertebra, and at six weeks to the fifth thoracic vertebra. At this age also the muscle has acquired its attachment to the scapula and clavicle. At seven weeks the muscle extends to the level of the sixth thoracic vertebra. The sp'inal accessory nerve is connected to the premuscle mass as early as the middle of the fifth week, and as the muscle extends posteriorly the nerve is carried along with it.

The sterno-mastoid muscle originates high up in the neck with the trapezius. It extends posteriorly and ventrally, reaching the clavicle and sternum during the sixth week.

The infrahyoid muscles also migrate from the anterior neck region, carrying their nerves down with them.

The rhomboid premuscle mass at 4.5 weeks lies at the level of the fifth cervical vertebra and gets its nerve supply at this time from the fifth cervical nerve. At five weeks it has extended to the sixth cervical vertebra, and at seven weeks it is for the most part in the thoracic region and has acquired its scapidar attachment.

The serratus anterior premuscle mass at four and one-half weeks already extends into the upper thoracic region and has its cervical nerve supply. It has probably already migrated from the cervical region. At five weeks it has reached its posterior attachment on the thorax, but is not as yet attached to the scapula. This occurs during the sixth week. The serratus anterior muscle is thus one of the first of these migrating muscles to attain its permanent attachments. It is also evident that the various serrations of this muscle are of secondary origin.

conilensed. mfs. tip

Plate I, Fig. A. Lateral view of the arm region of embryo XLIII. X 20 diameters.




onder.seti. mes. tip.

Plate II, Fig. B. Median riew of left arm of embryo XLIII. X 20 diameters.

Plate TI, Fig. C. Median view of right arm of embryo XXII. X 20 diameters.








From the Biological Laboratories of Tufts College.

With 9 Test Figukes.

These studies were imdertaken at the suggestion of Dr. J. S. Kingsley and were carried on during the year 1899-1900 under his direction, at the Biological Laboratory of Tufts College.

My specimens were killed either in aqueous corrosive sublimate or in Davidolf's corrosive-acetic mixture. Dektield^s hematoxylin was principally used as a staining agent. Wax reconstructions were made according to the method of Born. My results are largely but confirmatory of those of YdiW Wijhe, Miss Julia Piatt, Hoffmann and Neal. It is hoped, however, that a presentation of the subject freed from externals may, together with the series of reconstructions submitted, assist in the comprehension of the process of development.

The discovery that m selachii the eye muscles are developed from the epithelial walls of the Ist, 2nd and 3rd head somites was made by Marshall. His results have been repeatedly confirmed, and there can be no reasonable doubt of their validity. I use the term " somite " advisedly, being convinced that in Acanthias the head cavities are comparable with trunk somites. Neal, 98, p. 187, presents an excellent summary of the evidence on this point. A history of the development of the eye muscles is therefore a history of the origin and differentiation of these head somites. At this point I wish to call attention to the very detailed accoimt of the early history of these somites, presented by Hoffmann, 96, in his " Embryology of the Selachii."

AxTERiOR Somite. — Before passing to a consideration of the eye muscle somites proper. I propose, for the sake of completeness, to consider the anterior somite. Van Wijhe saw (82, p. 13), in the single specimeu of Galeiis at his disposal, on either side of the head, anterior to the 1st or premandibular somite, a slender cavity with distinct and

1 Studies from the Biological Laboratories of Tufts College, under the direction of J. S. Kingsley, No. XXIX.

186 The Development of the Eye Muscles in Aeanthias

thickened walls. He homologised this with the anterior prolongation of the first somite observed by him in Pristiurus and Scyllium. He therefore considered it as merely a secondary subdivision of that cavity. Miss Piatt, 91, observed similar cavities in Aeanthias, and to her is due the name of " anterior head cavities " ; it seeming unwise to alter the numbering of the remaining head somites for the sake of a pair of somites which are only known to occur in two forms. It also de

A. V.

OS. V.

S. A.

Op. Ves.

Fig. 1. — Reconstruction of auditory and optic vesicles, ganglia of fifth and seventh nerves and the anterior, first, second and third somites of the right side of an Aeanthias embryo, 12}^ mm. total length. Lateral view.

serves mention that Zimmermann, 91, p. llo, recognized, in the same year and quite independently of Miss Piatt, the presence in Aeanthias, of this somite. According to Miss Piatt, the archenteron, which extended forward to the anterior neuropore as a solid mass of cells, was divided into an anterior and a posterior part by the down-growing infundibnlum. Both parts .grew laterally; the anterior forming the anterior head somite, the posterior the 1st or premandibular somite. Hoffmann was able to add to this the observation, that the downgrowing anlage of the infundibnlum not only divides this process of the archenteron into an anterior and a posterior part, but that it also sub

Arthur B. Lamb


divides the anterior part into three smaller portions: one axial in position, two lateral and paired. From these lateral portions develops, on either side, the anterior head cavity of Miss Piatt. Of the axial portion as much as lies beneath the infundibulum is aborted, while its anterior part persists and forms a connecting stalk by which the somite of one side is joined with that of the other. This connecting stalk is similar to that (C. sf. in figures) which joins the first (premandibular) somite of one side with that of the other. The only difference is that there we have a canal, while here we have a loose and solid strand of


Fig. 2. — Parasagittal section of somites A, I and II of Acantliias embryo of 16 mm. total length showing the early ditlerenliation of muscles inferior and superior obliquus and inferior rectus.

connective cells. It wdl be seen that Hoffmann differs from Miss Piatt, simply in the recognition of an axial portion which later gives rise to a connecting strand. Stages in which 29-33 somites were differentiated showed very clearly the presence of this axial portion as described and figured by Hoffmann. See also Minot's figures (oi, pp. 82, 83).

At a 32 segment stage the somite is elongate in form, its main axis extending obliquely downward beneath the eyeball. It is smaller at its dorsal end, where the cells have assumed a somewhat epithelial arrangement, and a slight lumen is present. Ventrally. the somite consists of a

188 The Development of the Eye Muscles in Acanthias

large mass of cells rather loosely packed, and occupying the space between eye-ball and epidermis. The somite is pressed closely against the. anterior walls of both the 1st and the overlapping 2nd somite.

As the embryo grows older the somite assumes a much more elongate form (Fig. 1). The lumen increases in size and extends far into the ventral process, while the walls become considerably thinner and butone cell in thickness; still, they never become so thin as those of succeeding head somites. At a fourteen mm. stage the walls have again become thickened. This is especially true of the median and posterior walls. At a later stage (IG mm.) the cells are being freely proliferated into^ the lumen of the somite, and the median thickening is very marked. This proliferation continues, probably externally as well as internally, for the outline of the somite becomes gradually indistinct. At a 19 mm. stage (Fig. 4, SA) the somite consists simply of a solid mass of cells, gradually thinning out into the general mesenchymatoustissue. At a 26 mm. stage no trace of the somite can be seen. While,, as Hoffmann says, no muscle fibres are formed by this somite, still, as both Miss Piatt, 91, and Neal, 98, obserTed, the cells proliferated into the cavity assume an elongate form.

The anterior somite undergoes an interesting change in its position relative to the first somite. Originally pressed against the anterior walls of both the 1st and 2nd somites it comes, at a 12.5 mm. stage (Fig. 1), to occupy a position lateral to somite I, and in the angle between that somite and somite II. This seems to be due to the great enlargement of the eye vesicle, and also to the forward growth of somite I. Soon, however, the outpocketing from the posterior end of somite I, which gives rise to the inferior oblique, appears, and this ultimatel}^ grows nearly around the anterior somite, so that this later somite occupies a deep depression in its wall (Figs. 2 and 3).

ISTeal, 98, p. 227, found at a 65 segment stage processes apparently extending from the ciliary ganglion to this somite. I have not been able to find such processes of whose nervous character I was certain. FiKST, OE Peemandibular Somite. — The epithelial walls of this somite give rise to four of the six muscles of the adult eye. It is therefore preeminently the eye-muscle somite of the head. Balfour stated that this cavity was cut off from the anterior end of the coelom by the formation of the first gill cleft. Marshall also held that it was cut off from tlie anterior end of the coelom, but that this took place independently of the formation of the gill cleft. In Scyllium and Pristiurus. Van Wijhe found that the cavity was never in other than potential connection with the primary coelom, arising independently of it

Arthur B. Lamb


S. Obl. Cil. S-.

C. St. Op. V.


from the undifferentiated mass of cells in which the notochord anteriorly ends.

In Acanthias, as was shown above in the history of the anterior somite, tlie down-growing infnndihulum divides the anterior prolongation of the archenteron into an anterior and posterior portion. From the anterior portion the anterior somite develops. The posterior por

FiG. 3. — Reconstruction of optic vesicle, head somites and nerves of au Acauthias embrj'o, 16 mm. total length. Right side, medial view.





I. Obl.

S. A



tion, growing laterally, gives rise to the first somite of either side, while axially it forms the connecting stalk or canal so characteristic of this somite (Fig. 3, C. si.). At a stage when 31-22 somites are differentiated, both the somite and the connecting strand are solid. This is still the case at a 29-30 mm. stage, except that in the connecting stalk a small cavity is visible. At a slightly later stage the number of these median cavities has increased. Miss Piatt, gi, homologised these with the median cavities described by Dohrn^ go, in Torpedo.

190 The Development of the Ej-e Muscles in Acanthias

A considerable lumen can now be distinguished in the lateral somites. The median stalk is continuous at its middle with the notochord above and the alimentary canal behind. Hoffmann describes three processes arising at this stage (32 segments) from the 1st somite :

I. A process extending backwards and downwards, running close to, and j)arailel with, the visceral prolongation of the 2nd somite. He considered it probable that this process, although he had never seen a lumen in it, was comparable to the hollow process found by Zimmermann, 91, in Pristiurus, connecting the premandibular somite with the ventral coelom. Neal, 98, p. 201 note, while confirming the. presence of this " Zellstrang," was very certain that it was derived not from the mesoderm but from the neural crest, having followed the migration of neural crest cells ventrally into the mandibular arch. Neal also called attention to a similar strand of cells situated posterior to the visceral portion of the mandibular cavity. While I found that this strand of cells is apparently continuous with a slight outgrowth from the 1st somite, as figured by Hoffmann, this continuity seems to be more apparent than real. In the first place, I am able to confirm the presence of the posterior strand described by Neal. Further, I found this posterior strand not only continuous laterally with the anterior strand, but dorsally with neural crest cells. This is especially evident at a 32-33 somite stage. I therefore conclude with Neal that this " Zellstrang " is not a process of the somite, but is rather derived from the neural crest.

II. A process extending ventrally forward below the anterior cavity. A similar process was seen by A'^an Wijhe in Pristiurus and was homologised by him with the anterior head cavity of Galeus. Since the anterior cavity in Galeus is in all probability homologous with that in Acanthias, if Hoffmann's process in Acanthias is homologous with that found by Van Wijhe in Pristiurus, then, since both occur at once in Acanthias, the homology drawn by Van Wijhe could not 1)e maintained. Hoffmann believed this to be the case.

1 have been able to find but very slight evidences of this process. I am led therefore to doubt the homology drawn by Hoffmann between this process and the process described by Van Wijhe in Pristiurus. Consequently, I cannot on this ground take exception to the homology drawn by Van Wijhe between the process of the 1st somite in Pristiurus and the anterior somite in Galeus.

III. A process extending dorsally along the anterior surface of the 2nd somite. It is small in extent and transitory in appearance. I am inclined, here as before, to doubt the real continuity between this

Artluir B. Lamb


process and the somite, since it seems to me that it might equally well be derived from neural crest cells.

As the embryo develops, the median stalk is pushed away from the alimentary canal and around the end of the notochord by the intervening aorta. The notochord thus shifts its position from the dorsal wall of the median stalk to its posterior wall. Such is the compression

iE >■

o. s



S. V.








Fig. 4. — Reconstruction of optic vesicle, ganglia and somites of an Acautbias embryo, 19 mm. total length. Right side, medial view. The Anlagen of the muscles lined obliquely.

that exists in this region that the median stalk is nearly severed at the point of contact. The irregularly placed median cavities of the stalk now fuse together and finally assume connection with the lumen of the somite on either side. The lumen of the median stalk persists until a late stage, when the walls become mesenchymatous and the cavity is obliterated. The stalk persists, however, as connecting strand until nearly a 30 mm. stage (C. st. in Figs. 1-7).

193 The Development of the Eye Muscles in Acanthias

The thickenings of the epithelial walls which give rise to the four muscles^ occur in general on the dorso-median walls. The first thickening appears on the more ventral end of the somite. This soon becomes a large outpocketing with thick walls (Fig. 3, I. Ohl.). It is the anlage of the muscle obliquus inferior. This therefore is, as Hoffmann pointed out, the first of the oculomotor muscles to be differentiated.

The next thickening to appear is located very near the abovementioned anlage of the inferior oblique. It gives rise to the muscle rectus inferior (Fig. 3, Inf. Bee). At a later stage thickeniugs appear on the more dorsal end of the somite. These do not become well marked and differentiated from one another until a somewhat late stage, about 20-22 mm. The more dorsal of these thickenings forms the muscle rectus superior; the more ventral, the muscle rectus interior.

It will be seen from the above that the muscles arise in two pairs, one at either end of the somite.

The outpocketing which is to form the inferior oblique soon becomes constricted off froin the somite. At a 19 mm. stage its lumen has nearly disappeared, and the muscle has assumed an elongate form (Fig. 3). The direction of the principal axis as well as the direction of its muscle fibres is longitudinal. In the adult the direction is also nearly longitudinal, but it will be seen from the series of reconstructions (Figs. 4, 6, 7, 8), that the originally anterior end has become posterior; i. e., the direction of the muscle is nearly reversed. This transformation is brought about by a revolution of the posterior end about the anterior end as a centre, combined with a general ventral shifting of the muscle. The adult condition is approximately reached at a 33 mm. stage (Fig. 8).

The thickening, which is to form the inferior rectus, and belonging to the same pair as the inferior oblique, at first extends parallel to that muscle and therefore in a longitudinal direction (Fig. 4, Inf. Eec). At a 26 mm. stage it has turned through approximately a right angle, and runs in a general dorso-ventral direction (Figs. 6, 7, Inf. Rec).

The thickenings which arise in the more anterior and dorsal end of the somite, and which give rise to the superior and internal recti, have only become clearly differentiated at a 25 mm. stage (Fig. 7). The internal rectus retains its nearly longitudinal direction; the superior rectus describes approximately a right angle about its posterior end. At a 33 mm. stage (Fig. 8) it has approximately reached its adult dorsoventral direction. Except where the muscle thickenings have been formed, the walls of the somite retain their single layered epithelial character until about a 27-30 mm. stage, when they become converted into loose mesenchyme and the outline of the somite is lost.

Arthur B. Lamb


The ninsculature arising from this somite is innervated by the ■oculomotor. This nerve is diiTerentiated at an 8 mm, stage. It arises, Neal, 98, from the ventral floor of the mid-brain, as processes from neuroblast cells in the ventral horn of this encephalomere. It extends backward to the ciliary ganglion and runs through it to the walls of the 1st somite. Neal, 98, p. 22 T, found, at a stage before the appearance of the oculomotor, processes extending from the ciliary ganglion to the somite, similar to those found in connection with the anterior

s c

Fig. 5. — Reconstruction of optic vesicle anrl derivatives of the mandibular and liyoid somites of tlie right side of an Acanthias embryo, 22 mm. long, viewed from medial side.

somite. As in that case, I have been unable to convince myself that the fibres Avhich seem to connect ganglion and somite are really nervous in character.

Secoxd, oe M.vxD[BUL.\ii SoMiTE. — This somite is the largest in the head, and is characterized by the possession of a visceral portion connecting it with the ventral ctelom.

Hoft'mann. 96, found this somite marked off by constrictions frcnii the general body cavity at a 20 somite stage. A contracted lumen was present. At this stage the floor of the brain is pressed closely down upon the notochord and somite, but as growth takes place it draws

194 The Development of the E3^e Muscles in Acanthias

away, and a considerable space is left beneath it. Into this space a proliferation of mesenchyme cells takes place from the anterior7median wall of the somite.

The walls of the somite at this stage are thin and single-layered^ except in the median side, where the cells are higher and a tendency towards the formation of two layers is evident. Later, the median wall becomes thicker, and the area of mesenchyme proliferation more definite. The cells derived from this outgrowth are spreading out around the walls of the somite. This outoTowth seems to me to be

Fig. 6. — Reconstruction of optic vesicle and derivatives of the premandibular somite of an Acauthias embryo, 2(5 mm. total length. Right half, medial view.

comparable to a sclerotome of a trunk sonute, both in position and in histological appearance.

At a 10 mm. stage the lateral, as well as the posterior median walls, have become very thin. This thinning out at posterior median wall continues, and soon the epithelial character of the bounding tissue is lost. This break, together with a constriction which gradually takes place, divides the somite at this point ultimately into a dorsal and a

Arthur B. Lamb 195

visceral part. At a 13 mm. stage the lumen of the one part is completely separated from that of the other. Until a late stage, however (24 mm.), the two parts are connected by strands of mesenchymatous tissue (Ifig. 5, MS.).

For the sake of clearness I will treat the further development of dorsal and visceral parts separately.

Dorsal Part, or the Myotome Proper. — At a fourteen mm. stage a large outpocketing with slightly thickened walls is apparent at the anterior end of this part of the somite. This outpocketing is the anlage of the muscle obliquus superior. At the base of this outpocketing, on the median side of the somite, a thickening of the epithelium is evident. This is the anlage of a rudimentary muscle first mentioned by Miss Piatt, and spoken of by her as " Muscle E." The walls of the remainder of the dorsal part are very thin.

Sixteen mm. stage (Kg. 3). The outpocketing giving rise to the superior oblique has become very thick-walled. " Muscle E is well developed. The direction of its principal axis, as well as of its fibres, is longitudinal. It is not straight, however, but its anterior end is curved outwards.

From this stage on, those parts of the walls not forming muscles rapidly degenerate, and the lumen of the somite is usurped by mesenchymatous tissue. A contracted lumen, however, persists until a late stage in the anlage of the superior oblique muscle. The general direction of this muscle and of the fibres which are now present in it, is longitudinal. The whole muscle migrates forward, the posterior end becoming attached, while the anterior end moves ventrally. The muscle consequently comes to extend in a dorso-ventral direction (Figs. 4, 5, 8, S. Ohl.). At a 19 mm. stage (Fig. 4) it is still longitudinal and still retains connection with " Muscle E " by a strand of connective tissue. This latter muscle has now reached its maximum development. The anterior end curves not only outward but upward as well, so that the direction of the muscle is approximately dorso-ventral. From now on this muscle undergoes degeneration. At a 26 mm. stage scarcely a trace of it remains.

Visceral Part. — At a 12 mm. stage the walls of this part, except "where they are continuous dorsally with the somite proper, are closely compressed right and left. At the ventral end the walls are very thick, and constitute the anlage of the muscle adductor maxillse.

At a 14 mm. stage an outpocketing appears at the dorsal end. This is the anlage of a rudimentary muscle which Miss Piatt, gi, first recognized. Hofl'mann, 96, considered this muscle identical with that de15


The Development of the Eye Muscles in Acanthias

scribed by Vetter^ 74, and designated by him, muscle levator labii superioris. He does not, however, give any reasons for this view. Miss Piatt was able to trace this muscle only until it came to occupy a position in close proximity to the inferior oblique eye muscle. She believed, however, that the muscle was permanent.

This outpocketing, as will be seen in the reconstructions, can readily be folloAved until a 26 mm. stage (Figs. 4, 5, 6, F). At a 28 mm. stage

O. S. V.

^'^'i; ■^

Int. Uec.

O f

■? o

Fig. 7. — Optic vesicle, nerves and developing eye muscles of an Acanthias embryo, 27 mm. total length. Right side, medial view. The oblique lines indicate the parts of the somites which are being converted into muscles.

its walls are thin and enclose an extensive lumen. At a 26 mm. stage its lumen has disappeared and its constituent cells have become elongate and apparently muscular. The muscle is situated at this stage, as Miss Piatt stated, close to the inferior oblique eye muscle. As will be seen in reconstructions, it is nearly continuous with the thickened ventral edge of the remainder of the visceral part. The cells of this

Arthur B. Lamb 197

thickened edge seem also muscuhir. At a 27 mm. stage I have been able to find only the very slightest remains of this muscle. Such a rapid degeneration seems, however, improbable, and requires, I feel, further investigation.

The superior oblique muscle derived from this somite is innervated in the adult by the trochlearis. This nerve, however, is the last cranial nerve to be differentiated, not appearing until a 21-22 mm. stage (Fig. 5). At a 16 mm. stage, as several investigators have shown, the small ramus ophthalmicus superficialis V. sends fibres to this somite. From this it might be inferred that motor impulses were originally transmitted to this somite by the 5th nerve. Neal considers this supposition untenable, since in embryos of but 19 mm. length, consequently before the appearance of the trochlearis, the ramus ophthalmicus superioris V. shows no connection with the muscle. While unwilling to contradict this latter statement and say that such a connection does exist, I should be even more unwilling, because of the very close proximity of muscle and nerve at 19-24 mm. stages, to say that such a connection does not exist.

Thikd, ok Htoid Somite. — This is the most posterior somite which contributes to the musculature of the eye, giving rise to the external rectus muscle. It is marked off from the rest of the body cavity merely by constrictions before and behind, at a time Avhen the 7th somite of Van Wijhe is completely separated. This emphasizes the progressive development which takes place both forward and backward from a point in the neck region. At this stage its form and position is very similar to that of the four succeeding head somites. At a 22 segment stage a contracted lumen is generally visible. ISTeal points out that at this stage the somite is in every way comparable with a trunk myotome. It is plainly dorsal in its topographical relations to the notochord, dorsal aorta and dorsal wall of the alimentary canal. Mesenchymatous cells are plainly proliferated from a well marked area on its median wall, forming an outgrowth comparable to the sclerotome of trunk somites. The somatic wall is plainly epithelial and there is a well marked myocoel. Finally, the somite is, as will be seen later, innervated by a nerve which is generally recognized as comparalile with the ventral root of a spinal nerve.

At a 28-30 segment stage this somite is completely separated from its neighbors. Its lumen has become well marked, while anteriorly the somite has assumed a bilobed appearance. At a 32 segment stage this lobation is especially evident. More marked growth now takes place in the middle and posterior part of the somite, and at the same time the walls there begin to lose their epithelial character.


The Development of the Eye Muscles in x\canthias

At a 10 mm. stage the lateral posterior end has become distinctly bilohed, and the more lateral of these lobes bears, in favorably orientated sections, a striking resemblance to the visceral portion of the 2nd somite. The disintegration of the epithelial walls of the main portion of the somite continues, while the more dorsal of the two anterior lobes has increased greatly in size. At a 13 mm. stage (Fig. 1) the main

fci > >

^ p; ►-;

O. S. V.

Tr. S. Ot)l.

Op. V. Int. Rec.

Abd. Ga. g. B. Rec.

Inf. Rec.

Fig. 8. — Optic vesicle, nerves and eye muscles of an Acautliias embryo, 33 mm. total length. Right side, medial view. The muscles have now nearly their definitive position.

portion of the somite, which is large and globular, is bounded merely by loose .connective tissue which now rapidly fills up the lumen of this part of the somite. There is therefore remaining only the anterior prolongation or dorsal lobe, which consists mainly of elements derived from the median wall. This prolongation now grows rapidly and extends directly forward as an elongate pointed process. Its median dorsal wall is thickened, especially at the posterior end. There, as well

Arthur B. Lamb


as in the anterior portion, cells are assuming an elongate form and a longitudinal direction. The posterior end is indistinct in outline, and cells are evidently dropping off into the mesenchyme. By this degeneration at its posterior end, by growth of the muscle as a whole, and especially by the outpushing at its anterior end (Fig. 9, E), the whole somite moves forward, so that while originally located some distance away, it comes to lie in close proximity to the eyeball (Figs. 4, 5, 7, 8, E. Bee. Fig. 9, a).

OP ve

& »8P*'S

Fig. 9. — Part of transverse section of Acantbias embryo, 19-20 mm. total lengtb, showing tbe proliferation of the external rectus muscle (E) from the byoid (III) somite.

This somite is innervated by the abducens. This nerve is, as mentioned above, generally considered as homologous to the ventral motor root of spinal nerves. It arises (Neal, g8, p. 230) at a ten mm. stage from the tloor of the hind brain at a point opposite the ear vesicle as an outgrowth from neuroblast cells in the ventral wall of eneephalomere YII. The nerve gradually extends forward until it reaches its somite.

200 The Development of the Eye Muscles in Aeanthias


Broadly considered, it will be seen that the necessary mechanical relations between eyeball and muscle is secured: (1) by a forward growth of processes from the 3nd and 3rd somites, and the development of muscle fibres in them; (2) by a S23reading out of the 1st somite around the eyeball and the development of muscles in its distal portions.

I wish to call attention to the fact, which so far as I know has not been noticed before, that the original direction of all the eye muscles together with " Muscle E " is longitudinal. This seems to me to represent an originally flexible condition of the head and to be an additional support for the homology of head and trunk somites.

Finally, it seems to me improbable that the present musculature of the eye in Aeanthias is the primitive one for several reasons: (1) The adult condition is reached only after the constituent muscles have undergone rather extensive alterations in form and transfer of position, (2) The muscles do not all arise equally early, nor do they reach their definitive condition at the same time. (3) Before some of the permanent eye muscles are formed, one muscle ("' Muscle P] "), which later disappears, reaches an advanced stage of development. This muscle, from its form and position, must either have once been functionally connected with the eye or with some structure now lost, and of which not even an embryonic rudiment is known. The same reasoning applies to the anterior somite though with diminished force, since it does not reach the same advanced stage of development.

If then the present musculature of the eye is not the primitive one, it becomes an interesting question to inquire if the embryonic development will indicate any stages in the phylogenetic development. Two such stages, it seems to me, are indicated. 1st, a stage where if any eye musculature existed it was furnished by the anterior somite. This is indicated first by the fact that this somite is the only one which from its topographical relations could move the eye; and second, the longitudinal direction and serial arrangement of the remaining muscle anlagen indicate a jointed condition of the head and consequently a functional activity on the part of these muscles which would preclude any connection with the eye.

2nd, a stage at which four muscles moved the eye. These were the superior oblique, the external rectus, the inferior oblique and " Muscle E." These four muscles were arranged radially. " Muscle E " and the inferior oblique opposed one another, the former pulling the back of the eye dorsally, the latter, ventrally. The superior oblique and the

Arthur B. Lamb 201

external rectus opposed one another, the former pulling the back of the eye forward; the latter, backwards. This stage is reached in ontogeny at a length of 21-22 mm. (Figs. 4, 5, 6). The four muscles then have the rectangular radial arrangement described above. They have all reached approximately the same degree of differentiation, which is far in advance of the three remaining eye muscles.

These speculations, based solely on ontogenetic evidence, require confirmatory phylogenetic evidence derived from a study of forms lower than Acanthias.


Altd., abducens nerve.

AM., anlage of muscle adductor mandibulEe.

A. v., auditory vesicle.

BC. I., first branchial cleft.

Cil. g., ciliary ganglion.

C. m,, stalk connecting the premandibular somites of the two sides.

U., Temporary muscle derived from the 'mandibular somite; in Fig. 9, external rectus muscle.

Ect., ectoderm of dorsal surface of head.

E. Rec, externuis rectus muscle.

F., temporary muscle derived from the mandibular somite.

Qa. ff., Gasserian ganglion.

/. Obi., inferior oblique muscle.

Inf. Rec, inferior rectus muscle.

Int. Rec, internal rectus muscle.

MB., mesenchyme connecting dorsal and visceral parts of somite II.

NC, notochord.

OC, oculomotor nerve.

Op. St., optic stalk.

Op. Ves., optic vesicle.

Op. v., ophthalmicus profundus branch of fifth nerve.

O. a. -v., ophthalmicus superficialis branch of fifth nerve.

0. S. VII., ophthalmicus superficialis branch of seventh nerve.

Ra. v., anterior root of fifth nerve.

Rp. v., posterior root of fifth nerve.

R. VII., root of seventh nerve.

S. A., anterior head somite.

»SV., 811., 811 1., first (premandibular), second (mandibular), and third (hyoid) somites.

8. Ohl., superior oblique muscle.

8. Rec, superior rectus muscle.

811. D. d: v., dorsal and ventral portions of somite II.

Tr., trochlearis nerve.

YII., seventh nerve.

All of the figures except 2 and 9 are drawn from vs^ax reconstructions. The regions ruled on figures 4 and 7 are those portions of the somites which are being transformed into muscles.

202 The Development of the Eye Muscles in Acanthias


DOHRN, Anton, 'go. — Studien zur Urgeschichte des Wirbelthierkorpers. XV.

Nene Grundlag-en zur Beurtheihing- der Metamerie des Kopfes.

Mittheil. Zool. Station, Neapel, Bd. IX, p. 330, 1890. HoFJFMANN, C. K., '96. — Beitrage zur Eutwicklungsgeschiclite der Selachii.

Morphol. Jahrbuch, XXIV, pp. 209-286, pis. ii-v, 1896. Marshall, A. M., '81. — On the head cavities and associated nerves in Elasnio branchs. Quarterly Jour. Micros. Sci., XXI, pp. 72-97, 2 pis., 1881. MiNOT, Charles S., '91. — On the morphology of the pineal region, based

upon its development in Acanthias. American Journal of Anatomy, i. pp. 81-98, 1901. Neal, H. v., '98. — The segmentation of the nervous system in Squalus acanthias. Bulletin Mus. Comp. Zool., Harvard College, XXXI, No. 7, pp.

147-294, 9 pis., 1898. Platt Julla. B., '91. — A contribution to the morphology of the vertebrate

head based on a studj^ of Acanthias vulgaris. Journal of Morphol.,

V, pp. 79-112, 3 pis., 1891. Platt, Julia B., 'gi^. — Further contribution to the morphology of the

vertebrate head. Anatom. Anzeiger, VI, pp. 251-265, 1891. Van Wijhe, J. W., '82. — Ueber die Mesodermseg-mente und die Entwickelung

der Nerven des Selachien Kopfes. Natuurk. Verh. Koninkl. Akad.

Amsterdam. Deel. XXII, pp. 50, 5 pis., 1882. Vetter, Benjamin, '74. — Untersuchungen zur vergleichenden Anatomic der

Kiemen- und Kiefermusculatur der Fische, Jena. Zeitschrift, VIII,

p. 405, 1874. ZiMMERMANN, K. W., 'gi. — l^cber die Metamerie des Wirbelthiereskopfs.

Verhandl. Anat. Gesellsch. V. (Anat. Anzeiger, VI, Ergtinzungs

Hefte), pp. 107-114, 1891.




From the Anatomical Laboratory of the Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, 2Id.

With 8 Figures and 14 Tables.

The following imper presents the results of a study of the distribution of the main nerves of the abdomen and of the border region between the abdomen and thigh in man. The study was made in the dissecting rooms of the anatomical laboratory of the Johns Hopkins University^ The methods employed have been elsewhere described.'

Of the ventral branches of the twelve thoracic or intercostal nerves, the first six generally are confined in distribution to the thorax/ while . the last six are distributed in part to the abdominal walls. In addition, the first two lumbar nerves usually give rise to branches that are distributed to the distal margin of the thoracic wall, and to the skin at the junction of the abdomen and thigh. Considerable variation, however, exists in the origin and distribution of the nerves of the abdomen and of the border region. The extent of this variation in the main nerve tracts is shown in the tables given on pages 216 to 228. The following notes briefly explain these tables:

The most Anterior Thoracic Nerve, the Ventral Branch of WHICH Extends into the Abdominal Wall to Form the "First Abdominal Nerve." See Table I.

This table is based upon a very limited number of instances. The ventral branches of the intercostal nerves confined to the thorax emerge ventrally from between two successive costal cartilages. The ventral branches of the nerves distributed both to the abdomen and to the thorax pass below the costal margin of the thorax, then course forwards

, '(1) A statistical study of tbe variations in the formation and position of the lumbo-sacral plexus in man, Bardeen and Eltin^, Anatomischer Anzeiger, 1901, VoL XIX, p. 124. (2) Use of the material of the dissecting room for scientific purposes, Bardeen, Johns Hopkins Hospital Bulletin, 1901, Vol. Xll, p. 1.5.5.

2 With the exception of the fibres distributed by the first two or three to the arm.

204 Study of the Abdominal and Border-Nerves in Man

between the muscles of the abdominal wall, and finally are distributed in part to the rectus musculature and in part pass through the latter to be distributed to the skin. The last intercostal nerve confined to the thorax is distributed in part to the thoracic segment of the rectus knd in part to the overlying skin, while the ventral branches of the more anterior intercostal nerves pass through, the overlying structures directly to the subcutaneous tissue. It is probable that occasionally more than one thoracic segment of the rectus muscle is developed in man. Such, however, has not been the case in the subjects which I have examined. As shown in the table, in 10 instances the 6th nerve was the nerve distributed to the thoracic segment of the rectus, and in 6 instances the 7th. The first nerve passing below the costal margin before entering the rectus (that is to say, the first abdominal nerve) was in 10 instances the 7th, and in 6 instances the 8th nerve. A record was preserved of the race, sex, side of body, skeletal conditions, position of the lumbo-sacral plexus and of the border-nerves in the instances studied. No marked relation seems to exist between any of these factors and the variations noted in the table.

Eelations of the Abdominal Nerves to the Teansverse Tendons (Linea transversa, Inscription es tendinece) OF the Eectus AbdoimiNis Muscle. See Table II. — The transverse tendons of the rectus abdominis muscle in man correspond to the 7th, 8th, 9th, 10th, and 11th ribs.^ The relation between the transverse tendons and the costal cartilages is best seen in the transverse tendons corresponding to the seventh and eighth cartilages. In this region the bundles of fibres making up a segment of the rectus originate or terminate in part on the costal cartilage, in part in the corresponding tendon. The transverse tpndons corresponding to the eighth costal cartilage are often, to the ninth are usually, and to the tenth and eleventh are always some distance removed from the corresponding costal cartilage.

In the adult individual the transverse tendons are often to a greater or less extent obliterated, owing to the unequal growth of muscle-fibre bundles, some of which extend over more than one segment. Tlie transverse tendon corresponding to the 7th costal cartilage has been fairly distinct in all of the instances I have examined, but that corresponding to the 8th was absent in 9 out of 37 instances (24.3^); to the 9th in 4 out of 62 instances (6.5^); to the 10th in 9 out of 85 instances

3 See Mall, Devel. of the Ventral Abdominal Walls in Man, Journal of Morphology, Vol. XIV, p. 2, 1898.

Charles Eussell Bardeen 205

(10.6^); and to the 11th in 56 out of 79 instances (70. 9j^). In no instance have I seen a transverse tendon corresponding to the 13th rib.

In the simple conditions where the segments of the rectus are distinct and the transverse tendons well marked, the abdominal nerves after emerging from the intercostal spaces take a fairly direct course to the lateral margin of the rectus. Each nerve then pierces the rectus sheath, courses along the under surface of the latter muscle, and then gives off one or more cutaneous branches which usually emerge through the rectus in the vicinity of the transverse tendon corresponding to the rib by which the nerve is designated, and one or more muscular branches which are distributed to the segment of the rectus distal to that transverse tendon. The region where the rectus sheath is pierced by a given spinal nerve is usually posterior to the corresponding transverse tendon in case of the 7th and 8th nerves, and anterior in case of the 10th, 11th and 12th nerves. In a recent article in this journal * it has been shown that the primary ventral cutaneous branches of the more distal thoracic nerves are caught between the successive tips of those myotomes which give rise to the rectus musculature, and that in this way, the segmental arrangement of the nerves of the abdomen is early insured. In those instances in Avhich no transverse tendon is developed in the region between the tips of two myotomes, the tissue derived from each myotome is fused to a considerable extent, and the corresponding nerves are less definitely guided in their growth. We find, therefore, in the adult far greater irregularity in the course and in the distribution of the branches of such nerves. Often two or more nerve trunks, arise from a single intercostal nerv^e, and course forward to pierce the rectus sheath separately. See Fig. II. This was found to be the case with the 8th nerve, in 2 out of 37 instances; with the 9th in 3 out of 61; with the 10th in 6 out of 85; with the 11th in 18 out of 79 instances; and with the 12th in 17 out of the 56 instances in which the twelfth furnished no direct hypogastric branch. In 18 instances, out of the 74 in which a careful record was made of the branches of the 12th thoracic nerve, the nerve sent a ventral branch to the rectus, and a separate hypogastric branch to the skin of the abdomen. See Fig. Ill A.

Not infrequently an abdominal nerve will divide into two or more branches immediately before entering the rectus sheath. See Fig. I C.

In the majority of instances, as pointed out by Mall (op. cit.), the transverse tendon of the rectus corresponding to the 10th rib is attached

4 Bardeen and Lewis: Development of the limbs, body-walls and back in man. This journal, Vol. I, 1901, p. 1.


Study of the Abdominal and Border-Nerves in Man

on its median margin to the dense tissue surrounding the umbilicus. This occurred in. 73 out of 85 instances. In 13 out of the 85 instances (15.3;^), the transverse tendon corresponding to the 11th rib was intimately united to the tissue surrounding the umbilicus. See Fig. V. In 9 of these instances the transverse tendon corresjoonding to the 10th rib Avas absent, in 4, present.

I have discovered no close relation between the development of the 7th, 8th, 9th, 10th, and 11th nerves, and the transverse tendons corresponding to them on the one hand, and race, sex, side of body, skeletal conditions, position of the lumbo-sacral plexus, or distribution of the border-nerves, upon the other.

Okigin of the Most Distal Abdominal JSTerve En^tepjxg the Eectus Muscle. See Table III. — As may be seen from the table, the 20th spinal (12th thoracic) nerve is the most distal spinal nerve supplying the rectus muscle in the great majority of instances (9G out of 112 instances, 85.8^).

The nineteenth spinal nerve was the last nerve to furnish fibres to the rectus muscle in but two instances. In both of these the spinal column was shorter than normal, the plexus had an anterior position, and the border-nerves were of a proximal type.^

Frequency with 2i<hicJi the most distal nerve to the rectus ahdominis muscle arose in the types of plexus designated^ from the spinal nerves indicated in the column at the left.

Types of Plexus.

Spinal Nerves.






































100 1























4 '44.5

6 Owing to an unfortunate oversight, a number of the earlier charts, made at a time when especial care was not taken in the study of the abdominal nerves, were included in making up the column on the " last nerve to the rectus muscle" in the Tables 2-8, in the article by Bardeen and Elting, on "A statistical study of the variations in the formation and position of the lumbo-sacral plexus in man." Anatomischer Anzeiger, Vol. XIX, pp. 228-237, 1901. These earlier charts should have been excluded in making up this column. The following table is based upon charts which record with especial exactness the more distal nerves of the abdomen:

Charles Eiissell Bardeen 207

Of the 14 instances in which the 21st nerve furnished fihres to the rectus muscle, in 9 the vertebral column was apparently normal, and in 5 it was lengthened by an additional vertebra. In 2 instances the plexus was of the normal type, in 10, of the distal type, and in 2 instances no good record of the plexus was preserved. See Fig. V.

No marked relations were noted between these variations in the distal supply of the rectus muscle and sex, race or side of body. Both Huge " and Bolk ' have given interesting accounts of the relations of the distal abdominal and border-nerves in the anthropoid apes.

The Number of Spinal Neeves Contributing to the Nerve Supply OF THE Abdomen. See Table 77.— In connection with the abdominal nerves it is of interest to inquire how many spinal nerves contribute to the nerve supply of the abdomen. With the possible exception oc twigs furnished by the most distal nerve confined to the thorax to the most anterior portion of the transversalis abdominis muscle, the first nerve of supply of the abdomen is the most anterior intercostal nerve the ventral branch of which passes below the costal margin to enter the abdominal wall. Similarly, with the exception of twigs furnished now and then by the genito-crural nerves, the inguinal nerve is the most posterior nerve furnishing a nerve supply to the abdominal walls. Taking the 1st abdominal nerve as the anterior limit, and the inguinal nerve as the posterior limit, we find that in 10 out of 16 instances (62.5^), seven spinal nerves contributed to the supply of the abdominal wall, in 4 instances (25;^) six nerves, and in 2 instances (12.5;^) five nerves thus contributed.

The transversalis and internal oblique muscles are supplied by branches which spring from the main abdominal nerves during their course to the rectus, and from the ileo-hypogastric, ileo-inguinal, and sometimes from the genital nerve, during their course between these muscles.- The last nerve also furnishes fibres to the cremaster muscle. The muscular branches springing from these various nerves are irregular in origin and distribution, and give rise to a plexiform union between successive nerve trunks. Owing to the great irregularity of these secondary muscle branches no statistical data concerning them are furnished.

s T. Ruge : Verschiebungen in den Endgebieten der Nerven des Plexus lumbalis der Primaten. Morph. Jahrbuch X, 1893, p. 305.

■> Beitrag zur Neurologie der unteren Extremitat der Primaten. Morph. Jahrbuch XXV, 1898, p. 305.

208 Study of the Abdominal and Border-Nerves in Man

The lateral branches of the intercostal nerves furnish nerves to the external oblique muscle and cutaneous branches which vary much in distribution. I have seen, for instance, a combined nerve trunk, arising from the lateral branches of the 11th and 13th thoracic nerves, extend well into the pubic region. The charts furnish, however, insufficient data on which to base a statistical study of variations in the lateral cutaneous branches of the eleven more anterior intercostal nerves. On page 310 the relation of the lateral branch of the 13th intercostal nerve to the iliac region is considered.

The Vaeious Types of Disteibution of the Boeder-Neeves. See Table V, and Figs. 1-8. — Greater variation seems to exist in the origin of the border-nerves from spinal nerves than in the origin of the main abdominal nerves. With the exception of the genito-crurab nerves, however, the courses taken by the border-nerves are fairly definite and are well described in the standard text-books. We shall consider first the variation in origin of the border-nerves taken as a group, and then that of the individual border-nerves.

In Tal)le V, we have divided the sets of border-nerves found in the subjects studied into various types. The five main types are based upon the spinal nerves from Avhich the border-nerves arise. In Type I, all border-nerves arise from the 30th and 31st spinal nerves; in Type II, from the 31st; in Type III, from the 30tli, 31st and 32nd; in Type IV, from the 31st and 33nd; and in Type V, from the (30), 21st, 23nd and 23rd. Types I, III and IV are further subdivided into sub-types, according to the relation of the spinal nerves to the individual bordernerves. These relations are made clear by the table. It will be noted that the border-nerves most frequently arise from the 30th, 31st and 33nd spinal nerves, and next most frequently from the 31st and 33nd. Types III and IV A., the forms most commonly met with, correspond with the pictures given in most text-books to illustrate the normal type.

Kelations of Race, Sex and Side of Body to the Various Types OF Distribution of the Bordee-Nerves. See Table VI. — In Table VI are given the relation of race, sex and side of body to the various types of distribution of the border-nerves. It will be noted that no very marked relations of this nature seem to exist. A much larger number of instances than we have studied would be necessary before reliable deductions could be drawn as to the influence of these factors in determining variation in the distribution of the peripheral nerves under discussion.

Charles Kussell Bardeen 209

Eelative Distkibutiox oe the BoRDER-ISrERVES OX Each Side of THE Body. See Table VII. — There is considerable variation in the types of distribution exhibited by similar nerves on the two sides of the same body. In Table VII the relation of the types of distribution of the border-nerves on one side of the individual to those on the other are given. Each numeral in the body of the table indicates the number of instances in which the type of distribution indicated at the left of the table was found associated with the type of distribution indicated at the top of the column. Thus, in two instances, when Type I D. was found on the right side, Type I C. was found on the left. The heavy figures indicate that the type of distribution of the border-nerves was the same on each side of the body in the number of individuals denoted by the figure. Thus, Type I B. was found on each side of the body in two individuals. It will be noted that while slight variations in type of distribution is very common, marked variation is rare.

Eelatiox of Variations in the Spinal Column to the Various Types of Distribution of the Border-Nerves. See Table VIII. — This table shows that a close relation exists between the development of the spinal axis and the distribution of the border-nerves. Eeduction in the spinal axis is marked in extreme cases by the loss of a thoracic, lumbar or sacral vertebra. In less extreme instances there is a tendency for the twelfth thoracic vertebra to assume the lumbar type, for the fifth lumbar to assume the sacral type, and for the fifth sacral to assume the coccygeal type. Although occasionally the twelfth rib may be ill-developed witliout accompanying changes in the lumbar and sacral vertebra, as a rule a rudimentary 12th rib indicates a tendency to a shortening of the spinal axis, as outlined above. AYlien the spinal axis is reduced, the hip bones are attached to the spinal axis more anteriorly than is usual, although not necessarily to the 24th vertebra. This anterior position of the posterior limb accounts for the derivation of the border-nerves from a more anterior set of spinal nerves than normal. Types I A., B., C, D., E., II and III A. and B. On the other hand, types of border-nerves marked by a more distal origin than normal (IV B. & V.), are characterized by the great frequency with which they are associated with extension in the vertebral column, marked in extreme cases by the addition of an extra thoracic, lumbar, or sacral vertebra.

Types of Lumbo-Sacral Plexus Associated with the Various Types of Distribution of the Boeder-Nerves. See Table IX. — As

210 Study of the Abdominal and Border-Nerves in Man

might be expected from the intimate relations existing between the development of the spinal axis, the position of the posterior limb, and the type of distribution of the border-nerves, we find also that when the lumbo-sacral plexus has a more anterior position than usual, the bordernerves generally axise from an anterior set of spinal nerves; and that when the lumbo-sacral plexus has a posterior positidn, the border-nerves likewise arise from a distal set of spinal nerves/

Origin of the Hypogasteic Neeve. See Table X. — We shall now consider in turn the individual border-nerves, beginning with the hypogastric.

In 6 instances, 2^ of the number studied, the hypogastric nerve arose from the 19th and 20th spinal nerves; in 91 instances, 32^, from the 20th; in 98, 34^, from the 20th and 21st; and in 92, 32^, from the 21st. In 106 instances, 37^, the hypogastric nerve arose from the ventral trunk of the 20th spinal nerve; in 190 instances, 69^, from the 21st; in 9 instances, 3^, there were two hypogastric nerves.

In the table the term " dorsal origin " is used to indicate the separation of the hypogastric nerve from the main ventral trunk of the twelfth thoracic nerve near the spinal axis. See Fig. 1, A. The term " ventral origin " is used to indicate the separation of the hypogastric nerve from the main ventral trunk after the latter has extended well into the abdominal wall. See Fig. 1, C. The hypogastric has a dorsal origin from the twelfth nerve in 40 instances, and a ventral origin in 43 instances out of the 83 in which these conditions were tabulated distinctly.

Oeigin of the Iliac Neeves. See Table XI. — By the term " iliac ,nerve " is meant a nerve which passes over the crest of the ilium to be distributed on the lateral surface of the hip. Only those nerves have been called "iliac nerves" the distribution of which is entirely distal to the level of the iliac crest. In addition, the lateral branches of the more distal intercostal nerves often extend in their distribution from the region of the abdomen over the lateral region of the hip.

In 3 instances, 1^ distinct iliac nerves Avere given off from the 19th spinal (11th thoracic) nerve; in 110 instances, 40^, iliac nerves were derived directly from the 20th spinal nerve; and in 76 additional instances, 27f^, from the 21st, after the latter had received a branch of

8 The relation between the lumbo-sacral plexus and the development of the spinalaxis has been pointed out elsewhere. — Bardeen and Elting, op. cit. p. 203.

Charles Eussell Bardeen 311

communication from tiie 30th. The iliac nerve was derived from the 31st spinal nerve in 198 instances, 70.4^. Tlie mode of origin of the iliac nerve is indicated in the table. Most commonly (331 instances, 86;^) it arises as a branch from the hypogastric nerve as this passes near the iliac crest. In 43 instances, 15.3^', it arose as a branch of the main ventral trunk of the ■30th spinal nerve. Less frequently (31 instances, 7.5^) it passed as a separate trunk from the region of the spinal axis (dorsal origin) to the crest of the ilium. In only 33 instances, 8.3^ was an iliac nerve found to arise from the inguinal. The term ilioinguinal should be restricted to nerves of this character, which are comparatively rare. Two iliac branches are not infrequent.

Okigin of the Inguinal Neeve. — The inguinal nerve in the great majority of instances arises from the 31st spinal nerve (358 instances, 89.8;?;). In nearly half of these instances (110) fibres were also derived through a proximal communicating branch from the 30th spinal nerve. In 10 instances, 3.5^, it arose from the 30th spinal nerve, and in 19 instances, 6.6^, the place of the inguinal nerve was taken by the genital branch of the genito-crural. Most commonly (334 instances, 78^) the inguinal nerve takes a course to the iliac crest separate from that of the hypogastric. Not infrequently (36 instances, 13.5;^), however, these two nerves pass in a common trunk as far as the iliac crest, and infrequently (8 instances, 3.8;^) they pass in a common trunk to the region of the external ring, Avhence the hypogastric branch turns up over the abdomen, while the inguinal nerve takes its way to the region where scrotum and leg adjoin.

Okigin and Course of the Genito-ceueal Keeves. See Table XIII. — So great is the variety in the distribution of the genito-crural nerves, it would be necessary to describe nearly every subject examined in order to record the many different courses taken by these nerves. The main trunks of the abdominal nerves are kept fairly constant in distribution, owing to their relation to the rectus muscle. The hypogastric and inguinal nerves are kept within moderate bounds, owing to their course in channels between the transversalis and internal oblique muscles, and between the latter and the flat tendon of the external oblique, channels that are limited distally by the crest of the ilium and by Poupart's ligament. Not infrequently the inguinal nerve courses for some distance between the abdominal fascia and the transversalis muscle before piercing the latter and entering the channel offered between it and the internal oblique muscle. In the region of its attach 16

212 Study of the Abdominal and Border-Nerves in Man

ment to the ventral portion of the iliac crest the internal oblique muscle is often divided into two layers, and between the layers another channel is offered for the passage of the inguinal and hypogastric branches. But while the regions in which the hypogastric and inguinal nerves pass from the channel between the transversalis fascia and the transversalis muscle to that between the latter and the internal oblique muscles, and from this to the channel between the two layers of the internal oblique and thence to that between the internal oblique and the tendon of the external oblique, vary in different individuals, the general course of these nerves is fairly constant. On the other hand, there are no definite paths of guidance for the genito-crural nerves. They take an irregular course from the anterior region of the lumbo-sacral plexus through the psoas muscle and behind the transversalis fascia to the region of Poupart's ligament. Here the genital nerve pierces the transversalis and internal oblique muscles or their tendon enters the channel between the latter and the tendon of the external oblique, fuses here with the inguinal nerve, and is distributed in common with the branches of the latter nerve. The crural nerve, on the other hand, passes beloAv Poupart's ligament and supplies the skin of the leg near the region of its junction with the abdomen. Either or both nerves may give off branches to the external iliac and femoral arteries.

In origin, the genito-crural nerves vary no more than the otlier bordernerves. Thus, from Table Y it will be seen that the genito-crural nerves arise from the 21st nerve in 56 instances, 19;^ (in a certain number of these some fibres are derived from the 20th also); from the 21st and 22nd in 125 instances, 79;^; and in but 6 instances, 2^, from the (21st), 22nd and 23rd.

There is considerable variation in the number of nerves designated " genito-crural . Most commonly (in 154 instances out of 250 of which good records are preserved, 61.6^), the genital and crural branches are bound in a common trunk, which, at a variable distance above Poupart's ligament, divides into genital and crural branches. Not infrequently, in addition to such a trunk, there is an extra genital branch (16 instances, 6.4^), or an extra crural branch (25 instances, 10^). Occasionally no crural branch is found (3 instances, 1.2^); more often the genital branch is wanting (17 instances, 6.8;^). I have seen no instances in which both branches were wanting.

The regions of exit of the genital nerve into the path taken by the inguinal nerve and of the crural nerve into the superficial fascia of the thigh, vary greatly. The genital nerve may pass into the path of the inguinal not far from the anterior superior spine of the ilium (lateral

Charles Eussell Bardeen 213

region of emergence, 47 out of 121 instances, 38.9;^, see Fig. Y), or in the vicinity of the femoral nerve (middle region of emergence, 55 instances, -15.5^', see Fig. II), or near the pubic crest (median region, 19 instances, 15.6^, see Fig. IV. A.). The crural nerve may pass to the leg in corresponding regions (lateral emergence, 27 out of 133 instances, 20.3;?^, see Fig. I. C), middle emergence, 81 instances, 60. 9^ see Fig. I. A, median emergence, 25 instances, 18. 8^ see Fig. III. E.).

When the genital nerve passes into the path of the inguinal near the anterior superior spine, it assumes many of the characteristics of the inguinal nerve. The inguinal nerve may take a course to the extreme .ventral limit of the iliac crest before passing into the abdominal musculature. Between an inguinal nerve of this type and a genital nerve emerging in a lateral region, only an artificial distinction can be drawn. As the line of demarkation between the two, I have taken the anterior superior spine.

The crural nerve, when it emerges laterally, sIioavs a tendency to become more or less closely uiiited to the lateral cutaneous nerve of the thigh. Occasionally the crural nerve arises as a branch of the lateral cutaneous (9 instances out of 287, ,3.1^). In one instance only have I seen a genital nerve arising as a branch of the lateral cutaneous nerve of the thigh.

Origin of the Lateral Cutaxeous Nerve of the Thigh. See Tohle XIV. — In connection with the border-nerves it may be of interest to consider briefly the origin of the lateral cutaneous nerve in connection with the various types of distribution of the border-nerves. In the more " anterior " types of border-nerves, it Avill be noted that the lateral cutaneous nerve springs most frequently from the 21st and 22nd spinal nerves, while in more posterior types it springs from the (21st), 22nd and 23rd, or from the main trunk of the femoral nerve. This association is not, however, a constant one.

General Conclusions.

Variation in the abdominal and border-nerves may be due either to local conditions, which affect merely the nerves derived from a given spinal segment and their immediate neighbors, or it may be due to conditions which affect the whole distal region of the spinal axis, and the position of the limb relative to the axis. Eace, sex and side of body seem to have no specific influence in determining variation of either sort.

Variation in the abdominal uerves anterior to the twelfth intercostal

314 Study of the Abdominal and Border-Nerves in Man

seems, in the main at least;, to be due to local conditions. Not infrequently the nerves and musculature derived from a given spinal segment have a less extensive development than usual. In such instances, the musculature derived from this segment gives way in part to musculature derived from a neighboring segment, and the nerve belonging to the latter covers a territory nearly equal to twice the usual territory, while the nerve belonging to the less developed segment is much restricted in distribution. These conditions become clear in a study of the rectus muscle. Similar vaxiations in extent of the cutaneous territory covered by a given spinal nerve, are also frequent.

The border-nerves may exhibit individual variations, or they may be affected as a group. In the latter case, the variations are intimately associated with the length of the spinal axis and the position of the posterior limb. This association is shown in Table VIII. When the border-nerves spring from the 20th and 21st spinal nerves merely, the condition is, with very few exceptions, found associated with skeletal conditions, Avhich indicate a rediiction in the vertebral axis. In the three exceptions given under Type I, we may assume that the genitocrural nerves were locally affected, and that the condition in these three instances does not indicate an influence exhibited on the border-nerves as a whole. The association of the more distal types of distribution of the border-nerves with extension in the vertebral column is less marked, owing probably to the fact that the relation of the pelvic bones to the vertebrae and the form of the vertebrae were recorded only in the more extreme instances of extension to the amount of a full segment. The frequency and the extent of the variation in the spinal origin of the border-nerves and of the lumbo-sacral plexus, make it important that these factors should be taken into account in making up tables of nerve distribution, like the valuable tables of Head. The marked relation existing between these variations and variations in skeletal conditions is their most noteworthy feature.

In the valuable paper by Bolk, referred to above (p. 207), he points out that the lumbo-sacral plexus in the anthropoid apes is as a rule in an anterior, or " high," position as compared to man, and that distinct border-nerves are less well developed. In man, however, when the spinal axis is shorter than usual and the lumbo-sacral plexus has an anterior position, we do not, as a rule, find that the border-nerves are reduced in number, although they may arise from but a single spinal nerve. Peripheral courses for nerve development are developed somewhat independently of the relation of the position of the limb to the spinal axis.

Charles Eussell Bardeen 315

In an interesting communication by P. An eel and L. Sencert/ these authors take exception to the terms " anterior " and " posterior " or " pre-fixed " and " post-fixed " as applied to the various types of variation in origin found in the lumbo-sacral plexus and the neighboring nerves. It must be admitted that local variation in the place and extent of origin of the border-nerves, and the nerves of the limb is more frequent than is marked variation in the relation of all of these nerves as a group to the segmental spinal nerves. The correlation, however, often found between variation in origin of the border-nerves and the position of the lumbo-sacral plexus on the one hand and the development of the spinal axis upon the other, makes it seem well to retain the terms " anterior " and " posterior " in describing variation in origin of these nerves.

1 Contribution a I'etude dn plexus lumbaire cbez I'bomme, Bibliograpbie anatomique IX, 1901, p. 209.


Study of the Abdominal and Border-lSTerves in Man


The Relations of the Ventral Branches of the Sixth, Seventh and Eighth Intercostal Nerves to the Rectus Muscle, Thorax and Abdomen.

Most anterior attachment of rectus is at

No. of instances.

1st intercostal nerve entering- abdominal


Nerve entering rectus from between two costal cartilages.


No. of



No. of



No. of instances.


No. of


4th costal cartilage



7 2


4 o



■ 7 o


5th " •'

7 8 2

6th " "


7th " "






The Frequency of the Presence and Absence of Transverse Tendons {Linea transversa, Inscriptiones tendmece) Corresponding to the 8th, 9th, 10th and 11th Ribs, and the Relations of the Tenth and Eleventh Tendons to the Umbilicus.

Tendon Corresponding to the

8th rib.

9th rib.

10th rib.

11th rib.

'Fresent :

No of Instances

fig 75.7

9 24.3

58 93.5



76 89.4

9 10.6

72 84.7


Per cent


A bsent :

No. of Instances

56 70.9

Median Margin near Umbilicus :

No. of Instances


Per cent


Charles Eussell Bardeen 217

TABLE III. Origin of the Most Distal Abdominal Nerve Entering the Rectus Muscle.

Nerve arose from the XIX spinal nerve in 2 instances 1-8^

Nerve arose from the XX spinal nerve and from a communicatiuii- branch from

the XIX in 7 instances 6.3

Nerve arose solely from the XX spinal nerve in 89 instances 79. .5

Nerve arose from the XX and XXI spinal nerves through anastomosis in 5

instances 4.5

Nerve arose solely from the XXI spinal nerve in 9 instances 8.0

TABLE IV. Number of Spinal Nerves Distributing Branches to the Abdominal Muscles. 7 nerves contribute :

1st abd. nerve from XV spinal, last nerve to rectus from XX spinal,

inguinal from XXI spinal 10 instances

6 nerves contribute :

1st abdominal from XVI spinal, last nerve to rectus from XX spinal,

inguinal from XXI spinal 4 "

5 nerves contribute :

1st abd. nerve from XVI spinal, last nerve to rectus from XX spinal,

inguinal from XX spinal 2 "

TABLE V. The Various Types op Distribution of the Border-nerves. (Total number of instances studied, 287. See Figures on opposite page. I. T?ie border-nerves arise from the 20th and 21st spinal nerves. 50 instances, 17^ of tbe total number.

A. Hypogastric and inguinal nerves arise from the 20th spinal nerve, the genito-crural from the 21st, after this has received a communicating branch from the 20th. 5 instances, 10^. See Fig. I A.

B. Like A, but with no communicating branch, 6 instances, 12^.

C. The hypogastric nerve arises from the 20th spinal, the inguinal and genitocrural nerves arise from the 21st, after this has received a communicating branch from the 20th. 21 instances, 42^. See Fig. I C.

D. Like C. but with no communicating branch. 11 instances, 22^.

E. The hypogastric nerve, arises from the 21st spinal, after this has received a communicating branch from the 20th. The inguinal and genito-crural nerves likewise arise from the 21st. 7 instances, 14^.

II. All border-nerves arise from t?ie 21st spinal nerve. 6 instances, 2^ of total mimber. See Fig. II.

III. The border-nerves arise f7'om the 20th, 21st, and 22nd spinal nerves. 139 instances,

4:9/^ of total number.

A. The hypogastric nerve arises from the 20th spinal, the inguinal from the 21st and from a proximal communicating branch from the 20th, the genitocrural from the 21st and 22nd. 27 instances, 19^. See Fig. Ill A.

B. Like A, but with no proximal communicating branch. 27 instances, 19^.

C. The hypogastric and inguinal nerves arise from the 21st spinal nerve and from a proximal communicating branch from the 20th, the genito-crural arises from the 21st and 23nd spinal nerves. 68 instances, 49<^. See Fig.


D. Like C, except that none of the fibres from the 20th spinal nerve go into the inguinal nerve. 8 instances, 6^.

E. Two hypogastric branches, one from the 20th and one from the 21st spinal nerves, inguinal from 21st, genito-crural from 21st and 22nd. 9 instances, 7^. See Fig. Ill E.

IV. The border-nerves arise from the 21st and 22nd spinal nerves. 86 instances, 30^ of

total number.

A. Hypogastric and inguinal nerves from the 21st, genito-crural from the 31st and 22nd. 78 instances, 91^. 'P^ ^<

B. Hypogastric and inguinal nerves from the 21st, genito-crural from the33nd. 8 instances, 9<^.

V. The border-nerves arise from the 21st, 22nd and 23rtZ spinal nerves.

Hypogastric from the 20th and 21st spinal nerves, inguinal from the 21st and 22nd, genito-crural from the 22nd-23rd. 6 instances, 3^ of total number.


These figures represent the distal abdominal and the border-nerves of various types in their relation to the abdominal wall, spinal column, skeleton of the limb and lumbo-sacral plexus. The ventral portion of the abdominal wall is shown turned back. The transversalis muscle is not represented. In the rectus muscle the transverse tendon corresponding to the tenth rib is shown in all figures except Fig. V. A transverse tendon corresponding to the eleventh rib is shown in Figures IV A and V. In each figure the hypogastric nerve is represented passing through the internal oblique muscle near its distal margin and at a point about half the distance between the anterior superior spine of the ilium and the distal extremity of the rectus. The inguinal nerve is shown coursing from the anterior superior spine of the ilium to the crest of the pubis. The genital and crural nerves pass from the pelvis in various regions, the genital branches in each instance becoming united to the inguinal nerve while tbe crural branches pass out to the region of the leg. The nerves of the limb arising from the lumbo-sacral plexus are represented diagrammatically in double outline. The lateral cutaneous nerve passes to a point near the anterior superior spine of the ilium, the femoral nerve passes to a point over the head of the femur, the obturator emerges through the obturator foramen, the sciatic nerve passes behind the ischium and the pudic nerve passes between the great and lesser ischio-sacral ligaments.

The twelfth rib is denoted by the appropriate numeral, except in Fig. I C, where the eleventh is thus designated.




^ijj^^jij^jj^^ - ■ " ' >^>^'










t— 1













•^nao jaa

!> CO M r-l CO CO


I 1

•ON mox

»-i ©:! t^-j


'. '-^


•:}naD a9<j






•ON moi

?^ i^ ^

>-i >-^ '-I







« 1 1

p:( ?? ;




I oo



lO iC "^






•^aao J8<j

CO >0 05 14 <M






•ON moj.

■s-j s^ '"-1



to '-H





6 1?

y-{ lO






d 1?







^ O I03 T-H




00 CD


d IS

lO Ttl d









Tti «l CO







•^uao .laa

t- l^ CO

r-< r-l CO



•ON IB^ox

'-H "-^ ©5




M ft

•^nao Jed

to CO -* C3 i-H rH







•ON IB^ox

S"! Oi i^








■* T-t





d iz;

04 r-l CO





d 1^

■* CO CO







6 ■z

OT CI r-l





r-l W







« (M CO <M <M rH







d a

So <3"^ Co

to <;o So tf h-i « 

SO h4







"a O



6 '3




TABLE VII. The Kelative Distribution of the Border-nerves on Each Side of the I!ody.

Number of Instances in which the Various Types of Bordernerves were Found on Left Side.
































Number of Instances in which the Various Types of Bordernerves were found on Right Side.





































































(— 1





















(231) •

o ^

> > s

•:jn8o .taj


. o

. o

1 :

•OM iT?;ox 1

'. iH


•%UQO .I9J 1


O C"! iC — 1 1-1 «o

IC O CO • 0? O r-1

: y



1 IN

1 *

■OM iB^ox 1

V. ^ M

^ ^ >*(


« 1 1 1

! ; : <M

! i-H i-H ;




rH CO -H

: ^



■'^uQo .ia<j


u^ o o Tt< Oi ^ lO


^*0 r^M



•ON mox 1


T-s On O t»

■ ^ ^ N (M


>s >H


« 1 1 1


« 1 1 1

. : « 

^ 1 1

■>* -* 05


rH '

rH T-{


=« 1 1


o j> o»


^ 1

1-1 lO «o i-t


•^noo joj

CO t~- IC o CO CO ir- Ol

•Oil lf!!JOX

'^i "s* 95 -H


•;U90.T8tI 1

r-< io tn

OS CD •* to 00 1-1


^ ^ ■^

S5 ® ««  'N ^ M


1-1 1-1 w

^ i \ ■ ^ \ i '

T-l 1-1

50 00 ;

— *

'-' ! "-1 I

CO ic ^ :

" 1 h

iH rH :

"^ II 1 ■•

c« I I I

« •* ; ;



•^jneojaj 1 :

05 ■# 05 ■* O i-H CO ; 00 ■* ■*

i- CO t- ■

rH CO rH

rH rH



d 1 •

!?; 1 •

-^ ^ ^ ^ 1? 5 ^


©^ v^ ^

1^ ©^



o o


(-1 o



_o +3 -o d o


o o





iO 1-1

o CO








Total No. assoc. with reduced spinal axis. . Normal vertebral column



"o o





.2 a




to CO











6 6


CO ai

rh to

>o ■*

CO CO rH T-t

M o3



-a d as





ti o


en OS


-tJ O







(— 1






















•^U80 J8t£








■ON V8%oi,







O .


m 1 -ON








<!l j 'ON








•(juao jaj;







•ON IBiox










DO ®









t— 1 M






























OJ 0« 










•^u9o jaj;








•ON l^ioj,





•4n90 J8<i 1




•ONIB^Oi 1




^ c3








P 1 'ON

I <^


o 1-1

O 1 -ON






« 1 -ON









•ijnao J9*








•saouB^sni jo "o^i






. .

•sqraii joija^sod



— 1

t— 1





josaA.i8n A"idclns


> X











jOTjajsod ^soH









> ><






h- 1



c >

> X



















■:3 >>f^



■ft is











.2 ■a









® *^ o









h- 1




eS > >S






■g <1^ Oi "










aid JO ;


















•:ju3o aej



•o^ IB:j0i

. . . . . (Q to • •


•^uao .T8J

• • • o

• • • o

•OM I^i"X

■ ®

• CC

«|| :::: : : ;*



• ■ • 00


ft >>

•^nao J8d^

^ • • t- • ■ ^

CO to

•ON IB^ox


6 I?

OS ■ 05



• • • ■ • 00 00


d ...... oo 30

^ ...... CO !0



■ ■ " 03 "■ ^ ' •■



C"! • 1-1 «C « o:

« -H ■ ■

® ft

•c^uoo a9(j

. . . . . . . o

• • o

•OM mox

.;:: : : ®

» ft


•jnao J9(i

I- • ■ ,-H

•ON mox



t- t




. ■ ^ I- CO



CO « rH 00 'i* CD • • •


d z

. . O -+I . • • •



^ tH Tt< CI Tf




■ • CO ■ • CO • -co


f»5 S<! C'O '^ 00 ^ CC 02 OV CI

C5 ^^ CO 55 oo ©

> (-1

o 1


From XTX and XX spinal nerves (fibres from XIX are derived through prox. com. branchi . . . .

Dorsal origin

Ventral origin

From XX spinal nerve. . . .

Dorsal origin

Ventral origin

From XX and XXI spinal nerves

Fibres from XX through prox. com. branch

Separate nerves from XX ann XXI



PQ M H 2

•%Uao J8t£




■ON ITs^oi

- :

'-^ Lt

>s Eo '-I

•:^U80 a8ti


■ ^

. CD

■ c6

•OM iij;ox

-* "^

! ^ SO '-I ^

vj- ®o

=^ ^

: '^j : « 


^ 1 1


^ rH

CO '-H T-H ;

?^ CO

-^ CO



•;n80 jaa





• lO

•ON mox

d ^

lO rH tH


•^ !>. ^

^ CO

« 1 i


■^ : « 

^3 C4

« 1 ^

^ (M ; ; CO ; ; co

" i 1


^} (M ■ ■ 90 ■ CO lO

lO ©^


" 1 1

- ■

J;, oo o IN ^ Tt<



< 1

. .

~-> r-l « rH ';i. C-.



•c^uao ja<j

•CM IB^ox

• ,'•

<o '--^


•;^^90 jaa




■ON 113101

"* '-'3-)g<:oio'-i© lo

V}. >-H



1 ® ft

« 1 1

'>^ « T-i ; ~^> ;

^ :

« 1 1

1 Ci j> (?« ; ; ;



- 1 ^°


<M ®0 CD CO i-i QO tn


" II

"^ : ^ : : :



■^ -^ r-( S^ ,-1 S5 : ;



— •>* tOi . . t~ . . . t









1 o


? a


> a '3



, to •

ID •

o •

P •


"3 ^

.— 1 «H


X X o


o o

o ft

x' >'1




a S


c .2 -S

fl bi

" O ^ ft o >

a o

to CO

<(5 <tj


s • K

2 *^

'5c '^

o .^

r- M

CO n

o- 3 Q P











CO ®


X c

bj C C






.a o C ?






D a



hi) •

o ft •


o . a _



X X o ■*^




2 ;

«^ : p

ft. :

bD •


Z a

O bl

« °



d bl





















03 bi


3 -a


CO 03






e ■3








)— 1


(— 1













•■;u80 .13 J

CD •

CO • CO •

•ON Wox


■54 OJ


•;juao jaj

05 •


•ON IBc^oi

^:> r-l CC CO "<*■

" 1 z 1

00 CO 1-1 ,H ;



■* lO t- 0« ■* t- IC T-l

M M 1— 1

® ft

•c^^90 aa J

«D ■

CO ■



l-T O CO 03 <n 05 tH Co t- rH ^-*



• • • • » t- iH




• • • • 00 oa



00 «? l-H T-l • •




. . . . j> i^ • • • ■ o> Ol


d 12;

I- -* OJ ^ ■ ■ 01 ot • ■


•JU90 Jtaj 1


CO • 00 .


•ON I^^ox

'-■^ CO rH rH '^H



•:jn9o aaj


05 •

CO •


•ON IB^ox

C5 O CQ 0« '-H ^

^ r-l




t- t



05 00 iH



6 12;



d !?;

1© "* r-l iH • •


d r)< 05 1-1 iH • •

?; • •






•S80UB:jsnt JO -ON

Q50C5N <CliCCOWO0CO'-l-* Ci


03 >





5 S


5 <

■4 t

l a c - o +

la t

^ o f 3 s "

=• .-S i

? ^:




^ S : - S .^

^ -^ :^" 5 1 : =s fl c

• * : s a

i. k --C «= o f -^ g cS O t^

^ S S « a'

1 D a ^ a

ba i

in O F -) O "



, . !■ '-^ C


o -*■ a <:

o f



ia, > a <:

i. o f

f -S : t ^ :


H !_;

1 j iC w

5 •

. in

• •



• '-H

• »^

: N ""^ :

• 'N


t-i 1 ujyi lo+'-'aj j '•^ ; ; ; ; ; ; ^


1— 1



•:ju90 jaj;


> •

• (M • •

rH in

> • Cr


•ON mox

10 ^ • ■^ ^

®0 rH • i-i ©4


• gj rH >-l '-H

.^^ ■H 1* »:

« il

■* • t-l • • r-l • rH r-l •

rH • • • •


d 12;

c; TtH CI • CO rt :o os « r-i

01 rH • rH ?1


• 05 '^ rH rH

CO CO rH ■*!

1— 1 ®



•^U80 aaa

. .

. .rH . .




•ON mox

CO '^ '-^ ^ ^

^ '-H '-H 'N So

»^ 2



t- • CO 04 • ■* rH • •




-* . ,-1 . . . . . .




d 12;




7-i r-t T-t





X . in • • « • o CO iM

CO 0» ?»





d !z;

to « CO rH (M CO rH lO



i-i y-i



® a

•:ju90 jaj

c c

•ON TB!»ox

Ijj • <3>} f-H • IS? '-I


Hi ®


•:jn90 jaj



m io to


•ON IB^ox


i^f «<:)



»N '-i

"*^ :

^ ^

N «N ^




Ca • rH rH . rH rH rH' rH

rH .


d 25

Ttl rH •

rH . . C« (?J

• c*


• rH

rH ^





rH rH




rH r^


03 <

d d

-* rH Ol

rH (M .



CO rH rH

rH . rH

01 Cl •

1-t r^

'"' :






a 00



rH rH O 1



3(M»nO(MC00* ©iCCOC}TtH,HlC©OJrH01CJOJrHl9Tj1^lMCOl05Cl«j^ lei^jHS W^COrHrHCOrH OJrH rH,-(rHrH f| (.^"ll.'^^'-lW




® ft








is 2 (-( "^

CO '^


iJ c K <

o fc

■ £



2 - TO ^^ -2 '2 a

•9 .9 .5

a> ^. a

rt - X>


OS — 1 g ~;

lis'® 1 « a a ^

flag r;

■« ■" "" ^

® r

t^ - = ® - - . 't

a s 1 " « • 3 II






a a







'c c











c 1


• a

• o

! 3


S -' ■Z ®

i i -^^

5 3

? § Ea

« o s c

S 2 a I


a a

d o ^





^ a

® bt

® '

g ®


a ::



S "b S a.

s £

■S a.

i £

•^ c

S "o —

2 e

o ■ O PC

® r

a a


"Si J •j a "a






) '





o - - - - - ;

'be' ' ■* " " •'

^ a> a rH ® P •

cj --■ OS eS ^ oj ■ ^ '^ U3 ^ ^ S •

^ a g^ a a :

® : 5"^^ ^ - - , •


S ? !

■g - - p ' - ;

S * •

1 ' ' 1 ' ' J




1 I






•jiiao .TOd






•ON IB'jox






•:>uaD aa<j








ff i 5

















•:m8o J8d^



1 1

•ON IB^ox

so It:)















































•:^nao J8d



a >>


•ON I^ijox




•^nao J9J



•ON IB^ox

S2 so

■ so














^ 1













d 1^





•!jnao .i9d:



















'd •




a •

S i


, ^

=w •



c ■



=) ?« 


a :

X 2^

a 5





o « 









w I-;




From the Embryoloyical Laboratory^ Harvard Medical School.

With 11 Text Figures and Two Double Colored Plates.

In a course of lectures on the problems of embryology, Prof. C. S. Minot demonstrated that the current descriptions of the embryonic vena cava inferior are inadequate, if not actually erroneous. Under his direction, the rabbit embryos of the Harvard Embryological Collection have been examined in order to revise Hochstetter's work, already once repeated by Zumstein. The results of this third investigation of the rabbit's cava inferior justify a new description of the vein, illustrated by lithographs, a gift from the Elizabeth Thompson Science Fund.

In rabbit embryos of about ten days, the abdominal veins are absolutely symmetrical. On either side of the intestinal canal runs an omphalo-mesenteric vein, which unites with the umbilical vein from the somatopleure of the corresponding side just before joining the duct of Cuvier. (See Hochstetter, 93, p. 546, Fig. 1.) For reasons which have not been explained this system becomes asymmetrical, and normally is predominant on the right side. On the 12th day the venous orifice of the heart is on the right; the right umbilical and right omphalomesenteric veins are larger than the left;^ and the vessels on the left side are forming a new channel, the ductus venosus Arantii, which conveys their blood directly across the liver to the right auricle.

The liver develojDS from the ventral wall of the intestine by sending its tubules into, and thus subdividing the omphalo-mesenteric veins. This condition was noted by Hochstetter (93, p. 54G) and others, and has since been fully described by Minot (00, pp. 197-202), who named the small venous subdivisions " sinusoids."

As the venous channels become predominant on the right side, the liver consequently develops more rapidly there and becomes a right 1 Although the right umbilical vein, in the early iDart of the 13th day, is larger than the left, and may be described as "colossal," the Ze/< umbilical vein is the one which persists throughout embryonic life. 17


The Development of the Vena Cava Inferior

sided organ. Veins and liver combine to pnsh the stomach toward the left. Fig. 1, a frontal section of a 5 mm. rabbit, shows clearly the barrier formed by the veins and liver, with the consequent forcing of the

stomach to the left. It may confidently be assumed that had the originally symmetrical veins persisted on the left side, stomach, liver, and later the vena cava would shift their position, resulting in situs inversus.

The position of the vena cava inferior as yet unformed, has been determined by the asymmetrical development of the umbilical and omphalo-mesehteric veins. In the early rabbit stages, there springs from the root of the dorsal mesentery a ]iair of mesenchymal lobes, one on either side. Traced anteriorly they pass into the mesenchymal anlages of the lungs, the alffi pulmonales of Eavn (89, p, 139), which precede the epithelial outpocketings from the oesophagus. These wings are at first quite symmetrical, but with the displacement of the stomach, the fold on the left is obliterated and that on the right enlarges. Fig. 2 is a cross-section, of a 5 mm. rabbit. The bulging of the stomach toward the left has caused it to present on that side a smooth rounded surface, but on the right it is irregularly indented and the mesenchymal fold referred to, C. M., becomes accentuated. This fold is destined to contain the inferior cava, and has been called the " mesenteric bridge " by Goette (75, p. 818), the "plica vena^ cavae" by Eavn (89, p. 140), and the " caval mesentery " by Hochstetter (93, p. 561). In later stages the elongated gastric mesentery runs sharply to the left, and from its right side, where it joins the body wall, springs this caval mesentery. As a whole the mesentery is now V-shaped, the left arm or mesogastrium going to the


12 days.

Rabbit embryo of 5 mm.. Series 105, section UO. x 35

Rabbit embryo of 5 mm.» Series 104, section 317.

Frederic T. Lewis


stomach, and the right arm or caval mesentery ending freely in thp abdominal cavity. The fate of the caval mesentery is briefly this^ The part most cephalad is invaded by the right lung, of Avhich it

^1^ r:sStivi^x ^" ""' '■' ""•' '■ '^^^ ^«^' -^^-- 250, 246, 2i7^

iovms the lobiis inferior medialis of Krause (Eavn, 89, p. 144) Belo^v the diaphragm it meets and unites with the liver. Hepatic tubules grow mto It and it becomes a part of the liver. Thus it at once connects the liver with the right dorsal wall and causes the hepatic ^inu

232 The Development of the Vena Cava Inferior

soids to come quite close to the posterior cardinal vein. Still further caudad there is a place where the caval mesentery has not united with the liver, but is free. Between liver and mesentery there is left a long slender passage, the foramen of Winslow.

These relations are illustrated by Figs. 3-(3, transverse sections of an 8.8 mm. rabbit. In Fig. 5 the foramen of Winslow, F. W., bounded by caval mesentery and by liver, is seen leading to the lesser omental cavity. Fig. 4 shows the caval mesentery uniting with the liver above the foramen of Winslow; a notch, 'N, marks the limit of the original hepatic lobe, but the tubules now fill the caval mesentery. At a higher level, as in Fig. 3, the notch becomes obliterated. Below the foramen of Winslow the caval mesentery again unites with the liver, as shown in Fig. 6, but is here rather a " portal mesentery," for it contains the portal vein. Since the relations of this portal mesentery and its connection with the ventral border of the stomach have nothing to do with the cava inferior, its further consideration is reserved for a subsequent paper. The foregoing description has shown how the path for the vena cava is laid out, and why the vein is to be unilateral. We may now consider the development of the vessel itself.

In the embryos of 5 mm. the aorta passes toward the tail as a median unpaired vessel lying dorsal to the root of the mesentery and ventral to the spinal cord. On either side of it runs a posterior cardinal vein, as shown in Fig. 2. The Wolffian bodies are found in the caudad part of the abdomen, ventral to the cardinal veins. The tributaries of the posterior cardinals are the intersegmental veins arising regularly between the dorsal ganglia, and a number of irregularly placed small vessels which come from the mesenchyma in front of the aorta, and from that around the Wolffian tubules. These branches are obscure in the early stages but in an embryo of 6.Q mm. they are plainly seen. Fig. 7 illustrates their arrangement. A vessel is shown passing from the mesentery into the left posterior cardinal vein. The Wolffian body is represented by a knot of coiled tubules. The tributary of the cardinal passes along its median surface, after receiving a branch from its ventral "border. Other cardinal branches curve over its dorsal side so that the Wolffian body becomes nearly surrounded by veins. The later intercrescence of Wolffian tubules and cardinal veins has been carefully described by Minot in his paper on sinusoidal circulation (oo, pp. 193197). It is important that the cardinal tributaries may anastomose with one another, and, in front of the aorta, with those of the opposite side. These anastomoses are found in embryos of 7.5 mm.

Beginning with an embryo of this length four stages in the develop

Frederic T. Lewis


ment of the veins have been illustrated by reconstructiou after the method of His. The drawings are similarly enlarged and arranged in Plates I and II. Each jDair of figures represents a single embryo, split in the median plane and laid open, the left half of the embryo lying on the right-hand page, and vice versa. All the blood-vessels involved have been drawn except the median aorta and its median (mesenteric and gastric) branches. Every drawing shows two sets of arteries: 1st, a regularly arranged series of intersegmental arteries, A. I., and 3nd, the irregularly disposed arteries running laterally from aorta to the



Fig. 7. Rabbit embryo of 6.6 mm., 13 clays, 12 hours. Series 460, section 117. X 4.5. Tliis section should have been reversed to be in the conventional position. The right side is here drawn at the rii,'-ht of the observer.

glomeruli of the Wolffian body. These may be named the mesonephric arteries, A. M.: their position in relation to the veins makes them a most important landmark. The umbilical arteries, A. IT., are also indicated. All the arteries are shown as cut across at the position where they leave the aorta.

Figs. 1 and 2, Plate I, picture the condition already described. In this 7.0 mm. embryo the posterior cardinal veins, V. C., pass cephalad ■to join the anterior cardinals, and then to turn back at a sharp angle and enter the heart. A^entral to the posterior cardinal vein is seen the line of mesonephric arteries, and ventral to these is an anastomosis of cardinal tributaries. This anastomosis forms a new vessel coming from

234 The DevelojDinent of the Vena Cava Inferior

the cardinal in the caudad region, emptying again into the cardinal anteriorly, and connected with the cardinal all along the line by cross branches running between the mesonephric arteries. This new vessel I would designate as the suhcardinal vein, Vena subcardinalis. The bilateral symmetry of the veins at this stage is complete. The small vessels from the mesentery, and mesenchyma ventral to the aorta are represented in the drawings, one of them being labelled V. m., and two points of anastomosis with the veins of the opposite side are designated by the letters V. m. x. Thus the suhcardinal veins are connected with one another by vessels of small calibre.

In Fig. 1, Plate I, a portion of the liver has been outlined. The portal vein, V. 0. M., is shown cut across in the median plane. It passes behind the intestine toward the right and forward through the liver connecting with the ductus venosus, D. V. A., and ending in a vessel known as the vena liepatica communis. This comprehensive name was applied by Hochstetter (93, p. 552) to that trunk passing from the liver to the heart, and formed by the union of hepatic, umbilical, and omphalo-mesenteric veins, to which the inferior vena cava is later added. In the figure a black, partly dotted line marks the limit of the dorsal hepatic lobe, which is filled with sinusoids. Some of these channels, Y. c. m., have extended over into the caval mesentery, into which the hepatic cylinders are to follow them.

A large stream of blood traverses the liver through the broad venous spaces unimpeded, whereas the current through the cardinal veins is clogged by the AYolffian tubules. The development of the posterior limbs demands a freer passage, and the formation of the subcardinals may be regarded as the attempt of the cardinal veins to become disentangled from the Wolffian body. Probably the recuri'ent bend of the duct of the Cuvier is another obstruction to the posterior cardinal system. At all events the right suhcardinal and the hepatic sinusoids approach one another and unite, thus forming a new access to the heart. All the component parts of the adult vena cava inferior have now become connected. The new passage is so favorable that it enlarges rapidly. On the left side, the suhcardinal can make no connection with the liver, since the stomach has cut off any approach to that organ. There has been no reversal of blood currents on either side, but blood from the lower left area crosses to the right through the anastomoses between the subcardinals. The cardinal system has been tapped by the hepatic.

Figs. 3 and 4, PI. I, represent a rabbit of 8.8 mm. The suljcardinal veins, V. Sc, are now large, and that on the right has connected with the vena hepatica communis. See also the cross section, Fig. 4, p. 231.

f'rederic T. Lewis


It extends for a short distance beyond this connection, as shown clearly in the cross section, Fig. 3. Below the superior mesenteric artery five anastomoses between the subcardinals could be followed, the first of which is lettered X. Fig. 6 of the cross sections passes through the anastomosis X. Just below the superior mesenteric artery a cross connection between subcardinal and cardinal becomes very large and marks an important subdivision of botli vessels into superior and inferior parts. The superior portion of the subcardinal enlarges, its inferior division diminishes, and correspondingly the inferior section of the cardinal enlarges, its superior part Ijecomes small. Tbus the inferior


A. M.S.

Fig. 8. Rabbit embrj-o of 11 mm., 14 days. x 2S. This series is not one of the Harvard Collection.

part of the cardinal and .superior part of the subcardinal are both large, and, by the obliteration of the kink made by the anastomosis between them, become a single straight channel. On the right side they persist as a part of the adult vena cava inferior.

As the superior part of the cardinal vein shrinks in calibre, it loses its continuity as a venous trunk, although its disjoined sections are still connected by the sinusoids of the Wolffian body. Fig. 3, PI. I, shows the anterior part of the cardinal, Y. C. a., separated from the posterior division, Y. C p. On the left side, however, tlie vessel is still continuous from the pelvis to the duct of Cuvier.

The third reconstruction is from an 11 mm. rabbit. Figs. 5 and 6, PI. II. The cardinal veins are now both sulidivided as just described.

23 G The Development of the Vena Cava Inferior

A notable change is in the decreasing importance of the inferior part of the snbcardinal veins. Only two of its cross connections remain, of which one, X, has become very large. A cross section, Fig. 8, of this embryo, taken a short distance above this region shows the symmetrical arrangement of the vessels, and the large size of the subcardinals on both sides. The snbcardinals lie at the ventral corner of the hilns of the "Wolffian body from which they receive tributaries, just as do the cardinals at the dorsal corner. The veins are separated from one another by the mesonephric arteries, a pair of which is seen in the section. At the upper end of the veins, on either side, cardinal and subcardinal anastomose in condensed mesenchyma probably connected with the suprarenal anlage.

In the rabbit of 8.8 mm., the kidney on either side was situated in front of the iliac artery, as described by Hochstetter, and beautifully draAvn in his Fig. 18 of PI. XXII (93). As it develops, it drops back over the artery and falls between the cardinal vein and the aorta, or even directly upon the cardinal. It may split the cardinal vein so as to form a loop, as figured by Hochstetter, but I have not seen any complete loop. In Fig. 6, PI. II, the position of the kidney is indicated by E. A portion of the cardinal vein receiving two intersegmental veins has been separated from the main trunk and pushed dorsad. On the right side of the same embryo. Fig. 5, PI. II, the vein was not divided, but the kidney had distorted the course of two intersegmental veins. The main cardinal stem bends rather sharply outward around the obstructing kidney and so comes to lie on the outer side of the lower end of the Wolffian body.^ The ureter is now on the median side of this large trunk. From the shattered inner pieces of the cardinal vein, or from new offshoots of the main stem, a venous connection forms on the median side of the ureter. Such a loop is seen in Fig. 5, the letter U marking the passage for the ureter. This new median arm of the loop is in line with the main vessel; it enlarges and becomes a part of the cardinal trunk. The vein has again become straight, but the ureter has been transferred from its inner to its outer side. The outer arm of the loop becomes smaller, and its caudad portion is divided into many sinusoids. It then appears as a large branch of the cardinal vein, entering it from the dorsal border of the Wolffian body. Thus it forms the ITrnierenvene of Hochstetter (93, p. 583), The ureter remains in the loop and passes, therefore, ventral to the iliac artery, external to the

^In pig embryos of 12.0 mm. the main cardinal vessel passes to the outer side of the caudal end of the Wolffian body uninfluenced by the renal anlage.

Frederic T. Lewis


cardinal vein, and dorsal to the Urnierenvene. My examination of these renal relations confirms the observations of Hochstetter (88 and 93) in almost every particular.

Figs. 7 and 8, PI. II, from a rabbit of 14.5 mm., show at Y the new cross connection between the cardinal veins in their pelvic portion. The kidney lies behind the AVolffian body, the hihis of which it compresses, as shown in Fig. 9. The renal vein is a branch of the cardinal at the level of the large anastomosis of that vessel with the subcardiual. In the pelvic part of its course the cardinal receives the vena iumbalis

Fig. 9. Rabbit embryo of 14.5 mm., 14 days, 18 hours ( ? ). Series 143, section 827.

transversa posterior. This is a large irregular vessel in the body wall, connected with one or two intersegmental veins, and suggesting the trunk which was split off by the kidney shown in Fig. 4, PI, I. The intersegmental veins were easily followed in younger and 'in older embryos, but at this stage their connections with the cardinal are very obscure. This may be due to distortion caused by the migration of the renal artery. The superior section of the cardinal receives a large • transverse lumbar vein, two intersegmental veins, and small vessels from mesenchyma in the suprarenal region. On the right side a considerable area fuses with the subcardinal and is incorporated in the vena cava. The mesonephric arteries become obliterated. In a rabbit

238 The Development of the Vena Cava Inferior

of 21 mm. a single one of them remained on either side above the anastomosis X. The relations of the vessels in this region are shown in

Fig. 9, the section on

_. the right side passing

t ^l "" , . through the fused sub '■ I """ cardinal and cardinal.

i^^ /-// A The inferior sections of

\// ? ^ , the subcardmal veins no

> ( longer receive branches

K^ ^ ^ ' '-) ' ^'[ ^ —'^■^- from the Woli!ian

34 ' ' \ c^ bodies, but appear as

j;.,_ ,\. J r^-^'^^ large spaces in the

V; " '^ OP^ . , ' ^,3/^"""^ mesentery, conspicuous /txT^^^ 'r^ ' f /^^ '^•'^^- ^-' empty of corpuscles,

WR-i^^r^'i)^/ -.4^ ^^^^' *^ adjoining

• ^' \\(l^^j \ I ^ The mesenchyma in

\ /ll W l^ c-^ -..i front of the aorta below GA.' 'Mes. the anastomosis X is per FiG.lO. Rabbit embryo of 14.5 mm., 14 days, 18 hours (?). meated by these SpaceS, Series 143, section 857. X 45. The vessels shaded with -i • T?' 1 n

lines contain corpuscles : the others are empty. AS SllOWll 111 J- Ig- if.

Mere strands of mesenchyma separate them from one another and the adjoining veins. Their fate is unknown, but they recall the description by Sala, oo, of the anlages of lymphatic hearts in the chick. They pass into slender vessels, empty of corpuscles, which extend some distance cephalad from the anastomosis X. They appear in the position previously occupied by the lower part of the subcardinal, and at the time when those vessels disappear. Therefore the}' may be subcardinal derivatives.

On the left side, the superior part of the subcardinal vein l)egins as a con- "^^^ N siderable branch from the Wolffian "^^c^-^- H^^^*^

body, uniting with another from the "^^-^^^^^===4 X'^^^^

suprarenal area. It receives vessels from ^.r"^^^^!-, )

botli structures along its course. The A.M.^^^^^ \""^'^F'

size of this i)art of the left subcardinal pip,. n. Keconstruction from rab in a 21 mm. rabbit is shown in Fig. 11, Wt embryo of 21 mm., 17 days, series

drawn with the same magnification as

Fig. 8, PL IT. The suprarenal body is found between the cardinal and

subcardinal veins which lie very close to it, the cardinal at the dorsal

Frederic T. Lewis 239

surface and the subcardinai ventrally. The suprarenal bod}' extends far beyond the traceable branches of the subcardinai vein. In a 29 mm. rabbit the relations were similar. The very small and short subcardinai vein ■came from the suprarenal body, from which possibly the cardinal also received some small branches. They could not definitely be followed. In Hochstetter's description the left subcardinai is named the left suprarenal vein from the first. It is quite probable that the subcardinai may become the adult suprarenal, though I shall not consider it an established fact until still older embryos have been examined. KoUmann (98, p. 1:77) writes that it becomes " bis auf unbedeutende Gefasse rudimentar."

The posterior section of the left cardinal vein becomes divided either above the Urnierenvene, or below it, or below the transverse lumbar vein. Hochstetter (93, pp. 585-586), gives figures of the three resulting •conditions in the adult. In the 21 mm. rabbit the division had occurred below the transverse lumbar vein, as is usual; the 29 mm. specimen had divided above that vein. The Urnierenvene becomes the spermatic vein of the adult; and the remaining part of the posterior section of the left cardinal, into which jt flows, is called the ascending lumbar vein. This lumbar vein terminates in the renal vein, the old anastomosis extending from the cardinal through the subcardinai to the opposite side. N"o later changes of importance occur in these veins.

The present inaccurate text-book accounts of the development of. the vena cava inferior have justified the reiteration of many well established observations. Schafer, in Quain's Anatomy, illustrates a very brief description by diagrams from Kolliker. These figures, published in Kolliker's Grundriss in 1884 (p. -104, Fig. 276) among other errors represent the cava as a vessel separate from the cardinals to the common iliacs. Schnltze in 1897 (p. 406, Fig. 357) replaced these diagrams by a modification of those of Hertwig, whose faulty figures have enjoyed great popularity. (See Hertwig, 00, p. 350, Fig. 315.) Kollmann (98, p. 470. Fig. 292 A) gives the only accurate diagram of the early vena cava inferior which I have seen. His figure agrees with the description by Hochstetter of the vein on the left side, symmetrical with the vena cava on the right, but Kollmann is misled in stating that the vena cava " sctzi sicli in Terbindung " with the cardinal veins. In this he follows Hochstetter's earlier description (93, p. 569).

" The posterior vena cava passes over from the liver into the caudal continuation of the caval mesentery (into which small branches from the hepatic venous network also enter), and thence may be followed, in the youngest stage in which I saw the cava, a short distance further

240 The DevelopineJil of the Vena Cava Inferior

toward the median side of the right Wolffian body. In the next older stage the posterior vena cava passes through the caval mesentery and then puts itself on the median side of the Wolffian body, along which it may be followed for a considerable distance beyond the place of origin of the superior mesenteric artery. Moreover, there is a vein on the left side quite similar in position to the caval trunk on the right, which extends as far caudad as the latter, and begins at the level at which the vena cava meets the right Wolffian body. It is joined to the vessel on the right by two or three weak cross connections. These roots of the posterior cava are united with the cardinal vein only by very weak vessels which should be reckoned as capillaries."

This descrii^tion has been taken to mean that the vena cava inferior developed downward from Ihe liver, that the symmetrical vein on the left was a branch of it, and that this system acquired its connection with the cardinals. Although his language is somewhat vague, this, I believe, is what Hochstetter meant. On p. 602 he describes a human embryo in which the symmetrical veins (subcardinals) were apparently separate from one another. In a significant foot note Hochstetter says that cross connections may have been present but invisible because empty, " otherwise the left vessel must be regarded as an independent anlage."' Grosser (oi, p. 362) describes a similar condition in bats. " The right cardinal vein stands already in broad connection with the posterior vena cava which continues beyond this anastomosis along the median side of the Wolffian body. A left Holilvenenanlage symmetrical with the right is present, and joined to the right by one (or two?) almost capillary channels. Moreover, this vessel is united with the left posterior cardinal by slender vessels, but this union plays no great role." Nevertheless, I consider these connections to be important and primary, the longitudinal anastomosis forming next, and, finally, on the right side, the union with ,the liver which has invaded the caval mesentery. Zumstein (98, pp. 311-312) gives a more accurate description than Hochstetter. In the mole of 3 mm. he found " on both sides, median and ventral to the cardinals, small venous passages Avhich united Avith the cardinal veins. Those on the right could be followed to the hepatic vessels. This condition differs from that of younger stages in possessing a clear connection between the right cardinal vein and the hepatic vessels. In the liver itself there is no clear passage Mdiich can be designated as the vena cava inferior." Zumstein did not appreciate the importance of these observations, which are illustrated by crude figures. He concluded his paper by disputing with Hochstetter regarding the spermatic veins and was told in reply (Hochstetter, 98, p. 517) that he had "brought to light no new fact regarding the development of the rabbit's inferior cava."

Frederic T. Lewis 241

That the plan of development described for the rabbit is of wide application is probable. Grosser has fonnd it in bats, Zumstein in the mole, Hochstetter and Kollmann have indicated it in human embryos. I have fonnd a similar arrangement in pigs, and note that the reconstruction of the pig's veins by Minot (98, PI. I, Fig. 5) is incomplete. Dr. Minot has pointed ont to me in the original reconstruction several sectioned areas in the veins, omitted in the figure. xV more complete drawing of these vessels is to appear in his " Text-book of Embryology."

Finally a paragraph concerning nomenclature! The vena cava inferior is a compound vessel belonging to the adult rather than to the embryo. It consists of a part of the heart, then in turn, parts of the vena hepatica communis, dilated sinusoids of the liver, part of the right subcardinal vein, and a section of the right posterior cardinal vein. It has been the custom of certain embryologists to give the name of the whole to one of its parts, namely to the subcardinal portion, and even to charge with ignorance those who called pther sections of the adult vessel the vena cava. I agree with D wight (01, p. 29) that it is quite accurate to speak of the " cava below the diaphragm " or above the diaphragm.


The persistence of the right umbilical and right omphalo-mesenteric veins causes the stomach to be pushed to the left side and the liver to become predominant on the right.

This displacement of the stomach causes the left mesenteric fold, continuous with the ala pulmonalis. to disappear; but the fold on the' right, the caval mesentery, enlarges. It fuses with the liver, becomes invaded by hepatic tubules and made a part of the right dorsal hepatic lobe. Thus it causes the hepatic vessels to lie near the posterior cardinal vein.

Small vessels from the mesentery pass into the cardinals. They anastomose in front of the aorta with the vessels of the other side. They form a longitudinal anastomosis parallel with the cardinal vein, with which it is connected by numerous short veins, and from which it is separated by a line of mesonephric arteries. This longitudinal vessel connected with the cardinal vein at l)oth ends, and bilaterally symmetrical in its early stages is the suhcardiual vein.

, The cross connections between the subcardinal veins give place to a single large cross anastomosis caudad to the origin of the superior mesenteric artery. Above this anastomosis the right subcardinal connects with the liver and rapidly enlarges: the left subcardinal becomes very

242 The Development of the Vena Cava Inferior

small — liochstetter says that it forms the left suprarenal of the adult. Below the anastomosis the subcardinals cease to exist as veins; they may persist as lymphatic spaces.

The vena cava inferior is a compound vessel composed of parts of the heart, the vena hepatica communis, the hepatic sinusoids, the upper part of the right subcardinal, and the lower part of the right cardinal vein.


DwiGiiT, Thomas, oi. — What constitutes the inferior vena cava? Anat.

Anz., Vol. XIX, pp. 29-30. GoETTE, Alexander, 75. — Die Entwickelungsgeschichte der Unke. Leipzig.

pp. 1-196. Grosseb, Otto, 01. — Zur Anat. und Entw. des Gefasssj'stemes der Chirop teren. Anat. Hefte, Abt. 1, Vol. XVII, pp. 203-424. Hektwig, Oscab, 00. — Die Elemente der Entwicklnngslehre des Menschen.

Jena. pp. 1-406. Hochstettee, Feedinand, 88. — Ueber den Einfluss der Entwickelung der

bleibenden Xieren auf die Lage des Urnierenabschnittes der hin teren Cardinalvenen. Anat. Anz., Vol. Ill, pp. 938-940. HoCHSTErrTEE, Febdemamd, 93. — BeitragB zur Entwicklungsgeschicte des

Venens3 stjenis der Anmioten. Ill Sanger. Morph. Jahrb., Vol. XX,

pp. 543-648, HociiSTETTEU, Feedinand, 98. — Benierkungen zxi Zumsteins Arbeit. Anat.

Hefte, Abt. 1, Vol. X, pp. 511-517. KoLEiKEE, Albeet, 84. — Grundriss der EntA\ickelungsgeschichte des Menschen. Leipzig. 2nd ed., pp. 1-454. KOLLMANN, J. — 98. — Lehi'buch der Entwickelungsgeschichte des Menschen.

Jena. pp. 1-658. MiNOT, Chaelijs S., 98.— On the veins of the WoMian body in the pig.

Proc. Bost. Soc. of JN'at. Hist., Vol. XXVIII, pp. 265-274. MiNOT, Chaeles S., 00. — On a hitherto unrecognized form of blood circulation without capillaries in the organs of Vertebrata. Proc. Bost.

Soc. of. Nat. Hist., vol. XXIX, pp. 185-215. Kavn, Edvaed, 89. — Ueber die Bildung der Scheidewand zwischen Brust und Bauchhohle in Saugethierembryonen. Arch. f. Anat. u. Entw.

1889, pp. 123-154. 'Sala, LriGi, 00. — Sullo svilhippo dei cuori linfatici e dei dotti toracici

neir enibrione di polio. Eic. fatte nel Lab. di Anat. norm. d. K.

Univ. di Eoma, Vol. VII, pp. 263-296. ScHAFEB, Edward A., 90. — Quain's Anatomy, 10th ed.. Vol. I, part 1, pp..

1-169. Schultze, Oscae, 97. — Grundriss der Entwicklungsgeschichte des Menschen. Leipzig, pp. 1-468. ZrMSTEiN, J., 98. — Uber die Entwickelung der Vena cava inferior bei dem

Maulwurfe und bei dem Kaninchen. Anat. Hefte, Abt. 1, Vol. X,.

pp. 309-342.



Figs. 1 and 2. Reconstruction from a rabbit embryo of 7.5 mm., 12 days,. 12 hours. Series 454. X 25.

Frederic T. Lewis 2^3

Figs. 3 and 4. Eeconstruction from a rabbit embryo of 8.8 mm., 13 days. Series 465. X 25.


Figs. 5 and 6. Eeconstruction from a rabbit embryo of 11.0 mm., 14 days. This series is not one of the Harvard collection. X 2o.

Figs. 7 and 8. Eeconstruction from a rabbit embryo of 14.5 mm., 14 days, 18 hours (?). Series 143. X 25.


The first and last of the spinal ganglia rei^resented in the plates are numbered, the first cervical ganglion being counted 1.

A. I., intersegmental artery. In each plate only the first and last have been lettered.

A. M., mesonephric artery. In each plate only one of several has been lettered.

A. M. S., superior mesenteric artery.

Ao., aorta

A. R., renal arterj'.

A. v., umbilical artery.

C. M., caval mesentery. !>.* v., duct of Cuvier.

D. y. A., ductus venosus Arantii. F. W., foramen of Winslow.

(r. A., g^enital anlag-e.

Et., heart.

Ki., kidney.

Li., liver. (In Plate I the outline of its right dorsal lobe.)

Lu., ahlage of lung.

Mes., mesentery.

M. P., portal mesentery, that part of C. M. caudad to the F. W.

N., notch between right dorsal hepatic lobe and C. M.

Fh., pharynx.

K., position of renal anlage.

Sp. C, spinal cord.

(S'. Sc, subcardinal spaces.

St., stomach.

U., venous loop throug'h which the ureter passes.

IJ. y., Urnierenvene (Hochstetter).

Ur., ureter.

V. C, posterior cardinal vein.

T. C. a., posterior cardinal vein, anterior division.

r. V. p., posterior cardinal vein, posterior division. ■ y. e. m., vein extending into C. M.

V. dv., vena cava, hepatic portion.

y. H. C, vena hepatica communis.

y. L. T. P., posterior transverse lumbar vein.

T. Hi., small vein running into mesentery. In the plate similar ones, caudad, are not lettered.

V. m. X., vein running into mesentery and anastomosing with those of the opposite side.

V. O. 31., omphalo-mesenteric vein. (Portal vein.)

y. P., portal vein, entering the liver from the M. P.

V. P., renal vein.

244 The Development of the Yena Cava Inferior

V. Sp., subcardinal vein.

V. Sc. i., subcardinal vein, inferior division.

V. Sc. w., subcardinal vein, branch from Wolffian body.

V. U. d., right umbilical vein.

y. Z7. s., left umbilical vein.

W. B., Wolffian body.

X., cross connection betv^^een subcardinals.

Y., cross connection betvs^een posterior cardinals.


Development of the Vena Cava Inferior EI Lewis.

American Journal of Anatomy. Vol

Plate 1.


Development of the Vena Cava Inferior. F.T.Lewis.


American Journal of Anatomy. Vol'

Plate 2.

B Heisel.Sa3i>slon.



JOHN BRUCE MacCALLUM, M. D. From the Anatomical Laboratory^ Johns Hopkhcs Universiti/.

With 17 Text Figures.

In studying the Wolffian body of human and pigs' embryos, certain facts were arrived at which will be set doAvn in the following order :

1. Methods of study and material,

2. Tubular system of Wolffian body in human embryos.

3. Tubular system of Wolffian body in pigs' embryos with a description of a wax reconstruction showing the course of the tubules.

4. Blood-vessels of Wolffian body of pig's embryo.

5. Eelation of the tubular systems of the testis and the Wolffian body.

1. Methods of Study and Material.

A large number of pigs' embryos were studied, varying in length from 8 mm. to 200 mm. Since a fresh supply of these could be obtained at any time, it was not difficult to make a considerable number of injections and preparations witli various methods. The human embryos were available through the kindness of Professor Mall, and free use was made of the large collection which he possesses.

A very instructive method in the study of the tubular system consisted in the injection of the organ through the allantois with a colored solution. Various injection masses were made use of, but the most satisfactory proved to be the saturated aqueous solution of Berlin blue, and the ordinary carmine gelatin mass. Gelatin in which cinnabar or lamp-black granules were suspended had the disadvantage of being less transparent. Double injections were also made with carmine gelatin for the tubules and Berlin blue for the blood-vessels. In the Wolffian body there is no difficulty in distinguishing veins from arteries with a general vascular injection. Double injections of the vessels, however, were also made to supplement the general ones.



Xotes oil the Wolffian Body of Higher Mammals

In forcing fiiiid into the tnbules of the Wolffian body it is necessary to inject either through the allantois or the cloaca. In small embryos it is easier to tie ofE the cloaca below the entrance of the Wolffian duct, and fill the allantois with the injection mass. Then by gently squeezing the allantois between the fingers the fluid can be forced slowly into the tubules of the Wolffian body. In older embryos the cannula can be placed in the cloaca, and the allantois tied off. Where possible this is the best method, because the soft gelatinous tissues around the cloaca make it difficult to close it in any way. It proved to be a most instructive thing to cause the injection mass to flow into the tubules slowly, and to watch with a lens its course. Injections with lamp-black agar and subsequent digestion with pepsin and hydrochloric acid were unsatisfactory; for the delicacy of the structures made it impossible to isolate complete tubules.

The ordinary methods of histological study Avere employed. The reconstruction was made by the Born wax-plate method.

2. TtTBULAR System of Wolffiax Body in Humax Embryos.

In all higher Amniota the first part of the urinogenital apparatus to make its appearance is the Wolffian duct. According to Hensen and

V. Spec this tube is derived from the ectoblast; Avhile His and Kowalewsky believe that it has its origin in the middle plate of the mesoblast. Eemak, V. Kolliker, AValdeyer, and others trace its development from the lateral plate of the mesoblast. Romiti, Eensen, Dansky, and others find that it springs from the ccelomic epithc4iiim. According to Michalkovics it is at first a solid mass of cells differentiated from the mesoblast. The canal is blind at both ends in the beginning, and becomes lined by an epithelium-like layer.

- - -ha.

Fio. 1. Transverse section of human embryo CLXIV (3.5 mm.) in length. A. beginning- of anterior part of urinary apparatus. W. D., V, olfflan duct.

John Bruce MacCallum


In a human embryo, CLXIV/ 3.5 mm. in length, possessing 19 myotomes (probable age 2 J weeks), the Wolffian duct is found in an early stage of its development. It is in close connection with the coelomic epithelium in many places; and at its anterior extremity is evidently a direct turning in of the lining of the crelom. Fig. 1 A. The duct consists of a rod of cells ending anteriorly in a depression or groove. This is shown on the left side of Fig. 1; while on the right side the duct is

cut more posteriorly and shows already some indication of the formation of a lumen. Examined closely, the organ is found to consist of two parts, an anterior, and a posterior division. The anterior part begins opposite the 6th myotome, and ends opposite the 9th. The posterior part begins opposite the 10th myotome and extends throughout the rest of the body to the level of the last myotome. This is shown diagrammatically in Fig. 2. The anterior part, A., is a simple rod-shaped mass, of cells possessing a small lumen at the anterior end opening into the body cavity, as shown in Fig. 1. The posterior part, W. B., extends backward parallel with the last nine myotomes; and at 13 places on its course it is thickened to form rounded masses, from a few of which there project lateral outgrowths. These are the beo-innings of the Wolffian tubules, W. T. At this stage there is no indication whatever of glomeruli. The significance of these two parts of the urinary apparatus is not clear. One is tempted to consider the anterior mass of cells as in some way related to the pronephros of lower animals; and the posterior mass, as the developing Wolffian body. The fact that the anterior mass possesses a lumen which opens into the body cavity would seem to support this idea, as this is the case with the pronephric tubules

Fig. 3. Diagrammatic reconstruction of urinary apparatus in human embryo CLXIV. A ., anterior rep-ion of apparatus : W. B., Wolffian body ; W. T., tubules. The myotomes are numbered.

1 The Roman numerals refer to embryos in the collection of human embryos belonging- to Dr. Mall, in the Anatomical Laboratory of the Johns Hopkins University.


Notes on the Wolffian Body of Higher Mammals

in lower vertebrates. Between the anterior and posterior parts there is a space of five or six sections, each 20 // thick.

In a somewhat older embryo, LXXX (V. B. 4.5, K. B.' 5.; probable age 3 weeks), a slightly more advanced stage in the development of the tnbules is noticed. The urinary apparatus begins opposite the 7th myotome as a small duct. This extends for 4 sections, each 30 fj. thick, and then ceases. During its course one small, blind, slightly curved, tubule is given off. In the next four sections no trace of this duct can be made out. In the section following, however, another duct starts and is continued to the posterior end of the body. It seems at first probable that this interruption in the duct may be due to a misplacement of four sections in the series ; but a <3lose examination shows that this is quite impossible. Furthermore, the tubule which arises from the anterior duct proceeds from its ventral side and curves with its convexity ventralwards; while the tubules of the posterior duct all arise from the dorsal side of the duct with the convexity dorsalwards, as shown in Fig. 3.

There are no glomeruli opposite the anterior duct; while in the posterior part of Wolffian body proper, there is a glomerulus corresponding with each tubule. The tubules are curved as represented in Fig. 3 and number 15 on one side of the body and 17 on the other. There proved to be 17 glomeruli on one side and 18 on the other. Considering the possibility of error in counting these by following them through a series of sections, it seems that the organ is a fairly symmetrical one; and that there are approximately as many tubules as glomeruli, and an equal number of each on the two sides,

A very similar condition is met with in another embryo, LXXVl (T. B. 4.8, probable age 3 weeks). Here also the urinary apparatus consists of an anterior and a Opposite the 7th myotome the duct first appears. At the upper end of the 8th it ceases, and a new duct begins at the lower end of the 8th myotome. The latter duct extends backward to the posterior end of the body cavity. The tubules have a structure similar to that described in the preceding embryo. There is no differentiation into a secretory and a conducting part, Fig. 4. As nearly as can be determined there are 19 tubules in the Wolffian body

Fig. 3. Diagrammatic reconstruction of urinary ap.paratus in Iniman enibrvo. LXXX, (V. B., 4-5.N. B.,5) Lettering as above. Gm, glonierules.

posterior part.

■•^ V. B. and N. B. refer to the vertex-breech and the neck-breech measurement.

John Bruce MacCalluni



.^^-Or"^!: ^' •^' ■•^•


Fig. i. Transverse section of Wolffian body of human embryo LXXVI, (V. B. 4.8). The

of this embryo. The Malpighian bodies are not fully formed. A crescent-shaped bending of the end of the tubule is present with the concave side thickened, and the opposite side thinned out to a layer of flat cells. A small mass of capillaries is pushed into the concave side of this end structure, as shown in Fig. 4. The tubule is curved like the letter S. The lining epithelium of the Wolffian duct is not different in any essentials from that of the tubules.

An older human embryo, II (V. B. 3, N. B. 7, probable age 4 weeks), shows a slight advance on this last stage. In the Wolffian body there are 30 tubules and 30 glomeruli. These correspond

throughout with the greatest accuracy. There is no trace of the short anterior duct described in the preceding embryos. The

Wolffian tubules are" S-shaped, Mau^'^wan corpuscle is she Vn i^ with a slight dilatation near the

Malpighian body. Except for this there is no differentiation into a secreting and a conducting region. In an embryo, CLXIII (V. B. 9, F. B. 9, probable age 4^ weeks), this differentiation is well marked. The duct itself is lined by regularly arranged cells. The tubules near the duct possess a small lumen and are lined by small polygonal cells. In the region of the Malpighian body the lumen becomes considerably wider, and the cells lining the tubule are large and rich in protoplasm. This difference, which was first noticed by J. Mliller, is seen in a human embryo about 5 weeks old, CIX (V. B. 11, N". B. 10.5). In embryo CXLIV (V. B. 14, K B. 12, probable age 5^ weeks), the Wolffian body possesses 27 tubules and approximately 25 glomeruli. Figure 5 is a longitudinal section of the Wolffian body taken from a sagittal series of the embryo, showing the relation of the organ to the testis and kidney. The close relation between the Wolffian body and the testis in which tubules are just beginning to develop, must be noted. That these tubules become connected with the Wolffian body tubules through the Malpighian bodies, and that their subsequent connection with the epididymis is thus established will be shown later. In this embryo the Miillerian duct can be seen only as a very short tube extending back


K^otes on the Wolffian Body of Higher Mammals

T_ _


ward from the peritoneal cavity at the anterior end of the Wolffian body to end blindly posteriorly.

In a somewhat older embryo, CXXVIII (V. B. 20, N". B. 14, probable age 11 weeks), there are distinct signs of retrogression in the Wolffian body. There are 20 tubules on each side, while in younger embryos as many as 30 were observed. The most anterior tubules possess a somewhat widened lumen, and the most posterior show signs of obliteration.

Tubules half filled with cells can be made out together with the remains of glomeruli. Into the anterior 8 or 9 Malpighian bodies there is a' growth of the testis tubules. The Bowman's capsule is broken through by the testis tubules and a connection thus established between testis and epididymis. This will be described more in detail in pig's embryo, where fresh material allowed of its more exact study.

In embryo LXXXAH (V. B. 30, X. B. 20), there are 9 tubules and 12 glomeruli in the left Wolffian body. It is evident in this specimen that the degeneration of tubules progresses from the posterior end of the organ forwards. In another embryo, LXXV (V. B. 30, X. B. 20), there can be seen in the posterior half of the organ only vestiges of tubules. The anterior end is somewhat enlarged. The tubules here are considerable coiled, and the Malpighian bodies are in close connection with the tubules of the testis.

From the above notes, a rough idea of the course of development and metamorphosis undergone by the Wolffian body in man can be arrived at. The anterior tubules (pars sexualis) continue to increase in length and complexity to form the head of the epididymis in the male, and the parovarium in the female. The more posterior tubules (pars renalis)

Fig. 5. Lougitudinal section of Wolffian body, testis, and kidney, from human embryo CXLIV. (V. B. 14, N. B. 13.) T., testis; Tu., Wolffian tubule; Gm., glomerulus; K., kidney.

John Bruce MacCallum


form in the male the paradidymis or organ of Geralde, and in the female the paroophoron. The Wolthan duct persists in the male as the tail of the epididymis and the vas deferens, and in the female as Gartner's canal.

The Miillerian duct in the female forms the Fallopian tube and uterus. In the male the middle part disappears. The anterior portion gives rise to the hydatids of Morgagni, the posterior to Weber's organ. "When the -whole tube persists it is called Eathke's duct.

Transverse embryo


Fig. 6 section

pig- 8 mm. long. W. U., Wolffian duct, Gm., glomerulus, Ao.. aorta.

3. Tubular System of "Wolffiax Body ix the Pig.

The youngest pig's embryo I was able to obtain was 8 mm. in length. At this stage the Wollhan body is fairly well formed. In Fig. 6 it is shown in transverse section. It is made up of a tubular and a glomerular part. The glomeruli are situated ventro-medially throughout nearly the whole length of the organ. At the posterior end they cease a short distance anterior to the hindmost Wolffian tubules. They are directly connected with the aorta by a series of arteries which run across in a straight line through the dor so-medial portion of the gland. Fig. 6. The Wolffian duct runs in a slight ridge along the outer ventral border of the gland, and extends from the anterior end of the Wolffian body to the cloaca. In its course it is slightly curved with its concavity towards the median line. From it there proceed at right angles a number of tubules, each of which has a lumen considerably smaller than that of the duct. These have the course represented in Fig. 7. In this embrvo there were 51 glomeruli and -12 tubules on the left side; 45 glomeruli and 40 tubules on the right side.

The Wolffian body reaches its greatest development when the embryo is about 40

mm. long. From this stage to the time ^^^^ ^ Diagrammatic recon when it reaches a length of 95 mm. the ^duc\'Hrom*'pTg'flSbryo8 mm'! gland remains in about the same condition, '"'^s' After this degeneration begins and changes take place which end in the almost complete disappearance of the organ.

In the Wolffian body, at the height of its development in pigs between 40 and 95 mm. in length, there can be recognized three main surfaces. The ventro-medial and dorso-medial sides are flattened by pressure from


Notes on the Wolffian Body of Higher Mammals

the sexual gland and the kidney respectively. The remaining lateral surface is rounded^ as shown in Fig. 13. Three borders may be spoken of: the ventral border, which is caused by the ridge in which the Wolffian duct is situated; the medial border between the ventro- and dorso-medial surfaces, and the more or less rounded dorsal border. The blood-vessels enter and leave the gland at the medial border. The glomeruli are situated beneath the ventro-medial surface.

An attempt was made to determine the course of the tubules by means of injections. Although by this method it was not possible to obtain

Fig. 8. Wax reconstructiou of the Wolffian body of a pig's embryo 80 mm. long. S, secretory portion of tubule; M, Malpigbian bodies; D, dorsal border; W. D., Wolffian duct, anterior border.

specimens showing the entire course of any one tubule, some interesting facts were arrived at. By filling the allantois with colored fluid and keeping up a constant pressure on it, the injection could be followed with a lens. The fluid could be seen to run rapidly up the Wolffian duct almost to its anterior extremity. A moment later the fluid entered the tubules, beginning with the most posterior ones. In these it could be followed around the lateral surface of the gland to the dorsal border, where it plunged into the depths. A moment afterwards it entered the capsules of the glomeruli. This same process could be followed until the anterior end of the organ was reached. If pressure enough

John Bruce MacCallum 253

was exei-ted to fill the anterior tubules, the posterior ones became much dilated and overfilled. On the lateral surface the fluid at a certain point could be seen to run in opposite directions in the tubules on the surface, and in those just beneath these, which will be explained in the study of the entire course of the tubules. Partial injections were found to be very instructive. It was observed that some of the tubules branched soon after leaving the Wolffian duct. In examining thick sections of these injected specimens cleared in creosote, the tubules were seen sometimes to branch just before entering the glomeruli. In this way one tiibule might be in connection with two or more glomeruli. Evidences of anastomosis and the formation of small networks of tubules were also made out. This was seen partictilarly in the region of the of the dorsal border.

To gain an exact idea of the course which the tubules take in the gland, a wax reconstruction was made according to the method of Born. This well-known method has been described in detail by Bardeen.' Wax plates, 2 mm. thick, and a series of 'sections cut at 10 //. were used. Every other section was reconstructed and controlled by the intervening ones. The magnification was thus 100 diameters. The model is represented in Fig. 8. The course of the tubtile can be made out plainly from its beginning in the ]\Ialpighian body to its termination in the Wolffian duct. The BoAvman's capsule (to use a term usually employed in describing a similar structure in the permanent kidney) narrows down to a fine tube which runs forwards towards the ventral border. Here it turns and follows the lateral surface of the gland to a short distance from the dorsal border, where it turns abruptly on itself, forming a large loop, and returns to the region of the anterior border. Here it becomes somewhat convoluted and then passes over to the region of the dorsal border, where it is again thrown into convolutions. Erom the dorsal border it proceeds around on the lateral surface of the gland to empty into the Wolffian duct. Certain differences in the calibre of the tubule are to be noted. The collecting tubule arising in the capsule of Bowman is small, and is lined by cubical epithelium. In the region of the lateral surface it passes into a tube many times larger, lined by large columnar epithelial cells containing granular protoplasm. These cells seem to be secretory in character. This large tube forms a complete loop, as shown in Fig. 8, and passes over in the region of the anterior border into a much smaller, somewhat convoluted segment of the tubule. This in turn runs across the stirface of the Malpighian bodies, where it becomes again greater in diameter, to join with another convoluted

■■^Bardeen: Johns Hopkins Hospital Bulletin, April-May-June, 1901.


Notes on the Wolffian Body of Higher Mammals

segment in the region of the dorsal border. This whole middle part of the tubule has a much greater diameter than either the collecting tubule at the glomerulus end or that which empties into the Wolffian duct. The relative size of these various segments is shown in Fig. 8. Special names might be given to the different parts of the tubule, but until their significance is more definitely known this could be of little value. There is, however, a very distinct division into a secretory and a conducting part. In the two convoluted segments, anastomoses sometimes occur. It can readily be seen in examining the course of this tubule how fluid forced into it from the Wolffian duct could be seen on the lateral surface running in opposite directions. In comparing Figs. 7 and 8 the development of the tubule can be roughly traced. In Fig. 7 the large secretory loop S can already be recognized. The greatest increase in length thus takes place in the segment between this loop and the Wolffian duct.

The epithelium lining the large secretory loop and the larger parts of the middle segment of the tubule is represented in Fig. 9, S. T. The cells are large, cylindrical, and somewhat rounded. The protoplasm is

granular in the basal half of the cell and quite clear in the other half. The nucleus is oval and situated near the centre of the cell, usually at the edge of the granular half. The epithelium lining the collecting tubules. Fig. 9, C. T., is made up of cubical cells rich in granules throughout. The nuclei are round and stain deeply in hasmatoxylin. The lines of demarcation between these cells are not plainly visible, while in the secretory portions of the tubule each cell can be seen distinctly.

Evidences of degeneration can be observed in injecting the Wolffian tubules of pigs 100 mm. in length. At this stage the tubules sometimes inject completely, while in other specimens the fluid runs only a short distance. In the male there is usually left a small uninjected region opposite the testis. The tubules injected anterior to this become the epididymis. At this stage also many of the tubules contain desquamated epithelial cells cast off into the lumen. In pig's embryos I'iO mm. in length, the injection fluid cannot in

Fig. 9. Section thi'ou^h Wolffian tubules sliowing secreting: tubule (S. T.) and coUecting- tubules (C. T.). B. C, blood capillary.

John Bruce MacCallum



case be forced through the entire length of the tubules. Usually

only an occasional tubule near the middle of the gland, and in the male the fine tubules at the extreme anterior end are filled with the colored solution. An injection of the gland in the female at this stage is shown in Fig. 10. It will be noticed that both the WoMan and Miillerian ducts are injected. The organ is drawn from its lateral surface to show the extent to which the Wolffian tubules have been injected. The tubules are by no means so alnmdant as in younger emljryos. The glomeruli are still present in considerable nimibers. The interstitial tissue is relatively greater in amount than in earlier stages. Degenerating tubules in such a gland are shown in section in Fig. 11. In the upper tubule the lumen is seen to be partially filled with epithelial cells, while in the lower tubule the lumen is almost obliterated.

In embryos 130 mm. long the tubules cannot be injected at all in the posterior (urinary) part of the Wolffian body. In

the female the fluid runs up in the Miillerian duct

and flows into the body ca^dty. In the male there

is a complete injection of the anterior (sexual)

part of the organ, ('. e., the epididymis. In pigs 1-10

mm. long it requires considerable pressure to force

fluid into the Wolffian duct. On entering, however, it runs up to the anterior end and flows out as

before into the tubules near the head of the testis.

In embryos 1-15 mm. long the injection fluid fills

a considerable mass of tubules representing the

head of the epididymis. In the female it requires

onlv very little pressure to cause the fluid to flow through the Miillerian

duct to the body cavity. Here the Wolffian duct can no longer be


Fro. 10. Injection of Wolffian and Miillerian ducts in a pig^'s embryo 120 mm. long-. O.. ovary ; M., Miillerian duct; AV., Wolffian duct; A.. allantois; K., Ividney. The organ is viewed from the side.


Fig. 11. Section showing obliteration of tubules in a pig's embryo 130 mm. long.


Notes on the Wolffian Body of Hio;lier Mammals

4. Blood-Vessels of Wolffiax Body of Embryo Pig.

The arteries of the Wolffian body in an embryo 40-80 mm. in length arise from the lower half of the aorta. Their nnmber varies from five to eight. They run in a slant direction posteriorly across the lower part of the kidney and enter the Wolffian body at its medial border. Entering the organ here they break np into branches which proceed to the glomeruli. The position of the latter in the organ has been described. It is shown again in Fig 12. Each arterial branch

Fig- 14

- V

Fig iZ.

Fig. 12. Thick transverse section of Wolffian body of a pig's embryo 4.5 mm. long. Ttie blood vessels are injected. The arteries, veins and glomeruli can readily be distinguished.

FigT 13. Ventral aspect of Wolflian body of a pig's embryo 45 mm. long, showing the surface veins and the arteries entering the organ.

Fig. 14. Cross section of Wolffian body, kidney, and sexual gland, showing the .relation of their veins.

Fig. 1.5. Three tubules from a thick section of the Wolflian body of embryo pig 45 mm. long, showing the capillary plexuses in the walls.

may supply one or more glomeruli; or, on the other hand, one glomerulus may receive several branches from one artery. The afferent arterial branches break up to form the large plexus of capillaries making up each glomerulus. No definite arrangement of these capillaries can be made out. The glomeruli are many times as large as those of the permanent kidney. From each glomerulus there arise two or more efferent arteries. These usually proceed from the side opposite the entry of the afferent vessels. As many as five of these are often seen in a thick section. They run out radially from the glomeruli and form networks of capillaries around the Wolffian tubules. From these the veins arise, as shown in Fig. 12.

John Bruce MacCallum 357

The vei7is of the Wolffian hody arising from the capillary networks aronnd the tubules are represented in Fig. 12. They gather together in two directions. A large number join to form veins which proceed towards the periphery of the organ, while the rest enter large veins which leave the Wolffian body by the hilus where the arteries entered. The surface veins are large branching vessels which run somewhat parallel with the tubules and divide the whole organ roughly into lobes. Their course on the ventral aspect of the organ is shown in Fig. 13. Arising from between the tubules they course over the surface and pass under the Wolffian duct. Figs. 12 and 13. On the ventro-medial surface of the organ they join together to form three or four large trunks, which enter a common vein at the medial border. From the dorsal region veins present a somewhat similar picture. They usually gather together into four large vessels, two of which drain the middle third of the gland, while the other two drain the anterior and posterior thirds. Eunning along the dorso-medial surface. these venous trunks join with the veins from the ventro-medial surface and enter the inferior vena cava. In addition to these surface veins, there is a series of central veins which leave the Wolffian body at the medial border. One of these veins is shown in Fig. 12. It is made up of the junction of several small branches derived from the capillary plexuses around the tubules. Passing down on the dorsal side of the glomeruli, it joins with the superficial veins to enter the common trunks.

Fig. 14 shows the relations of these three series of veins and their relation to the veins of the testis and kidney.

It is necessary to note particularly the disposition of the efferent arteries as shown in Fig. 12. As mentioned before, they pass out from the glomeruli in a radial direction. Each artery in this way occupies a territory of its own, and from all sides its small branches form capillary networks which collect to form the veins. This is a repetition of what has been noted in many organs, namely, the formation of blood vascular units with an artery in the centre of each and veins at the periphery. In a transverse section, such is as represented in Fig. 12, six or seven units can be observed. The arterial end of each capillary plexus can be easily distinguished from the venous end by a difference in structure just as the arteries and veins can without difficulty be recognized in a single injection of the Wolffian body. The venous end of this network is shown in Fig. 15. This figure is intended to represent a thick section of three tubules, the walls of which are seen obliquely. A fine plexus of irregular venous capillaries covers the walls and gives evidence of the remarkably rich blood supply of the organ.


Xotes on the Wolffian Body of Higher Mammals

5. Eelation of the Tubular Systems of the Testis axd Wolffiax


An intimate relation between the tnbular systems of these two orgaus Avas spoken of in describing the human organs. In pigs' embryos the same relation can be made out with much greater distinctness, owing probably to the possibility of obtaining fresh material. In the pig the sexual gland is from the first very closely connected with the Wolffian body. It develops on the ventro-medial surface of the anterior part of the organ apparently from the cells covering this surface. Later on tubules develop in the testis, and the large characteristic sexual cells in the ovary. The exact method of development of these glands does not come Avithin the scope of the present paper. It is sufficient to note that in a pig's embrvo 95 mm. long the testis tubules

Fi(i. 16. Transverse section of Wolffian body, testis and part of the kidney of embryo pig 95 mm. long'. K., tubules from testis breaking into the Malpighian body; T., testis; K., kidney; W., Wolffian body, W. D., Wolffian duct; M. D.. MUlleriau duct.



are well developed, showing well-marked walls and a distinct lumen. In the centre of the gland and towards the hilus the tubules become very narrow and enter a mass of extremely fine tubules which run together to the hilus of the testis. These tnbules are so small that it is difficult to observe a many of shown in ^i

mass of tubules leaves .^iO;l^- a portion of the preceding; section with higher magnification. K., tubules from testis; G., glomerulus; C, cavity thp tpctia Einrl noa-ific; of tubule and Bowman's capsule. The entrance of the testis uie LCMib ctnu pdb.Lfe tubules into this cavity can plainly be seen.

directly over into the

Wolffian body through the neck of tissue which joins the two organs.

John Bruce MacCalium 359

Here they come into contact with the Malpighian corpuscles, with the walls of which they seem to fuse, so that the tubules come to communicate Avith the cavities contained hy Bowman's capsules. ' This is shown in Figs. 16 and 17. It will readily be seen that a communication is thus established between the testis tubules and the Wolttian duct through the Malpighian bodies and tubules of the Wolffian body. The testis tubules break into only the anterior ten or twelve Malpighian bodies, so that the anterior tubules (10 or 12) are the only ones in connection with the testis. From these tubules the head of the epididymis must be formed. From the Wolffian duct the rest of the epididymis and the vas delferens arise. This mode of secondary communication between the testis and the Wolffian tubules is not unknown in the lower classes of vertebrates.



Associate Professor of Anutoiny, Avatomical Laboratory, Harvard Medical School.

With 8 Text Figures.

Although the vitelline (omphalo-mesaraic) artery is synonymous with the suiDerior mesenteric, yet the vitelline vein is not identical with the

superior mesenteric vein.

The artery, at all stages of the animal's life, is found in the mesentery of the jejunum and ileum. Fig. 1 is a transverse section of a cat embryo of 7.6 mm. The section is published not because it shows anything which is unlcnown, but because it happens to be a fortunate section and demonstrates at a glance the course and relations of this vessel. The artery is seen in the mesentery of the intestine; it crosses the ileum, and divides at its termination to surround the yolk sac.


Fig. 1. Transverse section of a eat embryo 7.6 mm

After the obliteration of this sac, that portion of the artery ventrad to the intestine, lies in the tissue of the umbilical cord, and consequently, fixes or anchors the loop of ileum which it crosses in the cavity of the umbilical cord, until all other portions of the intestine have entered the coelom proper. The artery then elongates, and thus finally allows 19


On the Vitelline Vein of the Cat


Fig. 3. Cat embrj-o of C.2 mm. Harvard Embryological Collection. Transverse Series 380. Section 373.

the loop of ilenm to enter the coelom. This process was described by

me in a paper two years ago.^ At birth, and even for a few days after birth;, this free, elongated artery may be easily identified, and, curiously enough, in the cat, remains pervious Ao. ■Lip to the fourth or fifth day. It represents the terminal branch of the superior mesenteric, and in the embryo is undoubtedly its largest branch.

Our knowledge of the liver veins is largely due to the admirable researches of Hochstetter, as well as to others who have written on this subject, not to mention what is to be found in the many text-books on

anatomy. As far as I know, Hochstetter, as well as the others, treats

of the course and relations of the vitelline

veins after they have

reached the duodenum,

rather than of the first

part of their course,

nam.ely, from the yolk

sac to the duodenum. I

have found no literature

relating to this division

of the subject. Both the

right and left vitelline

veins are to be seen in a

cat embryo of 3 mm.

They extend from the

yolk sac, within the duodenal walls, encircle its

cavity, and finally terminate in the heart


Fig. 3. A drawing- of the stomach and duodenum of a cat at birth to show the free vitelline vein joining the Soon superior mesenteric vein.

after this date the right vein, below the liver, is obliterated, and the

1 Additional Observations on the Morphology of the Digestive Tract of the Cat. The Journal of the Boston Society of Medical Sciences. Vol. IV., p. 205. April 1900.

Frankliii Dexter



left alone remains. jSTotice once more the conrse which the vein takes from the yolk sac to the liver, and especially its relation to the duodenum. It lies at first ventrad to the duodenum; it next lies laterad to it, then dorsad, and, lastly, cephalad where it reaches the liver.

Fig. 2 is a transverse section of a 6.3 mm. embryo cat. It shows at this stage the relation of the vein to the duodenum. The vein lies within its walls and encircles it.

Fig. 3 is a drawing of the duodenum and i'ts mesentery in a cat at birth. The vitelline vein rests upon the ventral surface of the duodenal mesentery, and is seen to perforate it just below, or caudad to the pylorus, in order to join the superior mesenteric vein. It is obvious that the relation of the duodenum to the vitelline vein in a 6.2 mm. embryo is absolutely different from that in a cat at birth. (Figs. 2 and 3.)

The following five figures represent transverse sections of cat embryos at various stages of development. They were all drawn on the same scale by means of a cam T . . T Fig. 4. Transverse section of a 7.6 mm. embryo.

era lucida.

In all the drawings the relation of the vitelline veins to the aorta remains constant, but the relation of the duodenum to the aorta gradually changes. The vein remains fixed, but the duodenum, by means of an extensive growth of its mesentery, migrates to the right, and thus produces the peculiar relation of the vein to the duodenum which is seen in a cat at birth. Besides the stages figured, I have examined several intermediate stages Avhich fully confirm the history of the development as given below. The growth is gradual. Now let us examine it step by step.

As has already been pointed out in Fig. 2, the vitelline vein lies on


On the Vitelline Vein of the Cat

three sides of the duodenum. The relation has changed in Fig. 4, which is a section of a 7.6 mm. emhryo. Here the vein is purely laterad to the intestine.

There is no very great change in the relation of the duodenum to the vitelline vein in an embryo of 13 mm. (Fig. 5) as compared with the last stage (Fig. 4), except that the mesenchymal tissue Avhich forms

Fig. .5. Embryo of 13 mm. series 399. Section 460.

Harvard Embryoloffical Collection. Transverse

the walls of the gut is much thickened, its lumen is farther from the vein, and the embryo is more developed in every respect.

In the section of a 15 mm. embryo (Fig. 6) a pronounced change has taken place. The vein may now be described as being in relation to the mesentery of the duodenum, rather than in relation with the walls of the intestine itself.

Figs. 7 and 8 are sections of the duodenum, its mesentery, and the vein, in embryos of 23.1 and 39 mm., respectively. The same extensive

Franklin Dexter


growth has continued, and now at 39 mm. the gut is found at an appreciable distance from the vein. The continued growth of the duodenum to the right, together with the immobility of the vein, fully accounts for the change in relation to the duodenum and vitelline vein as seen in the youngest embryo, and in the cat at birth.

We have already seen (Fig. 1) the relations of the vitelline artery




Fig. 0. Embryo of 15 mm. Harvard Embryological Collectiou. Transverse series 436. Section 527.

throughout its entire extent. Fig. i is taken from the same series, the twelfth section cephalad to it. It shows remarkably clearly the course of the vein from the yolk sac to the duodenum. The vein is ■seen to be unconnected with any mesentery. It lies absolutely isolated and alone until it reaches the mesentery of the duodenum.

One can easily identif}^ either in this section, or in one made at right ang-les to the intestine, its endothelial lining, Avhich is surrounded by a


On the Vitelline Vein of the Cat

variable amount of mesenchymal tissue, and covered by the mesothelium. It is obvious that this vessel cannot be a synonym for the superior mesenteric vein, since that vein lies with the artery of the same name in the mesentery of the small intestine. I know nothing of the development of the superior mesenteric vein, but if one injects the portal system of a cat at birth with very thin Teichmann's mass, the pervious vitelline vein can be seen entering the mesentery of the

Fig. 7.

Fig. 8.

Fig. 7. Embryo of 23.1 mm. Harvard Embryological Collection. Transverse

series 466. Section 1079.

Fig. 8. Embryo of 39 mm. Harvard Embryological Collection. Transverse

series 361. Section. 643.

duodenum, to join the superior mesenteric vein just previous to the union of that vein with the splenic. In other Avords, the vitelline vein is no more a branch of the superior mesenteric than is the splenic vein. It does not lie in the mesentery of the jejunmn and ileum, neither does it receive blood from the intestines. Its object seems to be to return the blood from the yolk sac to the liver, and in its course it joins the

Franklin Dexter 36 T

superior mesenteric vein, to aid, together with other veins, in tlie formation of the portal system. It is certainh^ most difficult to understand why both the artery and the vein should be pervious after birth, and especially such a very long time after the obliteration of the yolk sac.

One other point in regard to the vitelline vein. It seems to reach its maximum development in the embryo of 13 mm. (Fig. 5) and then to slowly atrophy. AYe have already seen that it is pervious for a few days after birth, so it is unlikely that there can be any great change in its size after the embryo has reached a length of 39 mm.

To recapitulate: The vitelline vessels remain pervious for a few days after birth.

As the result of an extensive growth of the duodenum to the right, the vitelline vein changes its position from the wall of the duodenum to the duodenal mesentery.

At no period is the vein found in the mesentery of the jejunum and ileum, but in all stages of development the vein is free from mesenteries in its course from the yolk sac to' the wall of the duodenum, or to the duodenal mesentery.

The vitelline vein unites with the superior mesenteric vein to aid in the formation of the portal system.

ABBEEYIATIOXS. Ao. Aorta. Du. Duodenum. Gt. O. Great omentum. II. Ileum. Je. Jejunum.

L. U. V. Left timbilical vein. Mes. Mesentery of duodenum. P. Pancreas.

Py. Pylorus. E. U. V. Eight umbilical vein.

S. M. A. Superior mesenteric arterj-.

S. M. V. Superior mesenteric vein.

St. Stomach.

V. V. Vitelline vein.

Yk. Yolk sac.



From the Hull Anatomical Laboratory, University of Chicago ; and the Hearst Anatomical Laboratory, University of California.

With 9 Text Figukes.

The ducts of the salivary glands have a peculiar interest because they represent the paths of development followed by the more highly organized secretory portions of the organ. Excepting possibly certain parts of the intralobular system comparatively little work has been done on the ducts of the human submaxillary gland. Owing to the important embryological relations of the ducts and the interest associated with their functions of providing a channel for the secretion, accurate information concerning their course and structure should be obtained. With this end in view, therefore, the following work was undertaken.


Studies of the gross anatomy of the ducts and the gland were carried on in the dissecting rooms during the regular work of a class in systematic anatomy. The material was embalmed with a bichloride, glycerine and alcohol fluid and injected with red lead and starch. On the whole the cadavers were in very good condition so that the relations and structure of the tissues under investigation and those about them were very well preserved. Entirely outside of the value of the study itself, the pedagogical effect of demonstrating to a working class of students some of the simpler research methods is not to be underestimated. We are indebted to Schwalbe, Cunningham and Mall for the extensive use of dissecting-room material for the purposes of research.' The material for the corrosions on which this study of the ducts is largely based was likewise obtained from the cadavers. The submaxillary gland was carefully dissected from its bed with a portion of the D. sul)maxil]aris and injected. Corrosions of the ducts can be easily obtained with the ordinary celloidin carriers, colored with chrome

' Bardeen : Bulletin of the Johns Hopkins Hospital, Vol. xii, 11)01.

370 The Ducts of the Human Submaxillary Gland

yellow, cinnabar, or Prussian blue. Prussian blue is the best pigment for this purpose as its dark color renders the smallest ramifications visible and its fine granulation often allows the mass to pass easily through the intralobular ducts into the alveoli themselves. When it is desired to inject only the sublobular or lobular ducts chrome j^ellow or cinnabar should be used, for such masses do not, as a rule, pass beyond these structures into the finer ducts. Celluloid colored by victoria blue is a good mass, its advantage lying in the fact that it can be kept in the air as a dry preparation without shrinkage and does not have to be preserved in glycerine like the celloidin injections. For these corrosions commercial celluloid dissolved in acetone can be used or the celluloid may be made by adding camphor and acetone to celloidin. Apparently the granular pigments do not give such good results with the celluloid mass for the corrosion is liable to crumble after the surrounding tissue has been destroyed. Both the celluloid and celloidin can be freed from the glandular tissue surrounding them by the pepsin hydrochloric digestion fluid or a more rapid destruction of the gland is easily effected by immersing the injected organ in commercial hydrochloric acid. Inasmuch as the ducts are small, the acid does not make the preparations too brittle to be handled. All of our injections have been prepared in this way rather than by the use of the more tedious pepsin method. The stereoscopic microscope proved to be of the greatest service in the study of the corrosions. By its use we can follow, OAving to its deep field, the course of the finer branches accurately in three dimensions and get much sharper pictures of the relations of these structures than by the old flat field microscope.

By far the best way of showing duets in relation to the frame-work of the glands is by a method devised by the writer " while working iu the laboratory of Prof. Spalteholz in the Anatomical Institute of Leip'zig. Small blocks of tissues are hardened in the graded alcohols, bichloride or Van Gehuchten's fluid, dehydrated and then repeatedly extracted with the (Soxhlet) apparatus and digested until all of the glandular elements are dissolved and nothing but the frame-work remains. ITp to this point this is the method of piece digestion devised by Spalteholz " for the demonstration of connective tissue in sections. After the digestion is complete, the digested frame-work of the organ is then cleared in glycerine, creosote or xylol and is then ready for preliminary study. This block of tissue, owing to the fixation and hardening, retains

2 Flint: Johns Hopkins Hospital Bulletin, Feb., 1903. sSpalteholz: Arch. f. Anat. u. Pbys., Suppl. Bd., 1897.

Joseph Marshall Flmt 271

perfectly the form and relations of the original tissue. It is the delicate opaque skeleton of the original tissue formed by the connective tissue frame-work, and when viewed through the stereoscopic microscope, shows in three dimensions all of the normal relations of the frame-work to the original structures of the organ. Owing to the high diffraction of the fibrils many of the finest details of structure are brought out, as for example, the basement membranes of the alveoli, ducts, vessels, perilobular membranes, etc. When pieces of the submaxillary gland are digested and cleared in this way, the ducts and their accompanying vessels are shown beautifully, both in the interlobular spaces and as Ihey enter the lobule and ramify in its substance.

After careful drawings have been made of these thick preparations in glycerine, they can be utilized for further study with the finer methods according to the original procedure of Spalteholz. When embedded in paraffin and cut in thin sections, they can be stained on the slide with iron hgematoxylin. Numerous variations in the stains are, of course, possible although iron hgematoxylin and aniline blue give by far the sharpest pictures. Beautiful specimens can be obtained by using celloidin as an embedding mediimi and cutting thick sections which are stained in an eight per cent solution of acid fuchsin. They are then washed rapidly in distilled water and the graded alcohols until the celloidin is decolorized, and finally cleared in creosote and mounted. These preparations show the fibrils distinctly for naturally the staining adds greatly to the clearness of the picture, but, at the same time, it is necessary to sacrifice some of the depth as the stained sections cannot be cut over a certain thickness, depending partially on the nature of the tissue and partly on the density of the meshwork.

For the study of the ducts in sections most of the ordinary procedures were employed. Several proved especially useful for this purpose, among which was the method of slide digestion perfected by Spalteholz and his pupils.* This consists, briefly, in mounting an alternate series of paraffin sections and digesting one with pancreatin, while the other is stained as a control. To complete this comparison the writer treated a third section by Weigert's elastic tissue method counterstained with picric acid, so as to have, side by side, successive sections prepared by three different methods instead of two. Hensen's modification of the Van Gieson stain ° proved of value in the study of the connective tissue

^Spalteholz: loc. cit. Hoehl : Arch. f. Anat. u. Phys., Anat. Abtlg., 1897. Clark: Ibid., 189S.

"Hensen: Anat. Anzeio'er., Bd. xr.

2T3 The Ducts of the Human Submaxillary Gland

in sections^ especially in the comparison with digested sections. Many other methods were used and modified as the exigencies of the research required.

Gross Relations.

The Ductus submaxillaris joins the submaxillary gland with the Caruncula sublingualis, its length vanes between four and five cm.^ its diameter is between two and three mm. The dtict first becomes visible as it emerges from the hilus of the gland which is situated usually near the central portion of the medial surface. From the hilus it runs downwards^ inwards, and forwards, upon the external surface of the M. hypoglossus running between it and the M. myiohyoideus. After passing the M. hyogiossus it passes in its course between the Glandula sublingualis, the M. genioglossus and M. lingualis inferior. As it runs by the medial surface of the sublingual gland it is usually in intimate connection with the N. lingualis and A. sublingualis. It then terminates in the Caruncula sublingualis which opens into the mouth just at one side of the Frenulum linguae. The walls of the duct are rather thin when the diameter of its lumen is taken into consideration, but it is well provided with elastic and fibrous tunics as well as a few smooth muscle fibres. The contrast in the thickness of the walls of the D. submaxillaris and D. parotidens is at first sight rather surprising, especially as the former carries the thick viscid secretion of the submaxillary gland while the latter forms the channel through which the thin serous product of the parotid is poured into the mouth. When one considers, however, the fact that the duct of the parotid is relatively exposed as it lies covered simply by skin and fascia, this is not so surprising, for the submaxillary duct is well protected and sheltered by the numerons firmer structures forming its environment.

' The Gl. submaxillaris lies in the Eegio submaxillaris, adapting its form apparently to the shape of the space in which it lies. It is irregularly prismatic or triangular in shape with its large axis directed dorsoventrally, slightly downward and inward so that it lies parallel to the axis of the ramus of the mandible. Below it is covered by the cervical fascia and M. platysma. The V. facialis communis and sometimes the A. maxillaris externa passes over the inferior surface of the gland. Medialwards the Gl. submaxillaris rests upon the M. mylohyoidens, M. stylohyoid eus, and M. hyogiossus, while lateralwards the ramus of the mandible forms its chief boundary. On the internal surface is the hilus where the D. submaxillaris leaves the gland. Often there is a posterior proloncation of the organ bnt this is usually poorly marked. A

Joseph Marshall Flint 2?3

small lobe or prolongation, however, is usually observed passing beneath the M. niylohyoideus with the D. subniaxillaris in rather intimate association with it. This portion may be completely free from the major part of the gland forming an aberrant lobe, the duct of which joins the D. subniaxillaris at a point somewhat below the hilus.

In taking up the description of the course of the secretory channels within the organ it is perhaps best for the sake of clearness to begin with the main duct aud then proceed through its complex ramifications to the alveoli, although this course is opposite that taken by the secretion. On the other hand from an embryological point of view, it is, of course, obvious that in adopting this method of description we follow the path taken by the gland in its development. In discussing the course of the ducts it will be necessary to refer, from time to time, to certain facts concerning their development, accordingly, at the outset, it may be well to recapitulate briefly certain details of the organogenesis of the siibmaxillary which are to form the substance of a later communciation. The first anlage consists of a spur from the epithelium ot the mouth which marks the beginning of the duct. This anlage is a solid cylindrical column of cells which grows and finally begins to branch. The branching portion becomes encapsidated and indicates the primitive form of the organ as we know it in adult life. At this stage it is composed of a blastema of branching nucleated cells in which the growing ducts are embedded. The growth at this stage is chiefly apical and the branches of the simple little tree which later is transformed into the major ducts of the gland terminate in little buds or swellings that form the growing points at the apices. As the gland develops these simple cell columns divide and ramify and become more complex until, after giving rise to the ducts of the first order, interlobular, lobular and intercalary ducts, they produce finally the alveoli and secreting elements of the gland. In their growth, the ducts and their accompanying vessels are surrounded by strands of connective tissue wliich form later the interlobular spaces. At the time when the ramification has proceeded to a certain point, the growing ends become surrounded by a fine capsule or membrane which marks the initial formation of the lobule and its membrana limitans. This membrane is attached to the growing duct at the future site of the lobular hilus and forms the one firm point of attachment of the lobule. Within this membrane, the intralobular ducts and alveoli are developed. At first the lobules are comparatively free but later become, as they increase in size, closely packed together, forming the irregular polygonal shapes observed in adult life. It is in this way that the limiting membranes of

274 The Duets of the Human SubmaxiUary Gland

adjacent lobules are pressed in close apposition, and yet, as a general rule, the attachment between them consists simply of a few fine fibrils of reticulum (Fig. 8). In its early stages, the organ in pigs, as a whole, is regularly symmetrical and the future ducts, marked by the growing columns of cells, branch with great regularity, the larger divisions alternately passing first to one side and then to the other of the gland. They can be followed with some distinctness in ordinary sections but in injected specimens better results are obtained when the gland is divided and viewed with the stereoscopic microscope which shows these relations in three dimensions. In the simplest forms the blood-vessels form a fine plexus about these growing columns of cells and, as they develop and ramify, the arteries and vessels supplying them follow the same line of growth so that we have an artery and veins developing with each branch of the duct.

It has been shown that the intrinsic vessels of an organ indicate in general the paths along which the different parts of that organ have developed, a principle which is expressed in the following paraphrase of a well-known scientific aphorism, viz. : the angiology of an organ in a measure recapitulates its ontogeny. In the case of the submaxillary this principle obtains and the blood-vessels of the organ represent the lines of its development. Therefore, in injected preparations of the developing gland we can follow accurately the course of the ducts from the vessels that always accompany them. Were it essential, this relation of the blood-vessels to the ducts Avould afford another proof that the ducts themselves also form a record of the development of the gland. It follows, therefoie, that the youngest parts of the organ are the terminals of the ducts or alveoli while the oldest portion is the main duct itself. It is also apparent that this relationship of the ducts and vessels gives rise to the invariable conditions observed in the interlobular Spaces where an artery and its venge comites accompany every duct. So constant and regular is this condition that these vessels may be justly termed the vasa comites of the ducts. In embryo pigs the Gl. submaxillaris in gross appearance is a small opalescent organ lying near the angle of the mandible covered by the developing platysma and fascia. At this stage it is not situated in a fossa, nor is it jammed up beneath the mandible. From the earliest period that it can be distinctly seen with the naked eye it is reniform in shape and perfectly symmetrical;

^ Flint : ^lonograph on the Adrenal. Contributions to the Science of Medicine, dedicated to Dr. William H. Welch by his Pupils. Johns Hopkins Hospital Reports, Vol. ix, Baltimore, 1900.

Joseph Marshall Flint


the vessels and ducts enter the gland at the liilus. At this stage in its development the organ is encapsulated.

Before the duct of the human gland penetrates the hilus of the organ, it is often joined by a small duct, either from the aberrant lobes which so frequently occur or from the anterior prolongation of the

Fig. 1. — CeUoidin corrosion of the ducts of the human snhmaxillary gland. Mao;nifled 4 diameters. Tbe Ductus submaxillaris is sliown as tlie main trunk in tliis tree, giving ofi' the primary branclies just witliin tlie boundaries of tlie gland wliicli are here roughly marked out by the terminal twigs. The secondary divisions are the interlobular ducts. These radiate from the central to the peripheral portion of the gland. The secondary branches of the interlobular ducts form the sublobular system. These divide once or twice and at this point the injection mass has usually stopped, although in a few places it has penetrated into the lobular ducts. The interlobular ducts may divide into one or two larger branches before exhausting themselves in the sublobular system. A, Ductus submaxillaris; iJ, primary ducts; C, interlobular ducts; i>, sublobiilar ducts.

gland which extends with the duct between the M. hyoglossus and mylohyoid. The corrosions by means of which the ducts are studied look remarkably like miniature representations of certain species of trees,

27G The Ducts of the Human Submaxillary Gland

especially the California live oak. That this parallel is not fanciful can be shown by a glance at a corroded preparation of the human submaxillary, where Wharton's duct represents the trunk, the interlobular ducts the branches, the intralobular ducts the twigs, and the alveolar ampullae the foliage. AVhen the injections are incomplete (Fig. 1) they look like the naked limbs of the oak, but if the mass has passed into the alveoli the corrosion resembles that tree in full foliage. In the corrosion preparations the form of the gland is preserved by the tree as a whole, and these naturally vary in the same wide limits noted in the gross relations of the organ. When aberrant lobes or prolongations are present their ducts nsnally look like branches arising from the trunk of a tree some distance below the nsual branching zone. The size of these portions varies a good deal, but in general they may be said to correspond to that part of the gland which is drained by a duct of the first order.

The submaxillary duct and its ramifications may be classified in the following general scheme, each subdivision representing one of its main divisions, which has, in general, fairly definite relations to the glandular units:

1. Ductus submaxillaris.

2. Primary ducts.

3. Interlobular ducts.

4. Sublobular ducts.

5. Lobular ducts.

6. Intralobular ducts. (Salivary tubes of Pfiiiger.)

7. Intercalary ducts.

8. Alveolar ampnlls.

At the hilus there is a considerable amount of connective tissue through which the duct penetrates as it enters the gland. In most human submaxillaries the duct divides shortly after entering the hilus; in pigs, apparently, it always does. It is not uncommon, however, to observe in human glands instances where the main duct preserves its identity, penetrating directly through the substance of the gland and exhausting itself by manifold lateral branching instead of dividing into several chief primary divisions just after entering the hilus.

It is somewhat difficult to obtain the diameter of the duct between, the hilus and papilla in corroded specimens owing to the nature of the material used since we employed for this purpose the glands removed from bodies in the dissecting room. The walls of the ducts had lost their tonicity and this, together with shrinkage of the celloidin

Joseph Marshall Flint 277

during the digestion, rendered the corrosions unreliable as a means of determining accurately the caliber of the ducts. These data are naturally best obtained by direct measurements of the distended duct in fresh subjects. In a general way, however, the relations in size are well preserved, although one would hesitate to apply methods of accurate mensuration to them. Of course the ducts in all parts of the gland are under the same general conditions so that the effect of shrinkage in one part would be about commensurate with that in another. And even while we can assume that this method gives a general idea of the relative size of these structures, under no circumstances, however, would we be justified in drawing conclusions from material of this nature as to their exact caliber in life.

In general the method of branching appears to be dichotomous, although often unequally so. The diameter of the two branches after a division is usually unequal, a fact which is especially true of the larger divisions. The rule of dichotomy holds nevertheless throughout the entire secretory system, both intra- and extralobular, with the single exception of the intercalary ducts where three or even four ducts are often given off at a single node. The ultimate alveolar ampullge, likewise, violate this law since three, four, or five of them always terminate the secretory system (Fig. 3).

The commonest distribution of the ducts is represented in Fig. 1, where the primary branches or ducts of the first order spread out irregularly from a short and twisted trunk radiating in various directions from the hilus. Since the Glandula submaxillaris is about three times as long as it is thick, the branching must be less in the plane of lesser than in the one of greater dimension. Except at the hilus the ducts run, in general, as far away from the capsule as the anatomical conditions which require the drainage of the entire organ will permit. In the human gland the primary ducts do not pass alternately to one and then the other side of the organ, as they do in embryo pigs, but arise rather irregularly from the main trunk. They correspond, however, to the primary divisions of the ducts in embryo pigs and if they had preserved the same regularity of distribution observed in the embryo they might perhaps be justly called lobar ducts. Owing, however, to the mechanics of development which crowd the gland into the small angle between the mandible and adjacent muscles the organ becomes distorted and its different portions have unequal opportunities for growth. Apparently these primary ducts have the same general caliber, although it is not uncommon to observe considerable variations in their diameter indicating that they drain unequal volumes of glandular 20


The Ducts of the Human Subniaxinarv Ghind

substance. Their number is not constant but varies in different glands between three and six. In the cases observed by the author there have been, as a rule, three ducts of the first order.

Fig. 2. — Celloidiu corrosion of an interlobular duct. Magnitied 12 diameters. The interlobular duct is shown taking a rather tortuous course and giving ofif siiblobular ducts of the first and second order. From these the lobular ducts are derived and can be easily seen together with the larger portion of the intralobular system. The lobular ducts in proportion to their diameters appear rather long. C, interlobular duct; i>, sublobular duct ; ^, lobular duct ; i^, intralobular duct.

From these main divisions arise the ducts of the second order which are usually termed the interlobular ducts. They are of large caliber, ramify extensively, and run for a considerable distance before giving

Joseph Marshall Flint


off the indivicliial branches. There is often considerable tortuosity observed in their course (Fig. 2). They run between the lobules embedded in the thick fasciculated connective tissue of the interlobular spaces and are accompanied by the vasa comites. From these occasional lobular ducts are derived. As a rule, however, they break up into the sublobular ducts which leave the interlobular ducts at sharp angles and ramify among the lobules. They are called sublobular because it is from them or their chief divisions that the great majority of lobular ducts are derived. The latter are proportionately longer than ducts in other parts of the system and pass Anthout dividing through the hilus of the lobule to ramify in the substance of the lobule itself. The position of the lobular ducts in corrosions can be identified by comparing them Avith the ducts of the same nature in digested preparations and sections of injected glands, the size of the ducts as well as their course corresponding perfectly in preparations made by both methods. When viewed under the stereoscopic microscope the lobular ducts ramify through three or four divisions which often follow in such close succession that the general rule of dichotomy seems to be violated, the case, for two complete trunks can always Careful study, however, shows that this is not be found after a division has taken ■ place although tli^y may occur very close together. The division is rapid so that the terminal

ducts are thoroughly distributed throughout the lobule. These intralobular duets which are synonymous with the salivary tubes of Pfluger, pass towards the center of the lobules and then radiate towards the periphery without ever quite reaching it, owing to the layers of acini which are interposed between them and the limiting membrane.

When the terminal branches of the intralobular ducts are reached the law of dichotomy is often violated; branches occur more frequently and more abru|)tly, three or four sometimes arising at the same level. These divisions are the intracalary ducts which are usually about onethird the diameter of the terminal intralobular ducts in injected preparations. They run at obtuse angles from the ducts from which they spring. These intercalary ducts are of variable length and often

Fig. 3. Celloidin corrosion of terminal ducts and alveoJar amimUa:. Magnified about 115 diameters- The main trunk in this preparation represents the end of one of the intralobular ducts which exhausts Itself In giving oCC the intercalary branches. These may be divided once or twice and then terminate in the alveolar ampull;e which look like little o\oid or pear-shaped ends of the corrosions.

J'— intralobular duct.

G— intercalary duct.

If— alveolar ampulla?.

280 The Ducts of the Human Submaxillary Gland

branch, although they not infrequently end in ampullae without giving rise to a single vessel of a similar nature, especially in the mucous parts of the gland.

At the ends of the intercalary ducts are the ampulla of the alveoli in which they terminate. These are surrounded by the secreting epithelium of the alveolus and represent moulds of the spaces into which the secretion is poured from the cells before it passes into the intercalary ducts. They have constricted necks marking the termination of the ducts and the end of this portion of the secreting system. Beyond the constriction their greatest diameter may be twice as large as the duct from which they spring. In corrosions they (Fig. 3) appear like ovoid knob-like endings to the intercalary ducts occurring in groups or clusters. As a rule they are slightly longer than they are wide, occasional ampullas, however, are much longer than others, showing that they must have been derived from longer alveoli. In Fig- 3 the two apical ampnllse represent alveoli of this nature. Apparently the number of these structures arising from an intercalary duct varies between three and six, four perhaps representing the average number. This means, of course, that four alveoli, on an average, empty into each of the termini of the intercalary ducts. Wliether they represent primary reservoirs for the storage of the products of glandular metabolism before they are emptied into the ducts it is as yet impossible to say.

In the course of development of the submaxillary gland the growing ducts, as we have already seen, are accompanied by blood-vessels which maintain thronghout life this close and intimate association. Since blood-vessels follow in general certain laws of ramification, each trunk of the same size in an organ tending to give off an equal number of branches, it is not unreasonable to assume that the ducts may perhaps obey some similar law. Blood-vessels, of course, are not in stable equilibrium but are continually subjected to progressive and regressive changes which depend upon certain well-known laws.' The caliber of the vessel, for example, depends on the velocity of the current within it and this, in turn, depends partly on the nature and number of its branches. So far as we know the cross-section of the ducts is not the resultant of the action of any mechanical factors like those influencing the progressive and regressive changes in vessels, although it is by no means certain that some such mechanical control is not exerted. But even while it is true that there is a general tendency for ducts of the

Thoma's Uutersnclmne^en iiber die Histogenese und Histomecbanik des Gefasssystems. Stuttgart, 1893.

Joseph Marshall Flint 281

same size to give rise to the same number of branches, this is by no means so definite and well marked as it is in the case of blood-vessels. In the submaxillary gland the following general quantitative relations are found in the successive ramifications of the ducts.

The Ductus Submaxillaris divides into 3 Primary Ducts which divide into 18 Interlobular Ducts Avhich divide into 96 Sublobular Ducts which divide into

1500 Lobular Ducts.

Obviously a table of this nature must be interpreted liberally inasmuch as it indicates only the average scheme of division in a system which varies within wide limits. As an absolute standard it is worthless, its chief service being to indicate the general plan of ramification of the ducts, estimated from corrosion preparations of several glands. Since the lobules are always drained by a single duct we find from the above table that there must be approximately 1500 lobules in the entire submaxillary gland.

In the corrosions one is often struck by an apparent similarity between the ducts of the lobule. and the ducts of the gland as a Avhole, the former appearing much like a miniature reproduction of the latter. When attention is called to this analogy it becomes immediately patent and may, indeed, be extended to many other features of the gland as we shall have occasion to show later. The duct enters the gland at the hilus; the lobular duct passes into the lobule through a similar portal. There is but one submaxillary duct to each gland; there is likewise but one lobular duct to each lobule. In the gland the ducts ramify through the central portion without ever reaching the capsule, keeping, indeed, as far away from it as the anatomical conditions which require the drainage of the whole gland will permit. In the lobule the intralobular ducts' take the same course with reference to the Memb'rana limitans and and the drainage of the lobular alveoli. This analogy may be of more interest than importance. Its explanation affords no difficulty since the lobular and intralobular duets are formed by the same laws of growth and mechanics of development which give rise to the larger ducts of the gland as a whole.

The Ducts in Sections and Digested Pkeparations.

In preparations made by the method of piece digestion which have been cleared by glycerine, xyol or creosote, the form of the lobule, the frame-work, and particularly the distribution of the interlobular and


The Ducts of the Human SuhmaxiUarv Gh^nd

intraloljular ducts, can be easily seen. The rchitions of the ducts to these structures are likewise sharply defined so that one obtains by the use of the stereoscopic microscope the relations of the vascular and secretory units to the frame-work and the structures of the gland. In these specimens the interlobular septa and their relation to the capsule can be easily determined. The larger ducts and vessels in the interlobular septa are readily folloAved, owing to the difference in ditfrac

'FiG. 4 — Piece digestion of doff s submaxillary. Magnified 10 diameters. This specimen shows the sui^lobular interspaces and the passage of lobnlar ducts and connective tissue from the interspace into the lobule through its hilus. The relation of the membrana limitans to other lobules is shown as clearly in this specimen as in figure 8. The course of the intralobular ducts is plain as they pass through the fine supporting meshwork formed by the basement membranes of the alveoli. J., Sublobular interspace with artery, duct, and veins; i)/, Membrana limitans; C, Capsule.

tion between them and the frame-work of other portions of the organ. The ducts, vessels, and septa appear in these specimens, Avhen viewed by transmitted light, considerably darker than the fine lobular frameAvork in which they run and they can be easily distinguished from each other by their size. The ducts are considerably larger than either of the vasa comites which run in the same interspace. Embracing the

Joseph Marshall Flint 283

group of vessels are fine fasciculated bands of connectiA'e tissue which form the interlobular spaces. These can be made out in digested specimens both by the position of the vessels and the darker areas which they produce as they pass between the lobules. Fig. -i is a representation of the submaxillary of a dog prepared by this method. The ducts and vessels lie in a sublobular interspace embraced by the connective tissue which is seen in cross-section at the edge of the block of tissue. The larger duct in this space runs for only a short distance before entering the lobules and is, therefore, of the order of sublobular ducts. The lobular ducts which are given off from this branch pass through the hilus of the lobules carrying with them considerable connective tissue derived from the interspace from which they come (Figs. 4 and 5). After penetrating the lobule they run to the center of that structure and then begin to radiate towards its periphery. The intralobular ducts can be distinguished from the blood-vessels by their caliber and the delicacy of the walls. Isolated terminal branches are seen towards the perijDhery of the lobule, but in no instance does a duct ever seem to reach the limiting membrane, a layer of one or two alveoli always intervening. The frame-work within the lobule and its relation to the ducts is exquisitely shown in these preparations; the strands of connective tissue entering at the hilus, the fine delicate limiting membrane embracing it, and the basement membranes of the alveoli are all patent, the latter appearing like a delicate web throughout the whole lobule. This is firmly attached to the limiting membrane on the one hand Avhere it forms a sort of mosaic, and to the Avails of the ducts and vessels on the other, so that the support of these structures is given by the alveolar frame-Avork, and they are, as it Avere, swung in the meshAvork of delicate reticalnted basement membranes.

In ordinary sections, the Ductus submaxillaris is lined by a double layer of epithelial cells, the inner of AA'hich is irregularly columnar and has oval nuclei which stain deeply and shoAV distinct gatherings of chromatin substance upon the linin filaments. These cells interdigitate with those of the outer layer which are more conical and polyhedral in shape, and are, as a rule, considerably smaller. The nuclei of the latter are smaller, somewhat more deeply stained and often more vesicular in shape. The tAvo layers of epithelial cells rest upon the basement membrane of the duct which is immediately embraced by the fasciculated intertAAdning strands of AA'hite fibrous tissue and reticuhmi. Immediately external to the epithelial layer of basement membrane is a dense meshwork of elastic fibres which interlace Avith the fibres of reticulum and white fibrous tissue. The few smooth muscle fibres described by von

284 The Ducts of the Human Submaxillary Gland

Kolliker can be seen in specimens stained by Van Gieson's method,, and the lumina of the rich plexus of arterioles, venules and capillarie? that surround the duct are often seen in cross-section. Ducts of the first order present no characteristic differences from those observed in the Ductus submaxillaris, except that the connective tissue which em

■'"i:4'M ' " l'-^ '■ .. " ^yf-"'--'.'fi-.i\.-'-i^%.


15. ■•iff W'^Hvi^ 'i^'-;. *;;

Fig. 5. — Sections of a Tmri\<m siibmaxiUari/ gland stained by Hensons modiflcation of Van Gieson^s stain. Magnified about 85 diameters. This section shpws one of the interlobular spaces with the duct and its vasa comites. Adjacent lobules show the mucous and serous portions of the gland. D, Interlobular duct ; T", Interlobular vein; 31, Mucous alveoli; A, Interlobular artery.

braces them is far richer owing to the fact that it now carries not only the excretory channels and the blood-vessels of the organ, but, in addition, forms the main interlobular support of the gland as a whole. This connective tissue is continuous with that which enters the gland at the hilus and forms the main support of the glandular lobules. The

Joseph Marshall Flint


interlobular spaces in the submaxillary gland may be compared to those in the liver, except that in the case of the former we have usually two veins accompanying the duct instead of the single branch of the portal vein which we are accustomed to see in the liver. The interlobular

Fig. 6. — Slide digestion after SpaltchoU. Magnified about 85 diameters. The* section is the one just follovving that sliown iu figure 5. All of the cells have been removed from the specimen which shows fasciculi in the interlobular spaces and the basement membranes about the alveoli. It is at once apparent that without the control specimen it would be impossible to distinguish the sections of the intralobular ducts from the alveoli. The basement membranes of both structures have practically the same arrangement. />, Interlobular duct ; .1, Interlobular artery ; F, Interlobular vein; J/, Mucous alveoli.

ducts (Fig. 5) like the other main channels are lined by two layers of epithelial cells which possess all the chief characteristics of those we have just described in ducts of a lower order. They also rest on the basement membranes. In preparations that have been digested on a

386 The Ducts of the Human Submaxinary Gkind

slide (Fig. 6) this basement membrane can be distinguished at the inner edge of the lumen of the duct where it appears as a delicate irregular line. The slight clear area just outside of the basement membrane is caused by the spaces left by the elastic tissue, the fibres of which have been entirelj dissolved from the specimens by the action of the enzyme. The connective tissue embracing the duct is now distinctly fasciculated and arranged so that its bundles seem, at the same time, to give the greatest strength and elasticity to that part of the duct. Numerous connective tissne corpuscles, endothelial cells lining the lymph spaces and capillaries, can be seen in the frame-work just about the interlobnlar ducts, the vasa comites cut in cross-section are also evident. Specimens stained with Weigert's elastic tissue method (Fig. 7) show external to the basement membrane, a dense, deeplystaining, elastic membrane, composed of interlacing elastic, fibres which entirely embraces the duct and appears, in these specimens, like an irregular black line *just external to the epithelium. ISTumerous elastic fibres having a concentric lamellar arrangement are found outside of the main elastic membrane. Some fibres connect the cliiferent concentric elastic lamellas, while others, variously arranged, appear to be extensively distributed throughout the entire interspace. Ducts of the next higher order, namely the sublobular ducts (Figs. 4 and 8), are likewise embraced by the coiniective tissue of the sublobular spaces, but this is now greatly diminished in amount. The sublobular ducts like those of the lower orders are lined by a double layer of epithelial cells. The cells of the inner columnar layer are much lower than those of the corresponding layer of interlobular ducts or ducts of the first order. The nuclei are more nearly spherical, the cytoplasm is somewhat diminished in quantity and appears slightly more granular. These cells are likewise slightly smaller and more compact than those of the corresponding layer of the larger ducts, the basement membranes are clearly marked and the connective tissue has the same characteristic fasciculated appearance noted in the larger interspaces, except that the fasciculi are much smaller and more compactly arranged. Connective tissue cells, endothelial cells and blood-vessels are also found in these spaces bearing ostensibly the same relation to the ducts and connective tissue which we have observed about the larger branches.

The elastica of the sublobular ducts is very well marked, forming a thick mesh-work of anastomosing and interlacing fibrils lying just beneath the membrana propria. As in the larger ducts there is the same concentric arrangement of the elastic lamella^, the latter alternating Avith layers made of white fibrous tissue and reticulum with numerous

Joseph Marsliall Flint


coarse elastic fibres running in between the elastic tissue bundles. In the meshes of the elastica are found numerous bundles of ordinary fibrous tissue so that in digested specimens the position of the elastica,


Fig. 7. — Section preceding the one sliown infifjnre5. — Stained hy a modified Weigerf ft elastic stain. Magnified about 8.5 diameters. The elastic membrane, tlie concentric lamellne about tlie interlobular duct are clearly shown together with the elastic fibres scattered throughout the interlobular space. The characteristic arrangement of the fibres about the blood-vessels can also be noted. In comparing this figure with the preceding one the mucous alveoli are seen to be surrounded by a delicate elastic membrane while only occasional fibrils are found about either the seious alveoli or the intralobular ducts. 7), Intralobular duct ; T' Intralobular vein ; A, Intralobular artery; J/, Mucous alveoli.

even though it has been dissolved by the enzymes, is indicated by the fact that the frame-work is more open at the points previously occupied by the elastic fibres.


The Ducts of the Human Subuiaxillarv Gland


As the duct enters the hdus of the lobule (Fig. 8) a considerable portion of the sublobular connective tissue is carried in with it, a relation between the lobular duct and lobule similar to that observed between the Ductus submaxillaris and the gland as a whole. The connective tissue which enters the lobule at this point, is continuous with that of the sublobular space from which it springs and possesses ostensibly the same characteristics and relations. It may be observed that the spaces containing the sublobular ducts are the points of origin of several lobules which may be seen in sections and piece digestions as arising from these centers (Figs. 4 and 8). That is to say, the hilus of the lobule is attached at these points and this intimate association with the sublobular interspaces is the only firm point of union between the lobules and the glandular frame-work, inasmuch as the fibrils connecting adjacent limiting membranes are, as a rule, too scant and delicate to have an extensive supporting function (Figs. 5 and 8). This is a point of considerable importance when the origin of the lobule in the development of the gland is considered. As soon as the duct is within the lobule the same relations observed in corrosions and digestions are seen in ordinary sections, namely that the ducts which are cut in various directions, transversely, longitudinally and obliquely, are observed to lie in the central portions of the lobule away from the membrana limitans. Indeed, it is only very rarely that sections of the ducts are seen nearer the perilobular membranes (Fig. 8) than the


■ O





f: 3-L. fee

Frr;. S.—Lohulc of the humaii suhm axillary gland, showiwj the hUiis and the lobular ducts. Magnified about 85 diameters. Same stain as Fiy. 5. The attachment of the lobule to the sublobular interspace is clearly shown and the arrangement of the connective tissue as it enters the lobuU' with the lobular duct, is evident, 'i'he membrana limitans has very few connections with those of the adjacent lobules. the main attachmeut of the lobule being- the jKirtion at the hilus. The distribution of the intralobular ducts in the central portion of the lobu es away fiora the membrana limitans is well represented. JL, Sublobular duct ; B, Sublobular interspace ; M. Membrana limitans; ly, Lobular duct at hilus of lobule; /, Intralobular duct.

Joseph Marshall Flint 289

width of two alveoli. Sometimes they may approach as near as one alveolus but an instance of a duct lying adjacent to the limiting membrane is almost impossible to find, except at the hilus, where the lobular duct enters the lobule. Once in the lobule the duct loses its double layer of epithelium and is lined from this point with a single layer of short columnar or cubical cells which are characteristic of the ducts in this region. These intralobular ducts are known throughout the literature as the " salivary tubes of Pfluger " who believed that they were concerned in the metabolic activities of the gland and took an active part in the phenomena of secretion. These cells have oval or vesicular nuclei which are situated about the center of the cells. As a rule they take the stain somewhat more deeply than the nuclei of the epithelium in the extralobular ducts. The portion of the cell towards the lumen of the duct is composed of granular cytoplasm which stains deeply with the ordinary acid contrast dyes, such as congo red, eosin, or the picric acid element of the Van Gieson stain. The pole of the cell external to the nucleus shows a characteristic appearance of longitudinal striations which run from the central portion just below the nucleus to the end of the cell near the basement membrane. In cells that have been isolated from the ducts the portion of the cytoplasm occupied by these striations splits into little staves which often spread out much like the sticks of a fan. Protoplasmic bridges have been described running between the individual filaments composing these striations.

As we have seen from the corrosions, the intercalary ducts form the termination of the intralobular ducts and connect them with the alveoli. They are seen readily in sections where they appear when undistended only about one-third of the diameter of the intralobular ducts. The epithelium of these structures changes suddenly from the striated cubical cells and is composed of rather long, flattened epithelium cells with their major axis running parallel to the axis of the duct. The nuclei are elongated, less deeply staining than the nuclei of the cells in ducts of the next lower order. The cytoplasm is neither so rich in quantity nor does it have the same affinity for the acid dyes that Ave have observed in the cells of' the intralobular ducts. The boundaries of the cells, mxOreover. are somewhat obscured. When cut in cross-section the lining cells of these ducts appear as flattened cuboidal epithelial elements. There is little elastic tissue about either the •lobular or intralol)ular or intercalary ducts, only an occasional fibril can be marie out surrounding them. The regular elastic membranes described in the extralobular system cease shortly after the ducts become intralobular. Sometimes, however, they may Ite observed following the



290 The Ducts of the Human Submaxillary Gland

lobular ducts for some little distance into the lobule, but these cases are exceptional. Both the interlobular and intercalary ducts are provided with basement membranes which differ so little from the membranas proprias of the acini that it is usually necessary to orient them in digested specimens in order to distinguish ducts from alveoli (Fig. 6). These basement membranes consist of a delicate network of interlacing fibrils of reticulum which appear in sections cut tangentially to the membrane as a cross-hatch or mesh-work of interlacing fibrils which are only visible with the immersion lens. When viewed with the lower powers the membrana propria usually appears loractically homogeneous.

At the point of termination of f the intercalary ducts- a slight

'A constriction is noted, in corro ^ sions, just as they widen into

/ , ^ «; the ampulla. In sections the

flattened epithelium at this point changes abruptly into the p »Y^ "'^ regular epithelium of the alveo ■ \%. • . . * lus. In sections cut in the right

^t.!j*J^ plane it is possible not only to

see the intercalary duct termi Fig. 9. Terminal intralobular duct, intercalary natinff in the alveoli but to make ciuct, and ^roup of mucous alvedli sliownig' the c'

Sl^'^oi^^T,*^^^?*^^^^*-. ^"'^(^'\^"^iV'='^*l'='7'o^}y"^- out the little ovoid spaces form Stained by Henson s method. Maynitied 300 dia- -i^

^^^vf^v- .• * +V, *• • 1, +1 * +1, ins: the ampulla as well (Fig.

The direction of the section is such that the f-^ i \ o

intralobular duct is cut In cross section and the 9)_ ^^ ^ -^^q hoWCVer, the intercalary duct tang-entiallj' so that one does not ' '

see its lumen. Inasmuch as the alveoli are not \m\QX borders of the CClls of collapsed, the alveolar ampullae are distinctly

^- «- intralobular duct. ^""^^ alveolar epithelium are in

c-ah*eoiar'a'^mpuiia close approximation so that in

the collapsed state of the alveolus only a small chink is left between them. About the serous alveoli there are only a few occasional elastic fibres; about the mucous alveoli, however, these fibres are numerous, as has been shown by Livini.' Their nature and relations, however, Livini did not describe. It appears that these fibres, which under the lower power of the lens look homogeneous, are in reality very delicate elastic membranes made up of an intertwining and interlacing mesh-work of fibres which have a reticulated appearance similar to that of the regular membrana propria. This elastic membrane appears to lie outside of the regular membrana propria of the mucous alveoli. As Livini pointed

8 Livini : Monitore Zoologico Italiano, vol. x, 1S99.

Joseph Marshall Flint 291

out, the thick, ropy, tenacious secretion of the mucous alveoli is partly expelled from the alveolus into the ducts by the assistance of the mechanical action of this elastic membrane. He did not suggest, however, the interesting corollary that, in the secretion of this substance, the elastic tension of this same mebrane must be overcome, which means that secretion in the mucous alveoli must at least be accomplished under a sufficient jjressure to overcome this elastic tension. It is, of course, well known that secretion takes place under a pressure higher than that of the blood, and this, together with the recent work which seems to indicate that the osmotic pressure within the cell is twenty times greater than the blood pressure, would explain how the stretching of this elastic membrane could be easily accomplished during the activity of the glandular cells.

There are several characteristic staining reactions of the duct epithelium which can be observed with more or less distinctness from the Ductus submaxillaris to the alveoli. The duct cells take the ordinary contrast stains deeply. They exhibit especially a peculiar affinity for congo red. x\ccordingly as in the case of demilunes of Gianuzzi, congo red may almost be considered as the special selective stain for the duct epithelium. When elastic tissue preparations are made and contrasted with picric acid the epithelial cells of both intra- and extralobular ducts take a rather yellowish-green tint, while the rest of the epithelium is ouly a pale yellow (Fig. 7). In Van Gieson preparations or modifications of this method the duct epithelium stains a pale yellow while the serous alveoli are a deep purple and the mucous alveoli stain a dark blue.

Discussion' of the Literature.

Comparatively little work has been done upon the ducts of the salivary glands alone, most of the research appearing as collateral study in course of work upon other portions of the organs. Yon KoUiker ' states that the ducts of the salivary glands are made up of a single layer of cylindrical epithelium which is surrounded by connective tissue and some elastic fibres. Those about the D. submaxillaris according to Kolliker are arranged in the form of a double membrane. As we have seen, however, there is just one well-marked elastic membrane located external to the membrana propria and several concentric, less regularly arranged lamellae situated external to the regular elastic tunic. It was one of these, no doubt, which von Kolliker believed was the second elastic sheath. He states, moreover, that this double arrangement of

9 Kolliker: Gewebelelire. Bd. ii, Leipzia:, 1852.

293 The Ducts of the Human Submaxillary Gland

the elastic fibres was limited solely to the main duct, whereas by means of improved elastic tissue stains we can show that these concentrically arranged elastic fibrils embrace ducts of all orders as high as those which drain the lobules.

According to the Tobiens '" the ducts of the glands in general consist of connective tissue. Those of the salivary glands in addition possess muscle fibres, which are arranged in an outer longitudinal and an inner circular layer. All the ducts of man, horse, dog, and cat have, according to this investigator, elastic fibres which vary inversely with the amount of muscle present. The arrangement of the fibres is inconstant, but there is usually an inner circular layer, while in man spirally arranged fibrils situated outside of this layer can occasionally be found. The results of Tobiens' work, however, has never been confirmed.

Krause " describes the ducts as consisting of fine-meshed connective tissue with numerous longitudinal or transversely-running elastic fibres. With the exception of Wharton's duct, muscle fibres do not occur in the walls of the submaxillary ducts. Previous to the work of Henle ^^ the epithelium of the Ductus submaxillaris has always been described with a single layer of epithelium. He states definitely, however, that the epithelial lining of Wharton's duct is made up of a double row of cells. This observation has now been shown to be true of all the ducts of the extralobular system as well.

Von Ebner " supports the work of Pfliiger on the structure and nature of the salivary tubes and describes, for the first time, the intercalary ducts. These, he states, are clothed by cubical epithelium and form that portion of the excretory system between the alveoli and the salivary tubes of Pfliiger.

This fact was emphasized by Klein " and Heidenhain." Klein described the epithelium of the ducts of the human submaxillary as consisting of an inner layer of cylindrical cells with long nuclei and a deeper layer of small cells with oval nuclei. In his later paper Klein goes extensivel}^ into the origin and relation of the ducts. Among other things he states that the amount of connective tissue supporting

"Tobieus: De slanclularum ductibus efferentibus ratione imprimis habita te; ae miiscularis. Inaiig. Diss. Dorpat, 1853. Cited by Oppel. 11 Krause: Zeit. f. rat. Med. Bd. 31, 1864. '■^ Henle: Eingeweidelehre, 1871. 13 Von Ebner: Arch. f. milv. Anat., Bd. VIII, 1872. " Klein: Quar. Jour, of Mic. Science, N. S., vol. XIX, 1879.

Klein: Quar. Jour, of Mic. Science,, vol. XXII, 1882. '5 Heidenhain : Hermann's Handbuch d. Physiologic, Bd. V, 1880.

Joseph Marshall Mint 293

the interlobular ducts and vessels is subject to considerable variation in different glands, but in all instances this connective tissue is proportionate to that penetrating into the interior of the lobules with the chief ducts and vessels. In sections of the submaxillary of man the connective tissue around the larger ducts and vessels appears to be of the same nature as in the organs where the fibrous tissue is arranged in continuous and compact masses, that is to say groups, bundles, or trabeculge of fibrous tissue running in various directions are seen cut at various angles. Between these fasciculi are the interfascicular spaces more or less dilated according to the method of hardening. Among the connective tissue fibrils Klein found branched cells, plasma cells of Waldeyer, and some Mastzellen of Ehrlich. The important point is that the groups or bundles are arranged into definite plates which vary greatly in breadth and thickness. These Klein calls the fasicle plates, each of which is composed of a number of fasciculi or bundles of connective tissue fibrils which are continued, into the lobule in company with the lobular ducts. The interlobular ducts in most glands, according to Klein, are lined by a double layer of cells, the inner of which are cylindrical and the outer, next to the membrana propria, conical. The cytoplasm of these cells shows occasionally a tendency to fibrillation similar to the striations observed by Henle and Pfiiiger in the intralobular ducts. This observation, however, has not been repeated by other investigators nor is supported by the preparations used in this study. The intralobular ducts are lined by a single layer of columnar cells, showing the characteristic fibrillations which are joined by short lateral branchlets, and, therefore, converted into reticulum. Distinct from these are the spindle-shaped or staff-shaped cells which are in communication with the membrana propria and extend from this structure up between the epithelial cells, and in some cases, form a sort of inner membrane within the lumen. Klein states that these cells are particularly well marked in the parotid gland of guinea-pigs. Xo other investigator, however, has described their existence nor have they been found in the ducts of the human submaxillary. As the intralobular ducts pass over into the intercalary portion there is a distinct shorter portion which Klein calls the neck. This is characterized by the lumen and the whole breadth of the salivary tube becoming here suddenly smaller. In the submaxillary of the pig Klein says there is no intercalary portion, in the submaxillary of man he finds in the serous portions a short neck passing over into a long, fine, intermediary duct, while in the mucous parts the neck terminates directly in the alveoli.


294 The Ducts of the Human Submaxillary Gland

Kultschultzky "■' describes in the epithelium of the intralobular ducts of the submaxillary of the hedge-hog three distinct cytoplasmic zones, an inner mucous zone, a protoplasmic zone, and a rodded zone next to the membrana propria. In the human gland three zones can be distinctly seen, but whether the deeply-staining portion adjacent to the lumen is due to a mucous zone has not yet been definitely settled.

Toldt" divided the excretory system into three portions, branches extending from the hilus of the gland to the points where they enter the lobule, branches given off within the lobule, and finally the so-called intercalary ducts connecting the alveoli with Pfliiger's salivary tubes. These ducts, according to Toldt, do not have the same arrangement in all glands and may even vary in the mucous and serous alveoli of the same gland. 'Toldt first called the attention to the fact that the nature of the division of the ducts is dichotomous and that this plan occurs both within and without the lobule.

According to Krause, the height of the epithelium depends on the diameter of the duct, the one varying directly with the other. He shows also in one of the figures, viz., Fig. 7, an ampulla within the alveolus but does not seem to recognize its importance as a definite part in the secretory system. In the schema given in Fig. 10, Krause also represents long serous alveoli given off from the intercalary ducts; the regularity of the ovoid ampullae found in corrosion preparations shows that the alveoli of both mucous and serous portions possesses also this same general shape, with perhaps a more marked constriction at the end where they rise from the intercalary ducts. This fact is also emphasized by the work of Maziarski/" who has used in two splendid researches on the classification and structure of different glands, Born's wax-plate method for the reconstruction of their terminal ducts and alveoli. Among other glands, both mucous and serous portions of the submaxillary were studied by this investigator. The results show that the salivary tubes or intralobular ducts in the serous parts of the gland break up after a short course into the intercalary ducts. These subdivide again until they terminate finally in the alveoli. The alveoli are slightly oval or pear-shaped and look like a bimch of grapes hanging on a stem. In the mucous portions of the gland the intralobular ducts seem larger than the serous parts. The intercalary portion which is also

"5 Kultschultzky : Zeit. f. Wiss. Zool., XLI, 1885. "Toldt: Gewebelehre, Stuttgart, 1888.

18 Krause : Arch. f. Mik. Anat., Bd. XLV, 189.5. Bd. XLIX, 1897. 19 Maziarski : Bull. Internat. de I'Acad. d. Scien. de Cracovie, 1900. Anat. Hefte, Bd. XVIII, Heft I, 1901.

Josepli Marshall Flint 295

smaller forms, according to Maziarski, the duct for the whole group of alveoli.

If one were to take a piece of the corrosion, as for example, Fig. 3, and clothe different portions with the epithelium which they normally possess, a picture would be obtained in this way almost identical with that given by Maziarski, except that owing to the regular distension of the system with the injection mass the form in this case would be somewhat more regular than that observed in Maziarski's reconstruction. The latter did not recognize the ampullse within the alveoli as they were collapsed by the fixation of the tissue, and therefore, are not rendered patent except, perhaps, in exceptional cases.

In conclusion, I wish to express my great indebtedness to Dr. Eevell, of the Department of Anatomy of the University of Chicago, for the drawings of the corrosions.



S. W. VVILLISTON, M. D., Pii. D.

The JJniversit]] of Kansas.

With 1 Text Figure.

The genus Nyctodadylus was proposed by Marsh, in 187G, for a pterodactyl from the Niobrara cretaceons of Kansas. Tliough very inadequately described, the single distinctive character given by him — the non-articular distal extremity of the scupnla — permitted its recognition with certainty, and, in 1892,' I gave additional characters placing the genus on a secure foundation. A specimen of this genus, of unusual perfection, recently collected by my assistant, Mr. H. T. Martin, in his usual skilful manner, presents so many interesting new features that I give herewith a brief description of its more important characters in advance of a monographic study of the gToup, which I hope to find time to undertake soon. The specimen is very nearly complete, lacking only the two distal phalanges of the wing finger in part, and many of the small bones of the digits and of the tail. The skeleton lies upon its back, with but little distortion or disarrangement of the bones; the right wing is folded across the abdomen, the neck vertebrae are partly dislocated, and the legs have been drawn a short distance away from the pelvis. The head lies obliquely to the long axis of the skeleton, with its palatal surface uppermost; and the bones of the pelvis have been separated at the sutures, lying flattened out with the sacrum in the middle. The outlines of the different parts have been, for the most part, made from tracings; that of the skull has been taken in part from a specimen of OrnUliostoma in the museum, since the skull of the specimen is too delicate to remove from the matrix; its anterior portion, however, has been examined on both sides, as also the mandible, and I do not think that the shape as given can depart much from the reality. I may further •add that the feet and small fingers have been completed from specimens of Ornitlw stoma. Because the bones of these pterodactyls are so ex ' Kansas Univ. Quart., Vol. I, p. \'l.

298 On the Skeleton of Nyctodactylns, with Restoration

ceedingly thin they have been invariably flattened ont in fossilization; the first phalange of the wing finger, the longest bone in the skeleton, has a thickness at its middle, as crushed, of less than one and a half millimeters. On account of this flattening, it is difficult to estimate accurately the real width that the bones had in the living skeleton; possibly they are represented in the drawing, for the most part, too broadly.

A brief resume of the more important osteological characters of this pterodactyl may now be given as follows:

Head long and slender, toothless; antorbital opening confluent with the nares; atlas and axis partly or entirely coossified; seven true cervical vertebra present, without free ribs, and with non-nrticular exapophyses.' Eighth vertebrae apparently ribless, much shorter than the seventh, with the posterior zygapophyses much prolonged; ninth, tenth and eleventh vertebra, that is, the second, third and fourth dorsals, coossified, and each with stout coossified ribs, or much elongated diapophyses, articulating with the sternum; fifth to ninth dorsals, inclusive, short, stout, procoelous, with elongated diapophyses; tenth, and perhaps also the ninth (which is partly concealed beneath the radius), coossified Math the sacrum; sacrum composed of six firmly fused vertebra, all imited with the ilium, and tapering much distally; caudal vertebrae amphiplatyan, probably about twelve in numlier (the first one and the three distal ones, only, so far discovered in the specimen). Ilium projecting far in front of the sacrum, narrow: ischium (or conjoined ischium and pubis) with a long, somewhat arcuated median symphysis, and with a large obturator foramen; acetabulum imperforate, situated far dorsad; prepubis (pubis?) band-like, with an anterior projection, U-shaped in life. Sternum very broad and thin, evidently deeply concave above, without keel, but with a stout presternal process ; with four costal articulations on each side, and a median, flattened, xiphisternal process. First three or four dorsal ribs stout, coossified with the vertebrae, and articulating with the sternum; posterior ribs very slender, almost threadlike, probably articulating in front with the extremities of the abdominal ribs, single headed; abdominal ribs at least four in number on each side; arranged very much as are the costal cartilages of the sixth to the tenth ribs in man, but joined in front and attached to the xiphisternal process.

2 Plienin.o-er, (Paleontographica, XLVIII, sa, 1901) objects to this term, and identifies the processes with the parapophyses. Assuming that they are morphologically identical with the real parapophyses, which is by no means proven, and is to me very doubtful, their very different position and function necessitate a distinctive name, for which I proposed that of exapophyses (Kans. Univ. Quarterly, 1896).

^^ ^



D _J > 1O < Q O I o > z

u. o





_l LU


300 On the Skeleton of Nyctodactyhis, with Eestoration

Coracoicl and scapula coossified (imperfectly so in another specimen of the same species), the former articulating by the usual saddle-shaped joint with the sternum, the latter terminating in a free, spatulate extremity, without union with the notarium. Humerus with its deltoid process very long, helmet-shaped and with a constricted neck; remaining bones of the extremities very much as they have been described in Ornithostoma.

In the restoration given herewith, in which the measurements have been made with great care by myself, one is struck with amazement at the extraordinary development of the head and wings as compared with the rest of the skeleton. While the wings gave a spread of very nearly eight feet, the body proper was less than four inches in diameter and not more than six in length, exclusive of the small tail; the pelvis is less than five-eighths of an inch in diameter at its outlet, and the entire body was smaller than one's closed hand! One wonders where sufficient surface was presented for the attachment of the strong muscles necessary for the control of the wings. When it is remembered, however, that even the largest bones of the skeleton had walls less than a millimeter in thickness, and that many of the smaller ones were almost like cylinders of writing paper, he will perceive that, notwithstanding the extraordinary development of the anterior extremities and head, the creature, when alive, must have Aveighed but little, I very much doubt whether the living animal attained a weight of five pounds. How and Avhere such creatures could have reared their young is to me inexplicable. No evidences have been found in the many specimens of these animals that have been exhumed from the Kansas chalk that they were viviparous, and from the high degree of ossification of the bones in the adult, it is quite sure that the foetus must have had a bony skeleton, and that evidences of such would have been forthcoming before now had the young really been born alive, unless, indeed, in the immature condition of marsupials. If eggs were laid, they could not have been more than a centimeter in diameter, and even if much elongated to accommodate the long bones of the wings, the newly hatched pterodactyl could hardly have been of sufficient size to have cared for itself.

A number of other interesting conclusions — or speculations — are suggested by the present specimen. The acetabulum is placed far back, nearly over the edge of the sacrum; so far back, indeed, that it would have been impossible for the knees to have met in the middle, when the thighs were flexed to a right angle. Furthermore, the femora have a peculiar mesial convexity, whereby the tibias were directed at a marked angle outward, with the thigh in the normal human position. The convexity

S. W. Williston 301

of the head of the femur, covering a little more than a third of a circle, is at right angles to the long axis of the shaft, making articulation impossible, except in a strongly abducted condition. Similar evidence is presented by the glenoid articulation of the humerus, demonstrating, I think, the improbability of an ordinary quadrupedal position in ambulation, as Seeley has restored some of the European forms. I am convinced that the thigh was rotated outward, through an angle of thirty or forty degrees, and was directed outwardly nearly in a coronal plane at an angle of thirty or forty degrees from the mesial line. I am not sure, indeed, but that the knees may have been turned at times more or less backward. The condylar surface of the femur is such that the knees could not have been flexed much, if any, more than a right angle. The tibige might easily have been brought parallel with each other, while the femora were outwardly rotated and abducted.

This normal outward rotation of the femora is also shown in an excellent specimen of the hind extremities of Ornitliostoma ingens preserved in the matrix. The heads of the femora occupy their normal relation to each other in connection with the remains of the pelvis, but both were directed outwards with the trochanters turned inwards. I may add here that in removing one of these femora for further study of its shape, I was greatly surprised to find on the under surface — the ventral— very vivid markings of the integument. Photographs of these will be given later. I may say here that there is no direct evidence of either scales or feathers, but the numerous, regularly placed patches of darker material are such as might have been produced by the skin of a bird where there are many feathers. Since we have hitherto been entirely ignorant of the covering of the body of these animals, the discovery is one of great interest. I am convinced that the integument was not a simple smooth membrane over the body, though what it really was I am not prepared to say. I expect to find further evidence, that I hope will solve the question, when the remaining bones of the specimen have been removed from the matrix.

So far, then, as the evidence of the legs goes, the animal may have stood erect upon its feet with the thighs rotated outward and tibiae far apart. Of the clawless character of the feet in these animals there can be no question. A specimen collected by me nearly ten years ago has the bones all intact and in position. The feet were not in the least prehensile.

The articulation of the humerus with the coraco-scapula was nearly perfectly saddle-shaped, with its axes nearly in the planes of the body, t'nlike the legs, there was little or no rotation of the upper extremity.

302 On the Skeleton of jSTyctodactylus, with Eestoration

either in the shoulder joint or elsewhere. This, it will be seen, must have detracted not a little from the ability to control the direction of flight by the wings, while giving greater strength to them as parachutes. The wing memhranes could never have have assumed any form, except that of an approximate plane when distended, bellied out, perhaps, like the sail of a yacht antero-posteriorly. The Joints of the wing are all ginglymoidal, unless indeed a slight lateral flexibility was possible at the closely united compact wrist, which is doul)tful; nor could the anterior or radial curvature of the phalanges be much, if any, greater than I have indicated in the restoration. Because of this lack of rotary power of the anterior extremity, I doubt not that the caudal membranous expansion in EJiamphorltynchus served as a compensatory steering organ, and the same function was subserved, in a somewhat different way, by the legs in the short-tailed forms. But there are much better reasons for supposing that the wing membranes continued to the legs or ankles of these animals. The jieculiar structure and evident j)osition of the legs would have been inexplicable under any other assumption, hut if the membrane was restricted to the sides of the body the patagial surface must have been a mere ribbon, five or six inches wide and nearly four feet long, scarcely serviceable as a wing or parachute even!

If the animals stood erect when upon the ground, with the knees rotated outward and the tibiie parallel, the wings, drooped at the side, which may have been possible, would have reached the surface at the metacarpophalangeal joint, with the phalanges trailing or partly folded; and it is possible that in such a position, partly stooping, partly creeping, the creature might have laboriously got about on land. But I do not think that they often voluntarily sought the ground for ambulation. Their home was in the air, and they rested suspended by the flexible, sharply-clawed middle fingers. The elongated zygapophyses of the first dorsal vertebra, a functional cervical, though structurally a dorsal, indicate, not a marked backward curvature of the neck at this place, but rather the possibility of a marked anterior curvature. Perhaps the neck was sufficiently flexible to permit a strong sigmoid curvature, bringing the head in a forward direction when in a prone position.

It is commonly believed that the small, slender bone articulating with the wrist and directed backward toward the shoulder — the so-called pteroid or thumb metacarpal— was for the support of the membrane in front of the elbow.

I am satisfied that this was not its function, for the simple reason, as I believe, that there was no membrane there, unless it extended on the sides of the neck broadly towards the skull! This may seem a mere

8. W. Williston 303

assumption, but there are evidences in its favor that give this idea some weight. The strongly developed deltoid process shows attachments for several muscles. One occupied the whole distal anterior face, as indicated by an oblique line running from near the distal lower extremity inward and upward. This was doubtless for the insertion of the supracoracoid muscle, the origin of which is shown by a strong tuberosity on the upper part of the coraeoid, and whose tendon was guarded in part, apparently, by a sesamoid bone found near the glenoid articulation. On the distal convex border, near its upper extremity, there is a small facet for muscular attachment, looking outward and forward in the extended position of the arm. This may have been for the attachment of the pectoralis, as Plieninger seems to believe, but of which I am very doubtful. Certainly the pectoralis must have been a very weak muscle to have terminated in so small a tendon, and the extensive surface of the sternum calls for a large one. It would furthermore have acted as a powerful muscle of inward rotatioi\, of which the joint was incapable. Lying in front of tlie arm and adjacent thereto, there are a number of long, thin, striated ossified tendons, with somewhat fimbriated extremities, some of them eighty millimeters in length by four or five in width. I am satisfied that the most of the space in front of the elbow was filled during life by strong muscles, controlling the movement of the arm and wrist, the anteiior brachial and carpal flexors, whose origins were high up on the humerus. On the upper distal extremity of tlie radius there is an articular surface extending backward, and, lying near it in the specimen, there is a small sesamoid bone, doubtless belonging to a carpal flexor. Tlie pteroid bone has a rounded convex articular surface on one side of its broad carpal extremity that evidently fitted into a depression in tlie lateral carpal bone lying near it. The joint seems to have permitted considerable enarthrodial movement, with but little gliding motion; it clearly permitted considerable oscillation of its free extremity in the plane of the wing. The distal extremity reached nearly to the deltoid process in the ordinary flight position of the wing. There certainly was not sufficient membrane in front of the elbow to need such an elaborate structure for its support if the membrane ceased at the shoulder. On the assumption that this bone is a reversed thumb metacarpal, an altogether probable theor}^, one cannot conceive how it could have assumed its present position, unless it had been reversed and brought toward the shoulder by the action of a membrane that originally extended along the sides of the body over the outstretched fingers like that of a bat. By the gradual development of the little finger, as is shown, indeed, by the more elongated metacarpal of the

304 On the Skeleton of iSTyctodactyhis, with Eestoration

later forms and the greater 23rop*ortioual development of the middle fingers in the early forms, the end of the thnmb was drawn backward and rendered tense, nntil finally its position became directly opposite to the original one.

AVe must assume then that the membrane originally was developed to a greater or less extent in front of the arm as well as behind it. Had the membrane finally disappeared here, it is only natural to suppose that the bone controlling it would become vestigial — assuming Lamarckian views! On the contrary, it has evidently increased in size, for it seems to be larger in this one of the most specialized of all pterodactyls than in the earlier ones. What then could be its functions, unless as the support of a membrane that extended over the shoulder to the sides of the neck? I can not say that I am convinced that this really was the case in our Nyctodadylus, but I think it not improbable.

The attachment of what I believe to be the pectoral muscles was by a stout and prominent process on the inner proximal side of the humerus.^

In an earlier communication I stated that the upper part of the bill or beak in Ornithostoma was not produced in a sharp ridge as Marsh stated, but that it was rounded. Plieninger (1. c), however, thinks that I was mistaken and that Marsh was right. " Die Medianlinie des Schadels ist im vorderen Theile in eine scharfe Kante ausgezogen, welche allmahlich nach hinten, gegen die Xasopra?orbital Offnung hiu, in eine sanfte, stumpfe Eundung iibergeht; allem Anscheine nach ist die scharfe Kante im vordersten Theile nicht durch Druck hervorgerufen, sondern war urspriinglich vorhanden." In the present specimen the skull is in a most admirable state of preservation, and an examination of it proves beyond shadow of doubt that the median part above was roundly, evenly and smoothly convex, at least as far back as the narial opening. " Die Oberflache der Schadelknochen ist fast durchwegs mit verschicden geformten, meist anuahernd ovalen Griibchen bedeckt. Williston glaubt, dass nur der Abdruck der in der spongiosen Masse befindlichen Hohlraume sei, eine Ansicht, welche ich nicht theilen kann. — Plieninger (1. c). The upper surface of the beak does not show the slightest indications of such depressions, but is perfectly smooth and plane. This condition I have seen so often in OrnWiostoma that I feel sure that the

^Plieninger rightl}' objects to the use by me of tbe term "bicipital crest" for this process, by saying that it was not for the attachment of the biceps muscle, wliich never arises from the humerus. That so unpardonable an error may not be attributed to one who has taught human anatomy for many years, I may say that I used the term, inadvertently, in the anthropotomic sense of the " anterior bicipital ridge " and as such I believe it to be correct, though not a proper term here.

S. W. Williston 305

depressions were always the result of the compression to which the bones were subjected.

At present our knowledge of the skeleton of Nijctodadylus is nearly complete, more complete perhaps than that of any ether pterodactyl known.

Its structure demonstrates the comparative unimportance of the scapular articulation as a diagnostic or classificatory character. The structure of the skeleton throughout, even of the uotarium or consolidated dorsal vertebrae, is very much like that of Oniithostoma save in the scapula. From this it follows that the genus must be placed in the same family with Ornitliostoma and OniWiocheirus. In my own opinion, there is not even a subfamily difference.

I still believe that the genus Pteranodon is identical with Ornitliostoma, and that the former term must be abandoned. Plieninger (1. c), however, concludes that even if the two terms be synonymous, the name Ornitliostoma has no claims for recognition, because it was not adequately described or figured before Marsh described Pteranodon. Were this true, and it may be, it would not be sufficient justification for the rejection of Ornithostoma. Were the rule applied to Marsh's own names, a large part of them would be rejected, as he rarely gave characters substantiating his terms. But there is a far w^eightier reason for the abandonment of the name Pteranodon. Prof. Seeley, according to his statement,* pointed out to Prof. Marsh the toothless character of Ornitliostoma and showed him the evidence before Pteranodon was known!

On every principle of nomenclature and justice the name Ornitliostoma must take precedence over Pteranodon if these genera are found to be identical, as I believe will be the case.

Note. — Since the foregoing has been in type, the skull of the specimen described has been nearly wholly freed from the matrix. It has no occipital crest, and the occiput is a little less produced than in the figure; otherwise the outline is nearly correct. The fossil skull, thirtyone centimeters in length, inclusive of the mandible, weighs less than thirty-nine grammes!

Dragons of the Air. London, 1901. p. 182.



From the Emhrijologkal Laboratvry of the Harnard Medical School.

With 14 Text Figukes.

The dog-fisli liaviiig been used so extensively as a basis for onr knowledge of the morphology and development of the genito-urinary system, any further contribution in this department of anatomy can be easily fitted in to larger accounts, such as wq have from the well-known investigations of Balfour, 78, and Semper, 75, who used this and closely allied species in their pioneer genito-urinary researches.

" Since Semper's time, in 1875,"' to quote from Dr. Minot's Embryology, p. 250, " it has come to be more and more generally admitted that the development of the genital glands leads in both sexes through an early stage characterized by the appearance of primitive ova {Ureier, Frimordialeier, ovoblast). The primitive ova are merely enlarged cells of the germinal epithelium (or so-called medullary cords)."

Balfour gives the following location of primitive ova when first obobserved, 78:

The primitive ova are confined to the region which extends posteriorly nearly to the end of the small intestine and anteriorly to the abdominal opening of the segmental duct.

" The portion of the mesentery in which the primitive ova are most densely aggregated corresponds to the future position of the genital ridge, but the other positions occupied by the ova are quite outside this. Some ova are in fact situated on the outside of the segmental duct and segmental tubes, and must, therefore, effect a considerable migration before reaching their final positions in the genital ridge on the inner side of the segmental duct."'

These cells destined to form the ova in the female and probably the spermatozoa in the male are to-day generally considered to be derived from the germinal epithelium of the genital gland. The epithelium itself is a modification of the embryonic peritoneum and its special region is indicated in the drawing of the 19 mm. embryo (Fig. 14 Ur).

308 Origin and Migration of the Germ-Cells in Aeanthias

Vol. I, Part 1, p. 125, of Quain's Anatomy contains a well-known picture taken from Balfour and is designed to show this transformation of epithelial cells into sex-cells and is labelled ^ Transverse section through the ovary of an embryo shark showing the germ-epithelium forming primitive ova."

Later investigators in the embryology of this region in the dog-fish, shark, etc., have also ascribed the origin of these cells to transformation of the coelom epithelium, and have attempted to account for their presence in the unusual and distant positions.

Euckert, 88, found the primitive ova in the segmental mesoderm of Selachieme and made the observation that only a few of the cells of this type lie outside in the unsegmented mesoderm, thus giving support to his belief in the Gonotome theory — that is, that the reproductive organs of the vertebrates were originally segmented like the vertebrae themselves.

This use of the word Gonotome was called in question by Minot in 1894, in an article " Gegen das Gonotome," claiming that our knowledge about these large cells was not sufficient to warrant us in believing them to be necessarily all primitive ova since some were in positions entirely outside the genital region. As we had no exact knowledge of the origin, fate or meaning, they might even be ordinary cells in the process of division.

Carl Eabl, 96, believed these peculiar cells to be all primitive ova. He found them first over a diffuse region lining the body cavity which region subsequently became contracted. They were situated in both the splanchnopleure and somatopleure, though most of them were in the former.

Like Balfour he could not explain their peculiar structure or the granules of yolk in their protoplasm. He considered it difficult to explain their disappearance from the somatopleure since there was no certain evidence of their migration, and he also suggested the idea that these more distant ones might be changed over into ordinary epithelial cells. He did not hint at their presence before the formation of the coelom. Thus the classical view is, that the germ-cells originate in the ccelom epithelium.

More recently, a few researches regarding the origin of the primitive ova in a few more or less peculiar lower vertebrates show that in certain forms at any rate these cells are differentiated very precociously even before any embryo is formed and never arise from any somatic or body cells.

My own investigation on the origin of the primitive ova in Squalus aeanthias or the common dog-fish, a typical elasmobranch. entirely dis

Frederick ildams Woods 309

credits the view that these cells arise from epithelium and shoAvs that the germ-cells are traceable out of the mesoderm as we seek them in younger and younger embryos, until their origin is placed in the endoderm or underlying yolk, even before any mesoderm is formed.

In fact, as far as determined, from their first appearance up to the time of their situation in the genital region Avhen they become the acknowledged primitive ova, these cells do not appear to be differentiated at all.

It is the other or somatic cells which become changed during the processes of growth.

In the youngest embryo studied, in the blastoderm stage, practically all the cells, except those of the ectoderm have all the characteristics of the primitive ova found in later embryos of from one to six millimeters.

It will be seen from the drawings that while most of the cells of the endoderm and mesoderm are losing their clear, round outline, and also their yolk, fusing together into a net-work, or being changed into tall, columnar epithelium, some cells retain all their original characteristics.

It will also be seen that at least some, if not all of these cells of the original type are gathered up in a small tumor-like ball at the junction of the endoderm and mesoderm before the mesoderm has split, and that afterwards these spread through this layer and by actual migration find more and more their positions in the segmented mesoderm until they finally rest exclusively in the genital region of this germ layer. During no part of this migration have any cells been seen that would lead one to suspect a transition of the mesoderm or mesothelial cells into primitive ova.

After the mesoderm is once formed and the ova are once in it, there is no difficulty in determining whether any given cell is or is not a germ-cell.

Although several thousand were counted with oil immersion, no doubtful cells were met.

The ordinary cells of the mesoderm give no clear cell outlines, they fuse together and are practically devoid of yolk. Such shapes as are indicated are small spindles and cylinders. The primitive ova are large oval or spherical, have clear cut cell walls, and are crowded with yolk. A peculiar notching of the nucleus is often present and has been suggested as characteristic of these cells, but as it is found in cells which do not in other ways conform to this t^-pe and as it does not appear to be present in all of them, I do not feel that this is a sure test.

Of course the youngest embryos, i. e., those without a mesoderm, 22

310 Origin and Migration of the Germ-Cells in Acanthias

give difficnlty since the younger the embryo the more the cells in general are filled with yolk sphernles and conform in other ways to the germ-cell type.

Let us follow the changes onward from the young blastoderm up to the point of sexual differentiation of the genital gland in embryos of 34 mm.

The first cut (Fig. 1) is taken through the greatest diameter of an embryo of Balfour's stage A, at the growing point. The cells of the ectoderm are somewhat differentiated, being long and slender, the other

Fig. 2.

Fig. 1. Blastoderm, Balfour's Stage A, at the growing point. Ec. ectoderm, En. ebdoderm. Harvard Embryological Collection, Sag. Series, 490, section 81. x 330.

Fig. 2. Blastoderm, slightly older than Balfour's stage A. Ec. ectoderm. En. endoderm, Yk. yolk. x 330.

or endodermal cells are nearly all alike and of such characteristics that found in the mesoderm of a dog-fish 3-6 mm., I should unhesitatingly call them primitive ova. No mesoderm is yet distinguishable.

The second section (Fig. 2) is slightly older, still no mesoderm is differentiated. Many of the cells of the endoderm show indefinite limits in certain directions, long processes of protoplasm tending to join them in a net work. Some of the cells, however, retain the earliest type.

A section of a later age, Balfour's stage D, 2^ mm. long, shows the mesoderm clearly formed on each side of the embryo. The split in the

Frederick Adams Woods 311

mesoderm which will form the ccelom has^ however, not yet taken place. At this stage most of the mesoderm and endoderm cells have altered their original characteristics, being smaller and less clear in outline, taking on spindle or cylinder shapes, losing more or less of the darklystained yolk grannies and tending to fuse into a more mesenchyma-like mass.

Here and there, however, in the extra-embryonic mesoderm, endoderm and even in the yolk just beneath the endoderm, one finds numerous cells of the original type.

The appearance of such cells in the yolk just beneath the endoderm and even frequently partly in the endoderm and partly in the yolk suggests the idea that cells of the early type are being formed in the yolk itself at the period during which the embryo undergoes its first two or three millimeters of growth and that these cells contribute to the formation of the endoderm and perhaps also to the Ureier. This contribution of yolk cells to the endoderm i^ stated in Balfour. Or it may be that the Ureier are derived solely from such yolk-formed cells. This would give the Ureier an extra embryonic formation similar to the blood corpuscles as claimed by His. " Angioblast," oo.

"Whether the Ureier are formed in the yolk or in the endoderm, cells of this type are now present in both and also in the mesoderm, but only near its junction with the endoderm.

It is important that so far none of the cells in the segmented mesoderm or even near the segmented mesoderm have any such characteristics. All cells of regions are of the small, dimly outlined variety, carrying only a

few volk granules. Fig. 3. Cross section, embryo of 2% mm. Ed. endoderm,

' . tir.. germ-cells. A-B., location of all the germ-cells. Har The next section vard Embryological Collection. Trans. Series 462, section

(Fig. 3) IS taken

through the hind segment of a 2^ mm. embryo with 9 somites. This is through the heart of the primitive ova region and shows that these cells are found far out on the yolk in the early stages. It is possible to count them at this stage since all the remaining cells have changed their characteristics in one way or another. There were 93 of them present on the right side and all lay within the region marked A-B, most of them being in the noticeable swelling caused by the union of the three germ layers. Only 5 were in the mesoderm.


Orioin and Mis-ration of the Germ-Cells in Acantliias

Dnring these early stages from 9 njD to 30 soinites more or less, the primitive ova always lie at the hind end of the embryo where the germ layers meet or are also a little anterior to this jnnction. In the yonngest embryo before the medullary groove has closed, they lie quite far outon the sides and always in the blastodermic rim.

Fig. 4 is from a 3 mm. embryo. The germ-cells are found near the junction of the three germ layers and are nearer the median Hue than in Fiff. 3.

Fig. 4. Embr}'0 3 mm. Eu. eudoderm, germ-cells as black dots. x 38. Fig. .5. Embryo o^o mm. Eu. eudoderm, Ur. g-erm-cells. Harvard Embryological Collection. Traus. Series 463, section 14T. x 38.

The next section, Fig. 5, is from an embryo of 3i mm. This shows the primitive ova at the junction of the mesoderm and eudoderm, huddled together in a characteristic tumor-like ball as they lie before their journey upwards into the segmented mesoderm and genital region.

Fig. 6. Section of germ-cell region drawn with oil-immersion objective. Embryo of 3}4 mm. Ec. ectoderm, En. endoderm, Mes. mesoderm, Ur. germ-cells. x 330.

This cluster is where most of the primitive ova lie and is just anterior to the last body segment where the three germ layers come in contact. A little mass like this is found on both sides of the body in all embryos between about 3 and 4 mm., and is so conspicuous as to be easily seen

Frederick Adams Woods


with low powers of the microscope and should be included in a description of the gross anatomy of the part. As yet there are no cells of this type higher np in the mesoderm.

The above section, Fig. G, was taken at the junction of the three germ layers in the posterior region of another embryo of 3^ mm. It will be seen that the ball cluster is broken up and also that the cells are found at some little distance up into the mesoderm. On one side in this embryo there were 230 cells of the primitive ova type, all very uear together in this part of the body.

Another section, Fig. 7, shows the position of most. of the Ureier in a -J: mm. embryo. These clusters of primitive ova were mentioned by Balfour who observed them in the genital regions of older embryos and considered them due to rapid cell division. I have never seen, during these earlv stages, anv indications of cell division. It would seem that


Fig. 7. Cross section embiTO i mm. En. endoderm, Ur. germ-cells. Harvard Embryological Collection. Trans. Series 464, section 123. x 38.

Fig. S. Embryo .5 mm. En. endoderm, Ur. germ-cells. Harvard Embryological Collection. Trans. Series 331, Section 27.5. x 38.

Fig. 9. Embryo 6 mm. En. endoderm, Ur. germ-cells. Harvard Embryological Collection. Trans. Series 293, section 31S. x 38.

these clusters or egg nests were here merely due to the fact that a little earlier, they practically all lie in two groups, one on each side in the narrow mesoderm and that in such a drawing as Fig. 8 they have not yet all wandered away from each other.

Fig. 8 shows the principal location of the cells in a 5 mm. embryo. Fig. 9 is of a 6 mm. embryo. One cell on the right is indicated as having reached the segmented mesoderm. Up to this point the mesoderm has not split. The next section. Fig. 11. embryo of 8 mm. shows the split in the mesoderm to form the body cavity. The primitive ova practically all succeed in getting on the splanchnopleure or inner layer; just how is, to me, a mystery.

A few are now in the genital region or dorsal end of the ca-lom, but most of them are in the epithelium all along around the intestine and mesenterv.

31-i Origin and Migration of the Germ-Cells in Acanthias

The larger mass of cells on the right shows the region in which most of the sex cells are scattered. It will be observed that even yet the

genital fold has not formed. There are in this embryo 154 primitive ova in the region ventral to the mesentery. Seventy-three are in the mesentery and 69 in the genital region.

Fig. 12 is a cross-section throngh an 11.5 nim. embryo. It shows the greatest height of the embryo above the yolk and also the corresponding length of the intestine. The black dots indicate the position of the primitive ova and the relatively large space that they now cover. About half of them would be found in the mesentery at this stage; 137 were counted in this structure.

Fig. 13 is a cross-section through a 15 mm. embryo at a point a little posterior to the last in a region where the connection of the embryo with the yolk does not show. In such an embryo most of the germ-cells are in or near their ultimate position in the thickened epithelium near the letter d. The great accumulation in the mesentery has been transferred to the posterior coelom epithelium. There were 29 in the mesentery and 41 ventral to this.

Fig. 14 shows a cross-section of a 19 mm. emTjryo. At this stage most of the cells have reached the region of the genital fold. Many, however, are at the root or posterior portion of the mesentery, and a few are still in the mesentery itself.

Out of 272 primitive ova, 242 were in the genital fold now shown on the left or just to the median side of it. There were 19 in the mesentery and 11 ventral to the mesentery.

In an embryo of 28 mm. we see the genital gland formed, and of 473 cells present, 469 were completely housed in the gland itself. The remaining four were close at hand, being in the root of the mesentery. An embryo of 34 mm. was

Fig. 10. Germ cpIIs as they appear in a 6 mm. embryo as Vig. 9. Ec. ectoderm, En. endoderm, Mes. mesoderm, Ur. g-erm-colls. X 330.

Fig. 11. Embryo of 8 mm. Most of the germcells are near the point Ur. En. endoderm. Harvard Embrj'olog-ical Collection. Trans. Series 447. X 38.

Frederick Adams Woods


also used for a count; there were 710 germ-cells and all were in the genital glands. M;V::, V>.j, > ; uV The following table shows the proportionate dis tribution of primitive ova from the time when they could first be distinguished up to the complete formation of the genital gland at about the time of sexual differentiation into male and female.

■'\ Fig. 12

Fig. 14

Fig. 13. Cross-section through the gut region of an embryo of 11.5 mm. En. €ndoderm, Ur. germ-cells. Harvard Embryological Collection. Trans. Series 306.

Fig. 13. Ventral portion of an embryo of 15 mm. En. endoderm, Ur. germ-cells. Harvard Embryological Collection. Trans. Series 499, Section 337. x 38.

Fig. 14. Ventral portion of an embryo of 19 mm. En. endoderm, Ur. germ-cells in the genital gland. Harvard Embryological Collection. Trans. Series 137, section 390. X 38.

Length of

Total No. of

Unsegmented mesoderm or ven

Mesentery, when

Segmented mesoderm. Later gpenital region.

Embryo in mm.


tral to the mesentery.



98 1



230 1








110 2






































Mode of Migration.

There is no question but what these cells migrate with reference to the embryo as a whole since the number ventral to the mesen

1 One side onlv counted.

Part of series lacking.

316 Origin and ]\[igration of the Germ-Cells in Aeantliias

tery, in the mesentery and finally dorsal to it, shifts by regular transitions and furthermore the number at first close together becomes secondarily scattered over a wide area and then contracted, but the cause of ■this migration is somewhat difficult to determine.

There are two views regarding this as well as a combination of the two possible.

First, they may migrate by independent amoeboid motions through the cells that surround them.

Second, they may migrate relatively to the embryo by themselves, remaining comparatively fixed and many complicated changes in various tissues of the embryo causing a shift of their position.

It is easy to conceive how a growing together of the two lateral lips of the blastodermic rim might convert Pig. 3 into Fig. 5, how a growth of somatic cells into the ball together with an elongation and narrowing of the embryo as a whole might bring about Fig. 7.

Fig. 9 might be formed by a sinking of the intestine with reference to the mesoderm combined with a segmenting of the mesoderm in a more and more ventral direction, thus bringing some ova to lie in the segmented mesoderm though none lay here in Fig. 7.

In comparing the Figs. 7 and 9, it does not seem impossible that this may be caused by a growth of tissue between the notochord and endoderm, together Avith a contracting down of the endoderm into a smaller circumference.

This would mean that the region between the primitive ova and the top of the protovertebrre has not grown any in length from the condition in Fig. 5, where Ave see that the ova nearest to the top of the protovertebrfB are fully as far away from the top as they are in Fig. 9 on the right, or even about as far as they are in Fig. 11.

It is to be remembered that Figs. 3-5, 7-9, 11-14 are all drawn with a camera lucida Avith the same magnification so that the draAvings relative to each other rej)resent the actual relative sizes of the embryos though all are enlarged.

The embryo during these changes has groAvn but little in height from Fig. 3 to Fig. 11. It can easily be conceived hoAV an unfolding of the tAvo lateral parts of the embryo in Fig. 5, combined Avith a splitting of the mesoderm, Avith a sinking of the gut might produce Fig. 11, adding, of course, certain other changes in the sizes of parts like the enlargement of the notochord, spinal cord, etc.

"We can reconcile Fig. 11, 8 mm., Avith Fig. 13, 15 mm., and not introduce the question of independent amoeboid motion, if Ave suppose that the mesothelium of the ccelom ventral to the mesentery and sin-rounding

Frederick Adams Woods 317

tlie gut migrates as a whole over the surface of the mesenchyma or that the gilt, as a whole, sinks further and growth of tissue takes place in its lower parts.

However, there comes a stage now which seems to me incompatible with any view except that of independent motion through the tissue. This is the transition between Fig. 13, 15 mm., and Fig. 11, 19 mm.

In the 15 mm. embryo there were 276 primitive ova in the posterior epithelium of the ccelom, 29 in the mesentery and 11 ventral to this point. Of these 11 occupying ventral positions there were 28 which are especially interesting in trying to prove this point since these lie around the intestine and even directly under it. Xineteen of these 28 lie in the territory between a and b and 9 lie between b and c.

In the 19 mm. embryo there were 212 primitive ova in the genital region, 19 in the mesentery and 11 ventral to this point. Nine of these were in the region b-c. None were in a-b, though the entire embryo was searched. The other 2 lay much further away, near the remains of the yolk. This was confirmed by a study of an 18 mm. embryo.

These changes between the 15 and 19 mm. are entirely compatible Avith migration through the tissues and it seems to me with no other view. It is not conceivable or at least extremely improbable that any special growth should raise cells from point a to point c. The only other alternative would be degeneration in situ of the cells between a-b in the 15 mm. embryo.

I have looked for such degeneration in the cells under the alimentary tract, but have never observed any such evidences. Whenever they were found they have always, with very few exceptions, shown out clearly and with no transitions wherever their positions may have been. So it seems that the changes in the early stages are due mostly to changes in relative growths of the ditferent parts of the embryo and that in the later stages at any rate we must add an independent migration through the epithelial cells. This independent migration, though remarkable and difficult to explain, is somewhat paralleled by young nerve cells whose movements through tissue are acknowledged to take place. It is very hard to understand how these cells can migrate even for a little distance through the cells of a columnar or low cuboidal epithelium and practically never fall out or wander into the underlying tissue. Yet such appears to be the case, especially in the stages between 11 and 19 mm.

It may be that some chemical forces, which we at present in our ignorance call chemotaxis, are factors taking an important joart in the development of tissues.

318 Origin and Migration of the Germ-Cells in Acanthias

It is interesting to note that just before the Ureier are taken into the mesoderm tHey all lie near the junction of the three germ layers. It may be that rejDroductive cells which have as they do, possibilities for formation of all three layers can come only from a region in the embryo in which the somatic cells themselves have possibilities in one of these three directions.

With regard to its bearing on the theory of the gonotome, the evidence is, of course, opposed to such a theory.

As we trace to its early condition, the sexual gland, we do not find it originally segmented. On the other hand, it is first unsegmented and subsequently becomes segmented, because it must, since it moves into the body cavity which is itself segmented.


To summarize: The most important conclusion appears to be that the germ-cells in the dog-fish are not developed from somewhat specialized cells of the body, but that a few undifferentiated cells of the earliest type are taken out and passed on until the new^ individual is formed.

This early appearance of germ-cells in vertebrates is not a new discovery, since it has been observed by Eigenmann in Cymatogasta, 91, a bony fish. Eigenmann, however, considers this fact to be in some way associated with peculiarities of other sorts in this fish.

J. Beard, 00, has announced the early appearance of the germ-cells in Eaja batis, the skate, though his paper containing the proofs is still wanting.

In the lamprey, according to W. M. Wheeler, 99, the germ-cells are not derived from the mesothelium cells, but appear very young in the endoderm.

, In all these forms cited above, the germ-cells had not been studied at all prior to these investigations, so it was not so much that the epithelial origin was overthrown as that such origin was not the true one in these special cases.

The value of finding a similar condition in the dog-fish and shark seems to me to be twofold — first, because these have long been used so much by investigators and students as typical lower vertebrates, and second, it shows that even among them where an epithelial origin was contended the early endoderm origin is likewise true, thus bringing them all in the same category.

Lastly, its bearing on the continuity of the germ plasm. Moritz ISTaussbaum, in 1880, formulated an hypothesis that "the sexual cells

Frederick Adams Woods 319

do not come from any cells that have given up their embryonic character or gone into building any part of the body, nor do sexual cells ever go into body formation." This he considered only an hypothesis without much basis of observation.

This hypothesis was taken up by Weismann, in 1883, who, like ISTaussbaum, insisted that such was inconsistent with Darwin's hypothesis of pangenesis and that the reason why the offspring is like the parent is because some germinal cells are saved out unchanged.

As Francis Galton expressed it, the individual is merely the " trustee " for the cells that maintain the species.

It seems to me that the facts about the primitive ova in the dog-fish amply bear out the hypothesis of ISTaussbaum. while regarding Weismann's later contentions concerning the inheritance of acquired characteristics, even if such early origin of germ-cells were proved by finer methods to be the condition in the higher vertebrates as well, his contention would not be proved, though ^s far as it went, it would be strengthened since there would be more reason still for looking upon the primitive ova and the offspring as well, as collateral witli, rather than a part of the parent.'

Finally. I wish to express my obligations to Dr. Charles S. Minot for his many useful suggestions during the progress of this research.

BIBLIOGRAPHY. Balfour, F. M., 78.1. — Development of Elasmobranch Fishes. Chap. VI. Bea;rd, J., oo-i. — Morphological continuity of the g-erni-cells in Raja

batis. Anat. Anz., Dec, 1900. EiGENMAX>', C. H., 91. 1. — Precocious Segregation of the Sex-cells in

Micrometrus Aggregatus. Journ. Morph., V. 481-492. , 95.2. — The History of the Sex-cells from the time of Segre g-ation to Sexual Differentiation in Cymatogaster. Trans. Amer.

Micros. Soc, XVII, 172-173. Hacker, V., 97.1. — Die Iveimbahn von Cyclops. Arch. f. Mikros. Anat.,

XLIX, 35-91. His, W., 00.2. — Lecithoblast u. Angioblast der Wii'belthiere. Abhandl.

Math. Phys. Classe K. Sachs-ges. Wiss., XXVI, 173-328. JuNGERSEN, H. F. C, 89.1. — Beiti-age zur Kenntniss der Entwickelung

der Geschlechtsorgane bei den Knochenfischen. Atbeit. Zool.

Zoot. Institut., Wiirzburg. IX, 89-219. MiNOT, C. S.. 94.1.— Gegen das Gonolome. Anat. Anz., IX. 210-213.

2 Beard's latest article, "The Germ Cells of Pristiurus," which appeared (Anat. Anzeiger, xxi, 50) after this article was in type, does not give results wholly in accordance with my own.

320 Origin and Migration of the (lerni-Cells in Acanthias

Eabl, C, 96.2. — Ueber die Entwickehnig ties Urogenital Sj'stems cler

Selachier. Morphol. Jahrb., XXIV, 632-767. ErcKERT, J., 88.1. — Ueber die Entstehnng der Exkretionsorg-ane bei

Selachien. Arch. Anat. Physiol., Anat. Abt., 205-278. Semper, C, 75.2. — Das Urogenital System der Plagiostomen und seine

Bedeutung fiir das der iibrigen Wirbelthiere. Arb. Zool. Zoot.

Inst., Wlirzburg, II, 195-509. Waldeyer, W.. 70.1. — Eierstock und Ei, 800, Leipzig, 174 p. Wheeler, W. M., gg.i. — The Development of the Urinogenital organs

of the Lamprey. Zool. Jahrb.^ XIII, 1-88.



With 1 Plate.

In the siDermatozoun of Allolohophora we have demonstrated three centrosome-like structnres, one at the base of the spine, one at the anterior, and one at the posterior end of the middle-piece. Heretofore we have differentiated these structnres at such rare intervals, we could not claim for them any morphological value, but quite recently, by the aid of photography, we have been able to demonstrate these bodies with sufficient constancy to warrant a consideration of their morphological and functional significance. Do these bodies represent merely points of insertion for the spine, middle-piece and tail, comparable to the basal bodies of cilia, or have they a bearing upon the problems of fertilization ?

The morphological value of the apical centrosome-like body is enhanced by the fact that a few investigators, Platner (12), Carl Messing (11), and Field (3), have traced the ceutrosome of the spermatocytes to the apex of the head of the spermatozoon, and in one case at least, this apical centrosome appears to function in the fertilized egg, as the ceutrosome of the male attraction-sphere. To this may be added the interesting observations of King (7), Avho has shown in the egg of Bufo that a male aster is formed at the apex of the head of the spermatozoon.

The morphological value of the centrosome-like body in the middlepiece is enhanced by the interpretations of a large number of investigators who have traced the centrosome of the spermatocytes to the middlepiece of the spermatozoon, in many cases this centrosome being identified in the egg, as the centrosome of the male attraction-sphere.

In the middle piece of Allolohophora, however, we have demonstrated two ceutrosome-like bodies instead of one, and in this connection Lenhossek's (8), observations on the spermatogenesis of certain vertebrates are of interest. He identifies two centrosomes in the middle-piece, these having originated by the division of the centrosome of the spermatid. He shows also a centrosome-like body at the apex of the head — his Alrosoma — which he claims, however, has no connection with the centro

333 The Spermatozoa of Allolobophora Foetida

some of the spermatid, arising merely as a thickening of tlie sphere substance. With improved technical methods we hope to be able to identify within the egg the three centrosome-like bodies of the spermatozoon of Allolohophora and determine whether any of them function as focal points for astral rays. For the present the only evidence in the egg, indicating that we may expect to find a centrosome in the spine and in the middle-piece is that the cytoplasm of the egg reacts to hotli spine and middle-piece, this reaction being expressed by two morphologically similar structures, the fertilization cone and the sperm aster, these two structures in turn resembling morphologically the asters of the maturation spindles, each of which contains a centrosome.

On several occasions Ave have called attention to the similarity of the fertilization cone and the male aster, further homologizing these structures to the poles of a spindle. ^Ye quote the following from a former paper : " It is impossible to avoid drawing conclusions as to the morphological significance of the resemblance between the male aster and transverse sections through the fertilization cone. The rays and the central aggregation of Archoplasm are as pronounced in the one as in the other, suggesting that each end of the head of the sperm — the spine and the middle-piece — produces on the cytoplasm of the egg a like morphological effect. This would indicate that the spine and the middlepiece are of the same substance, though the identity can not be complete, as the cytoplasm does not react to the two structures at the same stage of the development of the egg. . . . The effect produced by the spine is made, however, by a moving object (the sperm entering the egg) and we have thus a different shaped aster — a cone shaped aster. Is it possible that this may have any bearing on the opposing interpretations of various authors, some asserting that the anterior end of the head of the sperm produces the male aster, and others, that the posterior end of the head (the middle-piece) produces it ?

" If we accept the interpretation of those authors who claim to have traced a part of the aster of the spermatid, to both spine and middlepiece, may we not regard that part of the spermatozoon (including spine, head and middle-piece) as an attenuated spindle, and expect that each end of this spindle will produce a like morphological effect upon the cytoplasm of the egg? " (5) page 605-G.

When the above was written we had not succeeded in establishing the identity of centrosome-like bodies in either spine or middle-piece, though homologizing the spine, head, and middle-piece of the spermatozoon to an attenuated spindle, made this identification very desirable.

If it can be proved that the fertilization cone and male aster are mor

Katharine Foot and Ella Church Strobell 323

phologically alike, it would be convenient to designate them as the ojiierior and posterior male asters — and it is impossible to resist an attempt to homologize them to similar structures described for other eggs — although we appreciate the danger of making too rigid an application of the phenomena observed in individual cases.

Lillie (10) in his suggestive work on Unio describes two asters, the first, which he identifies as the true sperm attraction-sphere, appears and disappears at about the same stage of the egg's development, as the anterior sperm aster (the cone) of AUolobophora; while the second, his "accessory aster," appears and disappears at about the same period as the posterior sperm aster of Allolohophora. It is significant, that the sperm aster of Unio is " comet shaped," thus resembling the fertilization cone of AUololopliora, and it is also significant that it is found, sometimes preceding the head of the sperm. Is it not possible that the male aster and accessory aster of Unio correspond to the anterior and posterior sperm asters of AUololopliora, the approxiinate agreement in the time of their appearance and disappearance being due to the fact that both eggs are fertilized at about the same stage of development ?

'In Axolotl, Fick (2) figures a distinct spherical body at the base of the spine of the spermatozoon, although he does not call it a centrosome. In the egg he sees a cytoplasmic reaction to the head of the spermatozoon, the so-called funnel. Fertilization occurs later in this egg, than is the case in AUololopliora — and yet the funnel and the sperm aster of Axolotl are undoubtedly homologous to the anterior and posterior sperm asters of AUololopliora.

In the egg of Allolohophora fertilization occurs very early, this fact marking the individuality of these two structures, the anterior male aster (the cone) appearing at the metaphase of the first maturation spindle, and the posterior male aster, after the first polar body is formed — thus separating the two structures by a period of time as well as position. In eggs in which fertilization takes place later, the cytoplasmic reactions to the spine and middle-piece following each other very rapidly, is it not possible that in some cases the anterior and posterior male asters may be fused or confused ?

If we call in evidence the data indicating that division is one of the life expressions of the centrosome, and if we interpret the three small bodies in the spermatozoon of AUololopliora as centrosomes, it involves the unauthorized assumption that the centrosome of the spermatid divides, part being destined to the apex of the head and part for the middle-piece of the spermatozoon, these centrosomes being the equivalent of the one centrosome left in the egg after the formation of the

324 The Spermatozoa of Allolobophora Foetida

second polar bod_y, and it is an interesting fact that several investigators have observed the division of this centrosome in other eggs.

If, on the contrary, we attribute to these three spermatic structures the value only of basal corpuscles, we still do not escape the centrosome problem, for Lenhossek (9), and Henneguy (G), claim that the basal corpuscles of cilia have their origin in the centrosome.

If they are indeed centrosomes, we must follow their logical implication and admit that they can be placed in evidence for the theory that the centrosome has its stage of activity and its stage of rest, the former represented by the aster, the latter by the so-called naked centrosome. The stage of activity of the spine and middle-piece centrosomes — assuming they are such — has but an ephemeral expression in the egg. and it seems only logical to assume that after this period of activity they may return again to a resting stage. With more exact technical methods, it may be possible to trace them in the egg during the resting stage and this can be assumed also for the egg centrosome. We wish to accentuate these points, as the egg of Allolobopliora has heretofore given evidence only, in favor of the theory that the centrosomes arise de novo, and are " the expression rather than the cause of cell activity " (4).

This evidence, in brief, is as follows: The complete disappearance of both male and egg attraction-spheres at a definite stage of the egg's development. A lack of decisive evidence that the rays of the male aster focus at any one point in the middle-piece (5), or that the rays of the cone focus at the base of the spine. Further, an inconstancy in both size and form of the egg centrosome at a given stage of the development of the spindle, and a lack of evidence of any division of either egg or sperm aster.

Although the greater part of this evidence is negative, we have no right to ignore it — we may say rather, that the centrosomes of Allolobopliora present conflicting evidence that demands rigid cross-examination.


1. Ballowitz, Emil. Untersuchungen iiber die Struktur dex* Spermatozoen, zugleicli ein Beitrag ziir Lelire voin feinei'en Bau der kontraktilen Elemente. Zeit. f. wiss. Zool., Bd. 50, Hft. Ill, 1890.

2. FiCK, E. Ueber die Eeifung und Befruchtung des Axolotleies. Zeit. fiir wiss. Zool., Bd. LVI, Hft. IV, 1893.

3. Field, George Wiltox. On tlie Morphology and Physiology of the Echinoderm Si)erniatozoon. Journ. Morph., Vol. XI, No. 2, 1895.

4. Foot, Katharine. The Origin of the Cleavage Centrosomes. Jonrn. JMorph., Vol. XII, Xo. 3, 1897.

Katharine Foot and Ella Church Strobell 325

5. Foot and Strobell. Photographs of the Egg of Allolobophora foetida I. Journ. of Morph.. Vol. XVI, No. 3, 1900.

6. Henneguy, L. F. Siir les rapjiorts des cils vibratiles avec les centrosomes. Archives d'anatomie microscopique, Vol. I, 1898, p. 494.

7. Kino, Helen Dean. The Maturation and Fertilization of the Egg of Bufo lentiginosus. Journ. Morph., Vol. XVII, No. 2, 1901.

8. VON Lenhossek, M. Untersuchungen iiber Spermatogenese. Arch. f. mik. Anat., Bd. 51, Hft. 2, 1898.

9. VON Lenhossek, M. Verhandl. der anatomischen Gesellschaft in Kiel. 1898, p. 117.

10. LiLLiE, Frank U. The organization of the Egg of Unio, based on a study of its Maturation, Fertilization and Cleavage. Journ. Morph., Vol. XVII, No. 2, 1901.

11. NiESSiNG, Carl. Die Betheiligung von Centralkorper und Sphare am Aufbau des Samenfadens bei Saugethieren. Arch. f. mik. Anat., Bd. XL VIII, Hft. I, 1896.

12. Platner, Gustav. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Zelle und ihren Theilung. Arch. f. mik. Anat., Bd. XXXIil, Hft. II, 1889.


The spermatozoa shown in this plate were collected at different times from spermatojihores found in the slime tubes removed from copulating worms. In each case one spermatophore was teased in a drop or two of water, spread on a slide and dried In the air, or by heat from an alcohol flame. The preparations were stained at once with iron haematoxylin and mounted in balsam.^

For the photos taken at magnifications of 1000 and 660 diameters, a Zeiss apo. 2 mm., immers. lens, 140 apr., was used, with projection ocular 4, (diaphragm at 0) and camera draw demanded for each magnification. For the photos taken at 450 diameters, the Zeiss apo. 4 mm., lens was used, with projection ocular as above.

For convenience we shall designate the three centrosome-like bodies, as the apical granule, and the anterior and posterior granules of the middlepiece. These granules are seen also in spermatozoa found in the spermathecae, but the photo of these was overlooked in preparing the plate.

In the half-tone plate some of the granules were strengthened slightly in order to secure satisfactory printing. If any of our readers should wish to compare the reproduction ^vith the original prints, the latter may be obtained on request.

Photo 1. Spermatozoon, showing spine, head, middle-piece, part of the tail, and the three granules, one between the spine and head, one between the head and middle-piece, and one between the middle-piece and tail. Mag. 1000.

^ Some of the slides were examined unstained, in glycerine, after five hours' immersion in a saturate solution of osmic acid. The spermatozoa failed to sho^v any osmophile granules.

326 The Spermatozoa of AUolobophora Foetida

Photo 2. Spermatozoon from the same spermatophore, though not the same slide as Photo 1. The magnification is less, i. e., 660. The two granules in the middle-piece were not clearly differentiated in this preparation, and we therefore focused on the apical granule. The apical granule is more constantly differentiated than the granules in the middle-piece which require a magnification of one thousand diameters for satisfactory illustration. Photos 3, 4 and 5 further demonstrate this point.

Photo 3. See under Photo 2. Mag. 660.

Photos 4 and 5. Spermatozoa from two spermatophores collected five days apart. Mag. 450. These preparations were photographed to show the constancy of the presence of the apical granule. The lower magnification was used to bring into the field a larger number of spermatozoa than is possible with a 2 mm. lens.

Photo 6. Anterior end of a spermatozoon from the same spermatophore as the spermatozoon shown in Photo 1. On every slide dried in the air, or by heat, there are areas in which entire spermatozoa, or definite parts of them, are much fiattened, sometimes the chromatin of the head flowing into a broad, thin layer, in some cases with a line of alveolar cytoplasm on each side of the head, and sometimes the tail splitting into parallel fibres. This is due perhaps to rapid and uneven drjdng. In such spermatozoa, the three granules are much more clearly differentiated. We have selected a few preparations to illustrate this. In Photo 6, the chromatin of the anterior part of the head is flattened, as described above, and the apical granule sharply differentiated. The effect on the form of the head, produced by the flattening, is seen by comparing the part of the head next the spine, with the part cut by the edge of the photo. Mag. 1000.

Photo 7. Anterior end of a spermatozoon, showing spine and part of head. The head is much flattened and almost completely severed from the apical granule, which is thus sharply differentiated. Mag. 1000.

Photo 8. Spermatozoon showing spine, apical granule and head, the middle-piece with" anterior and posterior granules and a part of the tail. The part of the head next the middle-piece is slightly flattened and the tail also is flattened and split into parallel fibres; this condition of the head and tail allowing a sharp differentiation of the two granules in the middle, piece. Mag. 1000.

Photo 9. Spermatozoon with flattened head, showing apical granule and the two granules of the middle-piece. C. f. Photo 6. Mag. 1000.

Photo 10. Spermatozoon, showing spine, apical granule, head with anterior half slightly flattened, and part of the tail. Mag. 1000.

Photo 11. Part of the head of a spermatozoon much flattened; middlepiece showing anterior and posterior granules, and part of the tail split into parallel flbres. Mag. 1000.

The spine with apical granule was not included in this photo, because not on the same plane with the middle-piece, and thus requiring a different focus.

Photo 12. This spermatozoon M^as photographed to show the fibrillar structure of the tail, this splitting of the cytoplasm of the tail being due



9 . 10 5


11 3 _


Katharine Foot and Ella Church Strobell 337

probably, as stated above, to some unusual condition in the drying- on the slide, for it occurs only in definite areas. Mag. 660. The head of the sperm is slightly out of focus, for it was necessary to sacrifice this detail, to get an exact focus on the extremely fine fibrillae of the tail.

This preparation resembles many of the figures Ballowitz gives of the spermatozoa of Coleoptera (1).


FRANKLIN P. MALL. From the Anatomical Laboratory of Johns Hopkins University.

With 18 Text Figures.

It is much disputed whether the connective-tissue fibrils arise within cells or from a substance between them. It matters little which view is entertained, the evidence in either case is unsatisfactory. The many researches upon the development of the connective tissues have not given results fully satisfactory and the reason for this is only too evident to those who have made this subject a special study. To be sure material is very abundant and at first sight the problem is a simple one to be solved easily.

The first marked step in advance regarding the histogenesis of connective-tissue fibrils was made by Flemming in 1891/ to be followed by a second communication in 1897.^ According to Flemming, the fibrils of white fibrous tissue are formed in the protoplasm at the periphery of the cell, then gradually thrown off, after which they may still continue to grow. Simple as this is, it is extremely difficult to prove; for with this problem many others are associated to cause complications.

While there are a number of investigators who support the view of Flemming, there are also a number who oppose it. One of the most recent is Merkel,' whose studies were upon the human umbilical cord. Merkel comes to the conclusion that the white fibers are formed in the intercellular substance, as taught by Kolliker. It is unnecessary to enter more into the literature of this subject, for it would only result in arranging the authorities into one group or another, or into an indefinite group. The literature has been collected recently in the article

1 Flemming:, Virchow's Festschrift, Berlin, 1891.

2 Flemming, Archiv fiir Anatomic, 1897.

3 Merkel, Verhandl. d. Anatom. Gesellscliaft, 189.5.

330 The Development of the Counective Tissues

by Spuler/ and the reader interested in this side of the question is referred to it.

My own studies upon the development of connective-tissue fibrils began a number of years ago and my first results were published in 1891/ Up to that time I could make but little headway with sections prepared in the ordinary way, and was compelled to use frozen sections and chemicals to analyze them. By using these methods alone I think all observers will also come to the conclusion I did at the time — that the connective-tissue fibrils are intercellular in their formation. Since that time, however, methods have been improved and I have gradually learned that the development of white fibrous tissue is better studied in the skin and superficial fascia of the embryo than in tendons, and that elastic tissue is better studied in the arteries and in elastic cartilage than in the ligamentum nuchas. I also have found that in their development the reticulum of the liver, the connective tissue of the cornea and cartilage are practically identical with that of white fibrous tissue. Very recently Dr. Sabin, Fellow in Anatomy at the Johns Hopkins University, has followed successfully the development of the reticulum of the lymphatic node. While ray results are now decidedly in favor of Flemming's view, the reader will soon see that if other methods and interpretations are employed (which I now consider false), it will be quite as easy to see the fibrils developing between the cells as within them.

This all brings me to a turning point, no doubt the key to the situation. The network of fibrils which forms Wharton's tissue, to employ the best known example, is composed of a mass of anastomosing cells, a syncytium, from which the connective tissues arise. Often this syncjtium is very sharply defined and differentiated, with nuclei and a little protoplasm which is less differentiated lying upon it. When differentiated to so great an extent it is very easy to designate the main portion of the syncytium as intercellular in position as well as in origin ; and since the connective-tissue fibrils arise directly from it they are of course intercellular in origin. When studying these structures in frozen sections it is quite easy to remove the nuclei, leaving only the fibrils of the syncytium. With improved methods, however, it can be shown that in later stages of the development of the syncytium the nuclei lie upon it and are therefore easily removed. In the earlier stages the nuclei lie within the syncytium, but at this time it is too delicate to isolate by the freezing method.

Spuler, Anatom. Hefte, Bd. 7, 1896. 5 Mall, Abhandl. d. K. S. Gesellscli. d. Wiss , Bd. 17, 1891.

Franklin P. Mall 331

In very early embryos the mesenchyme is composed of individual cells which increase rapidly in protoplasm and then unite to form a dense syncytium. The protoplasm of the syncytium grows more rapidly than the nuclei divide, so that in a short time we have an extensive syncytium with a relatively small number of nuclei. In its form the syncytium appears as large bands of protoplasm with spaces between them filled at times with cells and at other times with fluid. The second condition we have in the umbilical cord of young human embryos. About this time the protoplasm of the syncytium differentiates into a fibrillar part, which forms ihe main portion of- the syncytium— the exoplasm — and a granular part, which surrounds the nucleus — the endoplasm. The fibrils of the exoplasm are very delicate and anastomose freely. When cartilage develops the exoplasm of the syncytium becomes denser and denser; the nuclei and endoplasm wander into the spaces of the exoplasm, which finally becomes semi-hyaline and takes the characteristic stain of the ground substance of cartilage. Eeticulum of the lymph node is easier studied, for here we have the least differentiated form, although the pictures are not so^ striking as they are in the development of cartilage. The development of the cornea is intermediate between reticulum and white fibrous tissue. In the development of membranous bone the process is similar to that of cartilage, only that the nuclei and endoplasm form the characteristic osteoblasts a little earlier and the ground substance deposited in the exoplasm does not stain with hgematoxylin. In the development of white fibrous tissue the nucleus and endoplasm lie upon the bundles of anastomosing exoplasm and in the course of time the anastomoses break and the exoplasm splits to give rise to the individual fibrils of white fibrous tissue.

The study of the development of elastic tissue is less satisfactory, usually, however, it develops in the middle of the exoplasm, the fibrils being extremely delicate at first, and anastomose from the beginning. Elastic tissue never develops by itself, but always in conjunction with some collagenous tissue, embryonic or mature.

Development of the Connective-Tissue Syncytium in the


Through the kindness of Professor Harrison I am enabled to follow the formation of the connective-tissue syncytium from the mesenchyme in a set of perfect serial sections of the tadpole. The sections had all been stained in hrematoxylin and congo red and were cut 7i n thick.


The Development of the Conuective Tissues

In a tadpole 3 millimeters long the mesenchyme is well defined around the spinal cord and brain, on the ventral side of the head and around the chorda dorsalis. The individual cells are made up of large irregular clumps of protoplasm filled with yolk discs and pigment granules, which almost hide the nucleus. At times the cells are arranged in rows and two cells in apposition often appear to be Joined. This, however, is not frequent, and when they are united in this way they form only a syncytial rod, for they are never united with cells on all sides to

Fig. 1.

Fig. 3.

Fig. 1. Mesenchyme around the anterior end of the chorda of a tadpole 3 mm. long. Zeiss ob. 3 oc. 4 ( x 500 diameters). Hsematoxylin and con^o red.

Fig. 2. Mesenchyme around the anterior end of the chorda of a tadpole 4 mm. long (X 500 diameters). The mesenchyme forms an extensive syncytium.

form a syncytial spherule. The best place to study the mesenchyme in this stage as well as in its further development is around the anterior end of the chorda, for here it is quite transparent and a distinct group of cells can be easily followed from stage to stage. Here the cells are large and irregular, as shown in Fig. 1. When these cells are examined carefully with a 2 mm. oil immersion lens it is seen that the nucleus is almost obscured by yolk discs and pigment granules. The

Franklin P. Mall 333

cell body itself is irregular in shape, running out into small elevations, or points, from which fine threads of protoplasm without pigment radiate. Occasionally one of these radiations reaches to and blends with a protoplasmic process from a neighboring cell. There is every indication of the beginning of an extensive syncytium formed by cells of the mesenchyme.

That the cells of the mesenchyme unite is a well known fact and can easily be demonstrated in frozen sections, and in teased specimens of the umbilical cord. In addition I need only to refer to the description and illustrations of Flemming "^ and of Spuler. " Die mit einander vielfach in netzartigem Zuzammenhang stehenden Zellen des jSTabelstranges sind ueberwiegend spindelformig odor 3-4 zipfelig und sind an den Enden in feinsten Fibrillen aufgefasert, bald dicht an der Zelle, bald erst nachdem ein Fortsatz sich ueber eine langere Strecke bin kompact erstreckt hat." '

The syncytium as seen in tadpoles 3 .mm. long progresses rapidly to form a definite tissue from which only connective tissues arise. The mesenchyme has already divided into at least two groups of tissues in the embr3'o, one destined, to form muscle and the other connective 'tissue. The syncytium destined to form the connective tissue, which I shall term the connective-tissue syncytium, begins to have its characteristic form at this time, and in its further growth it either remains as it is or gives rise to the connective tissues as we ordinarily understand them.

The point I wish to leave open is whether or not the mesenchyme was ever composed of individual cells. Was it not a syncytium throughout its development ? The most valuable and suggestive studies of His ° will have to answer this question for the present. At any rate, it is quite evident that the earlier syncytium, if it exists, is a very incomplete one, with very loose protoplasma bridges, easily broken and easity united to allow the cells to wander in all directions during the earliest stages of development. So it may be that the syncytium as seen in the tadpole 3 mm. long has existed ever since the appearance of the mesenchyme.

In a tadpole 4 mm. long the amount of mesenchyme, or connectivetissue syncytium, has increased a great deal around the brain, myotomes, etc. Around the anterior end of the chorda it is again very definite and can be studied better than elsewhere on account of its

6 Flemming, His' Archiv, 1897, S. 183. ■f Spuler, Anat. Hefte, viii, 133.

8His, Zellen uud Syncytialbildung; Protoplasmastudien ; Lecitboblast und Angioblast. Abhandl. d. K. S. Gesellschaft d. Wiss., Bd. 34, 2.5 u. 26, 1898-1900.

33-i The Development of the Connective Tissues

transparency. The main body of the cell mass has become decidedly multipolar in character and if anything, smaller than that in the embryo 3 mm. long. The yolk discs have largely disappeared while those remaining have become more transparent. On account of this change the nuclei are more distinct than in the earlier stage. The main cell body still contains many pigment granules. From each of the many poles of the cell fine threads of protoplasm arise, which divide once or twice, and anastomose into the same kind of threads from neighboring cells. In other words the multipolar cells form a complete syncytium. What now forms the main cell body gradually becomes a nodal point in an older stage of the syncytium. In this embryo we have mesenchyme pure and simple in the tail and a complete syncytium formed by the mesenchyme around the anterior end of the chorda. Between these there exist of course all intermediate stages.

In an embryo 6 mm. long no very great change has taken place in the

development of the sj^ncytium (Fig. 3). The cells in the tissue around the anterior end of the chorda appear much as in the earlier stage, with the exception that the protoplasmic bridges between the cell bodies are somewhat thicker and have a slight fibrillar structure, forming the first exoplasm. There are also some vacuoles in each process which indicate that an individual bridge is widening and breaking up into a number of bundles. The yolk discs and pigment granules are about as numerous and as definite as in the embryo 4 mm. long. The mesenchyme of the tail is now in the form of a complete syncytium on both its dorsal and ventral sides.

In another embryo slightly larger than the one just described and just before the mouth breaks through, the connective-tissue syncytium is of different arrangement in different portions of the body. Around the anterior end of the chorda the protoplasmic filaments of exoplasm form a dense network of fibrils a little more advanced than in the embryo 6 mm. long. They are now arranged as bundles between which there are numerous spaces. The endoplasm around the nucleus, including its transparent yolk discs and pigment, is spreading over the fibrillar network of exoplasm. It appears as if the main mass of endoplasm around the nucleus is being drawn upon to form more of the fibrillar exoplasm of the syncytium in its further growth. The nuclei can now be plainly seen lying upon or within the dense masses of fibrillar exoplasm of the syncytium.

In front of the brain the cells of the mesenchyme are spindle-shaped

and run out into fibrils of thicker bands of protoplasm which form a

Franklin P. Mall


coarse network. In the mandibular arch all stages of embryonal connective tissue are seen, from single cells of mesenchyme, closely crowded together immediately below the ectoderm, to a complete syncytium lying deeper in the tissue. The single cells which are closely crowded undoubtedly form a growing point from which the syncytium arises. In the tail there is a very dense connective-tissue syncytium, more so than around the anterior end of the chorda. The nuclei are encircled with endoplasm which radiates over the exoplasm in all planes. Within the endoplasm there are imbedded numerous yolk discs and pigment granules; there are also some single yolk discs scattered throughout the





Fig. 3.

Fig. 3. Mesenchyme around the anterior end of the chorda in a tadpole 6 mm. long ( X 500 diameters).

Fig. 4. The same in a tadpole 9 mm. long.

exoplasm, especially in the neighborhood of the yolk of the embryo. This condition occurs before the circulation of blood is well established, and indicates that the nutrition of the syncytium of the tail is carried on in part by the inwandering of cells from Uie yolk of the ernbrj'o.

In a stage somewhat older than the one just described, just after the mouth has broken through, the connective-tissue syncytium around the anterior end of the chorda is practically completed. Most of the nuclei, with a small amount of endoplasm around them, lie upon the exoplasm of the syncytium at its nodal points. Within the head in

330 The Development of the Connective Tissues

front of the brain the exoplasm has increased markedly in quantity, by an addition to it from the mesenchyme cells at the growing point as well as by a multiplication of the cells of the finished syncytium. The same is true of the syncytium on the ventral side of the head. In the tail the connective-tissue syncytium forms a very dense network of exoplasm with nuclei and a small amount of endoplasm lying upon, or imbedded within, some of the nodal points. The endoplasm about the nuclei form stellate bodies with their points running out into the general mass of exoplasm. Minute pigment granules, often in rows, are distributed throughout the syncytium.

In general we have here a stage similar to that described by Flemming and by Spuler, and what I have stated above confirms' the work of these investigators, though it formulates it somewhat differently.

The connective-tissue syncytium is practically complete in embryos 6 mm. long. In its further development it spreads and enlarges to form the general framework of the body. From now on there differentiate from it, with the exception of the chorda, the permanent connective tissues of the body, i. e., the skeleton, ligaments, tendons, true skin, etc.

Before discussing these tissues I shall describe the general arrangement of the syncytium in a tadpole 9 mm. long after the cartilages are beginning to form. In this embryo the syncytium around the anterior end of the chorda is again fully developed, with a difference, however, in the shape of the nuclei and endoplasm around them (Fig. 4). They are now spindle-shaped, lie upon and are connected with the exoplasm of the syncytium. In the course of time the nucleus and its endoplasm separates itself from the exoplasm of the syncytium, which is gradually converted into connective-tissue fibrils. The syncytium in front of the brain of the embryo is formed of bundles of anastomosing exoplasm with nuclei at some of the nodal points (Fig. 5). Each nucleus has a small quantity of endoplasm around it, forming a spindle-shaped mass which runs out into points to be lost in the exoplasm of the syncytium. In specimens of this kind it is easy to view these cells with their endoplasm as the connective-tissue cells and the exoplasm of the syncytium as the intercellular substance were not the development of the syncytium taken into consideration. Within the syncytium certain of the fibrils are more sharply defined than the rest, which indicates that in addition to the shifting of the nucleus and its envelope of endoplasm there is already some differentiation Avithin the exoplasm. The syncytium in the ventral side of the head is much like that just described. As this is followed towards the tail there is a gradual transformation of

Franklin P. Mall


the arrangement of the bundles of exoplasm into an extremely dense network. In the tail the endoplasm around the nucleus forms a stellate mass with fibrils from the points running over into the fibrillar exo])lasm of the main bod}- of the syncytium (Fig. (3). Within the exoplasm there are some fibrils more sliarply defined than the rest, which often appear to be composed of rows of extremely minute granules.

When the connective-tissue syncytium is fully developed in the tadpole it shows practically all of the characteristics found in mammalian embryos. I have made numerous chemical tests with the syncytium in the embryo pig, as an abundance of this material is constantly at my disposal. The tests were made with various stains, and dio-estive fer





Fig. 5.

Fig. 6.

Fig. 5. Connective-tissue syncytium just below the ectoderm in tbe anterior part of tlie head of a tadpole 9 mm. long ( x 500 diameters.)

Fig. 6. From the tail of the tadpole from which Fig. 5 was drawn.

ments npon sections which had been cut in paraffin. Frozen sections were also used a great deal, with more or less satisfactory results, to control the above, and to test with acetic acid, caustic potach, pancreatin, and pepsin.

The Coxxective-Tissue Syxcytium ix the Pig.

The connective-tissue syncytium is fully developed in the embryo ■pig from 9 to 12 mm. long. At this time it corresponds wdth that of the tadpole 6 mm. long. In the greater portion of the embryo, however, the syncytium is pretty well obscured by its numerous nuclei with the exception of that in the skin, around the brain and on the dorsal

338 The Development of the Connective Tissues

side of the heart and lung. In these regions it is formed of an extensive network of exoplasm with nuclei at the nodal points. In other words, there are multipolar cells with anastomoses of their prolongations. At this time the nuclei are oval in shape, without the surrounding endoplasm as in the tadpole. At certain points there are indications of a beginning of a differentiation into cartilage and into white fibrous tissue, but beyond this there is the simple syncytium.

All the above may be seen in ordinary thin sections stained with acid fuchsin, but it is better shown in specimens stained with haematoxylin and Congo red. My best specimens Avere obtained by staining the sections with Mallory's connective-tissue stain,* which tinges the nuclei and surrounding endoplasm, if present, slightly red and the exoplasm of the syncytium intensely blue. We have modified this stain somewhat by omitting the water and intensifying the bhie. The method now employed in our laboratory, for which we are indebted to Dr. Sabin, is as follows :

Specimens hardened in Zenker's fluid are cut in paraffin and fixed on the glass slide by the water method. They are then stained with fuchsin, yV psr cent, until they take up a proper amount of color and then without washing are fixed for a few minutes in a saturated aqueous solution of phosphomolybdic acid diluted ten times. They are next washed in alcohol, 95 per cent, and stained a very short time in the following solution: Aniline blue soluble in water, 1; orange G,, 2; oxalic acid, 2; boiling water, 100. Next they are washed in alcohol, 95 per cent, blotted, cleared in xylol, and mounted in Canada balsam.

With this modification there seems to be no difficulty in obtaining an excellent double stain in nearly all cases, which is not so with the ordinary Mallory stain. Washing the sections with water has a tendency to remove the red and this is obviated to a great extent by substituting alcohol. The blue in this modification is strengthened in order that the section need not remain in the aqueous blue stain long enough to remove the red. Successful specimens are especially valuable to trace out the exoplasm of the syncytium which is somewhat matted together when stained with hfematoxylin and congo red.

Digestion of the Syncytium in Pancreatin and Pepsin.

It is extremely difficult to obtain satisfactory results by digesting sections of embryos in either pancreatin or pepsin. If the test is made with frozen sections the pancreatin causes them to swell into a transpar 9 Mallory, Jour, of Exp. Med., Vol. 5, 1901.

Franklin P. Mall 33D

ent slimy mass, dii'Ecult to handle or to stain in any very satisfactory way. In pepsin the section becomes firmer, opaque, brittle, and it must be crushed to separate the nuclei in order to study the syncytium, in case it is not digested. Quite satisfactory results are obtained by digesting sections of embryos, which have been attached to glass slides by the water method. It is of course necessary to use sections from embryos which have been hardened in alcohol, in order to obtain results similar to those obtained from frozen sections, Not only does this statement apply to embryos but to tissues in general. With pancreatin, however, the digestion upon the glass slide is very unsatisfactory, for the alkali in the solution nearly always detaches the sections, probably on account of the great amount of mucin in them. The younger the embryo the more difficult it is to retain the sections upon the glass slides.

Not only is it difficult to obtain fairly good sections which have been digested, but there is in addition the complication of unequal as well as contradictory results. When one point appeared to be worked out in a satisfactory manner, later tests contradicted it, and so on. It is therefore with some hesitancy that I give the tests with digestive ferments upon the connective-tissue syncytium.

In general it is quite certain that when the main mass of the syncytium is formed of exoplasm it is digestible in pancreatin and bicarbonate of soda. This treatment causes the section, if fresh, to become a swollen and slimy mass in which the delicate fibrils can be seen after it is treated with picric acid. The ground substance of the cartilage, if present, is well isolated and the more developed fibrils of the perichondrium can also be seen. It appears that the more the syncytium is differentiated the more it resists pancreatic digestion. In case a section of an older embryo is digested upon the glass slide it will be found that at the end of 3-4 hours all of the nuclei are dissolved, while all of the fibrils of the exoplasm of the S5^ncytium, the white fibrils and the ground substance of the cartilage remain. In a section of this kind, which includes the umbilical cord, all stages of the syncytium can be studied; that in the cord is not differentiated, while that toward the back is changed into white fibrous tissue and cartilage. In the aorta there are at this time numerous elastic fibers. With Mallory's stain it is shown that a beautifuL network of fibers alone remains, the nuclei having begn digested in the pancreatin. Furthermore, it is shown by staining with Weigert's elastic tissue stain that the elastic fibrils have also been dissolved. The above-named tests were made many times on embryos from 7 mm. to 20 cm. in length. The older the tissue the

340 The Development of the Connective Tissues

easier it is to isolate fibrils by digesting in pancreatin and bicarbonate of soda.

The action of pepsin and hydrochloric acid upon the connective-tissue syncytium appears to be just the opposite of that of pancreatin. The younger the syncytium the more ditticult it is to digest it in pepsin. A section of a young embryo becomes opaque and shrinks a little when placed in dilute hydrochloric acid and pepsin. It is shown by examining it with the microscope at this time that the nuclei are opaque, and the white fibrous tissue, if present, has become transparent. After the sections have been kept in the digestive fluid for a few hours at 37° C. they still remain opaque and are somewhat elastic, for pressing a section under a covergiass only spreads it but does not break it. When stained with magenta the delicate fibrils of the syncytium are easily recognized. When the sections are digested for 34 hours or longer they usually fall into granules, showing that the syncytium is fully broken up. This is especially the case if the sections are from embryos 10 cm. long or longer. It is only in the smaller embryos that the syncytium is well developed and in them we are to make the valuable tests. The sections of an embryo 5 cm. long were still opaque at the end of 48 hours, with considerable elasticity, indicating that the ' syncytium must be present in considerable quantity. Furthermore, some fibrils could be seen from time to time in bits of crushed sections. The cartilage and white fibrous tissue of the perichordium resisted the action of the pepsin for 24 hours, but at the end of 48 hours they were fully dissolved.

Sections of embryos hardened in alcohol can be easily digested upon the glass slide and then stained with Mallory's connective-tissue stain or with Weigert's elastic-tissue stain. If the digestion is continued 24 or 48 hours usually all of the connective tissue and syncytium are dissolved, leaving only broken cells to outline the structures of the body. When the digestion is not complete it is found that usually the white fibrous tissue is dissolved first, then the cartilage and then the syncytium. A section through the body of an embryo, including the umbilical cord, has in it from the ventral to the dorsal side all stages of the syncytium in the process of differentiation. When such sections are digested to a proper degree, usually from 24 to 36 hours, it is often found that the white fibrous tissue of the body wall and back are dissolved while the syncytium of the cord is almost entirely intact; the cartilages are destroyed only in part.

It appears then that the connective-tissue syncytium is more resistant towards the action of pepsin than is white fibrous tissue. The more mucoid, that is, the younger, the syncytium is the more resistant it is

Franklin P. Mall 341

toward the action of pepsin. The action of pancreatin is in a measure the opposite.


Cartilage appears as a band of condensed tissue on either side of the head of tadpoles just before the mouth breaks through. In the region destined to become cartilage the nuclei of the connective-tissue syncytium become first slightly enlarged, for nuclear figures are here more numerous. The eudoplasm around the nuclei extends rapidly, and due to the multiplication of nuclei now fills the entire space and partly obscures the exoplasm of the syncytium. Where the endoplasm passes over into the exoplasm there is now a sharp line of demarcation making it appear as if the capsule of the cartilage cell were forming.

In tadpoles about 6 mm. long, immediately after the mouth has broken through, the nuclei of the precartilage are surrounded by a solid mass of endoplasm, thus filling up all the space between them. Where the nuclei are more separated the exoplasm is at the periphery of the endoplasm, but where the nuclei are packed together the exoplasm is wholly obscured. The endoplasm stains quite intensely with Congo red, not more so, however, than the protoplasm of other cells.

A tadpole 9 mm. long has in it slender bands of cartilage fully developed from which the ground substance is directly continued into the exoplasm of the surrounding syncytium (Fig. 7). The best pictures are found at the tips of growing cartilage which are being added to by a transformation of the neighboring syncytium. Where the border of the cartilage is sharply defined the transition into the surrounding tissue is not marked, for its boundary line is obscured by a layer of flat cells. In a suitable specimen it is seen in passing from the syncytium over into the cartilage that the nuclei gradually become more and more crowded and the bundles of exoplasm become smaller and smaller. The nuclei gradually come to lie in the meshes formed by this exoplasm, that is, they have been extruded from the syncytium. With this change of relations between the nuclei and the exoplasm there is an increase of the endoplasm which now fills the meshes, encroaches upon the exoplasm, and partly obscures it. At this time the endoplasm of the syncytium stains with congo red, but as the finished cartilage is approached, the nuclei and surrounding endoplasm are separated by delicate lines or fibrils of exoplasm, which stain with hgematoxylin. These lines now widen, stain more intensely with hgematoxylin, and form the ground substance of the cartilage. The endoplasm becomes clearer and clearer, separates from the ground substance, and finally encircles



The Development of the Connective Tissues

the nucleus onl}^, leaving a space between it and the ground substance. In other words, we have a thickening and transformation of the exoplasm of the syncytium to form the ground substance of the cartilage, while the nuclei and endoplasm of the syncytium become the cartilage cells. This statement is found to be true in following the development of cartilage from embryo to embryo as well as in the transformation of the connective-tissue syncytium when cartilage grows into it.

The very early change in the syncytium preceding the formation of cartilage is much more easily followed in tadpoles than in mammals, the pig, for instance. On the other hand, when the cartilage is once formed its further growth is better studied in pig's embryo. •





r -to

■ \ ■*xi

■ •'■.' i-->

■ V- .-•^'\;. :

.--._ - ■■<;:.

< -^p



■ ■■.


Fig. 8.

Fig. 9.

Fig. 7. Transition between cartilage and syncytium in a tadpole 9 mm. long. ( X 350 diameters). Hsematoxylin and eosin.

Fig. 8. Beginning of the occipital cartilage in a pig's embryo 16 mm. long ( x 250 diameters). Mallory's stain.

Fig. 9. Transition between the syncytium and cartilage in an embryo pig 24 mm. long. The specimen had been macerated in Miiller's fluid 24 hours before it was hardened in alcohol ( x 250 diameters). Hsematoxylin and congo red. The central dark zone stained with hematoxylin while the zone of ground substance between it and the syncytium only took the congo red.

The beginning of the formation of cartilage can be recognized in pig's embryos from 10 to 15 mm. long, in the condensed mass of cells around the chorda. When sections which have been stained in acid fuchsin are studied the connective-tissue syncytium can be followed to the areas of precartilage, but not into them, for the numerous nuclei obscure entirely the exoplasm of the syncytium. In sections stained by Mallory's method the beautiful and definite exo^olasm of the syncytium can be followed to the precartilage, and between its numerous nuclei. As this tissue is followed from the region of the spinal cord towards the chorda it is found that exoplasm becomes denser and denser and the

Franklin P. Mall 343

nuclei somewhat larger with numerous karyokinetic figures. In the neighborhood of the chorda the exoplasm of the syncytium is so dense that it appears as a granular mass between the nuclei. The sheath of the chorda is stained intensely blue. The endoplasm which is quite marked around the nuclei of the syncytium near the spinal cord gradually disappears as the chorda is approached. By most methods of hardening the nuclei of the precartilage become so packed that the exoplasm of the syncytium is entirely obscured. Especially is this true in the development of the cartilage of the arm. In an embryo pig, 12 mm. long, which had been macerated in Miiller's fluid for 24 hours, washed in water, then in alcohol, stained in hiematoxylin and congo red, the precartilage of the arm could also be analyzed. The nuclei of the precartilage are all surrounded with a continvious mass of protoplasm, stained red, which is directly continuous with the exoplasm of the neighboring connective-tissue syncytium. In specimens which have been macerated it is very difficult to separate the endoplasui from the exoplasm of the syncytium. Therefore between the nuclei there is one continuous mass of protoplasm practically of the same structure.

In pigs' embryos from 15 to 20 mm. long the cartilages of the vertebral bodies are well developed and are pretty sharply defined. In sections treated with Mallory's stain it is found that on the dorsal side of the bodies of the vertebrae the ground substance of the cartilage is directly continuous Avith the exoplasm of the connective-tissue syncytium. By all odds the best place to study the early development of the cartilage is in the occipital cartilages, which lie on either side of the dorsal middle line. At this time the exoplasm of the connective-tissue syncytium in the region of the occipital precartilage is in the form of sharpened bands encircling definite openings, some of which contain nuclei (Fig. 8).

In a pig's embryo a little over 2 cm. long the main cartilages of the body are all well developed, and in this specimen we obtain the best pictures showing the relation of cartilage to the connective-tissue syncytium. Again, the occipital cartilage shows all the transitional stages from the completed ground substance to the exoplasm of the syncytium (Fig. 10). Passing from the ectoderm of the embryo towards the cartilage it is seen that the main spaces between the exoplasm of the syncytium become gradually smaller and smaller, with the nuclei shifting into them as the cartilage is approached. This takes place before any true ground substance is deposited, as the figure shows. Next we reach a zone in which the exoplasm has ground substance deposited between

344 The Development of the Connective Tissues

its fibrils. Finally, when the cartilage is complete, the fibrils of the exoplasm are entirely obscured by the ground substance.

Sections stained by Mallory's method show that the endoplasm is almost wanting around the nuclei of the syncytium immediately below the ectoderm. Practically none is seen until the nuclei shift into the spaces between the exoplasm in the neighborhood of the cartilage. In this region the nuclei are larger than those more distant and in the region of the completed cartilage both nuclei and endoplasm are several times as large as in the surrounding syncytium. When the cartilage is fully developed the relatively large granular nuclei are encircled with vacuolated endoplasm. Each nucleus and endoplasm is encircled by a transparent space separating it from the surrounding exoplasm or ground substance. In specimens which have been macerated in Miiller's fluid for a day, then washed and hardened in alcohol, and stained with hsematoxylin and congo red, it is seen that no space exists between the endoplasm about the nucleus and the ground substance. By this method the endoplasm becomes more marked and the ground substance less marked than in the specimens hardened in Zenker's fluid and stained by Mallory's method.

Specimens of developing cartilage macerated as described above show at the jimcture of the cartilage v;-ith the connective-tissue syncytium a zone of ground substance which will noL stain with hgematoxylin, but tinges with congo red (Fig. 9). Passing from the surrounding syncytium into the developing cartilage, the nuclei become larger, the exoplasm increases, condenses and obscures the endoplasm. Gradually the fibrillated exoplasm becomes granular, making it appear as if the nuclei were imbedded in a continuous granular mass. This all seems to be due to the maceration in Mliller's fluid. On the periphery of the cartilage there is a zone of ground substance which does not stain with hematoxylin but tinges with congo red (Fig. 9). This zone is of the width of one or two nuclei which are surrounded with some endoplasm. The completed ground substance, which stains with hgematoxylin, begins quite abruptly; the nuclei are encircled with a considerable quantity of endoplasm, filling almost entirely the spaces in Avhich they lie.

The definite conclusion to be drawn from the above specimens is that the ground substance of the cartilage is deposited directly into the exoplasm of the syncytium and its nuclei and endoplasm become the cartilage cells.

Not only can the direct connection between the ground substance and the exoplasm be seen in the occipital cartilage, but also at the dorsal side of the bodies of the vertebrjB, the petrous portion of the temporal

Franklin P. Mall 345

cartilage, and occasionally in other cartilages of the head as well as in the ribs. Otherwise the boundary line between the cartilage and the surrounding connective-tissue syncytium is quite sharp and is obliterated by the dense tissue and nuclei of the perichondrium. Specimens stained by Mallory's method are the best by all odds for studying the transition of syncytium into cartilage, for in them the ground substance and exoplasm are stained intensely blue, while the nuclei and endoplasm are shrunken and tinged red.

After the cartilage is once well formed its further growth is interstitial as well as peripheral. Not only do the nuclei divide, but the ground substance increases out of proportion, forcing the nuclei apart. This is beautifully illustrated in the sheath of the chorda, which is gradually incorporated with the vertebral cartilage. Often the thickened sheath appears as a great stump with its roots extending out into the cartilage.

In an embryo 3 cm. long the occipital and petrous cartilages have extended greatly, but still show beautifully the connection of the ground substance with the exoplasm of the syncytium. The transitions from the nuclei, endoplasm and exoplasm, into cartilage are again as distinct as in embryos 2 cm. long. This indicates that the syncytium at the peripher} is being changed into and added to the cartilage already formed.

In older embryos the cartilage becomes separated more and more from the surrounding syncytium, Avith the exception where the cartilage is still extending into it. In an embryo 5 cm. long this condition is still present in the occipital cartilage and in the sternum. The borders of the vertebra and most of the other cartilages are well defined and are beginning to ossify at different points.


The frontal and mandibular are the first membranous bones to appear in embryos about 2 cm. long. In smaller embryos no indication of the formation of bone can be seen. Sections through the frontal region of embryos 2 cm. long stained by Mallory's method shoAV that the bone begins by a very blue zone of hyaline deposit in the exoplasm of the connective-tissue syncytium (Fig. 11). The deposit appears to be equally distributed throughout the exoplasm within this zone. The nuclei stain somewhat more intensely than those of the surrounding syncytium, and the endoplasm around them is increased in quantity. Nuclei and endoplasm now show all the characteristics of osteoblasts and may be considered such. Sections certainly show definitely that when the syncytium turns into bone the nuclei become more sharply defined, the

346 The Developn\ent of the Connective Tissues

endoplasm increases greatly in quantity, and the bone substance is either transformed exoplasm or is deposited into it. This latter process is first marked by the fibrils of the exoplasm becoming sharper and staining more intensely blue than before. Soon, however, the substance between the fibrils of the exoplasm takes up the blue stain, making it appear as if the tissue were injected with a blue color. In fact I thought for a long time that in this region there was an extravasation which stained blue, until I recognized the osteoblasts in older stages. Furthermore, the extravasation proved to be constant and took on the characteristic bone stain when treated with hfematoxylin and eongo red. The gradations in color from hferaatoxylin to congo red are in the order, nuclei, endoplasm, exoplasm, and bone substance.

The frontal and mandibular bones have increased in size in embryos 3 cm. long, the bone deposit is beginning to radiate into the surrounding

^ ^ 2 ^-^ '^ ^


Fig. 10. Fig. 11.

Fig. 10. Section through the occipital cartilage of au embryo pig 20 mm. long ( X 250 diameters). The ground substance is deposited in the exoplasm of the syncytium.

Fig. 11. Section through the frontal bone of a pig 30 mm. long ( x 250 diameters).

exoplasm, and the osteoblasts are larger and more numerous along these radiations. The bone radiations are still more pronounced in embryos 5 cm. long and are lost in the prefibrous tissue which is now arising from the surrounding exoplasm.

Most instructive specimens showing the - extension of membranous bone as well as of the beginning of periosteal ossification are obtained from embryos 5 cm. long, stained by Mallory's method. In such specimens it is seen that the frontal bone is well started, with bone corpuscles imbedded within it, and osteoblasts encircling it. The bone substance with its radiations stains intensely blue, and it is seen that the radiations, with the accompanying osteoblasts, extend into the membranous skull and are gradually lost in the exoplasm and prefibrous tissue. At the extreme tips of the bone radiations the scattering fibrils are surrounded with osteoblasts. At the outer border of the

Franklin P. Mall 347

zone of osteoblasts, where there are transition forms between them and the nuclei of the syncytium, there are heavier fibrils of bone radiations between the nuclei. Passing from these fibrils towards the finished bone it is seen that they soon unite to form bundles which are soon stuck together to form the apparently homogeneous bone substance. After the bone is once well formed the primitive Haversian canals are filled with osteoblasts and a core of connective-tissue syncytium in which course the blood-vessels.

The difference in appearance between the beginning of bone in embryos 3 and 5 cm. long is probably due to the perfect syncytium in the former and the syncytium differentiating into prefibrous tissue in the latter. In the first the bone is deposited directly in the exoplasm, while in the second the exoplasm is first partly changed into prefibrous tissue and then into bone.

There are marked changes in the cartilages of embryos 5 cm. long, preparatory to their ossification. The shafts of the clavicle and ribs are encircled with a shell of bone and the transverse processes of the vertebra are beginning to ossify. In suitable sections of the latter it is seen that the perichondrium is thickened and filled with osteoblasts. Not only do the osteoblasts appear to be arising from the nuclei of the perichondrium, but also from the outer layer of cartilage cells. Between the osteoblasts the bone fibrils first appear; they stain intensely blue with Mallory's stain, more so than the ground substance of the cartilage, extend throughout the perichondrium and extend somewhat into the cartilage. In order to separate the bone fibrils from cartilage it is necessary to stain sections with hsematoxylin and congo red. Such sections show that the greater part of the bone is first deposited in the perichondrium, and only a small amount, if any, in the ground substance of the periphery of the cartilage, in periosteal ossification.

So it appears that in periosteal ossification the connective-tissue syncytium changes partly into cartilage and partly into white fibrous tissue before it gives rise to bone. Possibly the study of some suitable sections from embryos smaller than 5 cm. will give results identical with those obtained for the frontal bone, but so far I have been unable to obtain such sections.

White Fibeous Tissue.

In the study of the development of cartilage and bone definite spots .can be located and followed from stage to stage. To do the same with white fibrous tissue and the other connective-tissue fibrils is much more difficult. Finally, after trying many regions, I settled on the develop

348 The Development of the Connective Tissues

ment of the connective tissues in the skin on the dorsal side of the body, between the two shoulder blades. Here there is the underlying broad trapezius, which marks a region in the section of the skin on one side with the epidermis on the other. Some 50 stages of this region were cut from embryos measuring from 1 to 30 cm. AIJ: important stages were hardened in Zenker's fluid, stained by Mallory's method, as well as by other methods. A parallel set of specimens was also made by macerating them in Midler's fluid for 24 hours, washing, hardening, etc., then staining in hsematoxylin and congo red. All the stages were also frozen, cut and examined fresh, then treated with dilute acetic acid and with caustic potash, after which they were stained with magenta and other aniline dyes. While the specimens stained by Mallory's method give the most definite and permanent preparations, the macerated and fresh preparations give an excellent control. Mallory's method stains pretty much all connective tissues in the embryos, while with macerations and digestions there is some differentiation.

It is shown by means of digestion in pancreatin that the earliest definite fibrils in the syncytial exoplasm are resistant in fresh specimens as well as in hardened specimens which have been fixed upon the glass slide. In acetic acid and in caustic potash the exoplasm and its collagenous derivatives become transparent in embryos 25 mm. long. In larger embryos there is a residual syncytium which resists acetic acid, even when boiled in it for hours, and probably is related in some way to yellow elastic tissue. This will be considered later.

In general the connective-tissue syncytium is fully developed in embryos 15 mm. long. It is practically of equal density throughout the skin. The nuclei are mostly round or somewhat oval, usually quite naked or with only a small amount of endoplasm around them. The exoplasm is very delicate, with a slight amount of fibrillation.

In an embryo 2 cm. long the connective-tissue syncytium has begun to differentiate; many nuclei are oval in shape and they are enveloped with an increased quantity of endoplasm, which runs out on either side of the nucleus, forming two poles— the well-known connective " tissue cells " of the embryo. The nuclei lying just below the ectoderm have the least quantity of endoplasm around them. As the muscle lying under the skin is approached the nuclei increase in number, forming quite a dense layer over it. Analyzing this layer by means of Mallory's stain shows that it is formed of syncytium which is drawn out parallel with the long axis of the body. The fibrillated exoplasm tends to form parallel bundles which anastomose quite frequently with one another. In this region the nuclei are markedly spindle-shaped, Avith the

Franklin P. Mall 3i9

surrounding endoplasm running out into two poles to be lost in the exoplasm.

Digesting the syncytium and the prefibrous tissue in pancreatin shows that they resist its action to a marked extent. In order to obtain any satisfactory result the digestion must be mild, i. e., for a short timeat room temperature. Great quantities of resistant white fibers cannot be obtained from the skin by means of digestion in pancreatin until the embryo is about 15 cm. long. Although no elastic fibers can be demonstrated in the skin of embryos 15 cm. long, frozen sections of it will resist boiling acetic acid for a very long time. In embryos 25 mm. long the first prefibrous tissue of the perimysium resists pancreatin more than the remaining syncytium. The fibrils of the prefibrous tissue also swell in dilute actic acid. These reactions, together with the position of the tissue in question, make it very definite that the changes in the syncytium immediately over the muscle mark the beginning of white fibrous tissue.

The prefibrous tissue of an embryo 2 cm: long is formed of anastomosing fibrils which are in direct connection with the exoplasm lying between the perimysium and the ectoderm. Immediately below the ectoderm the meshes of the exoplasm are smaller, the syncytium thus forming a more compact felt upon which the epithelium rests.

In embryos 3 cm. long the perimysium is a little more compact and sends reflections between the muscle fasciculi. The layer immediately below the ectoderm is a little more extensive than before, while between it and the perimysium the syncytium is quite typical. The two zones of altered exoplasm have approached each other in an embryo 4 cm, long, leaving a narrow zone of typical syncytium between them, within which the first lymph channels have appeared.

In the next stage, 5 cm. long, all of the exoplasm of the syncytium of the skin has changed considerably, being more fibrillated, with some of the fibrils staining more intensely than the rest (Fig. 13). The prefibrous perimysium is advanced one step more now, being composed of layers of fibrillated exoplasm, the layers anastomosing between themselves, and the fibrils within a given layer forming a dense network. True white fibrous tissue is not yet present.

The prefibrous tissue has extended still more in an embryo 7 cm. long. Its development is most advanced in the perimysium, where the individual fibrils are beginning to become wavy. In a transverse section of the body it is seen that the development is most advanced in the neighborhood of the vertebral column and least in the umbilical cord. From without inward the permysium is most developed, diminishing in

350 The Development of the Connective Tissues

the intermuscular septa, ligaments, superficial fascia, and cutis, the least development being immediately helow the epidermis. Even here it is no longer typical syncytium, but partly differentiated. The process continues in embryos 9, 10 and 12 cm. long; most of the prefibrous tissue is still within the syncytium. Immediately over the muscle a further differentiation of the prefibrous tissue of the perimysium has taken place. In this narrow zone the fibrils are arranged in parallel bundles apparently communicating with one another as well as being continuous with the neighboring exoplasm. In this region the individual fibrils anastomose with one another. Prefibrous tissue is changing into fibrous tissue very rapidly in an embryo 16 cm. long. The perimysium, composed of parallel fibers, sends processes of wavy fibers into the superficial fascia, and from them fibers enter the cutis. All of the tissue between the epidermis and the underlying muscle is composed of these

^ " '-^ 9 -^:' ^ ^ f

^- ^ ^

Fig. 12. Fig. 13.

Fig. 12. Section through the skin of a pig 5 cm. long ( x 250 diameters). The first white fibers are just forming in the exoplasm.

Fig. 13. Section through the skin of a pig 16 cm. long ( x 250 diameters). The nuclei and endoplasm on the left are immediately below the root of a hair.

wavy fibers, either isolated or connected with the exoplasm, which is very fibrillated. The process is quite complete in embryos from 20 to 30 cm. long. In the older embryos, however, the density of the fibers is greater in the skin than in the underlying superficial fascia.

The individual fibrils after once well formed are of unequal size, often appearing in bands and frequently anastomosing. The anastomoses are finally broken and the bands and thicker fibers split into the individual fibrils.

I have now followed the development of the white fibers from the exoplasm of the sj'ncytium without considering the nuclei and the endoplasm. What follows relates to them.

In smaller embryos (2 cm.), which have been stained by Mallory's method, the nuclei are round or oval with a small amount of endoplasm around them. When the tissue is macerated in Miiller's fluid for 24

Franklin P. Mall 351

hours before cutting, the amount of endoplasm around the nucleus is greatly increased, showing that by Mallory's method it becomes , shrunken. x\s the embryo grows the endojDlasm increases in quantity until in specimens 5 cm. long it forms a spindle-shaped mass around the nucleus, the tips of which run out into the exoplasm and are lost. Hajid in hand with the expansion of the exoplasm the endoplasm continues to grow until in embr^^os 10 to 13 cm. long it is ditl'erentiated to correspond with that of the exoplasm. In the neighborhood of the first white fibers the nuclei and endoplasm are arranged in rows, while, where the exoplasm is changing into prefibrous tissue, they are as before. More towards the epidermis the spindle-shaped endoplasm is much larger, indicating that it is also active in the conversion of exoplasm into prefibrous tissue. At this time the hairs are beginning to develop and below their roots the nuclei are multiplying and accumulating, apparently preparing much new endoplasm and exoplasm at these points (Fig. 13). At any rate, in larger embryos (15-20 cm.), there are islands of new syncytium at the roots of the embryonic hairs, making it appear as if the soft syncytium is present at these points to enable the hairs, in their further growth, to sink into the skin with greater ease. In the rest of the skin the embryonic white fibers, the prefibrous tissue, and fibrillated exoplasm are accompanied with nuclei surrounded with a spindle-shaped mass of endoplasm, Not only are all of these stages seen in the skin, but also between the radiations of embryonic white fibers from the perimysium into the superficial fascia.

After the activity of the nuclei and endoplasm has produced enough exoplasm to give rise to all the white fibers of the skin, which is the case in embryos from 20 to 30 cm. long, they cease to be so prominent and sink back into the form of irregular cells. Around the roots of the hairs there are still the islands of quite typical sjmcytium. Probably in both the scattered cells (nuclei and endoplasm) as well as in the islands of syncytium we have forces which can develop new white fibers, should circumstances so demand.'" The syncytium at the roots of tlie luiirs undergoes a further differentiation in the development of elastic tissue, v/hich I shall take up presently.

It appears then that the connective-tissue syncytium grows rapidly before it gives rise to white fibrous tissue. The nuclei multiply, the

'i»Reddinghaus (Ziegler's Beitrage, 29, 1901) lias shown tbat in inflammation of the omentum the fixed cells become active and form a syncytium which is in every respect identical with the connective tissue syncytium of the embryo. His pictures are in every respect like the normal specimens I obtained with Mallory's method.

353 The Development of the Connective Tissues

endoplasm becomes larger, the exoplasm increases absolutely and relatively in quantity. The nuclei and endoplasm form the well-known bipolar cells, the tips of which rvm into and are lost in the exoplasm, ■» making it appear as if the exoplasm were spinning its fibrils from the granular endoplasm. Soon the fibrillated exoplasm is drawn out intobundles, the bands between them beginning to break, thus forming the prefibrous tissue. The process of drawing out continues and the prefibrous tissue is changed into embryonic white fibers, which at first are irregular in size and anastomose occasionally. In the further development the bridges break and the thicker fibers split into the individual fibrils of white fibrous tissue.

The first white fibers apjDcar in the perimysium, then they, grow as radiations into the superficial fascia and cutis. Not only do the nuclei of the syncytium multiply, but the exoplasm increases much out of proportion. This continues in the prefibrous and embryonic fibrous tissues by stretching, widening, and splitting the individual fibrils.


The reticulum of the 13'mph node is developed directly from the connective-tissue syncytium, and is probably the least differentiated of the connective tissues. This view has been advanced by writers, most recently by Waldeyer. In its differentiation it begins much like white fibrous tissue and when fully developed is about as far advanced as the tissue I have termed prefibrous. When white fibrous tissue and reticulum develop side by side it is impossible to separate them in their early stages, but when the early development of the perimysium is compared with the develojjment of reticulum of a lymph node it is noticed that the arrangement of the fibrils is different, although their development is parallel. In the liver the reticulum develops from Kupffer's cells.

The development of rhe reticulum of the lymph node is now under investigation by Dr. Sabin who has given me the following resume with the permission to publish it. " The lymph node has just appeared as a plexiform mass of lymph ducts in embryo pigs 4 cm. long. These duets can be injected from more distant lymph channels and within the node they are relatively large and are separated from one another by bridges of tissue, or primitive lymph cords. The lymph cords are composed of a syncytium of delicate bands of exoplasm, with oval nuclei surrounded by spindle-shaped endoplasm. In addition there are many round cells which lie in the meshes — the first lymph cells. By the time the embryo is 10 cm. long the lymph node is one millimeter in diameter..

Franklin P. Mall 353

The whole node is composed of a delicate syncj'^tium which now shows all of the characteristics of a fnliy developed reticulum, with many nuclei and endoplasm lying upon it. The meshes are partly filled with lymph cells. At the surface of the node the reticulum is continuous with the syncytium of the surrounding tissue. That there is a continuous network is best seen in sections stained by Mallory's method, which also show that the meshes are smaller and the fibrils are more delicate than those of the surrounding syncytium.

" The node has grown to be 3 mm. in diameter in embryos 20 cm. long. Each node is now surrounded with a delicate capsule of prefibrous tissue, and the reticulum, prefibrous tissue and surrounding syncytium form one continuous network. Upon the reticulum there are but few spindle cells and within the meshes there are many lymph cells."

From the above description it is seen that the reticulum develops directly from the exoplasm of the syncytium, while the nuclei and endoplasm are converted into cells which' lie upon the reticulum fibrils. After the node is outlined the surrounding syncytium develops into prefibrous tissue to form the capsule.

The study of sections of the pig's intestine stained by Mallory's method shows definitely that both white fibrous tissue and reticulum are developed directly from the syncytium lying between the muscle wall and the epithelium. In embryos 20 cm. long there are small villi and rudimentary crypts present, but there is no marked muscularis muscosfB to separate the submucosa from the mucosa. There is no line of demarcation between the reticulum of the mucosa and the white fibrous tissue of the submucosa, more than a few scattered muscle cells of the muscularis mucosae. The tissue around the bases of the embryonic crypts is fibrillated, wavy, and generally parallel with the muscularis mucosa3, stains more intensely and corresponds with the prefibrous tissue found elsewhere. From this layer there are gradual gradations towards reticulum in the villi on one side to a less developed white fibrous tissue in the submucosa ou the other side. The degree of development of the layer of prefibrous tissue of the intestine is about the same as that of the skin of the same embryo.

The results here given suggest very much that reticulum represents an embryonic form of white fibrous tissue. That these two tissues blend and arise from a common syncytium does not speak for their identity any more than it does for the identity of either cartilage or bone with white fibrous tissue. As the matter now stands all of these tissues, including that of the cornea, are to be classed as collagenous, but still as distinct tissues. I have recently given the reasons for classing

354 Tlie Development of the Connective Tissues ,

reticulum as a separate tissue and will not enter upon the discussion " of this subject at present. At any rate, if these reasons are overcome, reticulum will remain as peculiar white fibrous tissue not fully developed, in case we can consider any tissue in the adult body as embryonic.

In examining various tissues for the development of reticulum, I found that in the liver it arises from Kupffer's endothelial cells, which here also form a beautiful syncytium.'"

Frozen sections of the liver of a pig 3 cm. long are very delicate, and can easily be crushed under a coverglass. When such preparations are stained with a little magenta it is seen that a network of fibrils lies between clumps of liver cells. It can now be determined that all of the fibrils surround the capillaries and are formed by prolongations from Kupffer's cells. The fibrils, or rather the syncytium, is delicate, can easily be stretched and broken by slight pressure upon the cover glass. Such sections are also very easily broken into granules by giving them a delicate shake in water. When digested a short time in pancreatin at room temperature the liver cells break up and fall out, leaving the delicate syncytium to which are attached many small granules. In such preparations the syncyidum is still very elastic and does not appear to swell in acetic acid.

The observations upon the development of the reticulum of the liver are entirely out of harmony with those of the development of connective tissue elsewhere. In all other places the syncytium arises from the mesenchyme but here it is from the endothelial lining of blood-vessels.

It is not difficult to obtain fresh specimens with all the capillaries surrounded with this syncytium which has the nuclei imbedded in it; the union is so complete that it is impossible to consider the nuclei and exoplasm in apposition only. The fibrils are in no way connected with the liver cells and true mesenchyme cells are not present at all.

The Coenea.

.The cornea of a pig 2 cm. long is composed of a dense syncytium. The exoplasm is fibrillated and it radiates from nodal points where are located the nuclei and endoplasm. In an embryo 3 cm. long the general direction of the fibrils of the exoplasm is parallel with the surface of the cornea, i. e., the lamellse are beginning to form. Between these primitive lamellfe the nuclei lie and are surrounded by

11 Mall, Zeit. f. Morpholog. u. Anthropol., ii, 9. '■^Kiipffer, Archiv f. mik. Anat., 54.

Franklin P. Mall 355

spindle-shaped masses of endoplasm. A faint Descement's membrane is shown in specimens stained by Mallory's method; it does not stain by Weigert's method. Practically the same condition is found in the cornea of pigs 4 cm. long.

In an embryo 6 cm. long the cornea has grown in thickness, the quantity of exoplasm has increased and the nuclei have multiplied. The general character of the exoplasm is as before. In the cornea of pigs 9 cm. long the adult condition is present, the lamellfe of the anterior portion of the cornea being more developed than those of the posterior. The exoplasm forms definite lamellae in the cornea of pigs 14 cm. long. The fibrillated lamellae are bound together by bridges which run between them. Descement's membrane is sharply defined, stains intensely blue by Mallory's method, but does not stain by Weigert's method. It gives the same reactions in the cornea of the adult.

Xo elastic tissue can be demonstrated in the cornea of the adult either by Weigert's method or by treating frozen sections with boiling acetic acid and magenta. The lamellae of the cornea can be easily resolved into fibrils by forming artificial cedema or by spreading frozen sections. " In specimens made in this way the endoplasm is seen to encircle the nuclei and forms an extensive syncytium, as is well known. The tissue of the cornea contains much mucin and has often been spoken of as an embryonic connective tissue. It appears to be tlje only collagenous tissue which contains no accompanying elastic fibers. In many respects the cornea resembles the perimysium of the embryo before the white fibers have been fully formed from the exoplasm of the syncytium. At this time there are also no elastic fibers in the perimysium.

Elastic Tissue.

It is quite evident that in order to obtain any definite ideas regarding the development of elastic tissue it must be studied when it first appears. Studying its extension when once formed may give results which are misleading, for in older embryos the tissues which are being invaded have also undergone development.

In order to study the first appearance of elastic tissue I first tried to follow it in the skin, both human and pig's, for here I obtained the best preparations of developing white fibrous tissue. Furthermore, pieces of skin are easily cut by the freezing method and treated with the reagents usually employed in studying the connective-tissue fibrils. Although numerous tests and specimens were made the results were unsatisfactory until I had gained clearer pictures of the development

356 The Development of the Connective Tissues

of elastic tissue in the arteries and in cartilage. For this reason I shall consider the development of elastic tissue in the skin at the end of the discussion.

Arteries. — At first it was extremely difficult to obtain any clear pictures of young elastic fibers in the walls of the arteries by means of Weigert's method, for the surrounding tissues were also stained somewhat black. Finall}^ by staining the paraffin section upon the glass slide just long enough, complete differentiation was obtained by subsequent treatment with alcohol and hydrochloric acid, stronger than usual, and with a saturated aqueous solution of picric acid. By this method numerous sections were obtained with the elastic tissue only stained black. These were then counterstained with congo red or first with a very dilute solution of Delafield's hematoxylin to tinge the nuclei a little and then with Congo red. In this way perfect specimens were obtained with the nuclei stained with hjematoxylin, the elastic fibers stained intensely blue and the rest of the protoplasm red.

Not any elastic fibers could be demonstrated by Weigert's method in embryos less than 4 cm. long. As soon as the embryo has grown to this length a delicate network of elastic fibrils is stained intensely blue-black in the aorta and extends from the origin of the aorta into the arteries arising from it. Here they are gradually lost. The arteries of the skin do not have any elastic tissue in them. In a section of the 'carotid artery it is seen that there is a thick layer of elastic fibrils in the intima forming nearh' a complete membrane. The media is but a few cells thick with a few individual fibrils between them. There are no elastic fibrils in the adventitia.

In an embryo 5 cm. long the elastic tissue is in the walls of the subdivisions of the main branches arising from the aorta. The walls of the whole aorta and its main branches are filled with fibers which extend into the adventitia. In the intima of the aorta the fibrils have coalesced to form the Avell-known fenestrated membrane. In the carotid the individual fibrils are present in the intima, the fenestrated membrane appearing in an embryo somewhat older. The muscularis is filled with most delicate elastic fibrils which together make a network of meshes which are filled with nuclei. At the outer border of the muscularis there is a gradual transition of the elastic tissue into the connectivetissue syncytium of the adventitia. In a thin section stained with Weigert's method and counterstained with congo red the relation of the elastic fibers to the syncytium is especially well seen when examined with the 2 mm. oil immersion lens of Zeiss. The elastic fibrils lie within the exoplasm together with other fibrils and the spindle-shaped

Franklin P. Mall 357

nuclei and endoplasni lie upon these bundles. The degree of development of the exoplasm is practically of the stage I have termed preiibrous above with numerous elastic fibrils, which stain with Weigert's stain, added. This process is slightly more advanced in the umbilical artery, which is especially suited for the study of early elastic fibrils, in longitudinal or oblique sections (Fig. 1-1). In such sections all grades of the development of elastic fibrils are easily found — from perfect syncytium in the cord without elastic fibers to the finished elastic tissue in the intima. At the point of juncture between the media and the adventitia it is seen that the white fibrous tissue gradually passes over


Fig. 14. Fig. 15.

Fig. 14. Elastic tissue just beginning in the syncytium of tlie umbilical vein of a pig 7 cm. long ( x 2.50 diameters). The specimen was first stained by Weigert's method, then tinged with hcematoxylin and couuterstained with congo red.

Fig. 15. Elastic fibers isolated from the skin of a pig 16 cm. long by means of boiling acetic acid ( x 250 diameters). Stained with gentian violet. The fibrils form baskets arouud the bundles of white fibrous tissue which are converted into a jellylike mass.

into prefibrous tissue and this in turn over into typical exoplasm of the syncytium of the cord. The degree of development of the elastic tissue is exactly parallel with this. In the media the elastic network encircles the bundles of white fibers, while in the region of prefibrous tissue the network is in the periphery of the exoplasm. Farther out, in the adventitia, the network of elastic fibrils is all through the exoplasm. The fibrillated exoplasm in the walls of the arteries is composed of two kinds of fibrils, destined to become the fibrils of white fibrous and yellow elastic tissue. As this process of differentiation begins the white fibers swell in acetic acid, are not digested in pancreatin, etc. While the yellow elastic fibrils resist acids and dilute solutions of potassium hydrate and stain intensely when treated by Weigert's method. At 25

358 The Development of the Connective Tissues

first the elastic fibrils form a network throughout the exoplasm but they gradually shift to its outer border, leaving the prefibrous tissue within. At this time the nuclei and endoplasm lie upon the exoplasm. A further development liberates the nuclei and endoplasm more and more and the elastic fibers come to form a network which encircles bundles of white fibers, to form the characteristic and fully developed connective tissue.

The youngest elastic fibrils which are stained by Weigert's method form a delicate network of homogeneous fibrils less than one n thick (smaller than the chromatin granule of the nucleus), and at no time are the fibrils composed of a row of granules as described by Eanvier. Eanvier's description of elastic granules in arytenoid cartilage is correct so far as it goes but does not apply to the development of elastic fibers.

I have studied carefully the development of elastic tissue in an embryo 7 cm. long, which had been hardened in alcohol, thus permitting tests with various digestion ferments. This was not possible with most of the sections I studied, for they were from embryos hardened in Zenker's fluid. Thin sections of the aorta show, when stained by Mallory's method, a beautiful syncytium composed of fibrillated exoplasm M^ithin which there is a network of sharply defined fibrils which stain intensely blue. The elastic membrane of the intima is also stained intensely blue. The arrangement of the network which stains more intensely by Mallory's method is identical with that stained by Weigert's method. If, now, a section is first digested in pancreatin for 24 or 48 hours, the network of the syncytium and the membrane of the intima are no longer present; as is shown in sections which have been stained with either Mallory's or Weigert's method. A shining mass of anastomosing fibrils of the exoplasm alone remains intact, nuclei, endoplasm, and elastic fibrils having been removed by the action of the pancreatin. From time to time specimens may be obtained by the action of pepsin in which only some elastic fibers and fragments of nuclei are left. In general, it is as difficult to isolate elastic fibers by the action of pepsin in the tissues of the embryo as it is to isolate them in the adult.

In thin sections of the embryo 7 cm. long which have been stained successfully with Weigert's elastic tissue stain, Delafield's hrematoxylin and Congo red the relation of white fibrous and yellow elastic tissue to the syncytium is beautifully shown in the adventitia. The two kinds of fibrils alternate in bundles with nuclei and endoplasm lying upon them. The individuaf elastic fibrils may appear as rows of granules, but the granules never leave the field of the microscope while focusing.

Franklin P. Mall 359

i. e., the granules are optical sections of fibrils of elastic tissue closely packed around the bundles of white fibers. In the adventitia of the umbilical artery, where the fibrils are cut parallel in this specimen, the fibrils are all homogeneous and continuous.

As the embryo grows the elastic tissue gradually extends along the arteries to every part of the body, reaching those of the skin in embryos about 20 cm. long. Shortly after the arteries of the skin have elastic tissue in their wall, it can also be demonstrated in the loose tissue below the hair follicles.

From the study of the development of elastic tissue in the arteries it is seen that the exoplasm of the connective-tissue syncytium forming their walls differentiates into two kinds of fibrils, which give rise to the white fibrous and elastic tissues, respectively. In other words, one cell gives rise to both tissues.

Arytenoid Cartilage. — In the arteries the elastic and white fibrous tissues develop at the same time from the common exoplasm, as would be expected in a region where the elastic tissue develops so early. In cartilage, on the other hand, the exoplasm is converted completely into the ground substance before the elastic fibers develop. A condition which is parallel with that in cartilage is found in the skin, in bone and in reticulated tissue when accompanied by elastic fibers.

The arytenoid cartilage of the adult pig is partly hyaline and partly elastic. Where the two kinds of tissue come together the fibrils course in the ground substance between the fartilage cells. The hyaline cartilage near the elastic is infiltrated with granules which are sometimes in rows but more frequently in clumps around one or more cartilage cells. Generally the granules in the ground substance lie midway between the cells but where they begin to form masses they are usually around a single cartilage cell. According to Kanvier the granules form rows which coalesce to form elastic fibers. My own observations show that whenever fibers or granules are in the same neighborhood that they are separated and that one is never continuous with the other. We have here to do with a special kind of elastic tissue composed only of granules, as we have another form in the fenestrated membrane in the smaller arteries. Conclusive proof is obtained when the development of these structures is followed in the embryo pig.

The arytenoid cartilage of a pig 12 cm long is a few millimeters long and can easily be dissected out. It is then to be frozen and cut, stained by Weigert's method, and mounted as usual. Such sections show that most of the cartilage is hyaline, with some elastic fibers appearing at one end of the cartilage. The fibrils are extremely delicate and lie

360 The Development of the Connective Tissues

within the ground substance midway between tlie cells. At no point is the diameter of the fibers as great as that of the granules in the arytenoid cartilage of the adult. Furthermore, there are absolutely no granules of elastic tissue in the cartilage in which the elastic fibers have appeared and are growing. The same pictures, only more advanced, are seen in the arytenoid cartilages of pigs' embryos up to 24 cm. long. I have been unable to obtain specimens between embryos 24z cm. long and the adult, so cannot contribute anything regarding the development of the elastic granules. It is probable that they appear as minute specks and gradually grow larger and larger, for where they are in clumps granules of all sizes are seen.

Mucous Membrane of the Intestine. — The reticulum of the mucosa and the prefibrous tissue of the submucosa form a single layer in the intestine of the embryo pig 24 cm. long. At this time no elastic fibers whatever can be demonstrated in any of the layers of the intestine by Weigert's method. Unfortunately the succeeding stages were not at my disposal, but from the examination of the intestine in the adult it is shown that the bundle of white fibers of the submucosa are surrounded with numerous elastic fibers which form a dense network throughout the muscularis mucosa and the stratum fibrosum. From this point a few fibrils extend between the crypts but not into the villi. Spalteholz " has followed them throughout the mucosa, showing that they accompany the muscle bundles of the villi. At any rate there is considerable reticulum in the mucosa of the intestine which has no accompanying elastic fibers, as is also the case in the ground sul)stance of cartilage.

Lymph Nodes. — Frozen sections of lymph nodes Avhich have been stained by Weigert's method show beautiful networks of elastic fibers throughout the trabeculfe and the follicles. Within the trabecular the elastic fibrils are very numerous and from there they pass at regular intervals along tlie bands of reticulum through the sinus to the periphery of the follicle. Their course is quite direct towards the center of the follicle wh'^re they anastomose to form an irregular network. If the section is macerated for a few days in a solution of bicarbonate of soda to soften the cells, the sections can be cleared pretty well, leavin*j only the reticulum and the elastic fibers. When specimens thus obtained are stained by Weigert's method it is found that not all the reticulum fibrils are accompanied with elastic. At the periphery of the follicle about every second fibril, while more towards its center, about every fifth reticulum fibril is accompanied by an elastic fiber.

'■'Spalteholz, Arch. f. Auat., Supplement Band, 1897.

Franklin V. Mall 36 L

The examination of nunicrous thin sections cut in parattin and stained by Weigert's method showed that the amount of elastic tissue in the follicle is by no means constant. Occasionally no fibrils at all could be demonstrated by this method while frequently they were only at the periphery of the follicle. Care must be taken in such tests not to stain the sections too long, for the reticulum, and the wdiite fibrous tissue of the capsule, take up considerable stain and thus lead to confusion. The only definite tests are those in which the surrounding elastic tissue stains intensely, leaving the white fibrous tissue colorless. In a beautiful specimen of a Peyer's patch the elastic tissue accompanies every reticulum fibril into the follicle for two-thirds of the distance to its center and then ends quite abruptly. When not highly magnified it appears as if the reticulum itself were stained intensely, but with the 2 mm. oil immersion it is very apparent that each fibril of reticulum is encircled with several delicate elastic fibrils. At the center of the follicles there are no elastic fibrils at all. . The variation in the amount of elastic tissue in the lymph node suggests at once whether it is not due to some pathological process, for most of my sections were from human lymph nodes which had been cut for other purposes. The recent work of Melnikow-Easnednekow, Flexner, and others upon the formation of elastic tissue in cirrhosis of the liver suggests this view. The observations are sufficient, however, to show that elastic fibrils accompany some, but not all. of the reticulum fibrils in the follicle of the lymph node. Furthermore, the development of reticulum precedes that of elastic tissue.

Sl'in.— It is extremely difficult to obtain clear pictures of the development of elastic tissue of the skin, when the youngest fibers which take Weigert's stain are studied in relation to the nuclei or to the white fibers. Practically no better results are obtained from the embryo than from the adult. In each case there are sharply defined fibers"^ and that is all. On the other hand, when the skin is macerated by boding frozen sections in 1 per cent acetic acid until the white fibers are mostly dissolved or are converted into a jelly-like mass the relations are somewhat distorted but the results are instructive, when compared with sections of the skin and of the larger arteries which have been stained by Weigert's method.

The elastic tissue of the arteries of the skin stains by Weigert's method in embryos from 20-25 cm. long. There are no elastic fibers within the skin itself. The clear areas at the roots of the hairs are

i-iMelnikow-Rasnednekow, Ziegler's Beitrage, 26, 1899. '5Flexner, Univ. Med. Mag., 1900.

362 The DeveloiDment of the Connective Tissues

filled with nuclei encircled with endoplasni lying upon a delicate network of exoplasm. This is beautifully showai in specimens stained by Mallory's method, and also to a certain extent by Weigert's method, provided the stain is pushed until the surrounding white fibrous tissue stains also. In embryos a little over 25 cm. long the elastic tissue of the arteries of the skin has increased in quantity, and the exoplasm of the syncytium below the roots of the hairs undoubtedly is stained more readily by Weigert's method than before.

When frozen sections of the skin (which show no elastic tissue by Weigert's method) are boiled in dilute acetic acid until the white fibrous tissue is either dissolved or converted into a jelly mass, a network of sharp fibers can still be demonstrated. by staining the swollen section with magenta or with very dilute gentian violet (Fig. 15). In case the sections are not boiled very long the gelatinous exoplasm of the syncytium has imbedded within it sharp fibrils upon which lie oval nuclei surrounded with a plate of endoplasm. When the boiling is pushed still further, until the section falls nearly into pieces, it can still be coaxed upon the glass slide and stained with magenta under the coverglass. The main bands of syncytium are now practically all dissolved, leaving a network of delicate and sharply defined fibrils which appear to be directly continuous with the endoplasm around the nuclei. Often some of the anastomosing fibrils are quite free and upon them lie the nuclei and surrounding endoplasm (Fig. 18). These specimens, which are extremely instructive, show definitely that the nuclei and endoplasm lie upon the fibers. Furthermore, when frozen sections are treated a short time in boiling dilute caustic potash only a network — the elastic fibers — remains, all the rest, including the nuclei, having been dissolved. These tests show that an elastic network is present in the skin in young embryos before it can be stained by Weigert's method. Elastic tissue can be demonstrated by Weigert's method in the skin of the embryo pig about 25 cm. long, and by maceration in boiling acetic acid, and staining with magenta, the fibrils can easily be isolated (Fig. 16). It is therefore seen that elastic tissue is present in the skin long before it can be stained by Weigert's method.

In a section of the skin in Avhich the elastic fibers just begin to take the Weigert's stain it is seen that the bundles of white fibrous tissue are accompanied by one or two elastic fibers. In the region of the roots of the hairs, where the development is not so far advanced, the fibers are continued into the exoplasm of the syncytium and are related to the nuclei and endoplasm as described above. Frozen sections boiled in acetic acid (1 per cent) until very soft, then coaxed upon the glass

Franklin P. Mall 363

slide and stained with magenta, show that the elastic fibers are related to the exoplasm of the syncytium much as they are to the reticulum of the lymph follicle.

It is much more difficult to obtain specimens of the human skin in which the elastic tissue is just beginning to appear. Fresh specimens are not always at hand and preserved specimens are often unsuited to cut into frozen sections which can be boiled or macerated.

In the skin of a human foetus, measuring 22 cm. from head to breech, practically no elastic fibers are stained by Weigert's method — much as in pig's embryos of the same length. Sections which have been boiled in dilute acetic acid for 4 hours had the white fibrous tissue de

If 4 - .-^

y s &

Fig. 16. Fig. 17. Fig. 18.

Fig. 16. Elastic fibers isolated from the skin of a pig 24 cm. long ( x 250 diameters). Magenta. The skin was frozen and cut, then boiled in acetic acid (1^) for one hour. The fibrils form baskets around swollen bundles of white fibers. To them cling nuclei and endoplasm.

Fig. 17. Elastic network obtained from the skin of a human foetus 22 cm. long ( X 250 diameters). Stained with magenta. The specimen had been hardened in alcohol, was washed in water, frozen, and cut. Sections were then boiled in acetic acid (\<fo) for 4 hours. Further treatment showed that the nuclei and endoplasm could be removed by means of dilute caustic potash, leaving only the delicate elastic fibers.

Fig. 18. Elastic fibers from the skin of a human foetus 26 cm. long ( x 250 diameters). The fresh tissue was cut by the freezing method and boiled in acetic acid (1^) for an hour. It was then coaxed upon a slide and stained with magenta. AH of the fibers have large nuclei clinging to them.

stroyed completely, leaving only a delicate network of fibers upon which the nuclei lie (Fig. 17). In this specimen it really seemed at first as if there is a complete network formed by the anastomoses of the ends of numerous multipolar cells, but crushing the section and pulling it apart, showed that a delicate network of fibrils remains, which stain with

364 The Development of the Connective Tissues

magenta, is jDartly buried in the gelatinous remnant of the white fibrous tissue, and is partly covered with nuclei and endoplasm. The elastic network can be further isolated by boiling the section in a dilute solution of caustic potash; the delicate elastic fibers alone remain, the white fibers and nuclei having been removed completely.

The skin of a foetus 7 months old (36 cm. long) has wdthin it many delicate elastic fibers which are stained by Weigert's method. The individual fibrils are in general parallel with the bundles of white fibrils, are not composed of rows of individual granules, but are homogeneous. When the sections are boiled to remove the white fibers in part and then stained by Weigert's method, a beautiful network remains, one or two fibrils accompanying each swollen bundle of white fibrils. Frozen sections boiled in dilute acetic acid and stained with magenta give the same picture. The oval nuclei with the surrounding endoplasm lie upon the elastic fibrils, surround them, but are not continuous with them (Fig. 18). Similar results have been obtained by Jores, who studied the formation of elastic fibers in a myxoma.'"

The elastic fibers have increased greatly in number in the skin of a fcetus 8 months old. The fibers are closely packed to form baskets encircling the individual bundles of Avhite fibers. Specimens made by the aid of boiling acetic acid are again most instructive, for in such specimens the fibers are isolated with nuclei and endoplasm clinging to them. Thick sections made in this way appear as a felt in which there are numerous holes, where the bundles of white fibers lay, with nuclei and endoplasm clinging to the elastic fibers. In the skin at birth the elastic fibers have become a little larger and denser, and therefore more numerous as the skin has expanded and become thicker. Frozen sections which have been treated with boiling actic acid and stained in magenta show nuclei and endoplasm attached to the individual fibers. Sometimes they are spindle-shaped but usually they form plates which are easily separated from the elastic fibrils after the white fibers have been dissolved.

In the skin of an infant two months old the elastic and white fibrous tissues are about equal in quantity. The elastic fiber baskets encircle and frequently sink into the bundles of the white fibers, as is easily shown in sections which have been stained by Weigert's method. The same picture is seen in the skin of infants from two to six months old.

While the elastic fibers are present in relatively small number in the skin of a foetus 22 cm. long, and gradually increase in size and


'6 Jores, Ziegler's Beitrii^e, xxvii, Fig. 3.

Franklin P. Mall 3G5

quantity as the fretus grows older and after birth, the study of their development in this region gives unsatisfactory results. It is definite, however, that they always appear around the bundles of white fibers^ being covered, especially at their points of anastomosis, with nuclei and endoplasm. If the early formation of elastic tissue in the syncytium of the walls of the umbilical artery is considered the type we must interpret what has been found in the skin as a secondary differentiation of the exoplasm, which is already collagenous, into elastic tissue, as is also the case in the ground substance of the cartilage. In the cartilage, however, the fibers develop in the middle of the ground substance, as far away from the nuclei as possible, while in the skin the elastic fibers appear at the periphery of the bundles of white fibers, close to the nuclei." The same is true regarding the elastic fibers which are formed in the lymph follicle along some of the reticulum fibrils.

From this histogenetic study it must be concluded that elastic tissue is a more highly differentiated tissue accolnpanying to a greater or less extent all collagenous tissues (reticulum, cartilage, bone, and white fibrous tissue) with the exception of the cornea.

The study of the growth of all connective tissues is difficult, for after they are once differentiated and quite sharply separated from the nuclei and endoplasm they have then power of further growth and expansion without a continuous transformation of endoplasm into exoplasm.

'^ See also Jores, Ziegler's Beitrage, xxvii, Fig. 4.




From the Anatomical Laboratory of the Johns Hopkins Unixersity, Baltimore, Md.

With 13 Text Figures.

Although considerable attention has been given of late to the study of the development of lymph glands, only two writers have led up to the discovery of the origin of the lymphatic system as a whole, Budge ^ and Ranvier."

In 1880 Budge published an account of a canal system which he had discovered in the mesoderm of early chick embryos; and in 1887, after Budge's death. His published a further but necessarily incomplete account of this work from Budge's notes and pictures.

Budge injected the false amnion of chicks three days old, and found that the fluid ran out into the area vasculosa as if in ducts. He then injected along the arteries in chicks from nine to eighteen days old and obtained beautiful injections of undoubted lymphatics. These two experiments are related to one another in the text by the following theory: Budge thought that there were two lymphatic systems, and that the first or primitive system was present in the three-day chick. He thought that the false amnion and ccelom being continuous, there were ducts within the body wall connected with the c«lom, analogous to those of the area vasculosa which he had injected from the false amnion. The ducts within the body lying along the dorsal line became pinched off from the coelom and united to form a thoracic duct. With the thoracic duct began the second or permanent lymphatic system, which he had injected along the arteries in nine-dav chicks. This idea of relating the lymphatic system to the serous cavities has remained but a theory and the gap between the two svstems of Budge has never been filled.

1 Budge: Arch. f. Anat. u. Phys., Anat. Abthg., 1880 and 1887.

•■^Ranvier: Comptes Rendus, 1895 and 1896; Archiv d' Anatomic, Tome 1, 1897.

368 The Development of the Lymphatic System

Having repeated Budge's experiments I am convinced that while his injections of the ducts along the arteries are fundamental in the study of a certain stage of the development of lymphatics, the spaces connected with the false amnion have no connection whatever with the lymphatic system. In injecting the false amnion some minor changes in the methods of Budge are an advantage. Instead of a hypodermic syringe it is better to use a glass tube drawn out to a fine point and to introduce the fluid slowly under the even pressure of a low column of mercury. Budge used Berlin blue and found it necessary after filling the false amnion, to stroke the embryo gently in order to force the fluid into the area vascnlosa. India ink is, however, a better fluid, for it is so finely divided that it runs of its own accord. I inserted the needle into the false amnion according to Budge's directions, given in his first paper, and injected the ink until the cavity was jnst full, then floated the embryo on to a glass slide with the dorsal surface upward. The fluid will now enter the area vascnlosa and in places will run to its edge. This can be watched under the microscope. The fluid runs by putting out blunt processes simulating canals and so interpreted by Budge; at first these processes anastomose, making the network shown in Budge's pictures, but, as a rule, the meshes soon fill in and the fluid advances as a solid column with processes projecting in every direction. In other words, the fluid runs just as it would if forced between two glass plates held closely together. In serial sections through these injected specimens it is found that the upper and lower layers of the area vascnlosa are connected here and there by delicate fibrils which are really processes of. scattered mesenchyme cells and that the injected fluid passes into the spaces thus made and not into preformed channels lined by endothelium.

jSk)twithstanding the fact that Budge's theory of the origin of the thoracic duct is not correct, this theory led to the discovery of the true origin. For it was by injecting into the side of the neck in early embryos in the hope of reaching Budge's spaces behind the aorta, that the cervical lymph heart was injected, and the lymph hearts give the key to all the superflcial lymphatics.

Between the years 1895 and 1897, Eanvier published a long series of articles on the development of the lymphatic system. He worked chiefly on the frog, and on pig embryos from 9 to 18 cm. long. From his injections of the lymphatic capillaries in the skin and in the villi of the pig embryos he made an important discovery; namely, that the lymphatics within the capillary plexus grow by budding. He says that

Florence E. Sabin 3G9

from the side of a duct appears a bud which is at first solid, but soon has a lumen. The lumen becomes larger, while at the same time the bud advances until it reaches a second duct. It opens into this duct by a process of absorption of the endothelium, and at the point of junction a valve is made. These points are beautifully seen in injected specimens for the larger duct forms, as Kanvier says, a collarette for the smaller. Thus he says the ducts grow from centre to periphery, while the valves necessarily open in the opposite direction. He says that as soon as lymphatics can be recognized in mammals they are furnished with valves. He also worked on frogs and described injections of the subcutaneous lymph sacs. From these sacs fluid can be made to run centrally to one of the lymph hearts and thence to the vein, and peripherallv to minute ducts in the web of the feet. Eanvier states that these small ducts develop from the great lymph sacs.

His general conception of the lymphatic system is that it is a great gland of which the lymphatic capillaries correspond to the secreting portion, while the lymphatic ducts are the excretory canals. He says that the lymphatic system may be considered as a great vascular gland which takes its origin en?l)ryologically in the venous system and pours into the veins the product of its secretion which is lymph.'

Eanvier's great contribution to the study of the lymphatic system is the discovery of the fact of the growth of the ducts by budding in contradistinction to the generally accepted theory that the lymphatic system develops out of tissue spaces. Gulland * states this theory clearly as follows: The fluid of the blood exudes from the veins into the tissue spaces which gradually dilate, flow together and form the first lymphatic ducts. The walls of these ducts are made from the connective tissue which becomes compressed around them, and the ducts subsequently open into the veins. The most recent statement of this theory is that of Sala.' He describes the development of the lymph hearts and the thoracic duct in the chick as follows: That the first trace of the lymphatic system is the appearance of lymph hearts or spaces in tlie mesenchvrae just lateral to the caudal myotomes. These spaces flow together and join the thoracic duct, which forms as two cords of mesenchyme cells which extend from the level of the thyroid glands to the level of the coeliac axis. In the centre of these

sRanvier: Comptes Rendus, Tome 121, 1895, p. 1109. ^Gulland: Jourual of Pathology and Bacteriology, Vol. II, 1894, p. 406. 5Sala: Ricerche n. lab. di anat. norm. d. r. Univ. di Roma, Vol. VII, 1900, pp. 263-'269. Reviewed in Archives Italiennes de Biologic, Tome 34, 1900, p. 453.

3^0 The Development of the Lymphatic System

cords develops the lumeu of the thoracic ducts which forms connections with the ductus Botali, the aorta and the superior vena cava.

In the present communication, Eanvier's hypothesis that the lymphatic system takes its origin from the veins Avill be proved. He missed the proof because he thought there were no lymphatics in pig embryos under 9 cm.° As a matter of fact the ducts have spread over nearly the whole body in a pig 5.5 cm. long.

In the study herein reported, I have been greatly aided by a manuscript of Dr. W. G. MacCallum's which I was privileged to read. From this paper, which is on " The Kelations between the Lymphatics and the Connective Tissue/' and is soon to be published in the Archiv fiir Anatomic, certain observations ?nd conclusions which aid my work are quoted with the author's permission.

He injected the subcutaneous lymphatics of embryo pigs for the most part between 5 and 15 cm. long and has given most graphic and accurate descriptions of these injections, and of the lymphatics both in fresh and stained preparations. He noted as Eanvier had the growth of the lymphatic capillaries within the plexus by budding, and describes the long sprouts or strands of endothelial cells growing out from the ducts, and how the lumen of a duct gradually opens into the sprouts. He discovered the fact that the early lymphatics have no valves, and made an important addition to the method of injection, by stripping off the skin, placing it on a slide and injecting it under the microscope. He noted that the fluid injected ran into perfectly definite walled channels and that there was no extravasation until the pressure was too great, when the walls of the ducts would suddenly and explosively burst and the fluid would then pass into the meshes of the connective tissue. His conclusion was that the lymphatic ducts in the skin of the embryo pigs are closed ducts. ' Inasmuch as in this communication the lymphatic system of the mammal will be traced in its development up to the stage represented in the frog, it will be necessary to keep in mind the amphibian lymphatic system. In the frog the large subcutaneous lymph sacs communicate by ducts with four lymph hearts or sacs, two in the neck and two in the inguinal region. From these sacs, ducts empty into the veins in four places, two in the neck at the junction of the subclavian and cardinal veins, and two in the inguinal region, where the femoral and sciatic veins join to enter the Wolffian body as the renal portal system. There are no valves except Avhere the ducts enter the veins and there are no lymph glands.

6Ranvier: Comptes Rendus, Tome 131, 1895, p. 1106.

Florence R. Sabin 371

Up to the time when the pig embryo reaches the fish stage, that is to say, when the four visceral arches are plainly seen (see Keibel's Normaltafeln, 1. Das Schwein., Fig. 19), there are no lymphatics. This is true of embryos up to 14 mm. long, which corresponds to a human embryo of about five weeks. There are, however, in these early stages certain areas in which loose connective tissue, bounded by zones of denser tissue, forms channels of least resistance for fluid injected under pressure. For example, there is such an area around the central nervous system. If Prussian blue is injected just dorsal to the spinal cord near the tail it will not only outline the cord and the brain but will also surround the peripheral nerves as far as they have developed. Sections of such specimens, especially if thick, give deceptive pictures, for the blue granules lying in the meshes of the connective tissue look as if they were in definite ducts. This is, however, not the case, and though these wide intercellular spaces, being full of lymph, may be called lymph spaces, and may have an important relation to the nourishment of the nervous system, they 'are not a part of the lymphatic system. In sections this loose tissue often breaks away, especially around the nerves, and gives the false appearafice of empty spaces. 1^ is in a similar way possible to outline the Wolffian body at least in part by injection.

Another of these areas of loose tissue bounded by zones of denser tissue is found beneath the skin. If one injects Prussian blue into the tissue beneath the skin of the embryo pig, there will be at the point of injection a mass of the blue fluid from which straight, blunt processes reminding one of Budge's canals, run out often in parallel lines. These processes have no resemblance to the true lypmhatic ducts which lie at a more superficial level and can be injected over them, but are due simply to the separation of the connective-tissue cells and show that the intercellular spaces are lines of least resistance for fluid injected under pressure. These spaces are artificially widened by injection. The distance one can inject these spaces depends on the looseness of the connective tissue, and as the Aeshes of the connective tissue are widest around the central nervous system, it is here that one can inject the farthest.

Serial sections of several embryos of stages before the lymphatic system has begun, that is of pigs up to 14 mm. long, have been made. In these specimens the blood-vessels are injected and from a study of the sections it is clear that all the spaces in the body walls can be proven to be blood-vessels except the spaces between the individual cells. There are no spaces along the dorsal line in connection with the

372 The Development of the Lymphatic System

Cffilom, wliich could form a thoracic duct as Budge supposed. In this stage, before there are any lymphatics, many of the blood-vessels widen out into sinusoids instead of capillaries.' Some of these sinusoids are beneath the skin, and since they are many times the width of the capillaries, and since the endotheliimi which lines them is thinner than that of the capillaries, they look much like lymphatics. However, they are readily distinguished by their evident connection with the veins and by the fact that they contain blood.

The development of the lymphatic system was found in this way. We have an abundant supply of pig embryos at the Anatomical Laboratory. Every day large numbers of embryos of all sizes from under 10 mm. upwards are brought to the laboratory. Moreover, we are so near tlie abattoir that the embryos are often brought with the heart still beating. It is essential in injecting lymphatics to have fresh embryos, for after an embryo is once thoroughly cold it is impossible to get good injections. The best results are always obtained while the heart is still beating. The embryos must be injected immediately after removing them from the nterus and the skin must be kept moist while injecting. «?»

I began with the study of the lymph glands and made the first injections of them by introducing the needle into the foot pads. If in pigs about 10 cm. long, the needle is inserted into the foot pads of the hind feet, ducts are readily injected which run to a gland in the inguinal region, while from the fore feet the ducts run up to a gland in the front of the neck. As younger pigs were taken, for example, below C cm., it became impossible to inject any ducts from the foot pads; and still younger, at 4 cm., it became impossible to inject the ducts subcutaneously in the side of the leg. In order to get younger stages of the glands it was thus necessary to inject nearer to them and it was found that in stages when no lymphatics could be injected in the legs they could still be injected with ease in the body wall. These ducts in the body wall run to two other glands, one over the crest of the ileum and one in the po^erior part of the neck.

These injections gave the first idea of the gradual growth of the lymphatic system from the centre; because at a certain stage when jymph ducts could always be injected in the body wall, none were ever injected in the feet or legs; that is to say, the legs had not yet received

'Minot: On a hitherto unrecognized form of blood circulation without capillaries in the organs of vertebrata. Proceedings of the Boston Society of Natural History, Vol. XXIX, No. 10, April, 1900, pp. 18.5-31.5.

Florence R. Sabin 373

lymphatics. From this time on my attention was turned to the development of the ducts rather than of the glands, because I was passing to stages before the lymph glands were formed.

At this time, following the suggestion of Budge's theory of the thoracic duct developing from spaces behind the aorta, a needle was introduced into the side of the neck of a very young embryo, and passed behind the heart. The injection obtained proved to be venous, but by taking larger embryos lymph ducts began to radiate out from the point of injection; for example, in a pig 18 mm. long a few ducts could be injected just at the point of puncture. For this injection the needle was introduced straight inward at a point midway between the ear and the upper border of the arm. At this stage, while it was always possible to inject the small tuft of ducts at the neck, it was never possible to inject ducts in any other part of the skin. Taking a stage a little larger, a wider area or zone of lymphatics could be injected from the same point in the neck, but none were injected in any other place in the skin until the pig was 3 cm. long, when the ducts could be injected just at a point over the crest of the ileum. Taking a stage still larger a wider injection could be made from both of these two points in the skin, one at the neck and one over the crest of the ileum. The zone that could be injected at each stage was both definite and constant and an increase of the pressure simply ruptured the ducts at their tips instead of injecting them farther. Moreover, at any point within a zone, ducts could always be injected subcutaneously in fresh specimens, while at all points beyond these zones they could never be injected.

Thus two points had been discovered as the result of many injections, from which the superficial lymphatics spread or radiated out to cover the skin of the body and head. At a little later stage two other points were found from which the ducts grew to the legs, one of these being in the front of the neck, the other being in the inguinal region. A large number of injections were made at. the two primary points until a very complete series of the zones possible to inject at each stage was obtained. This series included the stages from the time when the ducts can just be injected at the side of the neck in a pig 18 mm. long, up to the time when the ducts from the two points of radiation have met and anastomosed over the side of the body of a pig 5.5 cm. long.

The early stages of this development have been embodied in a diagram or composite picture, Fig. 1. The picture includes pigs of four different lengths, 1.8 cm., 3 cm., 3 cm., and 4 cm. Later stages are

omitted to avoid confusion. The injections for the diagram were all 26


The Development of the Lymphatic System

made from two points, marked a for the neck and c over the crest of the ileum. The letters are used to mark the area which can be injected in a pig of a given size. For example, c corresponds to a pig 3 cm. long and shows that the ducts are just beginning over the crest of the ileum, while from the neck they have already grown over the head and thorax, and over the face either side of the eye.

The areas without any ducts in the diagram represent the areas which have not received lymphatics in a pig 4 cm. long. In a pig 5.5 cm. long the two systems of ducts s~hown in the diagram have met and anastomosed over the body wall, and ducts have grown down the legs nearly to the feet, but there are still areas of the skin which have not yet received lymphatics; for example, the top of the head, the foot pads and the tail. The details of how these areas receive lymphatics as well as the relation of these ducts to the glands that form subsequently are given later in order to relate them to the lymph hearts. At this time we will limit the attention to the study of the successive zones of lymphatics and their relation to the areas without lymphatics.

The method of obtaining these injections is important. In the neck it was found that the best way to obtain maximum injections was to introduce the needle perpendicular to the skin, and it appeared later that this is due to the fact that one often enters the cervical lymph heart, a large sac from which all the ducts radiate. The method used was as follows : A glass tube drawn out to a fine point, the size of which should vary with the size of the pig, is held in a firm clamp which can be moved in three directions by screws. The glass tube is connected by rubber tubing with a flask of Berlin blue or India ink, and this flask is again connected with a pressure flask. The pig is placed on the

Fig. 1. Composite picture of the spreading of the superficial lymphatics in the embryo pig. A, area of lymphatics in a pig 18 mm. long ; b, area in a pig 2 cm. long; c, area in a pig 3 cm. long ; d, area in a pig 4 cm. long.

Florence E. Sabin


stage of a dissecting microscope, just enough pressure is used so that Ihe fluid will drop slowly and the needle is screwed down into the side of the neck half way between the ear and the upper border of the arm. If the pig is not longer than 3 cm., tie the umbilical cord so as to fill the veins with blood and then introduce the needle into the side of the neck to a point just outside the anterior cardinal vein. For the point of radiation of the ducts for the lower part of the body, namely, over the crest of the ileum subcutaneous rather than deep injection are better for, as will appear later, the posterior lymph hearts are situated ver}^ deep.


Fig. 1 cm. lonj


Terminal lymphatics of the skin between the eye and the ear in a pig 5 X 16.

It now became necessary to study more carefully these successive zones which had been injected, to prove that the ducts in the border of the zones were terminal and to note their relation to the skin areas not yet invaded by lymphatics. Figure 2 gives a picture of the border zone taken from the ducts injected over the side of the head between the "eye and the ear in a pig 5 cm. long. This is a favorable place for study, for the ducts are larger and readily seen with the unaided eye. In general the ducts are the largest in pigs from 4 to 5 cm, long and they decrease in size as the pig grows larger. Other good places for studying the border zone are over the shoulders and over the side of the body. The ducts from the two sides of the neck meet and anasto

376 The Development of the Lymj)hatic System

mose between the scapiilaB when the pig is 3 cm. long, so that the border zone is early obliterated here. Figure 3 shows that in the border zone the ducts grow out in advance of the plexus. In injecting, when the pressure is increased, these advance ducts always burst at the rounded tips, showing that they are the ends of the ducts. If now the ducts are just filled, care being taken not to burst them and each duct is touched just at the point where it leaves the plexus, with a small glass rod, it will be noted that the duct expands and contracts as the pressure is varied, or in other words, the wall is continuous and elastic. Occasionally it happens that one of these blunt ends, which may even be bulbous, is not really the end of a duct, for by a little pressure the injecting fluid can be forced out into a long thread-like process. That this is really a duct is shown by the fact that it can be iilled and refilled by varying the pressure. These fine ducts or sprouts represent the process of growth at the border zone. In areas where the ducts are growing more rapidly than they do over the side of the head the terminal ducts are smaller than those shown in Fig. 2, and almost every one will have one or more long sprouts running out in advance.

It has already been said that no lymphatics have ever been injected in the areas beyond these zones of lymphatics in the different stages. Beside these injection experiments to prove that the ducts in the border zone are terminal and that no lymphatics can be injected beyond, complete serial sections have been made showing, first, the zone itself, with its rich capillary plexus, second, the zone of the growing tips, and third, the areas not yet invaded by lymphatics. These early ducts are so large that there is no mistaking them in sections; they are many times the size of blood capillaries. Uninjected specimens stained in acid fuchsin show them especially well in contrast with the blood capillaries.

I now considered the point proved that the lymphatics gradually invade the skin, for by making injections from either of the two radiating points in successive stages one can inject a wider area as larger pigs are taken and around these areas there is always a border zone of terminal ducts, which burst at the tips if pressure is used. The tips of these ducts are growing points and often have sprouts running out from them and finally, beyond this zone, there are no lymphatics, as has been proven both by their absence in sections and by a large number of negative injection experiments.

The next step in the growth of the lymphatics was to find out how they reached the surface. This was studied first in the neck. The

Florence E. Sabin 377

lymph ducts in pigs 4 to 6 cm. long were injected and the specimens were dissected so as to follow the ducts to the vein. When, however, the injection had gone over into the veins extensively the lymph ducts could not be distinguished from them. To overcome this dilficulty the veins were filled with cinnabar gelatine and then the lymphatics were injected with a small amount of fluid, just enough to enter the vein. It is easy to see when the Berlin blue enters the subclavian vein, for the vein lies so near the surface. These specimens showed that the duct accompanies the anterior cardinal vein. In

embryos between 18 mm. and 2.5 cm. long, /"^ " ~"X

if one injects subcutaneously in the side of / , \

the neck, small ducts pass inward and open 7,, \

into a large sac just external to the cardinal vein. The sac when injected is easily seen 1 \v " --. /)

from the surface. Figure 3 is a section \ H Jp\ U. iVcv

through it in an embryo 2.5 cm. long. . This ^ 1 _..„.^ ^ /

sac, which corresponds to the anterior '1|*

lymph heart of the frog, is the key to the fj^ure 3. Transverse section

study of the subcutaneous lymphatics for i^S^t^lHl^rtt anfel-ilfr lymTh the anterior half of the body, for they all tTh'"" ll.'^'f^^^^V'^ri^li radiate from it. In serial sections of this pfiThk^nxfrtrachir*' ^'"*' stage, the duct from the sac to the vein was traced to the junction of the anterior cardinal and subclavian veins.

This method was sufficient as long as the sac could be injected from the surface, but in an embryo below 18 mm. in length it was again difficult to distinguish the l3^mphatics from the veins. To overcome this difficulty the veins Avere now injected. This can be done in three ways: First, if the umbilical cord is tied, there will be a natural injection of blood; second, if one injects into the liver the entire venous system will be injected, and third, in the younger embryos in which the liver is too small the "Wolffian body answers the same purpose. By this method the sac which, being empty, contrasted with the injected vein was traced in serial sections in an embryo 15 mm. long.

Serial sections were now cut of embryos 12, 13 and 14 mm. long and showed no lymphatics whatever. However, in an embryo 14.5 cm. long a minute lymphatic sac connected with the vein was found. There are Avell marked differences in development between embryos 14, 14.5 and 15 mm. long. An embryo 15 mm. long shows the ear (See Keibel's ISTormaltafeln, No. 1. Bas Sehwein. Fig. 23), while an embryo of 14 mm. corresponds more to Keibel's Fig. 21, and shows indistinctly all four visceral arches. In the sections of the embryo 14 mm. long the


The Development of the Lymphatic System

subclavian vein is represented only by a constriction on the side- of the

cardinal vein. At 14.5 mm. two visceral arches show on the surface

and in sections the subclavian vein reaches the root of the arm bud.

In this specimen the lymphatics are two small buds extending 228 />.

from the vein. Figure 4 is the opening of this sac into the vein and

shows that the entrance is guarded by a valve.

The valves which guard the openings of the lymphatic ducts into

the veins have required considerable study. Serial sections of five

different stages of embryos between 14.5 mm. and 3 cm. have been cut. The sections are stained on the slide with hajmatoxylin and a combination of eosin, 6 parts, aurantia, 1 part and orange G, 4 parts. In this stain the endothelium of the lymph ducts contrasts much better with the connective tissue* than in sections stained with carmine. In all the sections of the openFiG. 4. Relation of the lymph duct ings of the lymphatics into the veins,

to the cardinal vein in a pig- 14.5 mm. ±-1 i i. ^■ £ j- x ■ j.

long. Aih, anterior lymph henrt. X 170. the duct lies ±or some distance against

the vein, the two being separated only by a double layer of endothelium, one for the vein and one for the lymph duct. Finally, in each series one can see that, ju.st at the edge of the lymph duet, these two